SlideShare a Scribd company logo
DBA 1651                                               PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


                               UNIT - I                          NOTES


   INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCTION AND
       OPERATION MANAGEMENT
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Learning objectives
1.3 System
    1.3.1 Business System
    1.3.2 Production System
    1.3.3 Production and Operations Managements
1.4 History of operations Management
1.5 Types of operation system
    1.5.1 Flow Shop
          1.5.1.1Continuous Production
          1.5.1.2Mass Production
          1.5.1.3Batch Production
    1.5.2 Job Shop
    1.5.3 Project Production
1.6 Production activities and communication link
1.7 Computer Integrated Manufacture ring (CIM)
    1.7.1 CIM sub systems
    1.7.2 Functional Areas of CIM
          1.7.2.1 Computer aided production planning
          1.7.2.2 Computer aided process planning
    1.7.3 Conceptual frame work of CIM
    1.7.4 Group Technology
          1.7.4.1 Definition
          1.7.4.2 History of GT
          1.7.4.3 Advantages of GT
          1.7.4.4 Organizational Suitability for GT
          1.7.4.5 Group technology in CIM
1.8 Global Supply Chain
    1.8.1 Global Complexities
    1.8.2 How to transform into Global Supply Chain


                                      1                Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                  PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                                               UNIT - I



                     INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCTION AND
                         OPERATION MANAGEMENT

                 1.1 INTRODUCTION

                         This unit starts with a definition of a system. In this unit production system and
                 its objectives are explained along with the components of a system. The history of
                 operations management is portrayed. The various functions of production system and
                 their interlinking are explained through a flow chart. The components of computer,
                 integrated manufacturing and their purpose are dealt. Finally, the recent trend in the
                 operations, namely, Global Supply Chain is introduced in this unit.

                 1.2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES

                     •   To know the importance of the production system in an organization.

                     •   To understand the link between various activities of the production system.

                     •   To comprehend the history of operations management.

                     •   To understand the components of computer integrated manufacturing

                 1.3 SYSTEM

                          It consists of elements or components. The elements or components are
                 interlinked together to achieve the objective for which it exists. Eg: human body,
                 educational institutions, business organizations.

                 Components of a system:

                         The input, processing, output and control of a system are called the components
                 of a system.




     Anna University Chennai                              2
DBA 1651                                                                          PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


                        Figure 1.1 - Components of a system                                     NOTES
         Input                                                          Output

                                    Processing




                                      Feedback
                                      Control




Control:

      There are two types of control, namely Proactive Control and Reactive
Control.

Proactive Control:

        When an operation is carried out on a product in a workstation, the quality
inspector goes to the workstation and inspects the product. When the samples that he
has taken for the inspection are not confirming to the quality, he stops the machine and
identifies the reason for the deviation and corrects the problem, so that the produced
product thereafter conform to the specifications. This type of control prevents any
major quality setback after the production. This is an example for proactive control.

Reactive Control:

          In a planning period, usually the quality target is fixed. Suppose, an organization
feels to fix 5% defective is safe in the targeted production quantity and assumes that at
the end of the planning period it finds that the defective output exceeds the targeted
defective products. Then, it has to find out the reason for the deviations, namely, whether
the problem is due to the method of doing the work or the resources used in the process.
Then the planner uses this knowledge to prevent any problem in the future. Thus a
Reactive Control is a post morterm case.

1.3.1 Business System:

        The business organization is classified into different subsystems based on the
functions like marketing, production/operation, finance and human resource etc.



                                             3                                     Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                             Figure 1.2 – Business System
 NOTES
                                Marketing                          Finance



                                 Human Resource                       Production/Operation




                 Each subsystem will have more sub subsystems.
                 1.3.2 Production / Operation System

                                     Figure 1.3 – Production / Operation System

                    Input              Transformation Output                     Objectives
                                       Process
                                                                     1. To produce the required quantity.
                      Capital
                    Man Power                           Goods        2. To achieve the required quantity.
                    Material
                                                                     3. To meet the delivery time.
                    Information                         Services
                                                                     4. Economical way of doing



                                                Operations Management

                          Operation system is either manufacturing sector or service sector. The input
                 requirements are shown in figure1.3 The transformation process, in which part of the
                 value addition takes place to get the required quantity of the product or services with
                 the targeted quality within the specified time period, is carried out in a most economical
                 way. Operation Management Plan coordinates and controls all the activities in the
                 operation system to achieve the stated objectives.
                         Thus (the activities listed in the diagram) the Operations Management activities,
                 ensure the objective of quantity, quality, delivery time and economical way of doing
                 work. The communication link between the various activities are shown in the figure1.3.
                          Each activity is dealt in detail in different sections of this material. This figure
                 (figure1.3) will be very much appreciated after getting a clear understanding of all the
                 activities.

     Anna University Chennai                               4
DBA 1651                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

1.3.3 What is operation management (OM)?
                                                                                           NOTES
        Operation Management is a way or means through which the listed objectives
of an operating system is achieved. There is always a confusion between the word OM
& PM (Production Management). It is accepted norm that OM includes techniques
which are enabling the achievement of operational objectives in an operation system.
         The operation system includes both manufacturing sector as well as service
sector, but when you use the word PM, you should be careful to note that it refers to
the manufacturing sector but not the service sector. Suppose, you are designing a layout
for the hospital you should say that you are applying Operations Management Technique
not the Production Management Technique.

       When you design a layout for a manufacturing sector you can say that you are
applying Production Technique or Operation Technique or vice versa.
      From, the above discussion we can come to a conclusion that production
management is a subset of Operations Management.
Review questions –
1.     What are the components of a system?
2.     What are the differences between the Production Management and the Operations
       Management?
3.     List the objectives to be fulfilled by an Operation System.

1.4 HISTORY OF OM
                               Table 1.1 – History of OM
Year /
Period of Concept/Tools and System Used                         Developers/
Concept                                                         Originators

(14-16)      Evolution of Production system
Century

18th         New Technology for Production Process              Adam Smith and
Century      Management                                         harles Babbage

1895         Scientific Management Principles (Work Study)      F.W.T. Taylor
             Motion Study for Psychological Factors             Frank & Lillian
             Activity Scheduling Chart                          Gilbreth Henry
             Gantt

1935         Hawthrone Studies of Worker Motivation             Elton Mayo

1950’s       Operation Research for Decision Making Long        Many Researcher
             term Medium term, Short term decision by

                                           5                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                               Critical Path Method (CPM), Program Evaluation
 NOTES                         and…… Technique (PERT), Waiting-Line Theory

                 1970’s        Computers for Inventory Control Material              IBM, Joseph
                               Resource Planning (MRP)                               Orlicky,
                                                                                     Oliver Wieght

                 1980’s        Just In Time (JIT), Total Quality Control (TQC)       Toyota
                               Kanban System, CAD/CAM, Computer
                               Integrated Manufacturing (CIM) Flexible
                               Manufacturing System (FMS)

                 1990’s        1.Total Quality                                       Asqc(U.S.). IOS
                                  Management (TQM), Concurrent (CIM),                (England),
                                 Engineering, Value Engineering                      Michael Hammer
                               2. Business Process Engineering                       Oracle, SAP
                               3. Supply Chain Management                            (Germany)

                 2000’s        Logistics, Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP),
                               E-Commerce, E-Business
                 Review questions -
                    1. What is the contribution of GANTT?
                    2. Who is the father of Scientific Management?
                 1.5 TYPES OF OPERATION SYSTEM
                       The type of Operation System to be adopted should be known to the people,
                 and then only you may choose the system based on the nature of the product that you
                 are going to manufacture. The types of operation system are classified based on the
                 following criteria.

                          Product flow pattern in conversion system
                          Output of the product
                          Specification of the output

                                        Figure 1.5 - Types of Operation System

                     Production Flow Pattern       Output of the product    Specification of the output



                                                                                   Customized       Standard
                  Flow shop             Job shop               Flow shop




                  Continuous          Batch                  Mass          Goods
                  Production          Production             Production                Services



     Anna University Chennai                                  6
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

The characteristics of the Operation System based on the product flow pattern:                NOTES
1.5.1 Flow Shop
      In this kind of production, the productive resources are arranged according to
the sequence of operation required by the product design.
        Assume that you are engaged in the ready to wear clothing, if you want to
adopt the flow shop production, then the productive resources are kept according to
the sequence of operations required by the product like
Cutting
Joining by sewing
Adding, buttons, zippers etc
Quality checking
Packaging
Mostly Flow shop production are adopted when there is untapped market for the
product, customers are price sensitive and more competition in the market.
Flow shop production as shown in the figure is further divided into Continuous
Production, Mass Production and Batch production.
1.5.1.1 Continuous Production
The industries involved in the following activities are classified as Continuous Production
    •   Oil refining.
    •   Fertilizer production.
    •   Chemical processing etc.
    •   In this type of production the product flows continuously without much
        interruption.
    •   This type of production lacks in flexibility.
1.5.1.2 Mass Production
The industries involved in the following activities are classified as the Mass Production
Industries:
Auto Manufacturing
TV Manufacturing
Cigarettes
This kind of flow shop produces the same type of output, it has little flexibility compared
to Continuous Production.
1.5.1.3 Batch Production
The industries involved in the following activities are classified as the Intermittent
Production.
    • Shoe manufacturing
    • Bottling plant
    • Cloth manufacturing

                                            7                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                 Here the basic design of the product is the same but the specification of the product
 NOTES           differs. The production gets interrupted when the system switches over to other type
                 of the product specification. The products are similar in nature but not identical.

                 The Characteristics of Flow Shop Production:

                 Refer Table1.2
                               Table 1.2 - The Characteristics of Flow shop Production
                 Product                     The products are standardized.
                 Conversion                  Special purpose equipments, designed for the specific
                 Resources                   process of the product.
                 Work force                  Specialized people, doing the repetitive jobs.
                 Workforce                   Job satisfaction among the employee is low because of
                 Job satisfaction            the repetitive nature of job, results in boredom, more
                                             turnover and absentees.
                 Work-in-progress            Productive resources are balanced that result in less work
                 inventory                   in progress inventory.
                 Cycle time                  Cycle time per unit is relatively low
                 Cost of production          Cost of production per unit is relatively low.
                 Quantity of production      Comparatively quantity of production is more
                 Varieties                   Products to be produced of less variety.
                 Flexibility                 This kind of production lacks in flexibility.
                                             Small change in the product design needs the change in
                                             production system abnormally.
                 Production planning and     Since less varieties of product are produced for longer
                 control                     period, the production planning and control activities are
                                             inbuilt in the system itself, so the production planning and
                                             control activities are not a complex one.

                 1.5.2 Job Shop

                        In the case of Job Shop Production, the products are mostly customized
                 products. Based on the customer requirements, the products are produced. The
                 productive resources are kept according to the function.




     Anna University Chennai                            8
DBA 1651                                                                           PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

The industries involved in the following activities are classified as the Job Shop production:   NOTES
    • Auto repairing
    • Hospital
    • Machine shop
                   The Characteristics Of Job Shop Production.
                                        Table 1.3

Product                        The products are of order based mostly non standardized.

Conversion of Resources        General purpose equipment, grouped according to their
                               functions.

Work Force                     Skilled people, doing multi skilled work.

Work force satisfaction        Job satisfaction among the employee is high because the
                               operator role is multifaceted.

Work in Progress               There is lot of waiting time for the product to be
Inventory                      manufactured in the system that results in more in process
                               inventory.

Cycle time                     Because of more waiting time for the product in the
                               production line that results more manufacturing cycle time
                               comparatively.

Cost of Production             Cost of production per unit is relatively high.

Quantity of production         Since it is order based production, quantity produced per
                               unit type is relatively less.

Varieties                      The production system capable of producing more type of
                               products.

Flexibility                    This system has more flexibility any change in the design
                               of the product could be incorporated without much problem.

Production Planning            The arrival, the operations demanded and the operations
and Control                    time required by the order mostly uncertain. This makes
                               the jobs of production planning and control difficult.


1.5.3 Project Production
       This refers to the industries involved in the production of one type of complex
products like, ship construction, dam construction, bridge construction, research and
development etc.

                                              9                                     Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                  Project production consists of many activities where the activities are interlinked,
                 time phased and resources committed.

                       In this kind of production, scheduling the activities is important so that you can
                 complete the project within the time and budget constraint. The resources, namely,
                 manpower, machines, material are brought to the workplace where the product is
                 manufactured. There is no movement of the product.

                 Review Questions

                 1.    Which type of the production system in the process inventory is less?
                 2.    In which type of production system flexibility is more?
                 3.    Tell the important characteristic of Batch Production about the product?
                 4.    In which type of production system there is no product movement?

                 1.6 COMMUNICATION IN POM

                         As it is mentioned in the above section, operation management is meant to
                 achieve the objectives for which the operation system is intended for. Based on the
                 objective set by the top management, the system design is established. The system
                 design involves designing the product and process, designing the methods, measuring
                 the work, identifying the location, and designing the layout. By keeping the system
                 design as a framework in the aggregate planning various production alternatives are
                 analyzed and the best feasible production alternatives are chosen.

                          Then keeping the aggregate planning as a input, resource allocation and
                 sequencing of day to day activities are done. The inventory also kept at minimum to
                 satisfy the organization’s inventory objectives. The maintenance activity ensures the
                 availability workstations. Quality control ensures the quality in the input, processing and
                 output stages of production system. (See figure 1.4- Communication in POM).

                 Review Questions-

                      1. List the activities in system design?
                      2. What are the phases of scheduling?




     Anna University Chennai                              10
DBA 1651                                                                                                                       PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                       Figure 1.4- Communication in POM                                                                                                      NOTES
                                                 External: Socio, Political, Economic environment          Figure1.4

                                   Top Management Strategy




                                                                                                                               Top M ana ge me nt
                Marketers                               Financial
                 Policy                                  Policy




              Human                                     Production
           Resource Policy                                Policy


   Forecasting
                            Long term forecast                 System Design

                      Medium term forecast
                                                                     Product Design                        Capacity Planning
   Short term




                                                                                                                                       O p e r a tio n M a n a g e m e n t
   Forecasting          Aggregate Planning

                                                                    Process Design                  Plant location & layout

                     Inventory Control
                                                                              Work Design and measurement



  Scheduling                      Maintenance                            Quality Control
                                                                                                                               P r o d u c tio n S y s te m




                    Material
                                                                          Product
                    Capital
                    Information                                           Service
                    Manpower




1.7 COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURINGAND SERVICE SYSTEM

        Computer Integrated Manufacturing (CIM), a strategic thrust, is an operating
philosophy. Its objective is to achieve greater efficiencies within the business, across
whole cycle of product design, manufacturing and marketing. International competition
has intensified the requirement for high quality products that can compete in the global
market place. As a result of this increased competition, the pace of development has
been quickened and thus forcing manufacturers to enter into an era where the continuous


                                                                        11                                                      Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                     PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           quality improvement is maintained as a matter of survival, not simply being competitive
                 As the time scale of product life cycle has decreased and the demand for the quality
                 increased, attention has focused on improving the product quality and promoting the
                 competitive ability of industries through better design, manufacturing, management and
                 marketing.

                         Global manufacturing industry is now undergoing a rapid structural change. As
                 this process is continuous, manufacturing industry is encountering difficulties as it confronts
                 with a more changed and more competitive environment and also the market place. In
                 order to share the international market, manufacturers need to implement two strategies.
                 The first is, to improve the Enterprise Management. The second one is, to develop and
                 apply a Systematic and Scientific Technology, i.e.., CIM.

                         With the rapid growth of the complexity of manufacturing process and the
                 demand for high efficiency, greater flexibility, better product quality and lower cost,
                 industrial practice has approached the more advanced level of automation. Nowadays,
                 much attention has been given by both industry and academia to CIM.

                         Currently, most of the industries have highly automated facilities. To stimulate
                 industrial companies for utilizing the newest manufacturing technology, this has compelled
                 to develop a system architecture that does not only replace the existing manufacturing
                 facilities, operational environments, but effectively utilizes the knowledge and facilities
                 that are available in the industry.

                         To overcome the difficulties and solve the problems mentioned above automatic
                 techniques and methodologies should be Introduced into real industrial manufacturing.

                 1.7.1 CIM Subsystems

                       Significant progress has been made in the manufacturing technology in recent
                 years. Numerically control machine tools, automated material handling systems and
                 controlled systems have been widely used in industrial companies. The Flexible
                 Manufacturing System (FMS), Computer Integrated Manufacturing (CIM) or Systems
                 or Automated Manufacturing Systems (AMS) can be attributed to and increasing number
                 of companies. The advancing manufacturing and computer technology has brought new
                 challenges to the designers of products, processes and system as well as to the managers.
                 The traditional design and management tools can not effectively cope with problems
                 arising in the modern manufacturing systems.



     Anna University Chennai                                12
DBA 1651                                                                            PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

1.7.2 Functional areas of CIM                                                                     NOTES
       CIM system has emerged as a result of the development in manufacturing and
computer technology. The computer plays an important role integrating the following
areas of CIM system.
    • Part (component) and product design
    • Tool and fixture design
    • Process planning
    • Programming of numerically controlled (NC) machines, material
        handling system (MHS), etc.
    • Production planning
    • Machining
    • Assembly
    • Maintenance
    • Quality control
    • Inspection
    • Storage and retrieval
         To emphasis the computer aspects, the terms Computer Aided Design (CAD),
Computer Aided Process Planning (CAPP), Computer Aided Manufacturing
(CAM), Computer Aided Quality Control (CAQC), Automatic Storage Retrieval
(ASR), have used. Each term refers to one or more of the listed functional areas. CAD
refers to the part and product design and tool and fixture design, CAPP refers to Process
Planning, CAM refers to the programming of manufacturing hardware, production
planning machining, assembly and maintenance, CAQC refers to the quality control
and inspection and ASR involves the storage and retrieval of raw materials, finished
products work in process inventory.
         The computer plays a leading role in the automation and integration of hardware
component i.e. machines, material handling carriers and the software components of
manufacturing systems. In order to understand the CIM subsystems and the importance
of integrating them, it is first necessary to explore the functional areas by these subsystems.
1.7.2.1 Computer Aided Production Planning
         Production planning involves establishing production levels for a known length
of time. This forms the basis for the following two functions:
        1. Material requirement planning
        2. Loading and scheduling
        Based on the information regarding the type and quantity of parts or products
to be manufactured, the materials required to produce the parts or products must be
ordered with an appropriate lead time to ensure their availability for production. This
function constitutes material requirement planning. Based on the material required,
capacity- for example, machine hours and labor hours can be calculated.

                                              13                                     Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                  Machine loading involves assignment of parts and products to machines and
                 machine cell in order to distribute the production loads. Scheduling determines the
                 sequence in machines perform the operations.
                 1.7.2.2 Computer Aided Process Planning
                       Process planning for a part involves the preparation of a plan that outlines the
                 routes, operations, machines and tools required to produce the component. Since the
                 process is a tedious task, there has been a trend to automate it. As a result, a number
                 systems have been developed. There are three basic approaches to the automated
                 process planning. They are -
                                 a. Variant Approach
                                 b. Generative Approach
                                 c. All based Approach
                 CIM Subsystems
                 Intelligent Manufacturing
                          Development in artificial intelligence has had an impact on the manufacturing
                 systems. All most all the areas of the computer integrated manufacturing have been
                 effected by the artificial intelligence. Researchers and engineers are developing the
                 intelligent systems ranging from application in machining and assembly to long term
                 planning.
                 1.7.3 Conceptual framework of CIM
                         The conceptual framework of CIM is shown in Figure.1.6 are six major being
                 integrated by computing technology. Note that one of these is Group Technology (GT).
                                   Figure 1.6 – Conceptual framework of CIM
                                                   GROUP
                                                TECHNOLOGY
                                                    [GT]


                                                                            MANUFACT.
                          COMPUTER                                          PLANNING &
                            AIDED                                             CONTOL
                           DESIGN                                              [MPC]
                                                   COMPUTER
                            [CAD]
                                                  TECHNOLOGY




                                                                            AUTOMATED
                            ROBOTICS                                        MATERIALS
                                                                             HANDLING
                                                                               [AMH]
                                                  COMPUTER
                                                    AIDED
                                                  MANUFACT.
                                                    [CAM]




     Anna University Chennai                            14
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

         According to Arthur D.Little and Co., GT is the important technology among           NOTES
the others and it will play a major role in the factory of the future. The GT concept is
considered a center road towards a higher level of CIM.

1.7.4 Group Technology

         Group technology (GT) is a concept that is currently attracting a lot of attention
from the manufacturing community. GT offers a number of ways to improve productivity
in the batch manufacturing. The essence of GT is to capitalize on similarities on recurring
tasks. GT is, very simply, a philosophy to exploit similarities and achieve efficiencies
grouping like problems.

1.7.4.1 Definition of GT

         “Group technology is the realization that many problems are similar and that,
by grouping similar problems, single solution can be found to a set of problems, thus
saving time and effort”

1.7.4.2 History of GT

         Prior to 1913, the era of Henry Ford and his model T, all machining models
were similar to our present job shop techniques with machines laid out usually in lines or
blocks of similar machines. The work was loaded onto the machines usually by the
manual progress control system. Ford introduced the assembly line and that, in turn, led
to automated transfer machines. However, the majority of engineering do not produce
items in quantity that justify such methods and so the jobbing shop philosophy continued.
GT is mainly a coordination of normal good engineering practices. It is impossible to
say who first practiced GT. There are reports of it having been used in Germany in the
1930s.

        In an international Conference held in Stockholm in 1947, the basic groups
were explained by C.B.Nanthorst. In Italy M. Patrignany was an early exponent of this
technology. However, little of this appears to have been in English. First published
work was from the USSR by S.P.Mitrofanov in 1959 and there after subsequent books
were published by F.S.Denyanyuk and E.K. Ivanov.The first reported work on GT
outside Russia was done by a French Forges et Ateliers de Construction Electriques de
Jeurmont - and this was about in Machinery in 1962. Subsequently, several British
companies conducted considerable work in this field. There have also been considerable
studies done by various consultants in the Universities. The significant contribution by
J.L.Burbidge in the 1 960s led to GT as A total Manufacturing Philosophy.


                                            15                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           1.7.4.3 Advantages of GT

                        According to Burbidge, following are the advantages after introducing GT in
                 manufacturing.

                 a. Short throughput times because machines are closed together.

                 b. Better quality because groups complete parts and the machines are closed together
                    under one foreman.

                 c. Lower material handling costs because machines are closed together under one
                    foreman.

                 d. Better accountability because machines complete parts. The foreman can be made
                    responsible for costs, quality, and completion by due date.

                 e. Training for promotion for promotion since GT provides a line of succession, because
                    a group is a mini-department.

                 f. Automation GT is a first evolutionary step in automation.

                 g. Reduced set up time since similar parts brought together on the same

                 h. Morale and job satisfaction since most workers prefer to work in groups.

                        Studies undertaken by N.L.Hyer indicate the following significant savings after
                 implementing GT Snead prepared a summary matrix, listing the benefits listing benefits
                 achieved for the various GT.

                 Table1.4 - Advantages of GT

                         Applications implemented set up time              20-60%

                         Planned labor                                     15-25%

                         Tooling                                           20-30%

                         Rework & scrap                                    15-75%

                         Machine tool expenditures                         15-75%

                         WIP carrying costs                                20-50%

                 1.7.4.4 Organizational suitability for GT

                         The suitability of a firm for the introduction of GT depends on several factors.
                 The survey of Willey and Dale give a tentative description of a company profile likely to
                 achieve the greatest benefits from GT, some of these are:


     Anna University Chennai                             16
DBA 1651                                                                         PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

a. The company must be a relatively small organization with a reasonably small machine         NOTES
   tools, and manufacturing equipment.

b. The company should not be typified by either large or small component variety.

c. The batch sizes and the batch size range of products of the companies it is relatively
   small.

        Athersmith and Crookall Rajagopal and Smith Gupta Andand Grayson have
suggested another way of finding out the suitability of GT for a batch production industry.
Computer simulation has been used by the effect of introduction of GT in the batch
production industries based on the parameters such as throughput time, WIP inventory
and plant utilization Further GT is considered a desirable stepping stone for establishing
Just-In-Time production.

1.7.4.5 Group Technology in CIM

       One may question whether a cellular concept is applicable to CIM systems.
Some studies have shown that grouping machines to machine cells may limit the
manufacturing system flexibility. However, industrial applications have proven that it is
virtually impossible to implement a large scale CIM subsystem using a cellular concept.
Here after, the automated manufacturing systems that cellular approach can be called
as, Cellular Automated Manufacturing (CAMS). Four crucial factors of CAMS as
identified by Kusiak are:

1. Volume of information

        Volume of information a large-scale CIM subsystem is typically large, and it is
too expensive to effectively process information without the system’s decomposition.

2. Material handling system

      In a typical CIM subsystem, automated material handling carriers are used
(AGVs and Robots). Each of the two carriers can tend a limited number of machines.

3. Technology Requirement

       Some machines have to be grouped together due to technological requirements.
For example, a forging machine and a heat treatment section.

4. Management

         Although in most of the currently CIM subsystems, the degree of automation is
higher than in classical manufacturing systems, humans will be, for a long time, an integral


                                            17                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           part of these new manufacturing systems. Due to limited size of each machine cell, a
                 CAMS is easier to manage than the entire system.

                 Review Question:

                 Following stands for :

                                  1. CRM 2. FMS 3. AMS

                                  4. AS/RS 5. CAD 6. GT

                 1.8 GLOBAL SUPPLY CHAIN

                          Even though the countries fought for border issues, but there is no trade barrier
                 for the trade is concerned. GATT agreements and WTO paves the way for the Global
                 Supply Chain in trading. (See Figure1.7).

                 Overall Objective of Global Supply

                       The objective of global supply chain configuration is in meeting or exceeding
                 worldwide customer (internal and/or external) expectations at the lowest cost.

                 Specific Objectives and Expectations of Global Supply

                         Achievement of the transformation of supply chains into value chains will normally
                 include some combination of the following objectives and expectations:

                 •   Leverage spend (across business units and geographic boundaries).

                 •   Align Incentives for integration of activities (buyers, suppliers, end-users) to support
                     organizational goals and strategies.

                 •   Optimize supply chain operation (no. of members, capabilities, costs).

                 •   Reduce inventories across the chain.

                 •   Reduce all costs (item costs and supply chain operational costs).

                 •   Assurance of supply of right quality items to support operations.




     Anna University Chennai                              18
DBA 1651                                                                                                PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                     Figure 1.7- Global Supply Chain in trading                                                       NOTES
            Country A
                                                                              Country B


  Supplie       Manufacturer             Custom                    Supplie              Manufacturer   Custom
  r                                      er                        r                                   er
                                         Manufacturer                                                  Manufacturer


  Supplie       Manufacturer             Custom                    Supplie              Manufacturer   Custom
  r                                      er                        r                                   er
                                         Manufacturer                                                  Manufacturer




  Supplie       Manufacturer             Custom                    Supplie              Manufacturer   Custom
  r                                      er                        r                                   er
                                         Manufacturer                                                  Manufacturer




                               Supplie              Manufacturer             Custom
                               r                                             er
                                                                             Manufacturer


                               Supplie              Manufacturer             Custom
                               r                                             er
                                                                             Manufacturer


                               Supplie              Manufacturer             Custom
                               r                                             er
                                                                             Manufacturer


                                                    Country C



For simplicity only one supplier, manufacturer and customer of each country is
taken in the above diagram, same can be possible for others.

1.8.1 Global Complexities

     If the supply/value chain involves sourcing in multiple countries, additional
considerations need to be addressed. Some of these include:



                                                          19                                              Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES              ~   Currency exchange and risk.
                    ~   Counter trade opportunities and requirements.
                    ~   Varying laws and jurisdictional questions.
                    ~   Cultural differences.
                    ~   Language differences.
                    ~   Labor and training availability, practices, laws, regulations.
                    ~   Transportation, packing, shipping, storing, import, export, customs.
                    ~   Security: materials, products, personnel, intellectual property.

                 Challenges and Barriers to Transforming Global Supply Chains into Value
                 Chains

                        In the varying environments encountered internationally, there are a number of
                 challenges and barriers involved in building global supply chains. Many of these are
                 rarely concerned with the domestic supply chains. Some of these include:

                    ~   Uncertain political stability, self-serving governments.
                    ~   Lack of infrastructure in some countries (roads, port facilities, trained labor,
                        utilities, communications).
                    ~   Lack of critical market mass in particular countries.
                    ~   High transaction costs.
                    ~   Requirements to use in-country agents or partners and local content
                        requirements.
                    ~   Lack of potential for repeat purchases.
                    ~   Slower adoption of e-business than in the domestic market.
                    ~   No or limited free trade zone availability.
                    ~   Partner/contract limitations requiring bidding for all procurement activities and
                        alliance-building.
                    ~   High logistics and transportation costs.
                    ~   Different time zones (communication difficulties).
                    ~   Financial risks are higher, e.g. potential for war, terrorism, government changes.
                    ~   The nature of global activity (may be fragmented and/or scattered).
                    ~   Long/unpredictable supplier lead times.
                    ~   Protectionism (tariffs, duties, quotas, inspections).
                    ~   Limited number of qualified global suppliers.
                    ~   Difficult to link global project work to “run and maintain” global activities.
                    ~   Limited availability of trained personnel for purchasing or supply management
                        positions inhibiting.

     Anna University Chennai                            20
DBA 1651                                                                         PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


1.8.2 How to Transform Global Supply Chains                                                    NOTES
         Improve the quality/cost ratio of your supply chain. Strive for the highest quality
at the lowest cost.

Leverage value across the supply chain

        Understand what constitutes value and to whom it is valuable in your supply
chain. Identify and evaluate trade-offs between value added and profitability. Leverage
knowledge to create and deliver the value. Where commodity markets are involved, be
proactive in initiating change that will benefit you.

Redefine the boundaries of business

        Redefine the boundaries of your business in the context of what provides
continuing competitor and customer advantage. Evaluate any existing vertical integration
structures and replace with virtual sourcing if value can be added by doing so. Evaluate
what to insource and what to outsource. Use all capabilities of existing or potential
supply chains in the development of new products.

Develop relational competence

        View relationships with other members of your supply chains as a continuum
ranging from spot relationships to strategic alliance or co-ownership but recognizing
that most relationships will be somewhere between these extremes. Determine where
more competition will add value and where more collaboration will add value and seek
the best combination of competition and collaboration.

Manage at the right level

        Determine which strategies and activities best add value with global management
and which best add value with local management. Determine the best level of autonomy
for local management within supply chain activities. Analyze supply chains for each
category of material or service that is significant to the organization to determine the
best value -adding approach for management and control.

Develop supply chain responsiveness

        Determine how the degree of responsiveness to customer needs such as re-
supply time or product mix adjustment matches with customer requirements in each
such area. Consider techniques such as supplier managed inventory, supplier integration,


                                            21                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           and consignment stocking. Pay particular attention to the quality of demand forecasts
                 throughout the supply chain. Drive down purchase costs. Capture cost saving
                 opportunities and share benefits with contributing supply chain members. Pay attention
                 to the differing cost management and purchase strategy needs of various categories of
                 purchases. For example, commodities, specialty items, custom-made items, MRO
                 materials. Service purchases can be similar.

                 Bring About Change

                        Change Management 1-1. It refers to transforming supply chains which involves
                 a collateral change management. Consider purchases in the broadest possible sense -
                 do not exclude anything which is purchased by the organization, material or service
                 effort. This includes the following activities:

                    ~     Seek Top Management mandate with visible support.
                    ~     Identify the local sponsors and supporters of the supply chain, change early in
                          the transformation process.
                    ~     Use coordinated communication efforts to develop a dialog about the benefits
                          and obstacles for implementation.
                    ~     Target quick wins and immediate opportunities.
                    ~     Focus on overcoming obstacles to implementation by creating a cross functional
                          approach (Team) to address issues.
                    ~     Perform a competitive advantage review in order to leverage the core
                          competencies of the supply chain members .
                    ~     Develop a supply chain agenda, manage the overall program and frame goals
                          to address major gaps in supply chain performance.
                    ~     Develop a business plan that will integrate the activities of the supply chain
                          members.
                    ~     Formulate key performance metrics and measurements, tracking quarterly.
                    ~     Review results and make modifications as necessary to achieve supply chain
                          optimization.




     Anna University Chennai                               22
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


Summary                                                                                  NOTES
   •   This unit helps the reader to understand the importance of the production /
       operation system in an organization.
   •   Characteristics of the different production / operation system are detailed out
       in addition to when one should prefer what type of system.
   •   The components of computer integrated manufacturing system and the
       introduction of Global supply chain network are highlighted.


Review Questions:
   1. State any five Global Complexity.
   2. Give any three steps to develop Global Value Chain?




                                         23                                 Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                         PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                                          UNIT II
                          MATERIAL AND INVENTORY
                               MANAGEMENT
                 2.1 Introduction
                 2.2 Learning objectives
                 2.3 Materials Management
                     2.3.1 Definition and Scope
                     2.3.2 Objectives
                           2.3.2.1 Primary objectives
                           2.3.2.2 Secondary Objectives
                 2.4 Material Handling
                     2.4.1 Introduction
                     2.4.2 Robotics
                           2.4.2.1 Advantages of Robots in Industry
                           2.4.2.2 Components of a robot
                           2.4.2.3 Industrial applications of robotics
                           2.4.2.4 Applications of robotics in other fields
                           2.4.2.5 Dangers and disadvantages
                     2.4.3 Automatic Storage and Retrieval system (AS/RS)
                           2.4.3.1 Types of AS/RS
                           2.4.3.2 Technical and Economic benefits of AS/RS
                     2.4.4 Automated Guided Vehicle
                           2.4.4.1 Component of AGV
                           2.4.4.2 Applications of AGV
                 2.5 Just In Time (JIT)
                     2.5.1 Problems of Conventional Production System
                     2.5.2 Conventional vs. JIT attributes
                     2.5.3 JIT as a waste elimination tool
                     2.5.4 KANBAN production control system
                           2.5.4.1 Working of KANBAN
                     2.5.5 Uniform loading
                     2.5.6 Quality Control
                 2.6 ABC analysis
                     2.6.1 Kind of Control

     Anna University Chennai                       24
DBA 1651                                               PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


2.7 Inventory models                                             NOTES
    2.7.1 Need for Inventory
    2.7.2 Types of Inventory
    2.7.3 Inventory costs
    2.7.4 Deterministic model
           2.7.4.1 EOQ model
           2.7.4.2 EBQ model
           2.7.4.3 Quantity discount model
    2.7.5 Probabilistic model
           2.7.5.1 ‘Q’ model
2.8 Material Requirement Planning (MRP)
    2.8.1 Introduction
    2.8.2 Overview of MRP system
    2.8.3 Inputs of MRP system
    2.8.4 MRP Process
    2.8.5 MRP output
2.9 Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRPII)
    2.9.1 Introduction
    2.9.2 Closed loop MRP system
    2.9.3 Master Production Schedule
    2.9.4 Capacity planning
    2.9.5 Forward scheduling and backward scheduling
    2.9.6 Benefits of MRPII
    2.9.7 Drawbacks of MRPII
2.10 Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)
    2.10.1 Need for ERP
    2.10.2 Evolution of ERP
    2.10.3 Advantages of ERP system
    2.10.4 Disadvantages of a ERP system
    2.10.5 Limitation of ERP
2.11 E-Business and E-Commerce




                                       25              Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                                             UNIT - II



                            MATERIAL AND INVENTORY
                                 MANAGEMENT
                 2.1 INTRODUCTION
                          In this unit the productivity of material resources is discussed. The role of
                 materials management in an organization and the latest material handling devices like
                 Automated Guided Vehicle (AGV), Automatic Storage and Retrieval System (AS /
                 RS) and Robots are illustrated. The deterministic and probabilistic inventory models
                 are illustrated with examples. Detailed discussions are carried out about material
                 requirement planning and manufacturing resource planning. The evolution of ERP system
                 is dealt. In addition, introduction about e-business and e-operation strategies are also
                 explained.
                 2.2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES
                     • To know the importance of material resources.
                     • To understand functions of materials management.
                     • To understand the computer controlled material handling devices.
                     • To know the importance of deterministic and probabilistic inventory models.
                     • To know the working of MRP – I and MRP – II systems.
                     • To highlight the E-business and e-operation strategies.
                 2.3 MATERIAL MANAGEMENT
                 2.3.1 Definition and Scope
                         We can define Materials Management as the function responsible for the
                 coordination of planning, sourcing, purchasing, moving, storing and controlling materials
                 in an optimum manner so as to provide a pre-decided service to the customer at a
                 minimum cost.
                 2.3.2 Objectives
                         However, within the broader management objectives of any industry or business,
                 Materials Management’s contribution towards objectives may be divided into two
                 categories:

     Anna University Chennai                             26
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

    1) Primary and                                                                            NOTES
    2) Secondary.
         The former contributes directly to the Materials Management function and the
latter, helps other departments to achieve their objectives.
2.3.2.1 Primary Objectives
Purchasing:
         Materials play a vital part in the field of cost-control and operating expenditure
of any organization and therefore, materials have a direct bearing on the cost of a
product, manufactured. If the Materials Department can reduce the overall materials
cost through an efficient system of buying, it can directly contribute its share to the
enhancement of profit. Thus lower prices, lower procurement and possession costs are
important objectives of Materials Management. Price consciousness or less materials
cost means more profit as embodied in the phrase, “Purchasing for Profit” which is
readily recognized by Management. It is therefore a prime functional responsibility of
the Materials Management department.
Stores and inventory management:
         Arriving at the right balancing point in the inventory investment like investment
in any other capital assets has always been a perplexing problem to industries. Inventory
Management function is more complex, more subtle and the balance of costs and gains
is much more difficult to find out. Briefly, Materials Management objective here is to
have the correct quantity and right quality of material on hand at the time required with
a minimum of investment expenditure, consistent with business experience. When
inventory turnover is high, storage and carrying costs are low.
Continuity of supply:
          This is an other important objective of Materials Management. Specially in
automated processes, where costs are rigid and are not easily amenable to reduction
due to lack of production materials, the question of continuity of supply gains prominence.
This foreshadows all other objectives, because idle-time costs of men and machines
push up overall costs of production and expediting supply means additional transport
costs.
Quality of materials:
        Where quality of materials presents cost plus production engineering problems,
it may well become one of the prime objectives of Materials Management, where other
objectives are sacrificed at quality-cost.
Good supplier relations:
       A good supplier relation, on which depends much of the product-reputation of
the company, is also one of the key objectives of Materials Managers. Suppliers respond


                                            27                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           to fair treatment but are uncooperative and unwilling if indifferently treated. The Materials
                 Management department can improve relations by providing the required stimuli for
                 their better performance.
                 2.3.2.2 Secondary Objectives
                         Secondary objectives are so varied that they limit the possibility of listing
                 exclusively in one breath. In one way or the other, they help to achieve the primary
                 objectives, but different organizations put different emphasis on them. The following
                 are a few examples.
                 Make-or-Buy decisions:
                          Since the Materials Management department is immediately concerned with
                 the selection of supply sources, materials-cost, procurement-cost and the availability of
                 materials. it influences heavily the Make-or-Buy decision. Often, this is a Committee
                 action where other departments are also involved. However, the Materials’ department’s
                 contribution is still substantial and more direct.
                 Value analysis and Value engineering:
                          Any item that is produced or bought is to serve a specific purpose. Before
                 making or buying any material or equipment, engineers and buyers must decide what
                 purpose they are to serve in order to find out whether a lower-cost design would work
                 well or a less costly item could fill the need. Both engineering department and purchase
                 department may watch the specifications for the best value of the money spent.
                          ‘Value engineering’ and Value Analysis’ are close to the same thing. They are
                 approaches to cost-saving goals that deal primarily with product design. The first
                 usually refers to what the engineering department is doing in this direction and the second
                 usually refers to the work that the buyer is doing in this area. If value analysis is designed
                 to reduce the cost of an item, standardization may often eliminate the item entirely.
                 Standardization:
                         Standardization is essential to a mass production system which is defined as
                 “that which has been established as a model to which an object or action can be
                 compared”. However, one should take note that even when a substitute is technically
                 feasible, it is not always economical to use it. The economics of standardization is not
                 necessarily so complex.
                         All that is required is to compare costs of acquisition and carrying before the
                 substitution was made with the costs after it was made. A standardized program is
                 primarily designed to root out unneeded inventories. The buyer who knows who made
                 the original components, need not pay a premium price for it to another equipment
                 manufacturer for the same thing.


     Anna University Chennai                               28
DBA 1651                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

          The Engineering department is primarily responsible for standards and             NOTES
specifications. However, the Materials department can promote incorporation of
standard components into product design to reduce cost. The fewer the items that
need be managed, the simpler and more efficient is the Materials Management process,
so that the Materials Management department can periodically review the stock to
suggest weeding out of non-standard items.
Product development and new products:
         Since the discovery and improvement of materials frequently lead to a new
product and lower costs on existing products, the Materials department can suggest
materials and components that will do better or equivalent jobs at lower cost. Product
efficiency is basically a compromise between engineering design and economic objective
of Management. The Materials Manager’s economic knowledge can supplement the
technical skill of engineering through a product change for bigger profits. Again, a
program designed to find ways and means of utilizing the by-products or wastes is
always profitable and here the Materials department can render substantial help by
adding new products to the existing product-line.
Price, demand and requirements forecasting:
        In large concerns this is a functional responsibility of economists. They make
forecasts both for sales and purchases. Materials Management personnel translate
them into specific purchase actions. Because of their intimate knowledge of the market
conditions through daily contacts with suppliers, in medium or small-size organizations,
Materials Management departments do this job. By analyzing and interpreting data of
past sales, seasonal variations in prices, availability and demand for materials, they
forecast future trends and plan material requirements accordingly.
An organization structure is an essential tool of management:
         As a system of responsibility and of formal interrelations, it is concerned with
two of the elements, namely, planning and coordination. Its chief purpose is to ensure
smooth and balanced working of the organization. Obviously the size of the unit must
affect the way in which management and other activities are carried out. Clearly, a large
organization will be able to use and will need to use techniques and procedures of a
different kind and higher degree of complexity than those of the medium or smaller firm.
In other words, there will be differences in methods or routines according to differences
in size, but the fundamental principles of management and the approach necessary for
the attainment of effective management are the same, irrespective of size.
1. The determination of the basic objectives:
        The basic objectives of an organization determine the organization structure for
they determine the type, stability, structure and permanency of the organization. The


                                          29                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           objectives of an organization play, therefore, a vital part in determining how quickly the
                 structure should be developed, what it should look like, its operating cost and
                 permanency. What we want to accomplish should be kept clearly in mind while
                 determining and setting up its structure. Obviously, the organization structure of a large
                 corporation is much more complex, and therefore, slowly developed. Here too,
                 objectives affect the structure. Once the objectives are clearly determined, the
                 development of structure will follow the natural path dictated by the desire to reach
                 these objectives. An organization structure should never hinder the achievement of
                 these objectives; instead it should facilitate the mechanism that will enable the organization
                 to accomplish things more easily and effectively than when left in unorganized things
                 more easily and effectively than when left in an unorganized fashion. Thus, if it is decided
                 that the company should add to a new line of product, and therefore, expand its marketing
                 territory, such an objective and its concomitant Materials Management activities would
                 necessarily affect the final structure of the organization.
                 2. Determination of the areas of activity:
                          Organization itself is nothing but the application of the universal law of
                 specialization. Through organization, a person’s actions and responsibilities are narrowed
                 to one or a few functions, specializing in these few and thereby, increasing efficiency.
                          Specialization by division of work into functional areas enables one to understand
                 his job more thoroughly. Therefore, effective organization must include specialization
                 as an element of efficiency for the performance of one or a very few leading functions.
                 As far as possible, similar functions should be combined into one position. Although its
                 advantages are universally recognized, yet it has its limits which should not be exceeded.
                 3. Determination of the ideal structure to accomplish the desired activities:
                          Physical listing of activities will in itself suggest possible areas within which it
                 needs to consolidate work. Each of the groupings will then lead to an ‘ideal’ organization
                 structure to carry out the functions. Products, tools and processes may be considered
                 as possible areas of functional activities. This ‘ideal’ structure may then represent the
                 long range or ultimate organization with available personnel, funds, etc., so as to reconcile
                 the ‘ideal’ with the ‘working’ organization.
                 4. Authority and Responsibility:
                           Authority is the right to give orders and the power to exact obedience. Authority
                 is not to be conceived apart from responsibility, that is, apart from sanction – reward or
                 penalty, which goes with the exercise of that power. Delegation of authority is the key
                 point of organization. Without delegation there would be no organization and this is the
                 core of all formal processes of organization. A major task of top management is the
                 delegation of authority to proper individuals in order to secure appropriate actions. But
                 often, we hear of responsibility being delegated without power to command or act.

     Anna University Chennai                               30
DBA 1651                                                                          PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Such an organization set-up makes for ease and efficiency in determining responsibility         NOTES
and delegating necessary authority. Since it would not be just to hold a person responsible
for performance of a task without first giving him the authority, responsibility should
always be coupled with commensurate authority. Here, authority can be delegated,
responsibility cannot.
5. Span of Control:
         By span of control, we mean the number of individuals one supervises and
directs. There is a definite limit to this number and this, to a great extent, determines the
units of an organization. There may be a tendency to over supervise and this may, in
effect, mean scant or ineffective supervision.
        On the other hand, when too few report to one supervisor, his time is not
effectively used. However, no hard and fast rule can be established and it depends
upon the type of work performed.
6. Personal Ability:
         Simply assigning jobs to individuals does not mean that they will be accomplished.
Individuals differ in capacity and ability and these differences as well as personal
limitations should be considered before placing an individual in an organization. In
developing an organization, therefore, proper regard should be paid to the personal
ability of individuals assigned to various components. An organization is referred to the
people and its structure reflects the ability of its members which again largely determines
the structure.
7. Unity of Command:
         For any action whatsoever, an employee should receive orders from one superior
only. Such is the rule of unity of command. No one in any organization should report
to more than one line supervisor and everyone should know to whom he reports and
who reports to him. In fact, receiving directions from more than one individual may
easily result in confusion, conflict, lack of action and poor morale. Each member of an
organization, therefore, should receive directions from only one boss, his immediate
superior and should be responsible to him alone.
8. Job Assignment:
          Logical groupings or related functions should be made in developing the
organization structure. It is often desirable to have the responsibility for each of these
functions assigned to specific individuals with these persons turning to the leader charged
with the accomplishment of the overall function.
9. Regulations:
     Rules and regulations aid improper operation of an enterprise. A complete
statement of the operating objective of an enterprise as well as the responsibility and

                                             31                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           the authority of each individual should be formulated and should be made available in
                 writing to all personnel in the organization. They may be broad and specific. Even
                 detailed methods manuals to describe how the tasks are to be carried out may be
                 valuable. They define the authority which certain individuals have over particular functions.
                 10. Two way communication:
                          Despite the fact that line of authority provides channels downward and upward,
                 they are often used only to pass directives downward and never as a means of
                 communicating attitudes, feelings or ideas upward. Such blocks in communication
                 occur in a great many organizations. In fact, one of the most immediate and costly
                 results of poor organization is the breakdown of intra-organizational communication.
                 In as much as an organization is developed to aid in accomplishing an objective, good
                 communication is necessary if all employees are to know what to do to reach this
                 objective.
                 11. Flexibility:
                           The environment in which an organization exists and the individuals who make
                 it up are constantly changing. Organizations change because of technological, economic
                 or personnel changes or changes in the objectives. An organization possessing flexibility
                 withstands minor pressures, but gives way to the demand for genuine change permitting
                 their expansion or contraction without seriously altering the basic functions of various
                 segments of the structure.
                 12. Line and Staff activity:
                           Line and staff functions should not be combined in one individual where
                 separation of functions is possible. Line functions, as has been said before, are those
                 which directly affect the product or service. Staff functions are those that aid the line or,
                 are auxiliary to the line function. Because confusion may result, line and staff functions
                 should be separate wherever possible. Staff specialists are useful and there will always
                 be a need for them. Especially in large materials organizations, where materials
                 management is treated as an integrated activity, there should be less need for staff
                 experts in a variety of functions. Among the major staff services value analysis, economic
                 forecasting and administrative planning may be essential. A staff expert on ‘trade relations’
                 is also a common feature in large-scale industrial purchasing.
                 Leadership Question:
                          Leadership is obviously more than personal ability and skill. Leadership is
                 important to the effective set up and operation of every organization because leadership
                 is the one force that charts and makes possible the economic accomplishment of the
                 objectives. A ‘weak’organization structure with effective leaders will probably accomplish
                 more than a so called ‘strong’ organization with weak leaders.


     Anna University Chennai                               32
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Structural balance:                                                                           NOTES
         An organization conceived and developed along the principles detailed above,
will more than reward its leaders, as well as its members. In the process of forming a
new organization structure or of reorganizing an existing one, these principles should be
considered. But the consideration of these principles, rules and types will not in itself
result in the development of a new organization. Instead a new organization structure
must be visualized and developed step by step. Although no series of rules can assure
an effective organization, this objective can be approached in a systematic fashion without
much difficulty. In a balanced organization, each function of the structure should be
large enough, but not overly developed in relation to other functions of the organization.
Without such a balance, the objective of the organization cannot be achieved
economically.
Review Questions:
    1. List any two Primary functions.
    2. List any two Secondary functions.
2.4 MATERIAL HANDLING
2.4.1 Introduction
            For an ideal operation system, material handling is not a desirable activity.
The reason is it does not add any value to the product but it adds only cost to the
product. So when you design a layout you should see that the movement of materials
should be minimum. The material handling equipment used mostly depends upon the
type of production system to be adopted. In the case of flow line production system,
the following material handling equipments are used.
Conveyors
            1. Slat conveyor
            2. Pusher bar conveyor
            3. Roller conveyor
            4. Belt conveyor
            5. Wheel conveyor
            6. Screw conveyor
            7. Pivoted bucket conveyor
            8. Apron conveyor
            9. Spiral chute
            10. Pneumatic conveyor
            11. Trolley conveyor


                                            33                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                  In the case of job order/intermittent type production systems, the material
                 handling equipment used are

                              1.   Fork Truck
                              2.   Platform Truck
                              3.   Industrial Truck
                              4.   Straddle carrier
                              5.   Hand operated vehicles

                         In addition, CRANES and HOISTS are also used in the production system.
                 Thus is not specifically related to particular system. All types of production system
                 uses/this kind of material handling equipment.
                 The types of CRANES and HOISTS are :
                         1.   Overhead traveling bridge cranes
                         2.   Jib crane
                         3.   Gantry crane
                         4.   Air hoist
                         5.   Electric Hoist
                         6.   Chain hoist
                           There is no hard and fast rule that particular material handling system used only
                  by the particular production system. But you can find that the trucks used in the flow
                 ıline. Production as well as the conveyors used in the job order and intermitted production
                  system.
                                      Diagram 2.1 – Material handling equipments




     Anna University Chennai                              34
DBA 1651        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


                          NOTES




           35   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                               PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES




                 2.4.2 Robot
                          The word “robot” is also used in a general sense to mean any machine that
                 mimics the actions of a human, in the physical sense or in the mental sense. It comes
                 from the word robota, labor or work. The word robot first appeared in Karel Capek’s
                 science fiction play R.U.R. (Rossum’s Universal Robots) in 1921. The word was brought
                 into popular Western use by famous science fiction writer Isaac Asimov.
                          A robot is an electro-mechanical or bio-mechanical device or group of devices
                 that can perform autonomous or preprogrammed tasks. A robot may act under the
                 direct control of a human or autonomously under the control of a programmed computer.
                 Robots may be used to perform tasks that are too dangerous or difficult for humans to
                 implement directly, such as radioactive waste clean-up, or may be used to automate
                 mindless repetitive tasks that should be performed with more precision by a robot than
                 by a human, such as automobile production. Robot can also be used to describe an
                 intelligent mechanical device in the form of a human, a humanoid robot.
                          The word robot is used to refer to a wide range of machines, the common
                 feature of which is that they are all capable of movement and can be used to perform
                 physical tasks. Robots take on many different forms, ranging from humanoid, which
                 mimic the human form and way of moving, to industrial, whose appearance is dictated
                 by the function they are to perform.


     Anna University Chennai                           36
DBA 1651                                                                           PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

        Asimov proposed three ‘laws’ which for many years were recognized as                     NOTES
principles in the use of robotics:
       A robot must not harm a human being or, through inaction, allow a human to
come to harm.
        A robot must always obey human beings unless this is in conflict with the first
law.
        A robot must protect itself from harm unless this is in conflict with the first or
second law.
Robots can be grouped generally
Mobile robots (e.g. autonomous vehicles)
Manipulator robots (e.g. industrial robots)
Self reconfigurable robots, which can conform themselves to the task at hand.
An industrial robot has been defined as:
“A reprogrammable multifunctional manipulator designed to move material,
parts, tools, or specialized devices through various programmed motions for the
performance of a variety of tasks”.
        The definition says the robot is a reprogrammable and multifunctional. The
reprogrammability means, through computer the programmed instructions can be written
fed and also can be edited. Multifunctional is in the sense of its versatility. It can perform
various activities.
2.4.2.1 Advantages of Robots in Industry:
        We can analyze the various advantages of robots in three perspectives.
Technical factors:
          When comparing robot and human performance it is generally considered that
humans cannot match the speed, quality, reliability, endurance and predictability of
robotics systems. However, robots cannot compete with hard automation if the cycle
times are short and flexibility is not an important factor. Robots therefore provide a link
between the rigidity of dedicated automation and the flexibility of the human operator,
in that they offer:
High flexibility of product type and variation.
Lower preparation time than hard automation.
Better product quality.
Fewer rejects and less waste than labor-intensive production.


                                             37                                     Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           Economic factors:
                            Major factors in considering the possible implementation of robotics systems
                 include:
                            •   The need to increase production rates to remain competitive.
                            •   Pressure from the marketplace to improve quality.
                            •   Increasing costs.
                            •   Shortage of skilled labor.
                 In general, robotics can increase profitability by:
                            •   Providing maximum utilization of capital-intensive production facilities for
                                up to 24 hours per day, seven days per week;
                            •   Reducing production losses due to absenteeism and skilled labor shortage,
                                reducing the amount of inventory which is being processed with resulting
                                savings in work in progress.
                            •   Reducing the manufacturing lead time of the product or processes;
                            •   Reducing scrap and increasing product quality, with resulting reduction in
                                the number of customer complaints.
                 Social factors:
                            •   Robots are employed to do mindless, repetitive tasks so that the human
                                capital can be utilizied in more interesting work.
                            •   Many low-level tasks can be carried out by robots.
                            •   Robots can be utilized to perform undesirable work in dangerous or
                                hazardous environments and work requiring heavy physical effort.
                                            E.g.: spot-welding car bodies, applying spray paint.
                            •   Robots are successfully implemented in the nuclear industry for carrying
                                out the maintenance work on reactors and for the handling of dangerous
                                waste products.
                 2.4.2.2 Components of a robot:
                     A robot has many components which include:
                 A base- fixed or mobile.
                 A manipulator with several degrees of freedom (DOF).
                 An end-effector or gripper for holding a part or a tool.
                 Drives or actuators causing the manipulator arm or end-effector move in a space.
                 Controller with hardware and software support for giving commands to drivers
                 Sensors to feed back the information for subsequent actions of the arm as well as to
                 interact with the environment in which the robot is working.
                 Interfaces connecting the robotic subsystems to the external world.

     Anna University Chennai                               38
DBA 1651                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.2 – Movements of a Robot                                         NOTES




2.4.2.3 Industrial applications of robotics:

Material handling:
Depalletizing/palletizing
Transporting components
Transfer of components/tools
Bottle loading
Parts handling
Machine loading and unloading components:
Loading parts to CNC machine tool
Loading a punch press
Loading a die casting machine
Loading electron beam welding and laser beam welding machines
Loading/orientating parts to transfer machines
Spray painting
Loading parts on the test machine
Painting of trucks/automobiles
Painting of agricultural equipment
Painting of appliance components
Arc welding
Spot welding
Arc welding
Seam welding of variable width
Machining
Drilling

                                      39                        Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           Deburring
                 Sanding
                 Grinding
                 Cutting
                 Forming
                 Assembly
                 Mating components
                 Riveting small assemblies
                 Inspection
                 In-process measuring and quality control, searching the missing parts
                 Others
                 Heat-treatment, applications of adhesives etc.
                 2.4.2.4 Applications of robotics in other fields:
                 1. Hazardous environments
                 Mining
                 Exploration
                 Search and rescue
                 Tunneling for main roadways
                 Operations in short passages
                 Municipal services
                 Fire fighting
                 Underground (dangerous gas-filled)
                 Sewer clearing
                 Maintenance of atomic reactors
                 Space
                 Space vehicles
                 Undersea
                 Oil/mineral exploration
                 Salvage operations

                 2. Medical
                 Rehabilitation engineering for handicapped
                 Non-invasive diagnostics
                 Surgery

                 3. Distribution
                 Warehousing
                 Retailing (for food industry or for retail industry)


     Anna University Chennai                              40
DBA 1651                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

4. Agriculture                                                                              NOTES
5. Hobby/household purposes

6. Military applications of robots may be in both manufacturing and non-manufac-
turing areas.
2.4.2.5 Dangers and disadvantages:
         Although robots have not developed to the stage where they pose any threat or
danger to society, fears and concerns about robots have been repeatedly expressed in
a wide range of books and films. The principal theme is the robots’ intelligence and
ability to act could exceed that of humans that they could develop a conscience and a
motivation to take over or destroy the human race.
          Currently, malicious programming or unsafe use of robots may be the biggest
danger. Although industrial robots may be smaller and less powerful than other indus-
trial machines, they are just as capable of inflicting severe injury on humans. However,
since a robot can be programmed to move in different trajectories depending on its
task, its movement can be unpredictable for a person standing in its reach. Therefore,
most industrial robots operate inside a security fence which separates them from human
workers.
         Even without malicious programming, a robot, especially a future model mov-
ing freely in a human environment, is potentially dangerous because of its large moving
masses, powerful actuators and unpredictably complex behavior.
        Designing and programming robots to be intrinsically safe and exhibit safe be-
havior in a human environment is one of the great challenge in robotics. Some people
suggest that developing a robot with a conscience may be helpful in this regard.
2.4.3 Automated Storage and Retrieval System (AS/RS)
         An integrated FMS, AGVS, and AS/RS system provides an efficient and ef-
fective production system for manufacturing. Receiving, identification and sorting, dis-
patching, placing in storage, retrieving from storage, packing, shipping, and record
keeping have traditionally been considered the functions of storage systems. An AS/RS
attempts to achieve these functions by automating most of these procedures in a cost-
effective and efficient manner.
An automated storage and retrieval system is defined as:
A combination of equipment and controls, which handles, stores and retrieves materials
with precision, accuracy and speed under a defined degree of automation.
    Different operations of AS/RS:
    •   Automatic removal of an item from a storage location
    •   Transportation of this item to a specific processing or interface point

                                          41                                      Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES               •  Automatic storage of an item in a predetermined location, having received an
                        item from a processing or interface point.
                 An automated storage and retrieval system comprises the following:
                    • A series of storage aisles having storage racks.
                    • Storage and retrieval (SIR) machines, normally one machine per aisle, to
                        store and retrieve materials
                    • One or more pickup and delivery stations where materials are delivered for
                        entry to the system and materials are picked up from the system.
                 2.4.3.1 Types of AS/RS
                         Several types of AS/RSs are distinguished based on certain features and
                 applications.
                 Some of the important categories include:
                         1. Unit load
                         2. Miniload
                         3. Person-on-board
                         4. Deep-lane
                         5. Automated item retrieval system
                 1. Unit Load AS/RS
                          The unit load AS/RS is used to store and retrieve loads that are palletized or
                 stored in standard-size containers. In general, a unit load system is computer con-
                 trolled; having automated machines designed to handle unit load containers. Each ma-
                 chine is guided by rails in the floor. These are the load-supporting mechanisms that
                 moves loads to and from storage locations and the pickup-and-deposit stations.

                 2. Miniload AS/RS:
                          A miniload system is designed to handle small loads such as individual parts,
                 tools, and supplies. The system is suitable for use where there is a limit on the amount of
                 space that can be utilized and where the volume is too low for a full-scale unit load
                 system and too high for a manual system. A smaller investment and flexibility of handling
                 small items make it a popular choice in industry.
                 3. Person-on-Board Systems
                          The person-on-board system allows storage of items in less than unit load
                 quantities. A person rides on a platform with the S/R machine to pick up individual
                 items from a bin or drawer. This provides in-aisle order-picking ability, which can reduce
                 the time it takes to fill an order. The operator can select the items and place them in a
                 tote or module, which is then carried by the S/R machine to the end of the aisle or to a
                 conveyor to reach its destination.


     Anna University Chennai                              42
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

4. Deep-Lane AS/RS:                                                                           NOTES
         The deep-lane AS/RS is another variation on the unit load system. The items
are stored in multideep storage with up to 10 items per row rather than single or double
deep. This leads to a high density of stored items, permitting high usage of the unit.
         Each rack permits flow-through of items; that is, an item is deposited on one
side of the storage rack and removed from the other side. The S/R machine is similar to
the unit load S/R machine, except that S/R machines have specialized functions such as
controlling rack-entry vehicles.
5. Automated Item Retrieval System:
         This system is designed for automatic retrieval of individual items or cases for
storage. The storage system consists of items stored individually in a flow-through system
that can be automatically released from storage and automatically brought to a required
point. The items are stored from the rear, as in the deep-lane system, and are retrieved
from the front.
2.4.3.2 Technical and Economic Benefits of AS/RS
There are several benefits of AS/RS for an organization, which include:
•   An AS/RS is highly space efficient. Space now occupied by raw stock, work in
    process, or finished parts and assemblies can be released for valuable manufacturing
    space.
•   Increased storage capacity to meet long-range plans.
•   Improved inventory management and control.
•   Quick response time to locate, store, and retrieve items.
•   Reduced shortages of inventory items due to real-time information and control.
•   Reduced labor costs due to automation.
•   Improved stock rotation.
•   Improved security and reduced pilferage because of closed storage area.
•   Flexibility in design to accommodate a wide variety of loads.
•   Flexibility in interfacing with other systems such as AGVS, FMS, and inspection
    systems such as coordinate measuring machines.
•   Reduced scrap and rework due to automatic handling of parts.
•   Reduced operating expenses for light, power, and heat.
•   Helps implement just-in-time (JIT) concepts by getting the right parts, tools, pallets,
    and fixtures to the right place at the right time because of automatic control of
    storage and retrieval functions and accurate inventory management.

                                            43                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           2.4.4 Automated Guided Vehicle
                         Automated Guided Vehicles (AGV), popularly known as battery-powered
                 driverless vehicles. AGVs are becoming an integral part of automated manufacturing
                 systems. They are with programming capabilities for destination, path location, and
                 positioning. The AGVS belong to a class of highly flexible, intel1igent versatile material-
                 handling systems used for materials loading and unloading throughout the facility.
                         Automated Guided Vehicle (AGV) is the advanced material handling
                 applications. AGV play an important part in automating the manufacturing unit because
                 they not only connect all faces of the factory by the horizontal movement of materials,
                 but allow management to control and direct manufacturing processes.
                         The AGV can be defined as a vehicle equipped with automatic guidance
                 equipment, either electromagnetic or optical. Such a vehicle is capable of following
                 prescribed guidepaths and may be equipped for vehicle programming and stop selection,
                 blocking, and any other special functions required by the system.
                         One of the interesting feature of AGVs is the collision avoidance capability.
                 That is, the vehicle comes to a dead stop before any damage is done to personnel,
                 materials, or structures.
                 2.4.4.1 The Components of AGV
                  There are four main components of an automated guided vehicle system:
                 1. The vehicle: It is used to move the material within the system without a human
                    operator.
                 2. The guide path: It guides the vehicle to move along the path.
                 3. The control unit: It monitors and directs system operations including feedback on
                    moves, inventory, and vehicle status.
                 4. The computer interface: It interfaces with other computers and systems such as the
                    mainframe host computer, the automated storage and retrieval system (AS/RS),
                    and the flexible manufacturing system (FMS).
                 AGV’s Control Systems
                 There are three types of AGVS control systems. They are 1-1
                 • Computer-controlled system:
                    In this system, all the transactions and AGVS vehicle movements are controlled
                 and monitored by the system controller. The guide path controller controls the guide
                 path of the AGVS and transfers the information to the AGVS process controller. The
                 AGVS process controller directs the movement of the AGVS vehicles.

     Anna University Chennai                              44
DBA 1651                                                                         PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

• Remote dispatch control system:                                                              NOTES
         In this system a human operator is required to issue instructions to the vehicle
through a remote control station. The control system sends destination instructions directly
to the vehicle. Therefore, the human operator does not have any direct control over the
AGVS vehicle.
• Manual control system:
       In the manually controlled system, the operator gives commands to AGVS.
The operator gives instructions like loading the vehicle, entering a destination and
unloading. A manually controlled system is simple and the least expensive of all control
systems. The efficiency of the system depends on the skill and performance of the
operator.
2.4.4.2 Applications of AGVS
        AGVS have numerous applications and have already been applied by many
manufacturing plants and companies. New applications are being developed as
technology improves and as experience is gained. Some of the most common applications
of the AGVS are:
•   Raw material storage
•   Finished goods storage
•   Assembly operations
•   Flexible manufacturing systems
•   Manufacturing operations
Technical and Economic Benefits of AGVs
•   Economic Justification: AGV systems are proving to be the most economical
    method of moving material.
•   Interface with Other Systems: AGV systems are designed to interface with other
    material-handling systems including conveyors, automatic storage/retrieval systems,
    production lines, and other devices.
•   System Accountability: Computer control means planned delivery, transaction audit
    records, on-line interface to production and inventory control systems and
    management information on the vehicle and workstation production.
•   Reduced Labor/increased Productivity: In cases where driverless vehicles are
    used, substantial savings are realized due to labor reduction.
•   Guide path Easily Expanded: As material movement needs change or plant size
    increases, AGV systems can be expanded or modified quickly and at low cost.

                                            45                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           •   Expandable System Capacity: As material movement needs an increase, load
                     movement capacity in the AGV system is easily accomplished by adding one or
                     more vehicles.
                 •   Unobstructed Aisles: Control wires for AGV systems are installed in the floor and
                     therefore, leave no ‘above-floor obstructions’.
                 •   Destinations Unlimited: AGV systems can be designed with an unlimited number
                     of pick-up and delivery points.
                 •   Less Equipment Damage: There is less product and equipment damage when
                     AGV systems are used to move material because the vehicles travel on a
                     predetermined route.
                 •   Reliable System Control: All automatic guided vehicles are equipped to allow
                     manual override for the special material or vehicle movement situations.
                 •   Energy Conservation: AGV systems require very little energy to operate.
                 •   Ease of Installation: AGV systems can be installed in less time than most other
                     material handling systems.
                 •   Installation in Existing Buildings: AGV systems can be installed in existing buildings
                     with minimum interference to ongoing operations.
                 Review Questions:
                         1.   Name any two Conveyors.
                         2.   List any two component of Robotics.
                         3.   Name any two trucks.
                         4.   Name any two cranes.
                         5.   State any two advantages of Robots in Industry.
                         6.   Name any two components of Robots.
                         7.   List three benefits of AS/RS.
                         8.   Expand AGV.
                 2.5 JUST IN TIME
                          Just In Time (JIT) is a philosophy, wherever an organization adopts this
                 philosophy to strive for excellence in their activities. JIT is considered to be a production
                 strategy which enables to identify the non value added activities and eliminate those
                 activities. The activities include the activities starting from the design to delivery of the
                 product. JIT helps in achieving the listed objectives like.
                                  Zero defects
                                  Zero lead time
                                  Zero Breakdowns
                                  Zero Handling
                                  Zero Set uptime
                                  Zero lot excesses
                                  Zero Surging

     Anna University Chennai                               46
DBA 1651                                                                             PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

2.5.1 Problems of Conventional Production Systems:                                              NOTES
          The well known Conventional Production Systems like Continuous Production
System and the Intermittent Production System have their own limitations as you have
read in the previous sections. The continuous production system has the shortcomings
like for eg; this kind of system is not suitable for variety production. If there is a change
in the product design, this system needs to be changed as it lacks in flexibility. The
work forces are specialized work forces. But the workstations are properly balanced,
comparatively you need less work in progress inventory. The manufacturing cycle time
is comparatively low. In the case of intermittent production system, the system is more
of process based. Since, it does the variety of products. The product has to wait for
long time in the queue for the processing. This results in more in process inventory. But
this system has the advantage of producing more no of variety production. Flexibility is
in built in this system.
      Since the traditional system have these kinds of problems, so we need a system
incorporating flexibility, balanced work station with multi skilled work force, with less
waiting time of the products.
    JIT provides solution for the problems of conventional production system.
2.5.2 Conventional Vs. JIT Attitudes
Table2.1 - Conventional Vs. JIT Attitudes

  Conventional Attitudes                             JIT Attitudes
 Some defects are acceptable                Zero defects are necessary and attainable
 Large lots are efficient (more better)     Ideal lot size is one (less is better)
 Fast production is efficient               Balanced production is efficient
 Inventory provides safety                  Safety stock is a waste
 Inventory smoothes production              Inventory is undesirable
 Inventory is an asset                      Inventory is a liability
 Queues are necessary                       Queue should be eliminated
 Suppliers are adversaries                  Suppliers are partners.
 Supply sources lead to safety              Sources of supply lead to control
 Breakdown maintenance is enough            Preventive maintenance is essential
 Long lead time is better                   Short lead time is better
 Setup time is given                        Setup time should be zero
 Management is by edict                     Management is by consensus
 Work force is specialized                  Work force is multifunctional


                                             47                                      Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                   The above table illustrates the difference between Conventional System and
                 JIT system. JIT is also considered as Inventory System in addition to considering it as
                 production strategy. The reason for considering JIT as an Inventory System is that the
                 main emphases of the JIT is the product, should flow in the production system without
                 any impediments.
                         But Inventory hides much type of impediments like:-
                             Bad raw materials-
                             Machine break downs-
                             Poor quality-
                             Worn tools-
                             Delayed deliveries
                             Unavailable material handling equipment
                             Unavailable inspectors or setup persons
                         If you have Inventory, the above problem will not come to the lime light very
                 much. So JIT focus on mainly on inventory reduction to pave the way for the smooth
                 flow of product in the system.
                 2.5.3 JIT as a waste elimination tool
                          As it is mentioned, JIT emphasis on the inventory reduction. You can see in this
                 section what re-engineering by the JIT requires in the input, processing and output
                 sides of an operation system.
                                      Figure 2.3 - JIT as a waste elimination tool

                         Input                    Processing                          Output

                 - Customer order       - Group Technology                 - Customer order
                 - Accurate Forecasting - Uniform plant loading            - Accurate forecasting
                 - Reliable supplier    - Kanban type production
                                        - Control system
                                        - Quality Control
                 Raw Material inventory reduction:
                 The following situations lead the organization to invest less in Raw Material inventory.
                    • The exact proportion of the input requirement is known, provided the organi-
                         zation produces the product based on customer order.
                    • Accurate finished good forecasting enables the organization to stock less.
                    • Fewer but better suppliers.
                    • Partnership with the supplier.


     Anna University Chennai                             48
DBA 1651                                                                       PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

    •   More local suppliers to reduce lead time.                                         NOTES
    •   Frequent delivery of parts directly to the point of use.
    •   Quality at the source by preventing defects and doing it right the first time.
Work in Progress reduction:
        Work in Progress is the result of long manufacturing lead time, improper bal-
ance of the workstations. First let us analyze the constituents of manufacturing lead
time. Manufacturing lead time consists of

                     Figure 2.4 - Work in Progress reduction


                      Process time           Wait time   Move time          Queue time


                       Manufacturing lead time


Except process time, all other times are non value added times. The organization
should re-engineer first to reduce non value added times.

Setup time:

    It is the time to setting up the machine. It involves the time included

        -   in bringing the raw material and tools to the work place.
        -     in cleaning and lubricating the machines.
        -     in changing the die and jigs & fixture etc.

The relationship between setup time, setup cost and production is given below:

Setup time is Proportional to Setup cost.

Production quantity = f (Setup cost)

    So, reduction the set up time in enables the reduction in set up cost. This in turn
reduces the economic production quantity to be produced. So JIT advocates one unit,
is the economic production quantity. The setup time reduction is Possible through
adopting the following means:

        -   Method analysis
        -   Quick disconnects
        -   Tinged bolts
        -   Clamps
        -   Roller platforms
        -   Tool carouses

                                           49                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           Process time:

                       It is the actual operation time on a product. This usually contributes less than
                    10% of the total manufacturing time.

                 Wait time:

                         This is the waiting time of the product to be moved for the next operation.
                    This time is reduced provided the movement of material and the completion of
                    operation are synchronized. This time is reduced through proper material handling
                    planning.

                 Move time:

                          This is the movement time from one work station to another work station.
                    This time is lessened if the work stations are adjacent.

                 Queue time:

                           This represents major portion of the manufacturing cycle time. This is the
                    idle time of the product, waiting for the operations because the machine center
                    from which the processing sought for, engaged by another product. This time
                    depends upon the routing procedure adopted, priority rule assigned for the product.

                           If you reduce the non value added times by the way and means mentioned
                    above, the investment on, namely, the material, labor and manufacturing overhead
                    in work in progress, inventory gets reduced. This is possible by adopting the group
                    technology principle, Kanban production control, assuming machine reliability
                    through preventive maintenance.

                 Finished Good Inventory Reduction:

                         Finished good inventory is reduced if you reduce the uncertainty related with
                    the timing and the quantity of the customer requirement. The means for the uncertainty
                    reduction:
                    • Production based on the customer orders.
                    • Accurate forecasting or free from errors .
                    • Through better customer relationship, retaining the customer helps in executing
                         agreement.
                    • To fulfill the customers future requirement.
                    • Retaining the customer through better customer relationship enables the
                         organization in executing agreement to fulfill his future requirement.


     Anna University Chennai                            50
DBA 1651                                                                          PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Group Technology:                                                                               NOTES
        This is already explained in the previous unit‘s section (1.7.4 Group Technology)

2.5.4 KANBAN Production control system:

           KANBAN is a Japanese word, meaning, CARD. There are two types of
    KANBAN one is called CONVENANCE KANBAN and the other one is
    PRODUCTION KANBAN CONVENANCE KANBAN acts as a move order
    authorizing the movement of material from one center to another work center.
    PRODUCTION KANBAN acts as a work order authorizing the work center to
    start production. You can understand the working of KANBAN Production control
    systems by considering intermediary work centers n-1, n and n+1 in a manufacturing.

2.5.4.1 Working of KANBAN

1. The production centers know in advance the production schedule.
2. The operator in the production center ‘n+1’ goes with conveyance KANBAN to
    the production center ‘n’. Where a container have the parts required for the
    production center ‘n+1’. Then he removes the production KANBAN and keeps
    it in the rack of the production center ‘n’.
3. Then he keeps the conveyance KANBAN in the container and move with the
    container to his work station n+1.
4. The order in which the production KANBAN in the rack gives indication to the
    operator in the work center ‘n’ about the priority based on which the product have
    to be processed in the centre ‘n’.
5. In the production center ‘n’ based on the production schedule, when the time for
    starting his operation reaches.

    -   He goes with conveyance KANBAN to the production center ‘n-1’.
    -   Remove the production KANBAN in the container and keep it in the rack of
        center n-1 and keep the conveyance KANBAN in the container and move
        with the container to the workstation ‘n’ to start further processing on the product.
The whole sequences of activities are portrayed in the figure2.5.




                                            51                                     Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                                  Figure2.5 - Working of KANBAN




                         From the above sequence you can understand that the JIT operates in the pull
                 system basis. That is the down stream pulls the components from the upper stream for
                 the production. But, in the case of traditional production system, it operates, based on


     Anna University Chennai                            52
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

the push system. In this case, whether the down stream requires the component at the          NOTES
time or not, the upper stream simply pushes the component to down stream as and
when it completes the component that results in comparatively more work in progress
inventory.

2.5.5 Uniform Loading:

      You can understand the concept of uniform loading through an example, suppose
a product ‘x’ of 2000 quantity is required in a month. Assume that the organization
works for 20 days in a month, then 2000/20 = 100 units, the organization has to produce
in a day. Uniform loading means, the organization never produces the product excess
of 100 units in a day even though there is an idle capacity available in a day. This means
that JIT insists not on the efficiency (Utilization of resources) because if the product is
produced faster than the required, then it adds more costs to the organization through
the following:

- Containers are needed to hold them.
- Trucks are needed to move them.
- Warehouse space is needed to store them.
- Money is needed to finance the inventory.
- Accountants are needed to keep track of it.
- Schedulers are needed to indicate when to produce more.

Quality Control:

       In JIT, as par as in process inspection concerned, the worker act as a inspector
and he is responsible for the quality. As it is mentioned, the work force is a multi 1-1
skilled workforce. The worker is trained in the inspection process also, if there is any
problem regarding the quality, the whole production stops. After, the quality problem is
rectified, the production starts. In JIT, the quality improvement is done through Total
Employee Involvement (TEI), quality circles. The emphasis is more on the quality
but not on the quantity. Workers are responsible for feeding only good quality parts to
the downstream operations. The machines are kept in good working conditions so that
it produces good quality part. The worker acts as a maintenance man to get defect free
product. JIT operates on the policy of prevention better than cure.

Review Questions:

    1. What does JIT aim for?
    2. How do you achieve flexibility and less work in progress inventory?

                                            53                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES               3. What is meant by wait time?
                     4. What is meant by queue time?
                     5. What does KANBAN stand for?
                 2.6 ABC ANALYSIS (ALWAYS BETTER CONTROL)
                         Any organization usually deals with lots of items. It is very difficult to
                 exercise control over all the items. Controlling means transactions related to
                 inventory, degree of control, type of records to be maintained, lot sizes, frequency
                 of review, size of safety stock to be maintained etc.
                         ABC analysis helps to classify the thousands or even millions of individual
                 items into three groups namely items belonging to A group, B group, C group
                 items respectively. ABC analysis is done based on the Pareto’s principle.
                 Consumption value is the basis for ABC classification. Consumption value is the
                 product of unit price and consumption.
                 Mechanism of doing ABC classification:
                 Steps involved:
                 1. Collect previous year consumption and unit price for each item.
                 2. Multiply the consumption and unit price for each item to get the consumption
                    value.
                 3. Rank the items corresponding to the consumption value.
                 4. Calculate cumulative consumption value against each item.
                 5. Find the percentage of cumulative consumption value.
                          Usually to classify the items into ‘A’ class there is leverage available. The
                 leverage is 60 to 70 percentage of the consumption value. This means the cut-off
                 value can be fixed in between 60 to 70 percentage of consumption and the
                 corresponding items which contribute up to the cut-off value are classified as a
                 class items.
                       Similarly, to classify the items into B class, there is a leverage of the
                 consumption value to the extent of 10 to 20 percentage of the consumption value.
                         To classify the items into C class, there is a leverage of the consumption
                 value to the extent of 10 to 20 percentage of the consumption value.
                                                      Table 2.1
                              Class of items             Cut-off % of Consumption Value

                                    A                                60-75
                                    B                                10-20
                                    C                                 5-10

     Anna University Chennai                              54
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Illustrated Example: 2.1                                                             NOTES
   1. Bulchand & Co. company inventories 20 items. The company decides to setup
   an ABC inventory system with 10 % of A items, 20% of B items and 70% of C
   items. The company records provides the information, which is as follows:

                                   Table 2.2
      Item Code        Annual usage in units          Cost per unit (Rs)
           G                    2,500                         150
           H                   15,000                          90
           I                   12,000                         100
           J                    8,000                          50
           K                 1,00,000                          50
           L                   25,000                         300
           M                   80,000                         500
           N                    2,000                         300
           O                    3,000                          70
           P                    6,500                          60
           Q                   10,000                          75
           R                    6,000                          20
           S                   20,000                          50
           T                   40,000                          90
           U                 1,20,000                         350
           V                   20,000                         200
           W                    1,500                         350
           X                    4,000                         100
           Y                    4,500                         200
           Z                    7,000                          40



   Analyze the above items into ABC categories on the basis of the information and
   prepare a report showing your findings with comments.

                                        55                                 Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                            PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                                     Solution
 NOTES                                               Table 2.3
                 Item code Annual usage          Cost per unit    Consumption   Ranking
                             in units               (Rs.)            Value
                    G                2,500           150            3,75,000      17
                    H               15,000            90           13,50,000       7
                     I              12,000           100           12,00,000       8
                     J               8,000            50            4,00,000      14
                    K              1,00,000           50           50,00,000       4
                    L               25,000           300           75,00,000       3
                    M               80,000           500          400,00,000       2
                    N                2,000           300            6,00,000      12
                    O                3,000            70            2,10,000      19
                    P                6,500            60            3,90,000      16
                    Q               10,000            75            7,50,000      11
                    R                6,000            20            1,20,000      20
                    S               20,000            50           10,00,000       9
                    T               40,000            90           36,00,000       6
                    U              1,20,000          350          420,00,000       1
                    V               20,000           200           40,00,000       5
                    W                1,500           350            5,25,000      13
                    X                4,000           100            4,00,000      15
                    Y                4,500           200            9,00,000      10
                    Z                7,000            40            2,80,000      18


                                                     Table2.4
                 Ordered Item          Consumption Cumulative Percentage of
                 Ranking Code          Value       consumption Cumulative   Class
                                             value consumption   value
                    1          U        420,00,000   420,00,000       37.90            A
                    2          M        400,00,000   820,00,000       74.14
                    3          L         75,00,000   895,00,000       80.92            B
                    4          K         50,00,000   945,00,000       85.44

     Anna University Chennai                          56
DBA 1651                                                              PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

   5       V         40,00,000      985,00,000      89.05                       NOTES
   6       T         36,00,000   1021,00,000        92.31
   7       H         13,50,000   1034,50,000        93.53             C
   8       I         12,00,000   1046,50,000        94.62
   9       S         10,00,000   1056,50,000        95.52
 10        Y          9,00,000   1065,50,000        96.33
  11       Q          7,50,000   1073,00,000        97.01
 12        N          6,00,000   1079,00,000        97.55
 13        W          5,25,000   1084,25,000        98.03
 14        J          4,00,000   1088,25,000        98.39
 15        X          4,00,000   1092,25,000        98.75
 16        P          3,90,000   1096,15,000        99.10
 17        G          3,75.000   1099,90,000        99.44
 18        Z          2,80,000   1102,70,000        99.70
 19        O          2,10,000   1104,80,000        99.89
 20        R          1,20,000   1106,00,000         100



                                    Table2.5
Class No. of items     % of items     Consumption      Cut-off % of
                                      Value in Lac Rs. Consumption
                                                          value

  A            6            30             450              73.48

  B            7            35             120              19.59

  C            7            35          42.25                 6.9




                                      57                              Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                               Figure 2.6 - Graphical representation of ABC analysis
 NOTES

                                  92


                                  74


                     % of
                     Consumption
                     value

                                                          C
                                         A      B

                                           10        30
                                                                 % of items
                 2.6.1 Kinds of Control
                     Purpose of classifying the items into ABC is to control over each item. The degree
                 of control required for A class is not same for B and C class items. The following table
                 helps the material manager in the kind of control to be exercised on these items.
                 Advantages of ABC Analysis:
                 1. Better exercise of control over all materials.
                 2. The capital invested in inventory can be reduced to minimum levels.
                 3. Warehouse and storage costs can be reduced.
                 Limitations of ABC Analysis:
                     •   ABC analysis mainly provides a guideline for inventory management. It needs
                         to be supplemented by basic understanding and judgment as there are certain
                         items which may fall into category C or category B due to their low usage value
                         but are otherwise very critical for the production process of the firm. Their
                         inventory levels have to be carefully monitored.
                     •   The ABC analysis, to be effective, needs to be constantly undertaken and pe-
                         riodically reviewed by the management, as the number of items and value of
                         items keep on undergoing changes.
                     •   The practical problem in the usage of ABC analysis is that generally, thousands
                         of items fall in category C, as a result, a lot of time is spent on managing inventory
                         of items of this category (even if it needs simple control). The time left for
                         controlling the inventory stocks of categories A is therefore much shorter than
                         that required for their effective management.

     Anna University Chennai                               58
DBA 1651                                                                           PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

           Review Questions:                                                                                NOTES
           What is consumption value?
           2.7 INVENTORY MODELS
           Inventory:
                   Organizations spend lot of money in materials. Material cost represent 20 to
           60 percent of the cost of production, even a small saving in material will reflect in profit.
           Idle scarce material resource is called inventory. Since we invest lot of money in materials
           and if materials are idle for long time, it is not good for the health of the organization. So
           it is a must to exercise a control over Idle Scarce Resources, otherwise, lot of money
           is tied in inventory. So had you not invested this money on material, it would have
           fetched return from the other source. Therefore, an opportunity of earning the return is
           lost by investing in the inventory, you can see now how can you control the inventory.
                                       Figure 2.7 – Inventory System




                                                          Constraint
                                                          Inventory Policy
- Demand
                                                          Objective
- Inventory Costs                                         Minimize Cost
            2.7.1 Need for Inventory                        Decision
- Lead time                                                 1. How much to
                     Inventory is required for taking care of uncertainty in business, Ex: raw material
                                                               order ?
            inventory is required because of the uncertainty of supply .i.e. .supplier may not be
                                                            2. When to order?
            prompt in supplying goods or the supply may also be lesser than expected. Therefore,
            to take care of these, you need raw material inventory.
           2.7.2 Types of inventory
               1.   Raw material inventory.
               2.   Work in process inventory.
               3.   Finished goods inventory.
               4.   Supplies.
               5.   Pipeline inventory.
               6.   Buffer stock or Safety stock.
               7.   Decoupling inventory.

                                                        59                                     Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                  PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           1,2,3,4 are the basic types of Inventory whereas others are named based on their
                 usage.
                 Supplies:
                     Materials which are used other than those used for production of finished goods.
                 Ex: lubricants, pencil, pen, paper, spare parts.
                 Pipeline inventory:
                         It can be raw material, work in progress or finished goods inventory. Ex: Assume
                 supplier is far away. Consumption per day is 20 units, 5 days for transportation
                 20X5= 100 units are required for the period of transportation.
                 So if you keep 100 units in your stock it becomes your pipeline inventory.
                 Decoupling inventory
                         Inventory “decouples” in different stages. It might be raw material, WIP, finished
                 goods inventory. Ex: customer has inventory for 10 days for the consumption. For 10
                 days the customer is decoupled from the producer.
                 So, decoupling inventory is the one which decouples the customer and the producer.
                 Safety stock:
                     This stock may be raw material, WIP or finished goods which are extra stock
                 required to take care of fluctuation or uncertainties in the demand or lead time.
                 Usually in a business organization two things are uncertain namely,
                           ·   Demand
                           ·   Lead time
                         Inventory models adopted by organizations depend upon the level of uncertainty
                 with the lead time or demand. The following table portrays the type of inventory model
                 of organizations has to be adopted against the lead time and demand situations.
                 Table 2.6 – Demand and lead time in different types of model to be adopted


                  Situations Demand             Lead time       Type of Model to be adopted
                       1         Constant       Constant             Deterministic Model
                       2         Constant       Variable             Probabilistic Model
                       3         Variable       Constant             Probabilistic Model
                       4         Variable       Variable             Probabilistic Model


     Anna University Chennai                               60
DBA 1651                                                                         PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Lead time:
                                                                                            NOTES
    There are two types of leadtime
        - Supply lead time
        - Manufacturing lead time
Supply lead time:
        This time refers to the time lapse between placing of order with the supplier and
receiving it by the customer.
Manufacturing Lead time:
    The average time consumed by the product in the plant.
Supply lead time (l)

        L=T1+T2+T3+T4+T5
        T1= order genesis time and transit time (selection of supplier).
        T2= manufacturing time of the product by suppliers.
        T2= 0 If the product is readily available with the supplier.
        T3= inspection time.
        T4= transit time.
        T5=receiving time.
        If L is high, more inventory is needed to take care of high lead time.
2.7.3 Inventory cost:
        Types of inventory cost are
        -Ordering cost / setup cost.
        -Carrying cost.
        - Shortage cost / Back ordering cost.
        - Purchase cost.
       Inventory cost varies according to decisions namely.
        Ordering quantity
Ordering cost: (Co)
   It is measured per order.
   Fig: Ordering Cost behavior against the Ordinary Quantity.

Figure 2.8 – Ordering Cost Curve



                                         Component of Ordering Cost
                                         •  Tender and Bidding Cost
                                         •  Purchase negotiations
                                         •  Selection of vendor
                                         •  Preparation and sending of order
                                            etc.


                                           61                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                 Suppose we produce internally without ordering, then there is no ordering cost . It
 NOTES           becomes Setup cost.
                 Setup cost: (Co)
                 It is measured per setup.
                 Figure 2.9 – Setup cost Curve


                                                        Component of setup cost are
                                                        •  Cost of cleaning and adjusting production
                                                           equipment
                                                        •  Inspection
                                                        •  Bringing required raw materials.
                                                        •  Changing dies etc.



                          As we have seen in both cases, it varies with decision making i.e. how much to
                 order?

                 Carrying cost: (Cc)

                    It is the penalty cost which organization incurs because of carrying inventory.
                 Components of carrying cost:

                                  •   Capital Cost
                                  •   Storage Cost
                                  •   Insurance
                                  •   Obsolescence
                                  •   Deterioration
                                  •   Tax etc

                 Cc = cost of holding one unit per unit time* avg. amount of inventory held per unit time.
                 Carrying cost is measured in terms of percentage.

                 Example 2.2

                 Assume that the average inventory in a year for an item = 2000 units
                 Price of the item = Rs. 100
                 Average Investment on Inventory        = 2000X100
                                                        = Rs. 2, 00,000

     Anna University Chennai                             62
DBA 1651                                                                       PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

By having the average inventory, the organization involves the following additional Cost.   NOTES
Capital Cost (Opportunity Cost)            = 500
Storage    = 1000
Insurance                                 = 5000
Obsolescence                                = 1000
Deterioration                              = 4000
Tax                = 4000
Total              = 20,000
        Rs. 20,000 contributes 10 percent of the Average investment of Rs, 2,00,000.
So the inventory carrying cost for this organization is valued at 10 percent ( 10 percent
of Rs. 100) per unit per year.

Figure 2.10 – Carrying Cost Behavior




                                                        Carrying Cost Behavior
                                                        against the
                                                        ordering cost




Shortage Cost (Cs)
       Shortage cost is the result of the customers demand not met from the existing
    stock. Shortage costs are of two types, the one is lost sale and another is the back
    ordered. In the case of the lost sale the customers demand is not mate. But in the
    case of the back ordering the customers demand is met at delayed date.
The components of shortage cost are the –
1. cost involved in taking steps to expedite the procurement of the purchased material.
2. cost involved in rearranging the shop schedule to permit the earlier completion of
   order under consideration.
3. cost involved in working overtime and so on.
4. loss of customers goodwill because of not meeting the customer requirement (future
   profit loss).
5. present profit loss etc.


                                           63                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES               Some of the components of the shortage cost is difficult to quantify but roughly it
                     is possible to estimate the shortage cost.
                 Shortage cost = [shortage cost per unit time] * [average shortage per unit time]
                               = Cs .Is
                 Cs = shortage cost per unit time
                 Is = average shortage per unit time
                 Example2.3
                 Assume that the average shortage cost is calculated per ordering cycle
                 Figure 2.11 – Inventory level fluctuations for determining average shortage



                            Excess Inventory


                                                                     2/3t
                      0
                                                                                        Minimum
                                                      1/3t                              Shortage

                                                                                        Shortage

                    500                                                                  Maximum
                                                                                         Shortage


                   Suppose t is the ordering cycle.
                 Assume that in that ordering cycle 2/3t time the i demand is not met from the stock.
                 The average shortage in the cycle =
                 [(minimum shortage during cycle + maximum shortage during cycle)/2]X [Proportion
                 of time shortage occurs during cycle]
                 = (0+500)/2X (2/3t)/t
                 =500/3
                 Assume that shortage cost per unit time = Rs. 9
                 Shortage cost = 9X500/3
                                =1500
                 Purchase Cost (Cp)
                       Purchase cost is the cost of purchase/price of product to be produced. Cp
                 becomes the production cost if it is produced inside the organization.

     Anna University Chennai                                 64
DBA 1651                                                                         PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                  Decision                                                                                       NOTES
                      The decision regarding inventory will be mostly of how much to order?, and when
                  to order? How much to order is related with ordering the quantity but when to order is
                  related with the frequency of ordering and reorder level.
                  Relevant Cost
                      The relevant costs, namely, ordering cost, carrying cost, shortage costs are relevant
                  cost. A cost is said to be relevant cost, provided the cost varies with the decision. If the
                  ordering quantity (Q) is more that results in less shortage cost and ordering cost but the
                  inventory carrying cost will be high. The purchase price is considered to be relevant
                  only when the supplier offers discount.
                          The purchase cost becomes relevant because the decision, namely, the ordering
                  quantity varies according to the offers provided by the supplier.
                  1.7.4 Deterministic Model
                  2.7.4.1 Figure below portrays EOQ model the deterministic inventory model. This is
                  shown time vs. inventory Level.
                                             Figure 2.12 - Deterministic Model


                   D e t e r m i n s t ic m o d e l ( E O Q m o d e l )
Inventory Level




                                                                   R e o rd e r L e ve l




                                             q u a n t i ty
                                   L e a d t im e
                  Demand (D)

                          Demand rate is uniform and is known. D is the annual demand.

                  Lead time (L)

                          Lead time is known and constant.

                  Costs

                          Ordering cost, carrying cost are known. Purchase cost is irrelevant it means no
                  price discount is offered. Shortage cost is not permitted.


                                                              65                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                  PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                 Decision to be taken:
 NOTES
                         How much to order? - Ordering quantity (Q)
                         When to order?          - Reorder Level
                 To answer for the questions related with the decisions, you have to proceed as follows:
                         •     Any organization, it has to minimize the total inventory cost.
                         •     Total annual inventory cost = ordering cost +carrying cost+ purchase cost
                               +short age cost
                         •     With regard to this model, the shortage cost is not permitted.
                         •     Total annual inventory cost = ordering cost + carrying cost + purchase
                               cost
                 Since you should find the ordering quantity and re-order level, next you should consider
                 relevant cost.
                 (i.e.) total annual relevant cost = ordering cost + carrying cost
                 = (no. of orders) (ordering cost per order)
                 + (average inventory) (Carrying Cost)
                 D/Q=No. of Orders
                 Average inventory according to the figure = (min. inventory+ max. inventory)/2
                 = (0+Q)/2
                 = Q/2
                 Total annual relevant inventory cost = (D/Q)×Co+ (Q/2)×Cc
                 Since you have to establish ‘Q’
                 Differentiating w.r.t. Q and equate it to zero.
                 = - (D/Q)×Co+ Cc/2=0s



                 Or




                 Or      = 2DCo/Cc

                 Or Q=?[2DCo/Cc] Answer to the question how much to order


     Anna University Chennai                              66
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Total annual relevant inventory cost
                                                                                         NOTES
= (D/Q)Co+(Q/2)Cc
Substituting q=?[2DCo/Cc]
=(D/?[DCoCc/Cc])Co + (?[DCoCc/Cc]/2)Cc
=
=(?[DCoCc])/?2+?[DCoCc]/?2
=(2/?2) ?[DCcCO]
=?[2DCoCc]
Total annual inventory cost

= Total annual ordering cost + Total annual carrying cost + Total annual purchase cost

          D      Q
    TC=     Co +   CC + D.C
          Q      2

= Purchase cost + total annual relevant inventory cost
= DCp+ ?[2DCoCp]
Graphically also you can approximate, find out EOQ as follows.
                     Figure 2.13 – Economic Order Quantity




Example 2.4

The demand for a certain item is 4800 unit per year. Each unit cost Rs.100.
Inventory cost charges are estimated at 15%. No shortage cost is allowed. The order-
ing cost Rs. 400 per order. Lead time is one day. Assume 250 working days.
Find the following:

1. EOQ
2. Time between the orders.

                                         67                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           3.   Number of orders required each year.
                 4.   Minimum relevant Inventory cost.
                 5.   Minimum total inventory cost.
                 6.   Reorder Level.
                 7.   Plot a graph for inventory level fluctuation with time.

                 Solution
                 (i) EOQ=v (2DCo/Cc)
                      =v (2×48000×400)/ (.15×100)
                      Cc=(15/100) ×100 =1600
                 (ii) To determine reorder level
                      = L× (D/12)
                      =2×(48000/12250)=192 units

                 (iii) Time between orders
                       Q/t =D
                        t =Q/D
                                             Figure 2.14 – Inventory Level




                 =1600/48000
                 =.033 years
                 =.033 ×250
                 =8.33 days

                 (iv) Number of orders
                     =D/Q
                     =48000/1600
                      =30 orders

                 (v) Total minimum relevant cost
                      Inventory cost=v2DcoCc
                       =v2×48000×400× .15× 100
                       =Rs. 24,000

                 (vi) Total minimum inventory cost
                       = DCp+v(2CoCc)
                       =48000×100+24000
                       =4824000 Rs.

     Anna University Chennai                              68
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                      Figure 2.15 – Inventory level vs. Time
                                                                                              NOTES




Above problem is solved scientifically, but this problem can be also be solved graphically.

                                        Table 2.2




                                            69                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                   Figure 2.16 – Graphical Calculation of EOQ
 NOTES




                 2.7.4.2 Economic Batch Quantity Model:
                 1. Demand:
                 -It is known and constant.
                 -It is nothing but the annual production requirement.
                 2. Production rate:
                 -It is known and is estimated based on the capacity of the plant.
                 3. Lead time:
                   It is known and constant.
                 4. Cost:
                 Setup/ordering cost: Since there is no purchase there is no ordering cost. Only setup
                 cost comes into picture in the place of ordering cost .this is known.
                 Carrying cost: It is known and constant.
                 Product cost: assume that product cost per unit does not vary with the production i.e.
                 unit is irrelevant of the quantity of production.

                 Decision

                 How much to produce?
                 When to produce?

                 The inventory model for this case will be as shown in the figure2.16.




     Anna University Chennai                            70
DBA 1651                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

           Figure 2.17 – Inventory Model (Economic Batch Quantity)
                                                                                           NOTES




 tp - It is the production period.
t - It is the time interval between the two productions.

From the fig. it is concluded that up to the period, both production and consumption
take place and inventory is built up at the rate of (p-d). Where ‘d’ is the demand rate.

Once the tp period is reached there is no production, there is only consumption at the
rate of ‘d”. Next production starts after ‘tth’ period.

To find the quantity of production ‘Q’, production time period tp and time interval
between production ‘t’. The following procedure is carried out.
Total inventory cost= setup cost+ carrying cost + production cost + shortage cost.
Total relevant inventory cost= setup cost + carrying cost.
Shortage and production costs are zero because no shortage is allowed and the pro-
duction cost becomes an irrelevant cost.

From the fig. the average inventory is calculated as follows:

Avg.inventory = (Imax +Imin)/2.
              = (Imax+0)/2
               = Imax/2.

                                          71                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                  PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           To find Imax , from the fig.
                         Imax/tp = (p-d).
                    So, Imax=(p-d)tp.

                 To find tp,
                          tp×p=Q
                             tp=Q/p
                         Imax = (p-d) Q/p
                         Imax = (1-d/p) Q.
                 Total relevant inventory cost =setup cost + carrying cost
                                  Setup cost   = (number of setup ) × setup cost per setup
                                               = (D/Q) Co
                                 Carrying cost = (Average inventory)× carrying cost per unit
                                               = [(Imax+Imin)/2 ]×Cc
                                               =(1-d/p)×(Q/2) Cc

                 Total relevant inventory cost = (D/Q)Co+(1-d/p)(Q/2)Cc
                 For cost minimization, differentiate w.r.t. Q and equate it to zero.

                                 DC0/Q2=(1-d/p)Cc

                                 Q=?[2DCo/Cc(1-d/p)
                 Total annual relevant inventory cost = D/v [2DCo/ (1-d/p) Cc] +
                                                         v [2DCO/ (1-d/p] Cc)/2

                                                   =v [DCoCc(1-d/p)/v2 + v[DCoCc(1-d/p)]/v2
                                                  = (2/v2) v[DCoCc(1-d/p)]
                                                  =v[2DCoCc(1-d/p)]
                 Total annual inventory cost      =v2DCcCo(1-d/p)+CpD

                 Deducing EOQ from EBQ model

                          It is known that in case of EOQ model, the production rate is infinity i.e. there
                 is an instantaneous replenishment.
                 Now
                     EBQ=v [(2DCo)/(1-d/p)Cc]
                     So when p = 8
                     EBQ=EOQ


     Anna University Chennai                             72
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Example 2. 5                                                                              NOTES
      ABC Power Company has planned to cover the demand for electricity using
coal. Annual demand for the coal input is estimated to be 8lakh tones. It is used uni-
formly throughout the year. Coal can be strip mined at the rate of 5000 tonnes per day.
The setup cost for mining is 200 rupees per run. The inventory holding cost is 5 rupees
per tone per day. The total numbers of working days are given as 250. Determine.

1.    EBQ.
2.    Duration of mining run.
3.    Time between runs.
4.    Minimum relevant inventory cost.
5.    Plot graph showing whole inventory fluctuation Vs time.

Solution:

     To find EBQ,
         EBQ = v[2DCo/Cc(1-d/p)]
     Where
            D = 8.00,000 tones per year
            D = 8, 00,000/250
              = 3200 tones per day
            p = 5000 tones/day
           Co = Rs2000 /run
           Ch = Rs 5 /tones/day

     (i) EBQ = v[(2×8,00,000×2500)/(5×(1-3200/5000))]

     (ii)Duration of each mining run Q/p = tp
         tp = 42164/5000
             = 8.43
             = 8.5 days (approx)

     (iii) Time between runs
            Q=t*d
             T = Q/d
               = 42164/3200
              = 13.17 days.

      (iv) Minimum relevant inventory cost = v [2DCoCc (1-d/p)
                                    = v [2×8,00,000×2500×5×(1-3200/5000)]
                                   = Rs. 84853

                                           73                                Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                          Figure 2.18 – Graphical representation of above the example
 NOTES




                 2.7.4.3 Quantity Discount Model

                     As it is mentioned already, the purchase cost becomes relevant with respect to
                 the quantity of order only when the supplier offers discounts.

                      Discounts means if the ordering quantity exceeds particular limit supplier offers
                 the quantity at lesser price per unit.

                      This is possible because the supplier produces more quantity. He could achieve
                 the economy of scale, the benefit achieved through the economy of scale, he wants to
                 pass it onto the customer. This results in lesser price per unit if the customer orders
                 more quantity.

                     If you look at in terms of the customer’s perspective, the customer should also
                 see that whether it is advisable to avail the discount offered. This is done through a
                 trade off between his carrying inventory by the result of acquiring more quantity and the
                 benefit achieved through purchase price.




     Anna University Chennai                              74
DBA 1651                                                                     PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Figure 2.19 – Quantity Discount Model
                                                                                         NOTES




Solution:

Start with the lowest price i.e. Rs 9 and to find whether Q is more than or equals to
5000.


    EOQ= v(2DCo/ Cc)
            = v(2×25000×60)/ 2.7)
            = 1054.06 approx. 1055 units
This is not a feasible solution because we expected that Q will be more than or equals
to 5000 but the EOQ came as 1055.
By taking the next least value i.e. Rs 11 and to find whether Q is more than 1000 and
less than 5000.
    EOQ=v (2×25000×60)/ 3.3)
         =956 units


This is also not a feasible solution because we expected Q will be more than 1000 and
less than 5000 but the EOQ came as 956.
By taking the next least value i.e. Rs 12 and to find whether Q is equals to 1000.



                                           75                                Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES               EOQ=v (2×25000×60)/ 3.6)
                           =912.87 approx. is 913units
                 This is a feasible solution

                 The total cost of inventory at EOQ is
                 TC=v (2×D×Cc×Co) + D×P
                    = v (2×25000×60×3.6) + (25000×12)
                    = Rs 303286.33
                 Total inventory cost at other ordering quantities are -
                 Total inventory cost for Q equals to 5000

                 TC= (D/Q) ×Co + (Q/2) ×Cc + D×P
                    = (25000/5000) 60 + (5000/2) 2.7 + (25000*9)
                    = 232000
                 Total inventory cost for Q between = 1000 and 5000

                 TC= (D/Q)*Co + (Q/2)*Cc + D*P
                    = (25000/1000) 60 + (1000/2) 3.3 + (25000*11)
                    = 278150.
                 The possible savings is equal to total inventory cost at feasible EOQ, total inventory
                 cost at 5000 units.

                 The possible savings are = 303286-232000
                                             = 71,286
                 A ordinary quantity 5000, the total annual inventory cost is 2, 32,000

                 2.7.5 Probabilistic Models

                      In the previous section, it is assumed that the lead time and demand are constant.
                 But in real life situations it is not so. The demand is always uncertain because it is
                 difficult to exactly estimate the required quantity by the customer and the supplier is
                 also usually not reliable. In the sense, he doesn’t supply in the specified time period.
                 Considering this kind of situation, the decision should be taken regarding the quantity of
                 ordering, time at which the order to be placed, the time between the orders and how
                 much inventory to be kept against the uncertainty of demand and the lead time become
                 cumbersome.
                    To deal with the above scenarios, the inventory model to be adopted is known as
                 Probabilistic Inventory Model.


     Anna University Chennai                             76
DBA 1651                                                                       PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

     The inventory models called probabilistic inventory model because the demand           NOTES
or lead time or both are random variables. The probability distribution of demand and
lead time should be estimated..

    The inventory models answers for questions related to the decision raised above
are called Probabilistic Inventory Model.

2.7.5.1 One such model is Fixed Order Quantity Model (FOQ).

In this model,

    1. The demand (D) is uncertain, you can estimate the demand through any one of
       the forecasting techniques and the probability of demand distribution is known.

    2. Lead time (L) is uncertain, probability of lead time distribution is known.

    3. Cost(C) all the costs are known.

           -Carrying costs Cc

           -Ordering costs Co

Stock out Cost

     It is difficult to calculate stock out cost because it consists of components diffi-
cult to quantify so indirect way of handling stock out cost is through service levels.
Service levels means ability of organization to meet the requirements of the customer as
on when he demands for the product. It is measured in terms of percentage.

For example: if an organization maintains 90% service level, this means that 10% is
“stock out” level. This way the stock out level is addressed.

Safety stock

      It is the extra stock or buffer stock or minimum stock. This is kept to take care
of fluctuations in demand and lead time.

     If you maintain more safety stock, this helps in reducing the chances of being
“stock out”. But at the same time it increases the inventory carrying cost. Suppose the
organization maintains less service level that results in more stock out cost but less
inventory carrying cost. It requires a tradeoff between inventory carrying cost and stock
out cost. This is explained through the following figure2.19




                                           77                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                 Figure 2.20 – Safety Stock
 NOTES




                 Safety stock (S.S*) is to be stocked by the organization.

                 Working of fixed order quantity model

                      Fixed order quantity system is also known as continuous review system or
                 perpetual inventory system or Q system. In this system, the ordering quantity is con-
                 stant. Time interval between the orders is the variable.

                    The system is said to be defined only when if the ordering quantity and time inter-
                 val between the orders are specified. EOQ provides answer for ordering quantity.
                 Reorder level provides answers for time between orders. The working and the fixed
                 order quantity model is shown in the figure2.20 (next page).




     Anna University Chennai                             78
DBA 1651                                              PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


           Figure 2.21 – Fixed Order Quantity Model             NOTES




                             79                       Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                      Application of fixed order quantity system
 NOTES
                    1. It requires continuous monitoring of stock to know when the reorder point is
                       reached.
                    2. This system could be recommended to” A” class because they are high
                       consumption items. So we need to have fewer inventories. This system helps in
                       keeping less inventory comparing to other inventory systems.
                 Advantages
                    1. Since the ordering quantity is EOQ, comparatively it is meaningful. You need to
                       have less safety stock. This model relatively insensitive to the forecast and the
                       parameter changes.
                    2. Fast moving items get more attention because of more usage.
                                                         Weakness
                    1. We can’t club the order for items which are to be procured from one supplier
                       to reduce the ordering cost.
                    2. There is more chance for high ordering cost and high transaction cost for the
                       items, which follow different reorder level.
                    3. You can not avail supplier discount. While the reorder level fall in different time
                       periods.
                 Illustrative Example 2.7
                    1. ABC company requires components at annual usage rate of 1200 units. The
                       cost of placing an order is Rs 100 and has a five day lead time. Inventory
                       holding cost is estimated as Rs 30 per unit per year. The plant operates 250
                       days per year. The daily demand is normally distributed with a standard deviation
                       of 1.2 units. It has been decided at to use fixed quantity inventory system based
                       on a 95% service level. Specify the following
                      1. Ordering quantity
                      2. Re order level
                 Solution:
                 Given data
                 Demand 1200 units
                 Ordering Cost Rs 100
                 Carrying cost Rs 30 per unit per year
                 Lead Time 5 days
                 Operating days 250 per year.
                 Standard deviation of demand
                 per day is 1.2 units.


     Anna University Chennai                             80
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

To determine the ordering quantity
EOQ = v(2DCo/ Cc)
                                                                                              NOTES
      = v2×1200×100/30
      = 89.4 approx. = 90 units
To determine the reorder level
Reorder level = average demand during lead time +safety stock.
Safety stock calculations:
         To find out the safety stock as it is mentioned already that you need to use the
service level. As per this problem it is given 95% service level that means 5% stock out
level. We need to have safety stock level against this 5% stock level. It is also given in
the problem that consumption of items follows normal distribution.
The mean lead time demand distribution is = (1200/250) ×5=24 units = XL
The mean of the distribution is (1200/250) ×5
                                   = 24 units
Variance of the distribution, since per day standard deviation is given. First it is to be
converted into variance by taking the square
(1.2)*(1.2)= 1.44 units
From the per day variance, the five days variance determined as follows because leadtime
equal to 5 days.
If V is the variance of one day then the five day variance is
V+V+V+V+V=5*V
Standard deviation = ?(5V) = ?5?v=?5ó
For 5 days            = ?(5 ó
ó = standard deviation per day
In common, to convert the per unit standard deviation into lead time standard deviation,
Based on above calculation it could be deduced that
óL=vL × ó
Where        is the standard deviation of demand during lead time.
? is the standard deviation of demand per unit time
Since the demand during lead time follows the normal distribution.

It is given that 95% service level and 5%stock out level.
For 5% stock out level, the safety level is estimated as follows:
From the distribution you can calculate the safety stock using the formula

K×

K is the safety factor for 5% stock out level; the K value is calculated using the standard
distribution table.


                                           81                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                 To calculate K at 5% stock out level
 NOTES

                 K=1.65 from the table
                 Safety stock= K ×

                 = 1.65*2.68
                 = 4.42
                 To find the re order level
                 = 24+4.42
                 = 28.42 units


                               Figure 2.22 – Graphical Presentation of Example 2.7




                 Review Questions:

                     1.   Define Inventory
                     2.   What is pipe line inventory?
                     3.   Give formulae for EOQ?
                     4.   Give formulae for EBQ
                     5.   When purchase cost become relevant?
                     6.   In which situations one has to adopt probabilistic model?



     Anna University Chennai                            82
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

2.8 MATERIAL REQUIREMENT PLANNING
                                                                                              NOTES
2.8.1 Introduction
Material Requirements Planning (MRP) is a computer-based production planning
and inventory control system. MRP is concerned with both production scheduling and
inventory control. It is a material control system that attempts to keep adequate inventory
levels to assure that required materials are available when needed. MRP is applicable in
situations of multiple items with complex bills of materials.
The major objectives of an MRP system are to simultaneously:-
   1. ensure the availability of materials, components and products for planned
       production and for customer delivery,
   2. Maintain the lowest possible level of inventory,
   3. Plan manufacturing activities, delivery schedules and purchasing activities.
        MRP is especially suited to the manufacturing settings where the demand of
many of the components and subassemblies depend on the demands of items that face
external demands. Demand for end items is independent. In contrast, the demand for
components used to manufacture end items depend the on the demands for the end
items. This is known as Derived Demand. The distinctions between the independent
and derived demands are important in classifying the inventory items and in developing
systems to manage items within each demand classification. MRP systems were
developed to cope better with derived demand items.

2.8.2 Overview of MRP system

The following figure shows the general overview of an MRP system.
Figure 2.23 – MRP system

    MRP Inputs              MRP Processing                       MRP Outputs

                                                                   Changes
                                                              Order releases
    Master
    Schedule                                                Planned-order
                                                            Schedules
                                             Primary
                                             Reports
                                                                        Exception
      Bill of                   Material                              Planning reports
     Materials                Requirements        Secondary
                                                  Reports           Performance-
                                Planning
                                                                    Control
                                                                    Reports


     Inventory
      Records                                                    Inventory
                                                                 Transaction



                                            83                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                               PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           2.8.3 Inputs to MRP system

                 There are three major inputs for an MRP system. They are
                 1.      Master production schedule,
                 2.      Bill of Material
                 3.      Inventory status records

                 Without these basic inputs the MRP system cannot function.

                 1. Master production schedule

                         The demand for end items is scheduled over a number of time periods and
                 recorded on a master production schedule (MPS). The master production schedule
                 expresses how much of each item is wanted and when it is wanted. The MPS is devel-
                 oped from forecasts and firm, the customer orders for end items, safety stock require-
                 ments and internal orders. MRP takes the master schedule for end items and translates
                 it into individual time-phased component requirements.


                 Overview of the Master Production Schedule


                 Figure 2.24 - Overview of Master Production Schedule




                         Forecasted
                          Demand


                                                       Capacity                        Master
                                                       Planning                      Production
                                                                                      Schedule

                      Customer Order
                      (Delivery Time)




     Anna University Chennai                           84
DBA 1651                                                                       PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Master Production Schedule- Example                                                          NOTES
Table 2.7




2. Bill of Materials
            A bill of materials (BOM) file gives the complete product descriptions and
    documents quantities of each component, part, ingredient, or raw material needed
    to make that product or sub-assembly. It is also called as the product structure tree.
    A sample product structure tree is shown below.
            For producing 1 unit of product A, 4 units of B and 2 units of C are re-
    quired. For producing 1 unit of product B, 2 units of D and 1 unit of E are required.
    For producing 1 unit of product C, 3 units of D and 2 units of F are required
    Product Structure Tree.
Figure 2.25 - Product Structure Tree


                                        A



                       B                               C
                      (4)                              (2


              D                  E           D                  F
             (2)                (1)          (3                 (2



                                            85                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                  PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           Explosion
                         If 20 nos. of product A is required then we require 80 nos. of B, 40 nos. of C,
                 280 nos. of D, 80 nos. of E and 80 nos. of F. This process of finding out the require-
                 ment of sub components based on the requirement of final product is known as Explo-
                 sion.
                 3. Inventory status records
                 The following inventory status records goes as input to the MRP system
                 1. Item
                 2. Supplier
                 3. Lot size
                 4. Safety stock
                 5. Lead time
                 6. On hand inventory
                 7. Allotted

                 8. Level
                 i) Item: Name or number for the item being scheduled.
                 ii) Supplier: Name or number for the of the supplier for the scheduled item.
                 iii) Lot size: Several lot sizing techniques are available. Few of them are listed below.
                 a) Lot-For-Lot (LFL) ordering.
                 The lot-for-lot (LFL) is the simplest approach and it calls for producing in period t the
                 net requirements for period t. The LFL approach minimizes the holding cost by pro-
                 ducing just-in-time.
                 b) Economic Ordering Quantity (EOQ):
                 EOQ is a fixed quantity which is ordered whenever the inventory level reaches prede-
                 termined level.

                                      2 ×D × Cs
                           Q=         Cc (1- d/p)

                 Where,
                 Q – Economic ordering quantity
                 D – Annual demand
                 Co – Ordering Cost (Rs. /Order)

     Anna University Chennai                             86
DBA 1651                                                                       PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Cc – Holding cost (Rs./Unit/Unit time)                                                      NOTES
    Economic Production Quantity (EPQ)
    EOQ is a fixed quantity which is produced whenever the inventory level reaches a
    predetermined level.

            2 ×D × Cs
Q=
             Cc (1- d/p)

Where,
Q – Economic Production quantity
D – Annual demand
Cs – Setup Cost (Rs. /Setup)
Cc – Holding cost (Rs./Unit/Unit time)
d – Demand rate
p – Production rate
         There are also other algorithms available for lot sizing like Wagner-Whitin (WW)
algorithm, Silver-Meal (SM) heuristic, part period balancing (PPB) heuristic etc. The
lot sizing technique which incurs the lowest cost is chosen.
      1.    Safety Stock: It is the additional stock carried in order to protect against
            any uncertainty in demand.
      2.    Lead time: It is the time gap between placing an order and receiving the
            order.
      3.    On hand inventory: It is the actual quantity on hand during scheduling
            period.
      4.    Allotted: It the quantity of inventory allocated to other orders from the on
            hand inventory.
      5.    Level: It indicates the level occupied by the particular product/component
            in the product structure file.

                  Figure 2.26 – Levels in the product structure file




                                           87                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                    If a component comes in more than one level then it should be assigned the
                 lowest level code. For example, in the above figure R comes in both level 2 and level
                 3. But it should be assigned level code 3 as it is the lowest level.
                 MRP Process

                         The process of scheduling the Production of all items is done using an MRP
                 Matrix. The MRP matrix is as shown below.
                 MRP Matrix
                 Table 2.8 – MRP matrix

                     Item:                Low-Level Code:     PD        1       2     3     4     5
                     Lot Size:                 Lead Time:
                     Gross Requirements

                     Scheduled Receipts

                     Projected on Hand

                     Net Requirements

                     Planned Order Receipts

                     Planned Order Releases



                 Gross Requirements is the anticipated usage of demand for each period.
                 Scheduled Receipts is the existing replenishment orders at the beginning of period.
                 Projected on Hand is the projected inventory status at the end of period after taking
                 into account the inventory to be provided for safety stock and already allotted for other
                 orders.
                 Net Requirements is the actual number of items to be provided and when it is to be
                 provided. This is calculated taking into account scheduled receipts and projected on
                 hand inventory.
                 Planned Order Receipts shows when actually net requirements are expected to be
                 received.
                 Planned Order Releases shows when the order has to be released if the order has to be
                 received as per planned order receipt.



     Anna University Chennai                             88
DBA 1651                                                                           PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Process Flow                                                                                     NOTES
    Calculate the exact requirements for each item managed by the MRP system by
the explosion process explained previously, and proceed as follows:
    1. Retrieve level 0 item requirements (gross requirements) from the master schedule.
    2. Use projected on-hand balances and schedule receipts to calculate net
       requirements. This process is called Netting.
    3. Calculate when orders should be received to meet net requirements, developing
       planned-order receipts schedule.
    4. Planned-order release schedule is calculated by offsetting the planned-order
       receipts by the items’ lead times.
    5. Repeat steps 1-4 for level 1 items.

    6. Repeat steps 1-4 for all items in each subsequent level of the bill of materials.

MRP Output

   The primary outputs of MRP are the following:
        1. Recommendations of planned order releases.
        2. Rescheduling notices changing open-order due dates.
        3. Notices to cancel or suspend open orders.
        4. Item-status-analysis backup data.
        5. Future planned order schedules.
         A variety of secondary or byproduct outputs can be generated by MRP at the
user’s option. It is not practical to list and describe all possible outputs and formats
generated by MRP found in industry; MRP lends itself to tailoring, individualization, and
infinite modification of outputs. MRP files (database), particularly inventory status records,
contain a wealth of data, providing almost unlimited opportunities for the supplying of
these data to a whole spectrum of possible outputs. Here are some of the common
secondary outputs:
        1. Exception notices, reporting errors, incongruities, and out-of-limits situations.
        2. Inventory-level projections (inventory forecasts).
        3. Purchase commitment reports.
        4. Tracers to demand sources (pegged requirements reports).
        5. Performance reports for people and functional groups.
Six categories of outputs by functional use are:

        1. Inventory order action.
        2. Replanning order priority.

                                             89                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                  PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                   3.   Safeguarding priority integrity.
                         4.   Capacity requirements planning.
                         5.   Performance control.
                         6.   Reporting errors, incongruities, and out-of-limits situations.
                         Inventory order action outputs occur when planned orders appear in current
                 time-buckets. Other types of order action are increases, reductions, or cancellations of
                 order quantities.
                      Re-planning order priority outputs alert inventory planners to cases of diver-
                 gence between open-order due dates and dates of actual need, resulting from changed
                 timing of net requirements.
                       Outputs to help Safeguard priority integrity aims at keeping order priorities
                 honest, revealing inventory status problems caused by overstated MPS. Some compa-
                 nies use these reports to provide guidance for planners when accepting customer or-
                 ders for guaranteed delivery. A “trialfit” of the order as an MPS item enables a net
                 change MRP program to determine potential component shortages. If the order does
                 not fit (too many shortages), the planner can recommend an alternative delivery date.

                         Capacity requirements planning outputs of MRP are open and planned shop
                 orders in individual time periods, which are input into the load projection program. To
                 keep load projections up-to-date and valid, they must be recomputed as MRP order
                 schedules change.

                         Performance control outputs are comparisons of MRP plans with actual
                 performance, enabling management to monitor the performance of inventory planners,
                 buyers, the shop, suppliers, and cost accounting.

                        Outputs reporting errors, incongruities, and out-of-limits situations are called
                 exception or action reports. Some examples:

                 1.      Date of gross requirement is beyond the planning horizon.
                 2.      Number of digits of quantity in gross requirement exceeds size of the field.
                 3.      Planned order is offset into a past period but placed in current period.
                 4.      Number of digits of quantity of open order exceeds size of the field.
                 5.      Number of digits of quantity of net requirements exceeds size of the field.
                 6.      Number of digits of quantity of receipt overflows size of quantity-on hand
                         field.
                 7.      Due date of open order is outside of planning horizon.
                 8.      Allocated on-hand quantity exceeds current quantity on hand (potential
                         shortage).
                 9.      Past-due gross requirement has been included in the current period.



     Anna University Chennai                              90
DBA 1651                                                                          PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

       In addition to such exception reports, individual exception messages can be          NOTES
generated at the time inventory transaction are entered, listing reasons for transaction
rejections. Some typical messages are
1.           Part number is nonexistent.
2.           Transaction code is nonexistent.
3.           Part number is incorrect (using self checking digits).
4.           Actual receipt exceeds quantity of scheduled receipt by x percent (test of
             reasonableness).
5.           Quantity of reported scrap exceeds quantity on hand.
6.           Quantity of disbursement exceeds quantity on hand.
7.           Order being released exceeds planned quantity.
Sample MRP Problem:
         Orders have been received for 20 units of product A and 50 units of product R
with the product structures shown below for period 8. The on hand stock levels are
A=1, R=4, B=74, C=19, D=190 and E=160. What is the low level code for each
item? If the components are ordered as required (no fixed lot sizes), what should be the
size of each order? When should the orders be released for each item?
Figure 2.27

                                A
                               LT=3                                        R
                                                                          LT=4

               B (2)           C (3)       E (4)                          B (4)
               LT=2            LT=3        LT=1                           LT=2



     D (2)             E (3)                                      D (2)            E (3)
     LT=1              LT=1                                       LT=1             LT=1
                                         Solution
                                         Table2.8

                               Item    Low Level Code
                                 A           0
                                R                  0
                                B                  1
                                C                  1
                                D                  2
                                E                  2




                                            91                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           Figure 2.28
                                                  A                                                    R                  Level 0
                                                 LT=3                                                 LT=4

                                                                                                      B (4)               Level 1
                             B (2)               C (3)       E (4)                                    LT=2
                             LT=2                LT=3        LT=1

                                                                                              D (2)           E (3)       Level 2
                   D (2)                 E (3)                                                LT=1            LT=1
                   LT=1                  LT=1
                                                                     Table 2.9
                 Item Lot    Lead Safety Allotted Level                Period
                      Sizing time Stock                                               PD 1        2   3   4   5       6   7    8
                                                                     Gross
                                                                     Requirements                                             20
                                                                     Scheduled
                                                                     Receipts
                  A    Lot           3      —            —   0       Projected
                       for Lot                                       on Hand          1       1   1   1   1   1       1   1    1
                                                                     Net Require-
                                                                     ments                                                    19
                                                                     Planned Order
                                                                     Receipt                                                  19
                                                                     Planned Order
                                                                     Release                                  91


                                                                 Table 2.10


                  Item Lot    Lead Safety Allotted Level                   Period
                       Sizing time Stock                                                  PD 1        2   3   4       5   6    7    8
                                                                       Gross
                                                                       Requirements                                            50
                                                                       Scheduled
                                                                       Receipts
                  R        Lot       4       —           —   0         Projected
                           for Lot                                     on Hand            4       4   4   4   4       4   4    4    4
                                                                       Net Require-
                                                                       ments                                                        46
                                                                       Planned Order
                                                                       Receipt                                                      46
                                                                       Planned Order
                                                                       Release                                46




     Anna University Chennai                                          92
DBA 1651                                                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                                   Table 2.11                                                             NOTES
Item Lot    Lead Safety Allotted Level Period
     Sizing time Stock                                               PD    1    2   3    4       5    6   7       8
                                                   Gross
                                                   Requirements                          184 38
                                                   Scheduled
                                                   Receipts
 B   Lot        2       —       —          1       Projected
     for Lot                                       on Hand           74 74 74 74 74              0
                                                   Net Require-
                                                   ments                                 110 38
                                                   Planned Order
                                                   Receipt                               110 38
                                                   Planned Order
                                                   Release                     110 38




                                                   Table 2.12

Item Lot    Lead Safety Allotted Level Period
     Sizing time Stock                                               PD    1    2   3    4       5    6   7       8
                                                   Gross
                                                   Requirements                                  57
                                                   Scheduled
                                                   Receipts
C    Lot        3       —       —          1       Projected
     for Lot                                       on Hand           19 19 19 19 19 19
                                                   Net Require-
                                                   ments                                         38
                                                   Planned Order
                                                   Receipt                                       38
                                                   Planned Order
                                                   Release                     38



                                                   Table 2.13

 Item Lot       Lead Safety     Allotted   Level      Period
      Sizing    time Stock                                                PD 1      2     3 4         5       6   7   8
                                                      Gross
                                                      Requirements                  220 76
                                                      Scheduled
                                                      Receipts
 D    Lot           1       —     —            2      Projected
      for Lot                                         on Hand         190 190 190            0
                                                      Net Require-
                                                      ments                         30    76
                                                      Planned Order
                                                      Receipt                       30    76
                                                      Planned Order
                                                      Release                       30    76




                                                       93                                                     Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                          PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                                                     Table 2.14
                          Item Lot    Lead Safety Allotted Level Period
                               Sizing time Stock                                  PD     1    2   3     4    5   6   7   8
                                                                  Gross
                                                                  Requirements               330 114        76
                                                                  Scheduled
                                                                  Receipts
                          E    Lot       1   —      —       2     Projected
                               for Lot                            on Hand         160 160 160 0         0    0
                                                                  Net Require-
                                                                  ments                      170 114        76
                                                                  Planned Order
                                                                  Receipt                    170 114        76
                                                                  Planned Order
                                                                  Release              170 114         76


                 Review Questions:

                 1.           List input of MRP system.
                 2.           List two MRP outputs.
                 2.9 MANUFACTURING RESOURCE PLANNING (MRP II)
                 2.9.1 Introduction
                         Till the early sixties, reorder point (ROP) systems was used by many
                 manufacturing organizations. In this system the component stocks were reordered
                 whenever stock fell to a pre-defined reorder level. Components were often ordered
                 when not actually needed, and because of which ROP systems resulted in very high
                 inventory levels.
                          In the sixties, customers became demanding, competition became tougher and
                 the interest rates began to increase. This made organizations to realize the necessity to
                 develop a much better response to the customer needs. At the same time the increase
                 in interest rates made money tied up in inventory into a serious financial burden for
                 manufacturing organizations.
                         In this period, computers were brought into planning and production systems.
                 As a result, several new manufacturing systems were developed. They were.
                      •       Material requirements planning systems.
                      •       Heavily reliant on computers and most frequently applied to batch or mass
                              production. Comprising of:
                      •       Material requirements planning (MRP or MRP I).
                      •       Closed loop material requirements planning (Closed Loop MRP).
                      •       Manufacturing resource planning (MRP II).

     Anna University Chennai                                 94
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

   •    Just-in-time (JIT).                                                                  NOTES
   •    Optimized Production Technology / Theory of Constraints (OPT/TOC)
   •    Project control
   •    Evolution of Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP II)

    Figure 2.29- Evolution of Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP II)


        Materials                    Closed loop                Manufacturing
       Requirement                      MRP                      Resource
        Planning                                                  Planning


2.9.3 Closed Loop MRP System
         In an open loop MRP system the plans are sent to buyers and production
personnel but it is not possible to get feedback. As a result of which the adjustments
could not be made to plans in order to keep schedules valid. For example, it assumed
that infinite capacity was available, and that suppliers always delivered correctly and on
time. And when there is a change in sales demand it will take excessive amount of re-
planning.
         Also, much of the demands from other sources are left out of the system and
shortages become inevitable. Material requirements planning generates valid schedule
that follow logically from the demand. But after planned orders are launched, some of
the planning factors may begin to stray off course. Some of the examples that cause
problem because of using MRP systems are shown below:
        Lead time estimates differ if: machine breaks down, deliveries are delayed,
        goods are damaged, power fails etc.
        If the system plans for 1000 of a component but 200 fail a quality inspection,
        this shows that the orders are arrived on time but there will be a shortage of
        material.
        The demand that drives material requirements planning consists of both forecast
        orders and actual customer orders. The forecasts may turn out to be wrong
        and customers may change their actual orders, for example, by asking for earlier
        or later delivery. This throws out all component orders.

          In summary, ‘open loop’ material requirements planning could result in some
or all of these problems:
            •     Uncontrollable costs.
            •     Late deliveries to customers.
            •     Late deliveries from suppliers.
            •     Unplanned overtime/offloading.

                                           95                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                           •     High work-in-progress levels.
 NOTES                     •     Mismatched inventories.
                           •     Over- or under-utilized resources.
                           •     Disruptions on the shop floor.
                           •     Many full-time expeditors.
                           •     Customer complaints.
                           •     High ‘past dues’.
                           •     Long queues.
                        This is clearly not a list that any manufacturing organization could regard as
                 acceptable.Something had to change, and so open loop MRP evolved into closed loop
                 MRP.
                 Closed loop MRP
                       Material requirements planning is useful but due to the problems that are faced
                 by the organization after implementation of MRP and lack of awareness of other re-
                 lated production and business functions, the organization started to shift towards closed
                 loop MRP system. The diagram below shows the much wider data horizon that is now
                 opened up for organizations which have started using better information technology to
                 upgrade their MRP system.
                 Closed loop MRP
                 Figure 2.30 – Closed loop MRP




     Anna University Chennai                             96
DBA 1651                                                                       PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

         Closed loop MRP has made feedback possible by including new functions               NOTES
such as file control, a master production schedule, rescheduling actions and shop floor
control. It thus ‘closed the loop’, overcoming the fundamental weakness of ‘open loop’
material requirements planning.
The closed loop diagram shows several additions to the open loop diagram:
            The long-term production plan. This feeds information into the master
            production schedule about the organization’s long-term manufacturing
            expectations.
            The master production schedule passes information to a separate rough
            cut capacity planning module, which estimates the amount of work
            achievable in a given time period.
            Orders generated by MRP are split into purchase orders and work orders.
            Manufacturing orders are passed to the capacity requirements planning
            module to see if there is sufficient labor and machine time available to carry
            them out in the time proposed by the master production schedule. This is a
            more detailed evaluation than rough cut capacity planning; it looks at
            individual work centers and their proposed workloads.
            The shop-floor execution phase is also shown; this is used to control the
            on-time completion of work orders.
2.9.4 Manufacturing Resources Planning (MRP II)
         Manufacturing resources planning (MRP II) is an extended form of closed
loop MRP that also incorporates strategic planning processes, business planning, and a
number of other business functions such as human resources planning, profit calculation
and cash flow analysis. MRP II uses the master production schedule as the basis for
scheduling capacity, shipments, tool changes, some design work, and cash flow. Hence
it requires several additions to the reference files. One is a bill of resources, which
details key resources needed to produce one unit of product. These resources may
include labour, machinery, tools, space and materials.
         The MRP II system can use the bill of resources to project shortages at specific
times, giving departments advance notice of required remedial action: for example, of
the need to hire or train labour. MRP II can also project needs for support resources;
for example, design engineering support if a customer order entails prior design work.
This additional resource is added to the bill of resources. Given still more reference
data, MRP II can keep track of tool wear and recommend when to replace or reshape
tooling. It can also keep track of machine loads and project machine capacity shortages,
which may signal a need for more machines or a subcontractor.

                                           97                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                     For financial planning, MRP II treats cash flow almost like materials. The MPS
                 is first exploded into component parts requirements; the system then calculates the cost
                 and payment dates of all planned order releases, effectively creating a cash flow forecast.
                 This includes not just payments to suppliers, but also wages, power and other
                 consumables associated with production. Cash outflows may be projected for a year
                 or more by expense category, work centre or department, making budgeting much
                 simpler than it would be without an MRP II system.
                                         Figure 2.31 - Framework of MRP II




                 2.9.3 Master Production Schedule
                    The MPS is a statement of the planned production of finished products that will
                 meet the demand on time, within the organization’s capacity. The master production

     Anna University Chennai                              98
DBA 1651                                                                         PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

schedule expresses. What we intend to make, how much we intend to make and when
we intend to make.
                                                                                               NOTES
    The demand for end items is scheduled over a number of time periods and recorded
on a master production schedule (MPS).The MPS is developed from forecasts and
firm customer orders for end items, safety stock requirements and internal orders. MRP
takes the master schedule for end items and translates it into individual time-phased
component requirements.

Overview of Master Production Schedule:

             Figure 2.32 - Overview of Master Production Schedule

         Forecasted
          Demand


                                        Capacity                            Master
                                        Planning                          Production
                                                                           Schedule

      Customer Order
      (Delivery Time)


Capacity Planning:

      Capacity planning essentially involves the following categories.

Resource Requirements Planning:

       Resource requirements planning refers to the planning of the overall capacities
of the firm. This planning is done to validate the aggregate production plans of the firm.

Rough Cut Capacity Planning (RCCP):

       Rough cut capacity planning (RCCP) involves planning capacities at key /
bottleneck work centers and broadly balancing workloads. It thus validates the MPS.
Material requirements planning (MRP) uses a master production schedule (MPS) of
end items to determine the quantity and timing of component part production. MRP is
capacity insensitive; it implicitly assumes that sufficient capacity is available to produce
components at the time they’re needed.

        A problem commonly encountered in operating MRP systems is the existence
of an overstated MPS. An overstated master production schedule is one that orders

                                            99                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           more production to be released than production can complete. An overstated MPS
                 causes raw materials and WIP inventories to increase because more materials are
                 purchased and released to the shop than are completed and shipped. It also causes a
                 buildup of queues on the shop floor. Since jobs have to wait to be processed, actual
                 lead times increase, causing ship dates to be missed. As lead times increase, forecast
                 accuracy over the lead-time gets affected because forecasts are more accurate for
                 shorter periods than for longer ones. Thus, overstated master production schedules
                 lead to missed due dates and other problems. Validating the MPS with respect to
                 capacity is an extremely important step in MRP. This validation exercise has been termed
                 rough cut capacity planning (RCCP).

                 For example: consider the man hour requirement for three components over a three
                 week period as follows:
                                                   Table 2.15

                                                  Week 1        Week 2       Week 3
                             Component A              70            70           70
                             Component B             100           100         120
                             Component C              80            75           80


                         Let us now check the total man hours required to produce this master produc-
                 tion schedule. From the above illustrated resource requirements, a rough cut analysis
                 can be done as follows:

                                                       Table 2.16

                                                       Week 1       Week 2         Week3
                          Required standard hours      250          245            270
                          Available standard hours     250          250            250
                          Negative deviation                                       -20
                          Positive deviation                        +5


                 RCCP DECISIONS
                          In this section, we discuss how to determine the amount of capacity that is
                 available, how to compare the capacity available to the capacity required and the options
                 that exist for adjusting the capacity available and/or the capacity required.


     Anna University Chennai                            100
DBA 1651                                                                          PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Determining the Capacity Available                                                              NOTES
       The plastic molding department of Al’s Lamps, presented in the previous sec-
tion, has three plastic molding machines. Since Al’s works one eight-hour shift each day
and there are 21 working days in an average month, it might seem that the capacity
available to the plastic molding department is 504 hours per month (3 machines times 8
hours/day/machine times 21 days/month).
        However, two additional factors must be considered. First, the plastic molding
machines may not be available all the time. The machines may break down, the worker
may be absent, and the mold needed or the material needed may not immediately be
available. Second, there must be an adjustment between the time standard average and
the actual average production rate of the department. The first adjustment factor is
known as utilization. Utilization is a number between 0 and 1 that is equal to 1 minus the
proportion of time typically lost due to machine, worker, tool, or material unavailability.
The second adjustment factor is known as efficiency. Efficiency is formally defined to
be the average of standard hours of production per clock hour actually worked. If a
time standard is exactly right, efficiency is 1. If the time actually required to perform the
work is less than the standard, efficiency is more than 1. If the time actually required to
perform the work is more than the standard, efficiency is less than 1. As mentioned
previously, time standards tend to be slightly pessimistic due to continual improvement
in production methods.
Capacity available is found by multiplying time available times utilization and times time
efficiency:
Capacity Available = Time Available x Utilization x Efficiency
Assume that for the plastic molding department of Al’s Lamps, utilization is 0.756 and
efficiency is 1.05. The time available in a month having 168 working hours (21 eight-
hour days) is 504 (3 machines times 168 hours/month/ machine). Thus,
Capacity Available = 504 x 0.756 x 1.05 = 400 hours (rounded to the nearest hour).
When capacity is inadequate, four basic options are available to increase capacity:
overtime, subcontracting, alternate routing, or adding personnel. If no combination of
the four options can provide sufficient capacity, the MPS will have to be reduced.
Options to adjust capacity required or available are discussed next.
• Increase Capacity
  – Additional shifts
  – Overtime
  – Additional resources


                                            101                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           • Reduce Load
                   – Subcontract
                   – Reduce lot sizes if possible
                 • Redistribute Load
                  – Use alternate work centers or routings if possible
                  – Shift production to earlier periods that have additional capacity
                  – Temporarily use safety stocks and shift load to later period
                 • If all else fails, revise MPS
                 2.9.4 Capacity Requirements Planning
                 Capacity requirements planning (CRP) is a computer-based extension of the MRP
                 process that uses the results of MRP along with detailed production information and
                 labor information to calculate planned workloads. It is a detailed capacity analysis that
                 helps in validating the MRP schedule. CRP arises mainly due to batching of production
                 work orders in the course of MRP. It is thus a computerized system that projects load
                 from material requirements plan.
                 CRP Inputs & Outputs
                 Figure 2.33
                                                    MRP planned
                                                       order
                                                     releases




                                                       Capacity                           Open
                     Routing                         requirements                         orders
                       file                            planning                             file




                                                  Load profile for
                                                each machine center




     Anna University Chennai                            102
DBA 1651                                                           PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Key Inputs
                                                                             NOTES
• Schedule of open orders and planned order releases (from MRP).
A typical example would be as follows:
                                    Table 2.17

  Release date Due date         Planned orders Number of batches of 20
  week 5       week 7                40               2
  week 8       week 10               80               4

• BOM with routing data:
A typical example would be as follows:
                                    Table 2.18




• Work center data
A typical example would be as follows:

                                    Table 2.19
               Work centre                         201
               Queue time                       2.5 hours
               Available capacity              440.0 hours
• Work order status
        Key Outputs
• Work center load report.
• Possible revised schedule of planned order releases.


                                         103                       Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           2.9.5 Forward Scheduling And Backward Scheduling
                 Forward scheduling:
                        In forward scheduling, we identify the earliest start date for the operation in
                 question through consideration of the planned order release date generated by MRP.
                 We then use the lead time to calculate the completion date. If the completion time is
                 prior to the due date then we have slack time available. If completion date is after due
                 date, we have a delay.
                 Backward scheduling:
                          In backward scheduling, we identify the due date for the operation in question
                 and use the operation lead time to calculate the latest operation start date. If the latest
                 start time is after the earliest start date then we have slack time available. If the operations
                 start time is prior to the earliest start date then we have negative slack.
                 An Illustration of Capacity Requirements Planning:
                 Consider a component-A which has a planned order as follows:
                                                          Table 2.20
                   Release date        Due date       Planned orders Number of batches of 20
                   week 5              week 7         60             3
                         This component has to undergo three process namely assembly, painting and
                 inspection. the data for these work centers is as follows:
                 Table 2.21
                                       Work center                         Assembly
                                       Queue time                          10.0 hours
                                       Available capacity                  60.0 hours
                                       Set up time                         0.40 hours
                                       Processing time                     0.30 hours
                                       Transport time                      1.30 hours
                 Table2.22
                                       Work center                         Painting
                                       Queue time                          18.0 hours
                                       Available capacity                  60.0 hours
                                       Set up time                         0.60 hours
                                       Processing time                     0.45 hours
                                       Transport time                      1.30 hours


     Anna University Chennai                               104
DBA 1651                                                                PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Table 2.23                                                                        NOTES
                      Work center                     Inspection
                      Queue time                      42.0 hours
                      Available capacity              60.0 hours
                      Set up time                     0.04 hours
                      Processing time                 0.30 hours
                      Transport time                  1.30 hours


Calculation of department loads:
Assembly department:
Load from component-A
    (Batch size X processing time) + Set-up
           60     X       0.30          + 0.4       = 18.4 Hours
Painting department:
Load from component-A
    (Batch size X processing time) + Set-up
           60         X    0.45            + 0.6      = 27.6 Hours
Inspection department:
Load from component-A
    (Batch size X processing time) + Set-up
           60         X    0.30            + 0.04       = 18.04 Hours
Calculations of operation lead time:
Operation lead time is calculated as
Operation lead time = Load from component + Queue time + Transport time
For assembly,
Operation lead time = 18.4 + 10 + 1.3 =29.7
For Painting,
Operation lead time = 27.6 + 18 + 1.3 =46.9
For Inspection,
Operation lead time = 18.04 + 42+ 1.3 =61.34

                                            105                         Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                 Now we use backward scheduling .The inspection has a lead time of 61.34 hours and
 NOTES           hence is loaded for the due date, which is week 7.Therefore the previous operation
                 (painting) is scheduled for the previous week (week 6).Painting only has a lead time of
                 46.9 hours, which means the assembly operation can be scheduled for completion in
                 week 6.
                 These load projections can be represented as follows:
                 Figure 2.34
                                          Load projection for assembly work center

                                                                                         18.4




                     week1        week2        week3         week4         week5       week6      week7



                 Figure 2.35 -

                                           load projection for painting work center

                                                                                       27.6




                      week1       week2        week3        week4         week5       week6     week7




     Anna University Chennai                             106
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Figure2.36
                                                                                              NOTES
                        Load projection for inspection work center


                                                                                 18.04




   week1        week2        week3        week4         week5        week6       week7


Shop floor control
     The system is provided with information on how many units were sent onwards
and the date as each work centre completes a job. This information enables the MRP
system to provide each work centre with daily notices of priority changes. After
rescheduling, new due dates and quantities go out to the factory and supplier companies,
who must act on them so that the previous schedule, with the jobs in progress, is
updated. The shop floor control thus provides information on the reschedules with the
help of which the existing schedules can be updated.
Production Activity Control (PAC)
    PAC, Production Activity Control, is concerned with converting plans into action,
reporting the results achieved and revising plans and actions as required achieving desired
results. Thus, PAC converts plans into action by providing the required direction. This
requires the appropriate prior master planning of orders, work force personnel, materials,
and capacity requirements. They are useful in the management of lead-time, queue
length, work center idle time, and scheduled order completion. The three primary
functions of PAC
             Order release
             Dispatching
             Progress reporting

                                            107                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           Order Release
                         Order release initiates the execution phase of production; it authorizes production
                 and/or purchasing. The planned order becomes a released (open) order. Placement of
                 a purchase order or the initiation of manufacturing follows shortly. Order release planning
                 may take place until the moment of order release.
                          Authorization of order release is based on the planned orders in the MRP
                 output, the current priority, the availability of materials and tooling, and the loads specified
                 by I/O planning. Release of an order triggers the release of the following:
                 1.       Requisitions for material and components required by the order. If some of
                 these items are not required immediately and have not been allocated previously, they
                 are allocated now.
                 2.        Production order documentation to the plant. This documentation may include
                 a set of both engineering drawings and manufacturing specifications and a manufacturing
                 routing sheet.
                 3.      Requisitions for tools required in the first week or so of production. Tooling,
                 including tapes for numerically controlled machines, required in later operations is
                 reserved for the appropriate period. Tooling can be included in the master production
                 schedule and the bill of material. Its availability is thus coordinated with material and
                 equipment availability.
                         The time required to deliver production order documentation, tooling and
                 materials to the first operation is included in the normal planned lead time for the order.
                 An order is released by adding it to the dispatch list.
                 Dispatching
                           Dispatching informs first-line supervision of the released orders and their priority,
                 that is, the sequence in which orders should be run. This information can be transmitted
                 via a hard copy (handwritten, typed, or computer printout) or via video output on a
                 cathode ray tube (CRT). In a job shop a dispatch list should be prepared for each
                 work center with the frequency of updating depending on the typical order-processing
                 time. If orders take a day or less to process, dispatch lists usually are prepared daily. If
                 orders take a few days, lists may be prepared weekly with midweek revisions handled
                 on an exception basis with on-line processing.
                         In a flow line process environment, a single list indicating the rate of flow (or in
                 a batch flow line, the sequence in which orders are to be started) will control work on
                 the entire line, which may be viewed as a single work center. An example of simple
                 dispatch list information identifies the date, the plant, and the work center; it includes
                 the work center capacity; and it lists the orders, their quantity, their capacity requirements,
                 and their priority. Orders usually are listed in descending priority for a specified period.

     Anna University Chennai                               108
DBA 1651                                                                           PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

        The list also may include jobs at upstream work centers to provide the supervisor        NOTES
with information concerning orders that will arrive shortly and an indication of their
priority upon arrival. A computerized system may produce relative rankings on the
basis of criteria such as critical ratio and earliest due date, as described earlier, but
review by a planner is required to determine if other considerations are overriding.

         The planner determines the final dispatch list ranking of orders on the basis of
the multiple criteria including a formal priority index such as, the critical ratio or the due
date, input control at downstream work centers, the availability of tooling, the status of
other parts required in the same assembly, energy consumption patterns, and sequencing
and assignment criteria.

Production Reporting

       Reports describing the actual production status are necessary for control.
Dynamic response to the changing conditions is possible only if timely, accurate, and
adequate information is available. The information must enable management to take
meaningful corrective action concerning production schedules.

        The production environment influences the design of the production reporting
system. Reporting in a line flow environment with long production runs, may take place
on an exception basis with feedback occurring only when the output rate falls below an
acceptable level. All reporting systems should have an exception reporting capability to
inform management whenever machine failure, material shortages, or similar events
threaten planned output.

2.9.6 Benefits of MRP II

       In the narrow sense, the main benefit of MRP II is its ability to generate valid
schedules and keep them valid. But valid schedules have broader benefits for the whole
organization. These include, more or less in order of importance:

1. Improved on-time completion

          A typical manufacturing organization using MRP II should be able to achieve
on-time completion rates of 95 per cent or more, because completion of a parent item
is less likely to be delayed for lack of a component. On-time completion helps improve
customer service.

2. Reduced inventories

         Inventory falls - typically by 20-35 per cent - because parts are not ordered
until needed.


                                            109                                     Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                  PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           3. Capacity requirements planning data
                           Work centre capacity requirements can be planned for many periods into the
                 future.
                 4. Improved direct labour productivity
                        Fewer shortages mean significantly less lost time and overtime, and less disruption
                 to accommodate shortage-list jobs.
                 5. Improved productivity of support staff
                        MRP II cuts expediting (or ‘firefighting’) and allows more time for planning.
                 For example, purchasing can start looking for alternative or better suppliers; materials
                 management can plan inventory needs better.
                 6. Total business planning
                         The ability to use one common set of data to help plan and control the whole
                 business.
                 2.9.7 Drawbacks of MRPII
                         Though Manufacturing Resource Planning has a number of benefits, it has a
                 few limitations too. They are:-
                       ·     MRP II system is complex.
                         · MRP II implementation programmer, takes a lot of time, effort and commitment
                 at all levels of the organization to set up a successful MRP II system.
                 The benefits, however, should very quickly make the exertion worthwhile.
                 Review Questions:
                 1.        MRPII stand for?
                 2.        List the various phases of evaluation of MRPII
                 3.        Discuss the input requirement of the capacity requirement planning.
                 4.        What is dispatching?
                 5.        List any two benefits of MRP
                 2.10 ENTERPRISES RESOURCE PLANNING
                          It is a system which integrates all the procesess and data of an organization.
                 It uses the hardware and software to integrate the activities of manufacturing, supply
                 chain, Financials, Customer Relationship Management (CRM), Human Resources and
                 Warehouse Management.


     Anna University Chennai                             110
DBA 1651                                                                         PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

2.10.1 Need for ERP                                                                            NOTES
      In the past, then available software applications that don’t talk to each other
and do not effectively interfaces, so the organizations were in the pursuit of identifying a
new software to eliminate the above limitation that result in the invention of ERP system.

       ERP acts as a single database that includes all data for the software modules,
which would include manufacturing, supply chin management, finance, projects, customer
relationship management, data warehouse. This is shown in figure 2.36.

Manufacturing:

   Engineering, Bills of Material, Scheduling, Capacity, Workflow Management,
Quality Control, Cost Management, Manufacturing Process, Manufacturing Projects,
Manufacturing Flow.

Supply Chain Management:

        Inventory, Order Entry, Purchasing, Product Configurator, Supply Chain
Planning, Supplier Scheduling, Inspection of goods, Claim Processing, Commission
Calculation etc.

Finance:

       General Ledger, Cash Management, Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable,
Fixed Assets.

Projects:

        Costing, Billing, Time and Expense, Activity Management

Human Resources:

        Human Resources, Payroll, Training, Time & Attendance, Benefits

Customer Relationship Management:

       Sales and Marketing, Commissions, Service, Customer Contact and Call Center
Support etc.

Data Warehouse:

       Various Self-Service interfaces for Customers, Suppliers, and Employees.
The framework of ERP is shown in the figure 2.36




                                            111                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                            PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                         Figure 2.36 - ERP System




     Anna University Chennai           112
DBA 1651                                                                            PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

2.10.2 Evolution of ERP:
                                                                                                  NOTES
MRP – Material Requirement planning focused mostly in the plant production level,
started, emphasizing the controlling of inventory for the dependent items. It acts as a
production scheduling system also. Because of change in business scenario like more
competition, more Global suppliers, warehousing, Global product demand, at different
count, changing environment business currency complexities etc. Focus has been shifted
from beyond the production level, to include all the activities that results in the development
of manufacturing resource planning, MRP II includes the sub modules manufacturing,
logistics, distribution, inventory, shipping, involving and accounting for a company. Then
further, improvement in the MRP II leads to the birth of ERP.
2.10.3 Advantages of ERP system
1. ERP effectively interfaces all the activities of the organization.
2. Computer security is included within an ERP to protect against both outsider crime,
such as industrial espionage and insider crime, such as embezzlement.
2.10.4 Disadvantages of ERP system
1. High investment required in buying and implementing the ERP system.
2. Problem due to a lack of corporate policy protecting the integrity of the data in the
   ERP system and how it is used.
2.10.5 Limitations of ERP include
      1.     There are compatibility problem with the various legacy system of the
             implementing organizations.
      2.     Hesitance in sharing sensitive internal information between departments can
             reduce the effectiveness of the software.
      3.     The blurring of company boundaries can cause problems in accountability,
             lines of responsibility, and employee morale.
      4.     ERP system can be difficult to use
      5.     ERP system is considered to be too rigid and too difficult to adapt to the
             specific work flow and business process of some companies.
      6.     Annual license renewal change is constant irrespective of the size of the
             company using the ERP.
      7.     Re-engineering of business processes to fit the “Industry Standard”
             prescribed by the ERP system may lead to lots of competitive advantages.
      8.     Customization of ERP software is limited.
      9.     The success of an ERP system depends on the skill and experience of the
             workforce.
      10.    Lack of training to the workforce result in failure of the ERP system.


                                             113                                     Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                 Review Questions:
 NOTES
                 1.      What does ERP stands for?
                 2.      List the Major phases in evaluation of ERP.
                 2.11 E-BUSINESS AND E-COMMERCE
                           Like any emerging field, e-business is changing fast and so is the thinking behind
                 it. A firm’s e-commerce strategy should aim to help organizations establish stronger ties
                 with customers and business partners. These strategies should also focus on helping
                 organizations acquire and retain customers efficiently. An electronic market not only
                 offers a cheaper, more cost effective way to transact business but also brings about a
                 more efficient market clearing mechanism, because it is not constrained by geographical
                 distance or time.
                        The beginning of the second millennium will almost certainly be remembered
                 as a time of unprecedented change in the business world. In the space of a few years
                 entire industries have been radically transformed. New technologies such as Internet,
                 digital televisions, intelligent home appliances have all reached critical mass at the same
                 time and are poised to revolutionize business. To begin it’s useful to describe what is
                 meant by electronic business and electronic commerce. It is defined as ‘the conduct of
                 business on the Internet, not only buying and selling but also servicing customers and
                 making strategic alliances with business partners.’
                          At this stage of development of e-commerce, everything that constitute a market
                 products, industrial structure, trade is in the process of being redefined. This raises the
                 issues of developing new strategies to answer questions like, how will the new networks
                 affect industries and the economy at large, how should firms compete in the new market
                 places that are developing, how can firm integrate the network into existing business
                 operations and how they should manage the new organizations. This makes business
                 strategy specialists to understand the networks and their business implications.
                          One of the advantages of using an electronic channel is the efficiency gain.
                 E-business can generate tremendous efficiencies through reduced transaction costs,
                 faster through out and better information to all members of the chain. Traditional strategy
                 development process is difficult to be followed in the case of e-businesses, as it has to
                 contend with additional issues of virtual transactions, unstable market, highly
                 interconnected firm and high uncertainty in the markets. The most striking features of
                 competitive strategies in e-business is that often new entrants have been able with limited
                 resources to undermine existing competitions in the industry through the use of new
                 business models. Strategy is driven by what is valued by the customer without being
                 constrained by existing industry rules. E-business strategy makers build on the powerful
                 commonalities in the features that customers value. This ensures these companies to
                 capture the core of the market, even if it means that they lose some of the customers.
                       Apart from the instability of the market, one of the greatest challenges for e-
                 business strategies is the sheer speed of change. Two processes are critical in time
                 pacing. The first one is managing transitions or the shifts from one activity to the next.
                 The second is managing rhythm, or the pace at which organizations change. Another

     Anna University Chennai                              114
DBA 1651                                                                          PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

area where e-strategists should concentrate is the ability to connect individuals, groups
and organizations worldwide. Complementary product providers and allies play a
                                                                                                NOTES
significant role in determining success in the industry.
         Uncertainty is another characteristic which the e-business strategies maker has
to cop up with. A firm’s posture in state of uncertainty defines the intent of a strategy
relative to the current and future state of an industry. Strategies are aimed at creating
new opportunities in a market, either by shaking up relatively stable industries or by
trying to control the direction of the market in industries with higher level of uncertainty.
Many e-commerce firms adopt the strategic posture of reserving the right to play, which
involves making incremental investments now that will put a company in a position of
advantage in the future. This allows the company to wait until the environment becomes
less uncertain before formulating a strategy.
        As e-business technologies, coupled with continued advances in voice
recognition and artificial intelligence, become more commonplace, even more radical
changes in the use of information are expected. Just as there has been a paradigm shift
in e-business strategy, this requires a shift from information management to knowledge
management. This will require systems that move beyond simply capturing past
experiences to using that information creatively. Another strategy that can be adopted
to cop with the speed of change and uncertainty of e-business is to establish a separate
e-business unit. Speed and flexibility are required to compete successfully in e-business,
something that is difficult to achieve in large organizations. The strategies of dot.com
business are best seen as a tradeoff between operational decisions and financial
decisions.
        We are on the verge of a revolution that is just as profound as the change in the
economy that came with the industrial revolution named ‘E-revolution’. So the e-
strategies should be formulated such that it allows people to rise above the barriers of
time and distance and take advantage of global markets and business opportunities.
SUMMARY
    •      This unit helped the reader to know the importance of one of the inputs of
           production system, namely, the material resource.
    •      The functions of materials management is dealt.
    •      Types of computer controlled material handling devices and their applications
           are discussed.
    •      The operation of Just in Time (JIT) system and the prerequisites to implement
           JIT in an organization are discussed.
    •      The deterministic inventory models and probabilistic inventory model and
           when do you adopt which model is elaborated.
    •      The working of MRP – I and MRP – II is illustrated with examples.
    •      Introduction of ERP, e-business and e-operation strategies are outlined.
Review Question:
What is e-business and e-commerce?

                                            115                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                               PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                                  UNIT III
                               PLANNING AND FORECASTING
                 3.1 Introduction
                         3.1.1 Learning Objectives
                 3.2 Forecasting
                         3.2.1 Importance of forecasting
                         3.2.2 Forecasting model:
                         3.2.3 Forecasting methods:
                                 3.2.3.1 Quantitative methods:
                                 3.2.3.1.1 Time Series Analysis
                                 3.2.3.1.2 Econometric models
                                 3.2.3.1.3 Economic Indicators
                                 3.2.3.2 Qualitative Methods
                                 3.2.3.2.1 Market Survey
                                 3.2.3.2.2 Expert Opinion
                                 3.2.3.2.3 Delphi Technique
                         3.2.4 Forecasting evaluation
                 3.3 Capacity Planning
                 3.4 Aggregate Production Planning
                         3.4.1 Introduction
                         3.4.2 Objectives of Aggregate Planning
                         3.4.3 Strategies to Meet Demand Fluctuations
                         3.4.4 Aggregate Planning Methods
                                 3.4.4.1 Error Method
                                 3.4.4.2 Linear programming Model
                                 3.4.4.3 Transportation Model
                 3.5 Product Design and Development
                         3.5.1 Product life cycle
                         3.5.2 New Product development process
                                 3.5.2.1 Concept Generation
                                 3.5.2.2 Concept testing
                                 3.5.2.3 Technical Development
                                 3.5.2.4 Standardization and Inter-changeability
                                 3.5.2.5 Commercialization
                 3.6 Expert System in Product Development
                         3.6.1 Expert System Development
                         3.6.2 Putting System Together
                 3.7 Computer Aided Design and Drawing
                         3.7.1 Introduction
                         3.7.2 What to Expect from CADD?
                         3.7.3 A Look at the CADD Industry

     Anna University Chennai                          116
DBA 1651                                                                           PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


                                     UNIT - 3                                                    NOTES



        PLANNING AND FORECASTING
3.1 INTRODUCTION

        In this unit the three levels of management are discussed. Product design and
development activities are also discussed. The enablers of product design and
development namely Expert system, Computer Aided Design (CAD) are also elaborated.
Forecasting activity is dealt to provide the input for the capacity planning and aggregate
planning activities. Capacity planning overview is done with the explanations of aggregate
planning.

3.1.1 Learning Objectives

        1. You should understand the three levels of the management and their
             characteristics.

        2. Different forecasting methods and forecasting evaluation tools are to be
             understood.

        3. To understand the capacity planning and the strategies for aggregate planning
             and then different methods of aggregate planning.

        4. To comprehend the new product development process and the utility of
             computer aided design and the expert system in the new product
             development process.

3.1.2 Levels of Management

        Generally, business activities can be classified into strategic, tactical and
operational level activities. All the three levels are involved in all the subsystems, namely,
production, finance, personnel and marketing. The characteristics of the decisions to
be taken in all the three levels are shown in the table 3.1.2



                                            117                                     Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                       PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           Table 3.1.2 - Characteristics of decision making at Strategic, Tactical and
                 Operational Levels of Management

                                                         Level of Management
                  Characteristics
                                         Strategic                 Tactical               Operational

                  Time frame to      “future” – Extremely “Current” – Year, quarter,   “Instant” – day
                  which decisions    long time            or month                     to day, or real-time
                  apply

                  Persons primarily Executive management Middle management             First line manage
                  involved          and staff                                          ment

                  Focus of decision On one aspect of the On organization only,         On small part of
                                    organization/environ- either in its entirely or    the organization
                                    ment relationship at a major portion of it
                                    a time

                  Complexity of      Numerous variables, Moderate number of            Small number of
                  decisions          most of which cannot variables; most of           variables, all of
                                     be quantified        which can be quantified      which can be
                                                                                       quantified

                  Degree of struc- Occurs at irregular      Rhythmic; specifically     Rhythmic; specifi
                  ture in decision- intervals, based        prescribed procedures;     cally prescribed
                  making process almost exclusively         repetitive problems        procedures; repeti-
                                    on judgment; each                                  tive problems
                                    problem differs.

                  Nature of infor-   External; predictive; Internal; Historical or     Internal; historical
                  mation             qualitative; not       real-time; often non-       or real-time; often
                                     particularly accurate financial; precise           non-financial;
                                     precise

                  Use of information Prediction             Action                     Action


                          You can see how the type of activities to be carried out in the strategic,
                 tactical and operational levels of production system is shown below for your
                 clarity.

                 Strategic level decisions in the production system are :

                          •   Plant location decision
                          •   New product introduction
                          •   Technology Selection
                          •   Supply chain network strategy

     Anna University Chennai                                 118
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Tactical level decisions in the production system are :                                      NOTES
        • Markets to be supplied
        • Aggregate planning
            - overtime estimation
            - inventory decision
            - subcontracting decision
            - hiring and firing decision
Operational level decisions in the production system are :
            -   deciding about the individual customer order
            -   allocation of inventory or production to individuals order
            -   deciding a date that an order is to be filled
            -   allocated can order to a particular shipping mode
            -   set delivery schedule of trucks
Review Questions :
        1. What are the three levels of management?
          Give an example in each level of the management
3.2 FORECASTING
         Forecasting activity is an important activity in the business. This is considered
to be an important input for many activities in the organization. Forecasting is of two
types, namely, long ranges forecasting and short range. The Long range forecast goes
as input for long range decision making like technology selection, capacity planning.
From the long range forecasts, the medium term forecasts are derived and used as
input for the activity like aggregate planning. From the medium term forecasts the short
range forecasts are outlined and go as input for activity like scheduling. Selection and
usage of forecasting method differs according to whether the company needs forecast
to the existing product or for a new product. When you forecast for the existing product,
the past demand data is taken into consideration, the pattern for the demand is analyzed,
then appropriate forecasting technique is chosen to predict the future. From the predicted
demand the manager adds his own intuitions and experience based on the situation to
change the estimated demand to suit the real life situation.
       In the case of new product, since there is no past data available, the organization
depends upon the qualitative methods of forecasting. Experts, customers, sales persons
opinions are solicited.
3.2.1 Importance of forecasting
       Forecasting activity plays major role in activities like budget preparation, cash
flow preparation, balance sheet and income statement. In marketing it does play a role
in product life, pricing and promotional decisions. In production it provides information
in capacity planning, aggregate planning and scheduling activities.


                                           119                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           3.2.2 Forecasting model
                 Figure 3.1 - Forecasting model

                                              Constraint
                                                 1. Advertisement Budget
                                                 2. Management Policies
                                                 3. Available Resources
                                                 4. Technology


                           Inputs                                                           Output
                  1. Past Data                                                      1. Demand Estimation
                  2. Demand Pattern                                                    a. Long Range
                  3. Market Situation                                                  b. Medium Range
                  4. Market Research                                                   c. Short Range


                                               Environmental Factors for
                                                Considering Long-term
                                                       Forecast
                                                 1. Social
                                                 2. Economical
                                                 3. Political



                           Before selecting any forecasting methods, you should see that whether you
                 require forecasting for long range; then whole frame work given in the model is useful
                 that is in addition to market and internal analysis you need to consider the environmental
                 factors like social, economic and political factors for the long term forecasting.

                 3.2.3 Forecasting methods

                         In this material the forecasting methods are classified into quantitative and
                 qualitative type. The past data and demand pattern play key role in selecting the best
                 quantitative method and providing good forecasting results. Quantitative methods are
                 very much used for forecasting the existing products. Qualitative method used for the
                 new product forecast.
                 The classification of different methods is shown below figure 3.1
                                  Figure 3.2 - Classification of forecasting method

                                                     Forecasting Methods


                               Quantitative                                   Qualitative


                  Time Series           Economic          Econometric
                  Analysis              Indicators        Models


                                                       Expert              Market             Delphi
                                                       Options             Survey


     Anna University Chennai                             120
DBA 1651                                                                         PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

3.2.3.1 Quantitative methods:                                                                  NOTES
    The method is called quantitative methods because forecasting is done based on
the data.
Time series analysis:
   In this method, the past data is analyzed against time scale.

Figure 3.3 - Time series analysis



                                                      5



                                                  4

                              2        3
    Past
   demand
                          1




                                      Time

If you analyze the demand pattern against a time scale, usually it consists of the following
components.

    1.   Level
    2.   Trend
    3.   Seasonal
    4.   Cyclic
    5.   Random

        Before selecting a particular forecasting, the past data is plotted against their
respective year or month or week the pattern analyzed in terms of what component the
pattern posses, then the appropriate forecasting technique is chosen.

    The combination of components is shown in figure3.4.

Figure 3.4

         Data



                 (Level + Random)                         (Level+ Trend+ Random)

                                            121                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                                PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES



                        (Level+Seasonal+Random)                                    (Level+Trend+Seasonal+Random)

                        Cycle component usually considered for the long term forecasting. The cycle
                 means business cycle or economy cycle. The different phases of this cycle are growth,
                 maturity and depression. Usually each phase may prevail for at least more than three
                 years.
                 3.2.3.1.1 Time Series Analysis
                        For after analyzing the pattern of data, you can choose relevant method for
                 forecasting. In this material important and complicated time series analysis methods
                 are discussed.
                 Moving Average

                 The moving average technique generates the next period’s forecast by averaging the
                 actual demand for the last ‘n’ time periods.

                                                            n

                                                           ∑Y         t −1
                             ˆ Y + Y + ......Yt − n =
                            Yt = t −1 t − 2                i =1
                                           n                      n
                 Where        = forecast for period ‘t ’

                    =
                        actual demand in period ‘t ’
                 n = Number of periods included in each average
                 Moving average problem – 1
                 From the data below, determine the forecast for period 7 using two month moving
                 average technique.
                 Table 3.2
                             Month       1     2       3                 4         5      6
                             Demand 20         30      40                30        50     58

                 Solution:
                        Moving average period (n) = 2
                                                                                 50 + 58
                           Forecast for period 7 would be                    =           = 54
                                                                                    2

     Anna University Chennai                                    122
DBA 1651                                                                          PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Moving Average – Problem 2                                                                  NOTES
           From the data below, determine MAD for the following forecasting techniques:
(a) last period demand, (b) arithmetic average, and (c) three month moving average.
What is the forecast for period 13?

Table 3.3
                 Period         Demand              Period        Demand
                  1.                  93              7.           100
                  2.                 105              8.           101
                  3.                 114              9.            81
                  4.                 111             10.           118
                  5.                 106             11.           103
                  6.                 116             12.           114



                  Last Period Demand Arithmetic Average         Three Month
                                                                Moving Average
Month Demand      Forecast Absolute        Forecast Absolute   Forecast Absolute
      demand      deviation demand         deviation demand    deviation


  1         93          -        -         105.16    12.16           -     -

  2        105         93      12          105.16     0.16           -     -

  3        114     105          9          105.16     8.84           -     -

  4        111     114          3          105.16     5.84      104.00     7.00

  5        106     111          5          105.16     0.84      110.00     4.00

  6        116     106         10          105.16    10.84      110.33     5.67

  7        100     116         16          105.16     5.16      111.00     11.00

  8        101     100          1          105.16     4.16      107.33     6.33

  9         81     101         20          105.16    24.16      105.67     24.67

 10        118         81      37          105.16    12.84       94.00     24.00

 11        103     118         15          105.16     2.16      100.00     3.00

 12        114     103         11          105.16     8.84      111.67     13.30

 13        114    Total     105.16          Total   111.67                 Total

                   139                      96.00                          98.97


                                             123                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                                               139
                                                =        = 12.63
                                                      11

                            n           ˆ
                                  Yi − Yi            96
                 MAD = ∑                        =       =8
                           i =1        n             12

                            n         Yi − Yˆ       98.97
                 MAD = ∑
                                  i
                                                =         = 10.99
                           i =1         n             9
                 Forecast for period 13 using last period demand = 114
                 Forecast for period 13 using arithmetic average = 105.16
                 Forecast for period 13 using three month moving average = 111.67

                 Exponentially weighted moving average
                      In the simple moving average technique, recent ‘n’ data have to be taken while
                 calculating the forecast. ‘n’ represents, ‘n’ month moving average’, exponentially weighted
                 moving average gives more weightage to the recent data and less weightage to the old
                 data moreover if you apply this technique to forecast the future, there is no need to store
                 recent ‘n’ data as you did in the moving average method. Because all the data will be in
                 one single value that is the previous forecast value.

                 Simple exponentially moving weightage average model
                           Forecast for period t = α (Actual demand of period t-1) + (1- α ) (forecasted
                 value of t-1)
                 This model is applicable only when the past data follows a horizontal pattern with error
                 component.

                      Figure 3.5 - Simple exponentially moving weightage average model




                                           Sales

                                            Time

                 Where ‘ α ’ is the exponential smoothening constant, α varies between 0 to 1.let us
                 analyze why this method is called exponential weighted moving average.

     Anna University Chennai                                   124
DBA 1651                                                                                  PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT



             Forecast for period t
                                                                                                                     NOTES
                = (actual demand for period t-1)                    + (1- α ) (forecasted value for t-1)



             ˆ
             X t = forecast for the level component for period t

             Xˆ
                  t                                   [
                       = Y t − 1α + (1 − α ) Y t − 2 α + (1 − α ) Xˆ
                                                                                        t−2   ]
                      = α Y t − 1 + α (1 − α ) Y t − 2 + (1 − α ) 2 Xˆ
                                                                                t−2


                                                                            [          ˆ
                      = α Y t −1 + α (1 − α )Y t − 2 + (1 − α ) 2 Y t − 3 α + (1 − α ) X t − 3         ]
             From the above expressions, you can easily understand that the past data gets less
             weightage than the recent data as follows:

                                          DATA            WEIGHTAGE              FOR α =0.4
                                          Yt-1                  α                       0.4
                                          Yt-2            α     (1- α )                0.24
                                          Yt-3            α     (1- α )^2             0.144


αˆ = Xˆ                  If you plot the weightage against the time data, it follows exponential pattern,
βt ˆ t −
 ˆ
Yˆ t −= Y1                 ˆ
         t −1α + (1 − α ) X t −1
X X
X            so the method is called as exponentially weighted moving average.
   t

             Exponentially weighted moving average with trend correction (Level + Trend)
                     When you analyze the past data and if you have a feeling that the past data
             contains both the level(X) and trend component (T), then the model is used for adjusting
             trend and level component is
                  = α Yt-1 + (1 - α ) (          -1
                                                      + Tt-1)
             Tt = β (                 ) + (1 - β ) Tt-1
             Tt = Trend adjustment for period‘t’.
             β is a smoothing constant for trend. This varies between 0 and 1.
             Now the forecast for period t
                     + Tt
             If you want to forecast for ‘n’ period from the period‘t’ where in the forecast value
                            ˆ
             available are X t and Tt, then the formula to be used
              ˆ      ˆ
             Yt +n = X t + (n + 1) Tt
             Exponentially weighted moving average Problem - 3
                   Using exponential smoothing and the data in the previous problem, forecast
             monthly demand if α = 0.2 and = 0.4. Assume that the actual demand in the first

                                                                    125                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                           PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                 month is the same as the forecasted demand and the initial level and the initial trend for
 NOTES           month 1 both are 10. From these results forecast the demand for period 8.

                                                                Table 3.5
                  Month            Yt Demand               Forecast Level       Tt Trend       Forecast

                     1                     20                     10                10           20
                     2                     30                     20                10           30
                     3                     40                     30                10           40
                     4                     30                     40                10           50
                     5                     50                     46                8.4         54.4
                     6                     58                   53.52           8.048         61.568
                     7                     54                   60.85           7.752         68.602
                     8                                          65.68           6.583         72.263

                 α = 0.2,        = 0.4

                                                                Table 3.6

                  Month          Yt                                         Tt Trend        ˆ
                                                                                           Yt Forecast
                                 Demand               Forecast              Level

                     1                20                   10                 10                20
                     2                30
                     3                40
                     4                30
                     5                50
                     6                58
                     7                54
                     8
                  ˆ
                  X t = α Yt-1 + (1 - α ) (          + Tt-1)
                                                -1

                 Tt = β (        ˆ
                               - X t -1) + (1 - β ) Tt-1
                 Tt = Trend adjustment for period‘t’.
                      ˆ
                    = X t + Tt
                 Forecast demand level for the 2nd month is obtained in the following manner
                  ˆ
                  X 2 = 0.2 * (20) + 0.8 * (10 + 10)
                      = 4 + 16
                      = 20

     Anna University Chennai                                    126
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Trend for the 2nd month is obtained in the following manner:                             NOTES
T2 = 0.4 * (20 - 10) + 0.6 * (10)
    =4+6
    = 10
Forecast for month 2 is
     ˆ
Y2 = X 2 + T2
   = 20 + 10
   = 30
Forecast demand level for the 3rd month is obtained in the following manner:
ˆ
X 3 = 0.2 * (30) + 0.8 * (20 + 10)
     = 6 + 24
     = 30
Trend for the 3rd month is obtained in the following manner:
T3 = 0.4 * (30 - 20) + 0.6 * (10)
   =4+6
   = 10
Forecast for month 3 is
 ˆ     ˆ
Y3 = X 3 + T3
   = 30 + 10
   = 40
Forecast demand level for the 4th month is obtained in the following manner:
 ˆ
X 4 = 0.2 * (40) + 0.8 * (30 + 10)
    = 8 + 32
    = 40
Trend for the 4th month is obtained in the following manner:
T4 = 0.4 * (40 - 30) + 0.6 * (10)
   =4+6
   = 10
Forecast for month 4 is
 ˆ     ˆ
Y4 = X 4 + T4
    = 40 +10
    = 50
Forecast demand level for the 5th month is obtained in the following manner:
 ˆ
X 5 = 0.2 * (30) + 0.8 * (40 + 10)
     = 6 + 40
     = 46


                                         127                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           Trend for the 5th month is obtained in the following manner:
                 T5 = 0.4 * (46 - 40) + 0.6 * (10)
                    = 2.4 + 6
                    = 8.4
                 Forecast for month 5 is
                  ˆ     ˆ
                 Y5 = X 5 + T5
                    = 46 + 8.4
                    = 54.4
                 Forecast demand level for the 6th month is obtained in the following manner:
                  ˆ
                 X 6 = 0.2 * (50) + 0.8 * (46 + 8.4)
                     = 10 + 43.52
                     = 53.52
                 Trend for the 6th month is obtained in the following manner:
                 T6 = 0.4 * (53.52 - 46) + 0.6 * (8.4)
                    = 3.008 + 5.04
                    = 8.048
                 Forecast for month 6 is
                  ˆ     ˆ
                 Y6 = X 6 + T6
                     = 53.52 + 8.048
                     = 61.568
                 Forecast demand level for the 7th month is obtained in the following manner:
                  ˆ
                  X 7 = 0.2 * (58) + 0.8 * (53.52 + 8.048)
                      = 11.6 + 49.25
                      = 60.85
                 Trend for the 7th month is obtained in the following manner:
                 T7 = 0.4 * (60.85 - 53.52) + 0.6 * (8.048)
                    = 2.932 + 4.82
                    = 7.752
                 Forecast for month 7 is
                  ˆ   ˆ
                 Y7 = X 7 + T7
                    = 60.85 + 7.752
                    = 68.602
                 Forecast demand level for the 8th month is obtained in the following manner:
                  ˆ
                  X 8 = 0.2 * (54) + 0.8 * (60.85 + 7.752)
                     = 10.8 + 54.88
                     = 65.68

     Anna University Chennai                           128
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

       Trend for the 8th month is obtained in the following manner:                                 NOTES
       T8 = 0.4 * (65.68 - 60.85) + 0.6 * (7.752)
          = 1.932 + 4.651
          = 6.583
       Forecast for month 8 is
        ˆ   ˆ
       Y8 = X 8 + T8
          = 65.68 + 6.583
          = 72.263

       Exponentially weighted moving average with seasonal correction (Level +
       Seasonal)
               When you analyze the past data, if you identify that the past data contains
       level and seasonal pattern. The seasonal pattern means that you can find the similarity in
       the demand pattern with respect to each period. This similarity occurs within a year.

       (e.g.).Demand of Air-conditioning equipment, Heating equipment, Ice Cream, Etc...
                The last year demand in the month of January may have the similarity with the
       demand of January of this year. If you have monthly data, then the seasonal period =
γY
 Xtt   12, if you have quarterly data, then the seasonal period = 4.
  ˆ
 Xt    When there is no trend, the model used for forecasting
        ˆ     ˆ
       Yt = X t It

       Where

        ˆ
       Yt = forecast for the period‘t’
        ˆ
       X t = level forecast for the period‘t’
       It = seasonal index for the period‘t’
       The seasonal index also are updated by the following model:

       It+m = γ       + (1 - γ ) It
       Where is the seasonal smoothing constant, it varies between 0 and 1.
       If you want to forecast for the ‘n’ period, where in you have then the forecast for
       the period ‘n’ after t
        ˆ       ˆ
       Y t+n = X t It+n

       Exponentially weighted moving average Problem -4
       Quarterly data for 12 periods is given below:



                                                  129                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                                                  Table 3.7
                               Quarter         Demand            Quarter      Demand
                                  1.             497                 7.          821
                                  2.             454                 8.         1017
                                  3.             624                 9.          709
                                  4.             764                10.          715
                                  5.             631                11.         1794
                                  6.             624                12.         1242


                 Using the data from the first eight quarters, compute the quarterly seasonal indices.

                 Solutions -

                                                        Table 3.8

                    Period      Demand          Average of same quarter Seasonal Index
                                                  of each year
                       1          497                   564                     0.83
                       2          454                   539                    0.793
                       3          624                  722.5                   1.064
                       4          764                  890.5                   1.311
                       5          631                   564                     0.83
                       6          624                   539                    0.793
                       7          821                  722.5                   1.064
                       8         1017                  890.5                   1.311
                    Total        5432                                          7.996
                                                5432
                 Overall quarterly average =         = 679
                                                 8
                                       Average of same quarter of each year
                 Seasonal Index =
                                            Overall quarterly average
                                                   564
                 Seasonal Index for Quarter 1 =        = 0.83
                                                   679
                                                   539
                 Seasonal Index for Quarter 2 =        = 0.793
                                                   679

     Anna University Chennai                             130
DBA 1651                                                                              PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT



              Seasonal Index for Quarter 3 =
                                                                722.5
                                                                      = 1.064
                                                                                                           NOTES
                                                                 679
                                                                890.5
              Seasonal Index for Quarter 4 =                          = 1.311
                                                                 679

              Exponentially moving average with seasonal and trend corrections (Level
              + Trend + Seasonal)
                  If the past data consists of the level, seasonal and trend pattern, then you
              need three expressions to estimate the three components:-

               ˆ
               Xt = α                   + (1 - α ) (           + Tt-1)
                                                          -1


              Tt = β (               ˆ
                                   - X t -1) + (1 - β ) Tt-1

              It+m =                + (1 - γ ) It

              The forecast model
                     ˆ
                =(X +T )I  t        t     t

              To forecast for the ‘n’ period
γY
β              ˆ       ˆ
              Y = [ X + ( n + 1) T ] I
Yˆtt−1
 ˆ
Yt t
X               t +n           t                    t    t+n

 It −t1
 X
              Exponentially moving average Problem – 5

                       Using the data from the last four quarters in the previous problem and
              the initial seasonal indices computed in the previous problem, determine MAD
              and bias of an Exponential weighted moving average with α = 0.2, = 0.4,
              = 0.5, an initial forecast of 720, an initial trend of 65, and an initial level of 801.
              What is the forecast for quarter 13? For quarter 15? (Assume period 9 as the
              initial period).
                                                      Given
                                                   Table 3.9
               Quarter                    Yt                        Tt Trend    Seasonal
                                   Demand         Forecast                      Index           Forecast
                                                  Level                         It      I t+m
                       9                 709            801              65     0.83              720
                  10                     715                                    0.793
                  11                    1794                                    1.064
                  12                    1242                                    1.311


                                                                  131                            Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES             = 0.2, = 0.4, = 0.5
                 New seasonal Index, It+m 9th quarter is obtained as follows:

                 New seasonal Index, It+m = γ                      + (1 - γ ) It


                                                   =                      + 0.5 * 0.83
                                                   = 0.4425+0.415
                                                   = 0.8575
                 Forecast demand level for the 10th quarter is obtained in the following manner:

                  ˆ
                  Xt = α           + (1 - α ) (             + Tt-1)
                                                       -1


                       0.2 * 709
                     =           + 0.8 * (801+65)
                         0.83
                     = 170.84 + 692.8
                 X 10 = 863.64
                 Trend for the 10th quarter is obtained as follows:
                                   ˆ
                 Tt = β ( - X ) + (1 - β ) Tt -1                   t-1

                      = 0.4 * (863.64 - 801) + 0.6 * (65)
                 T10 = 64.056
                 Forecast for quarter 10 is
                       ˆ
                   =(X +T )I
                           t   t     t

                     = (863.64 + 64.056) * 0.793
                  ˆ
                 Y10 = 735.66
                 Forecast demand level for the 11th quarter is obtained in the following manner:

                  ˆ
                  Xt = α           + (1 - α ) (             + Tt-1)
                                                       -1


                       0.2*715
                     =          + 0.8* (863.64 + 64.056)
                         0.793
                     = 180.32 + 742.156
                  ˆ
                 X 11 = 922.47
                 Trend for the 11th quarter is obtained as follows:
                                ˆ
                 Tt = β ( - X ) + (1 - β ) T
                                     t -1                    t-1

                   = 0.4 * (922.47 - 863.64) + 0.6 * (64.056)
                 T11 = 61.96


     Anna University Chennai                                             132
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


         Forecast for quarter 11 is                                                             NOTES
               ˆ
           = ( X t + Tt ) It
           = (922.47 + 61.96) * 1.064
          ˆ
         Y11 = 1047.43
         Forecast demand level for the 12th quarter is obtained in the following manner:

         ˆ
         Xt = α            + (1 - α ) (        + Tt-1)
                                          -1


               0.2 *1794
             =           + 0.8 * (922.47+61.96)
                 1.064
             = 337.21 + 787.54
         X 12 = 1124.75
         Trend for the 12th quarter is obtained as follows:
                        ˆ
         Tt = β ( - X ) + (1 - β ) T
                             t -1               t-1

           = 0.4 * (1124.75 – 922.47) + 0.6 * ( 61.96)
         T12 = 118.08
         Forecast for quarter 12 is
                ˆ
           =(X +T )I
                 t     t     t

Yˆt −1
 ˆ
Yt t
X          = (1124.75 + 118.08) * 1.311
It −1     ˆ
         Y12 = 1629.35
         Forecast demand level for the 13th quarter is obtained in the following manner:

         ˆ
         Xt = α            + (1 - α ) (        + Tt-1)
                                          -1


               0.2 *1242
             =           + 0.8 * (1124.75 + 118.08)
                 1.311
             = 189.47 + 994.26
          ˆ
         X 13 = 1183.73
         Trend for the 13th quarter is obtained as follows:
                        ˆ
         Tt = β ( - X ) + (1 - β ) T
                             t -1               t-1

           = 0.4*(1183.73 – 1124.75) + 0.6 * (118.08)
         T13 = 93.43
         Forecast for quarter 13 is
                ˆ
           =(X +T )I
                 t     t     t

           = (1183.73 + 93.43) * 0.8575
          ˆ
         Y13 = 1096.02



                                                         133                          Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                           PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                 Forecast for quarter 13 is 1096.02
 NOTES           New seasonal Index, It+m for 10th quarter is obtained as follows:

                 New seasonal Index, It+m = γ                + (1 - γ ) It


                                                   =               + 0.5* 0.793
                                                   = 0.413 + 0.396
                                                   = 0.809
                 It+m for 11th quarter,

                                          It+m = γ         + (1 - γ ) It


                                               =                  + 0.5 * 1.064
                                               = 0.972 + 0.532
                                               = 1.504
                 It+m for 11th quarter,

                                          It+m = γ         + ( 1 - γ ) It


                                               =                  + 0.5 * 1.311
                                          = 0.552 + 0.655
                                   = 1.207
                                                                Table 3.10
                  Quarter          Yt                ˆ
                                                     Xt        Tt Trend       Seasonal
                  Demand Forecast                              Index                            Forecast
                         Level                                                It         It+m

                     9            709                801             65       0.83     0.8575    720
                    10            715         863.64            64.056        0.793    0.809    735.66
                    11          1794          922.47             61.96        1.064    1.504    1047.43
                    12          1242          1124.75           118.08        1.311    1.207    1629.35
                    13                        1183.73            94.43        0.8575            1096.02
                 Forecast for Quarter 15 is
                   t+2
                         = [1183.73 + 3 * (94.43) ] * 1.504
                         = 1467.02 * (1.504)
                  ˆ
                 Y15 = 2206.39


     Anna University Chennai                                     134
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

         Forecast for quarter 15 is 2206.39
                                                                                                  NOTES
                                             n     ˆ
                                             Yi − Yi
         Mean Absolute Deviation, MAD = ∑
                                        i =1    n
                   11 + 20.66 + 746.57 + 387.35
         MAD =
                                        4
              1165.58
               =
                 4
         MAD = 291.39

                ∑
                    n
                                  ˆ
                           (Yi − YI )
                    i =1
         Bias =
                            n
              (−11 − 20.66 + 746.57 − 387.35)
          =
                             4

         =
         Bias = 81.89



327.56   3.2.3.1.2 Econometric models
  4
                 Econometric models may be designed as social science in which the tools of
         economic theory, mathematics, and statistical inference are applied to the analysis of
         economic phenomena.
         The traditional econometric methodology proceeds along the following steps:
              1. Statement of theory.
              2. Development of model.
              3. Specification of econometric model.
              4. Obtaining the data.
              5. Estimation of the parameters of the econometric model.
              6. Hypothesis testing.
              7. Forecasting.
              8. Using the model for central or policy purpose.
         The above steps can be explained by an example:-



                                                  135                                 Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES               1. Economic theory says, other things remaining the same, a reduction of price of
                        a commodity results in increase of quantity demanded for that commodity.
                     2. You can find an inverse relationship and a mathematical model can be developed.
                     3. Use of mathematical model which enables you to develop an economical
                        equation.
                     4. Get the past data for the price and quantity.
                     5. Estimate the parameters for the economic model.
                     6. Use the model as well as parameters.
                     7. The predicted data further used for decision making purpose.
                    Thus econometric models are developed and used for decision making purpose.
                 3.2.3.1.3 Economic Indicators
                      In this kind of model the independent and dependents variables are economic
                 indicators. The variables may be GNP, Personal income, Bank deposits, Inflation,
                 Pre-capita income, Purchasing Power Parity, Wholesale price index, Consumer price
                 index, etc. You should develop a relationship .
                 Y = f (x1, x2, …., xp)
                           Then develop a model using the variable and treat the problem as simple
                 linear regression or multiple regression model. Then use the model to forecast for the
                 future and test the model and parameters using ANOVA and ‘t’ test. The difference
                 between econometric models and economic indicators are, in econometric model you
                 may have more than one equation which you may get to show the relationship between
                 the economic variables and the parameters estimated and it is used for forecasting, but
                 in the case of economic indicator model you will be having single regression model to
                 predict the future.
                 3.2.3.2 Qualitative Methods
                         Qualitative methods of forecasting are adopted where you don’t have past
                 data for projections. But, these techniques are adopted to forecast for new products.
                 These techniques also adopted to validate the forecast which is derived from the
                 quantitative methods mentioned in the early sections.
                 3.2.3.2.1 Market Survey is a technique, where the market / consumer are surveyed to
                 estimate the potential market through various techniques like direct survey, questionnaire,
                 interview methods etc.
                 3.2.3.2.2 Expert Opinion has a method in which the experts are called and they are
                 allowed to discuss to arrive at the decisions related to market potential. This method
                 has a disadvantage of the dominating expert – who may sway away the whole discussion
                 in his way. The docile expert view may not find a remarkable place in the discussion.

     Anna University Chennai                             136
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

3.2.3.2.3 Delphi Technique - the short coming of the expert opinion method is                 NOTES
eliminated in the Delphi technique method. In this method, the experts are not invited for
the discussion, instead the questions is prepared for which is indented and circulated to
all experts. The responses of experts are collected and then the reasoning for their
response will also be collected and then same such process is continued until the consensus
is arrived at. The whole task is carried out by a person called Facilitator.
Review Questions:
    1.List the techniques under qualitative methods.
    2.List the different techniques used in the quantitative methods.
3.2.4 Forecasting evaluation
          Forecasting evaluation tools are many. But each tool is the function of forecast
error that is the difference between the actual sales and the forecasted value. The
forecasting methods are evaluated based on the forecasting evaluation tool.
          The best method is chosen where the forecast error is minimum.Different
forecasting evaluation tools are:
    1. Sum of squared error
    2. Mean squared error
    3. Mean absolute deviation
    4. Tracking signal
Let us assume that
Ft Forecast for the period‘t’
At Actual for the period‘t’
n     number of observation
    1. Sum of Squared Error (SSE)
                             n
                         = ∑ ( Ft − At ) 2
                            t =1

    2. Mean Squared Error (MSE)
                             n
                         = ∑ ( Ft − At ) 2 / n
                            t =1



    3. Mean Absolute Deviation (MAD)
                              n
                          = ∑ Ft − At / n
                             t =1


                                             137                                 Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                  PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                     | Ft – At | is the absolute value
 NOTES           Tracking Signal (TS)
                                         n

                                       ∑F
                                        t =1
                                                t   − At
                                TS =
                                               MAD

                 3.3 CAPACITY PLANNING

                          Capacity planning is a process, which is to be carried out after deciding the
                 product and the long range demand for the product. Suppose if you produce custom
                 made product, the demand is not estimated through the product but in terms of hours.
                 Once if you know the long range demand, the effort needed to determine the amount of
                 resources needed to meet the demand requirement is all about capacity planning.
                     Capacity Measure
                      In this section, you can learn a method of measuring a capacity of system.
                 Consider anything for which you need to measure the capacity, as a system.
                                               Figure 3.6 – Capacity Measures




                 Analyze the system into input, processing and output. When you analyze, see to that,
                 where there is a less variability, choose that side and identify the product, process-
                 resources, the input resources and attach time frame to provide the capacity measure.
                 Measure of Capacity through output
                           Consider an automobile mass production industry. You can’t find much variation
                 in the output side compared to the input resources and processing parts. So the number
                 of cars/time is considered as the measure. Mostly in the case of mass production industry,
                 the output side is considered to measure the capacity.
                 Measure of the capacity through Input
                        Consider an educational institution; here the output side is not taken into
                 consideration because the number of outgoing students per time may vary depending
                 upon the pass result. But the intake is always constant because the intake depends
                 upon the government approved. So, the capacity of educational institution is measured
                 through the input, namely, the number of students intake.

     Anna University Chennai                               138
DBA 1651                                                                          PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Measure of the capacity through processing                                                      NOTES
        Consider a sugarcane industry, the capacity of that industry is not measured in
terms of the output and input. There is a variability in terms of yield rate that means
some times “y” tons of sugarcane may give “x” tons of sugar or some times same “y”
may give more than or less than the “x” tons of sugar. Since variability is existing in both
the input side and output side. Inputs and outputs are not considered for measuring the
capacity. But in the processing side there is a less variability namely the crushing capacity
or the number of tons of sugarcane could be crushed by the crushing machine is
considered to be a best measure to measure the capacity of the sugarcane industry
from the processing point of view.
         In summary, if you want to fix the measure for the capacity, then see the
system as input, processing and output. Find where there is a less variability choose
that side and correspondingly choose the product or the resources to estimate the
measure. The table- 3.11 provides some of the systems and their corresponding measure
to measure the capacity.
Table 3.11 - Capacity planning involves three stages of planning.

 System                  Components of              Unit of Measure
                         System considered
                         for capacity measure

 Automobile Industry     Output                     Number of Automobiles
 Bottling Plant          Output                     Gallons / Day
 University              Input                      Number of students intake
                         per year
 Auto repair shop        Processing                 Number of machines hour per
                         day

 Restaurant              Processing                 Seating Capacity

         Stage 1 involves resource planning this is considered to be long range planning.
In the long range planning, mostly the type and amount of man power requirement, the
capital equipment requirements are to be decided.
          Stage 2 is by considering the resource planning; the rough cut capacity
planning is carried out. Here it is not discussed in detail because it has been discussed
in unit II.
         Stage 3 is capacity requirement planning this is lower level planning. This is
carried out with the input of rough cut capacity planning. This is also discussed in the
unit II.

                                            139                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           Review Questions:
                     1. How do you measure the capacity planning?
                     2. Give an example for the capacity measure based on output?
                 3.4 AGGREGATE PRODUCTION PLANNING
                 3.4.1 Introduction
                         In the operational planning, the long range planning involves capacity planning
                 which involves the determination of long range capacity needs of an organization. Next
                 to the capacity planning is the process of aggregate planning which comes under
                 intermediate range planning. Aggregate planning is done considering capacity planning
                 as a framework.
                 Aggregate Planning
                      Aggregate Planning includes identifying different feasible production alternatives
                 and selecting the best one in order to reduce the production cost to minimum. First let
                 us analyze what is meant by aggregate planning? And why this is called aggregate
                 planning? There are organizations which involve the production of various products
                 and each product has its own measurable dimension. For e.g. Assume that an organization
                 produces three products – Product A, Product B and Product C. Product A is measured
                 in terms of tons, product B is measured in terms of length and Product C in terms of
                 number of units. As you know aggregate planning is a medium range planning, you need
                 not plan the capacity of individual products. Instead you should plan the capacity for
                 aggregate demand by converting the different product demand into an aggregate demand.
                 For doing so, you need to find out a common unit, for the above mentioned three
                 products. If possible you can convert into total hours of production. Here the dimension
                 becomes time. Hence time becomes the aggregate unit. After finding the aggregate
                 requirement then you should plan the capacity for the aggregate requirement. This is a
                 planning done at a broader level and does not include details of individual product.
                 Aggregate planning includes:
                         Staffing plan – related to staff and labor related factors.
                         Production plan – related to production level and inventory.
                 3.4.2 Objectives of Aggregate Planning
                         The main objective is to minimize the cost. The others include:

                         To maximize
                             1. customer service and.
                             2. utilization of resources.

     Anna University Chennai                            140
DBA 1651                                                                       PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

        To minimize
            1. changes in workforce and.
                                                                                            NOTES
            2. changes in production.

3.4.3 Strategies to Meet the Demand Fluctuations

     Suppose the annual requirement is 1200 units, then you can establish a constant
capacity for production as 1200/12 = 100 units per month.

      Figure 3.7                                                   Figure 3.8




        In reality, the demand fluctuates. It could follow seasonal, trend pattern. To
meet these demand fluctuations there are certain strategies to be adopted with regard
to capacity to meet the demand. They are:

        Inventory carrying through constant workforce.
        Subcontracting.
        Variable workforce.
        Variable Working hours.
        Promotional Activities.
        Backordering.


a. Inventory Carrying Through the Constant Workforce

         In this strategy a constant workforce is maintained throughout the planning
period, because of which there is a constant output. But the demand may vary. So
during certain periods there will be excess output and at certain times decreased output.
The excess demand is met through excess output produced through constant workforce
in the previous demands by carrying the inventory.



                                          141                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           Figure 3.9 - Inventory Carrying Through Constant Workforce
                         Inventory carrying through constant workforce
                         Subcontracting
                         Variable workforce
                         Variable Working hours
                         Promotional Activities
                         Backordering
                 a. Inventory Carrying Through Constant Workforce
                          In this strategy a constant workforce is maintained throughout the planning
                 period, because of which there is a constant output. But the demand may vary. So
                 during certain periods there will be excess output and at certain times decreased output.
                 The excess demand is met through excess output produced through constant workforce
                 in the previous demands by carrying the inventory.
                 Figure 3.9 - Inventory Carrying Through Constant Workforce




                 Advantages:

                         This method provides a stable workforce who can give better quality products
                         because of their experience.
                         The employees feel secured about their job and hence high productivity level is
                         maintained.
                         It avoids hiring and firing cost.

                 Disadvantages

                         There will be inventory carrying cost when there is excess output during a
                         period.


     Anna University Chennai                            142
DBA 1651                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

        There is a difficulty in finding a stable workforce that will keep the inventory
        cost at its minimum.
                                                                                           NOTES
        This strategy cannot be followed for perishable goods.

b. Subcontracting

    This is one of the strategies to meet demand fluctuation in which a portion of the
production is placed with a subcontractor or subcontractors.

                           Figure 3.10 - Subcontracting




Advantages

        During the period of the peak demand this is a good alternative if the company
        is unable to produce the demand needs in a given time period.

Disadvantages

        Unless the company has good relations with the suppliers it cannot have much
        a control on the product quality and delivery time.
        If practiced extensively it will result in increased competition among
        subcontractors which in turn leads to subcontractors becoming competitors for
        the firm.

c. Variable Workforce

         This strategy involves hiring and firing of employees based on demand
fluctuations. When the demand increases workforce is hired and when the demand
decreases some amount of workforce is fired.



                                         143                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                               PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                         Figure 3.11                                 Figure 3.12
 NOTES




                 Advantages

                         Variable workforce enables to match between production quantity and demand
                         because of which inventory cost can be kept at minimum.

                 Disadvantages

                         There is a cost involves in hiring and firing the employees.
                         Newly hired employees need training and hence initially productivity might be
                         lowered.
                         Workers might feel unsecured about their job which may in turn affect
                         productivity.

                 d. Variable Working Hours

                       Under this strategy, workforce remains constant but working hours would vary
                 as per the demand. During periods of increased demand employees are made to work
                 overtime. If the demand is low workers are idle but the firm would be paying them full
                 salary. This is a loss to the company.
                                       Figure 3.13 - Variable Working Hours




     Anna University Chennai                           144
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Advantages
                                                                                           NOTES
        It helps to maintain a stable workforce.
        The company can save the cost on inventory.
Disadvantages
        In case of very large demand it is difficult to follow this strategy.
        Overtime wages are higher than regular time wages.
        Employees are idle during periods of low demand.
        During overtime, if the employees are very much stressed, it will lead to a
        decrease in their efficiency of working.
e. Promotional Activities
     During off seasons, there is a decrease in demand. At such times firms can promote
the sales by offering discounts, selling at a lower price, “buy one get one free” sales,
etc. This can be adopted to sell the excess inventory.

Example: Giving off-season discounts for soft drinks during winter season.

f. Backordering

      Here products are supplied to the customers only after a period of waiting time.
i.e., customers are made to wait for the product. As soon as the goods are produced
they are first supplied to back orders. It is the same as shortage of a product.

                             Figure 3.14 - Backordering




                                           145                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                  PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                 If any one of the above strategies is used it is called pure strategy. If a combination of
 NOTES           the above strategies are used it is then called mixed strategy.
                 The Cost Aspects
                    Various costs are associated with aggregate planning strategies. They are explained
                 as follows:
                 Production cost
                     This includes the fixed cost and variable cost associated with production activities
                             Fixed cost – Cost such as rent for the building, salaries, property tax,
                             insurance etc. These cost that does not vary with the volume pf production.
                             Variable cost – The cost of labor, material or overhead and this changes
                             according to the change in volumes of unit produced.
                  Hiring and Firing cost
                         The cost associated with variable workforce size. Costs involved with termination
                 of employee will come under firing cost. Similarly if an employee is recruited temporarily
                 during increased demand there will be cots of training, wages to the new employees.
                 These come under the hiring cost. Hiring cost would include employer expenses on job
                 advertising, screening cost and training of newly hired employees.
                 For employee lay-off, the firm incurs certain cost such as compensation, expenses on
                 legal advice for settlement, counseling of fired employees, etc.
                 Back-order cost
                           This is nothing but the shortage cost, when the demand for a product is met
                 later. In other words, customer is made to wait for the product. This may result in any
                 one of the following
                             The customer may wait for the product, but there is a cost associated with
                             this which is proportional to the waiting time of the customer.
                             The customer may be dissatisfied, and the cost associated with this is
                             independent of waiting time. This is called fixed shortage cost.
                             The customer may also switch to competitor’s products and hence the sale
                             is lost. This may result in loosing the goodwill of the customer also.
                 Overtime Cost
                         In case of variable work hours, the employees may be asked to work overtime
                 during periods of peak demand. This results in paying the employee for the overtime.
                 This cost is usually much more than the regular time cost.
                 3.4.4 Aggregate Planning Methods
                        In this section you can see about the different methods used for aggregate
                 planning. The methods are classified based on the above discussed cost varying linearly

     Anna University Chennai                             146
DBA 1651                                                                       PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

or non- linearly against the activities to be measured. It is also based on whether you
need optimal solution or non-optimal solution.                                              NOTES
The aggregate planning methods can be represented as follows:

                    Table 3.12 - Aggregate Planning Methods
                                           Cost Behavior
 Solution Requirement
                              Linear                       Non-Linear
 Optimal                      Linear Programming           Linear Decision rule
                              - Transportation model       Dynamic Programming
                              - Simplex method
 Non-Optimal                  Trial and Error method       Heuristic method
                                                           Computer research

Real life aggregate planning problem consist of more complex interacting variable and
constraints. So it is difficult to formulate the optimal model. Here, planner resorts to
non-optimal solution. In this section you can understand the Trial and Error method,
Simplex method and Transportation model. Other methods are out of scope and thus
not included.
3.4.4.1 Error Method
         The following example is solved through the Trial and error method. This method
is called as the Trial and Error method because you are following a particular logic to
solve the problem, but there is no guarantee that whether the solution that you got is
optimal or not.
Example 3.1
        A company has estimated the demand for each product for 12 months as follows:

                                       Table 3.13

                              Month              Demand
                                 1                  1200
                                 2                  2400
                                 3                  3000
                                 4                  3200
                                 5                  3500
                                 6                  4000
                                 7                  4500
                                 8                  4700
                                 9                  3200
                               10                   2900
                                11                  4800
                               12                   5000

                                          147                                     Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                 These demands can be met through Regular Time, Overtime and Subcontracting.
 NOTES
                 Regular Time capacity – 200 units
                 Overtime capacity – 1500 units
                 Subcontracting capacity – infinity
                 Regular Time cost, rt = Rs.30 per unit per period
                 Overtime cost, ot = Rs.50 per unit per period
                 Subcontracting cost, ut = Rs.100 per unit per period
                 It is possible to carry inventory from one period to another and carrying cost Cc = Rs.
                 10 per unit. Provide feasible production alternatives.
                 Solution:
                 Table 3.14

                 Month Demand                    RT                              OT                         ST
                                               (2000)                         (1500)                     (infinity)
                    1   1200      1200, 500 (6), 300 (7) - 500      700 (7), 800 (8) 700 units
                                  units required in 6th month is    required in 7th month is
                                  produced in 1 month and carried produced in 1st month
                                                 st

                                  as inventory. 300 (7) - 300 units and carried as inventory.
                                  required in 7th month is produced 800 (8) - 800 units
                                  in 1st month.                     required in 8th month is
                                                 st
                                  produced in 1 month.
                    2   2400                   2000                 1400, 400 (8), 700 (11)
                                                                    400 units required in 8th month
                                                                    is produced in 2nd month and
                                                                    carried as inventory. 700 (11) -
                                                                    700 units required in11th month
                                                                    is produced in 2nd month.

                    3   3000                   2000                 1000, 500(11) 500 units required
                                                                    in11th month is produced in 3rd
                                                                    month and carried as inventory.

                    4   3200                   2000                 1200, 100(11), 200(12)
                                                                    100 units required in11th month is
                                                                    produced in 4th month and carried
                                                                    as inventory. 200 (12) - 200 units
                                                                    required in12th month is produced
                                                                    in 4th month.

                    5   3500                   2000                           1500

                    6   4000                   2000                           1500

                    7   4500                   2000                           1500

                    8   4700                   2000                           1500



     Anna University Chennai                                148
DBA 1651                                                                         PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 9     3200                    2000            1200, 300 (12) 300 units
                                               required in 12th month is
                                                                                           NOTES
                                               produced in 9th month and
                                               carried as inventory.

 10    2900                    2000            900, 600 (12) 600 units
                                               required in 12th month is
                                               produced in 10th month
                                               and carried as inventory.

 11    4800                    2000                      1500

 12    5000                    2000                      1500              400

                          12

Total production cost = ∑ C t, where Ct is the cost incurred for the month ’t’.
                          t=1


C1 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) = Rs. 135000
C2 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) = Rs. 135000
C3 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) = Rs. 135000
C4 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) = Rs 135000
C5 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) = Rs 135000
C6 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) + (500*50) = Rs 160000
C7 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) + (300*60) + (700*60) = Rs 195000
C8 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) + (800*70) + (400*60) = Rs 215000
C9 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) = Rs 135000
C10 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) = Rs 135000
C11= (2000*30) + (1500*50) + (700*90) + (500*80) + (100*70) = Rs 245000
C12 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) + (200*80) + (300*30) + (600*20) + (400*100)
    = Rs 212000
Total Production cost = Rs.19, 721,000

3.4.4.2 Linear programming Model
          The aggregate planning problem can be formulated as a Linear Programming
Model when cost behavior is linear and the optimal solution is required you can Two
kinds of linear programming model. One is for constant workforce and the other for
variable workforce as shown below.

Fixed Work Force Model

  The following notation is used to describe the above model.
       vit   = unit production cost for product I in period t (exclusive of labor cost)
       cit   = inventory carrying cost per unit of product I held in stock from period


                                         149                                     Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                  PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                       t to t+1
 NOTES                   rt = cost per man hour of regular labor in period t
                         ot      = cost per man hour of overtime labor in period t
                         d it    = forecast demand for product i in period t
                         ki      = man hours required to produce one unit of product i
                         (r m) t = total man hours of regular labor available i period t
                         (o m) t = total man hours of overtime labor available i period t
                         Iio     = initial inventory level for product i
                         Wo = initial regular work force level
                         T= time horizon, in periods
                         N       = total number or products

                 Decision variables

                      Xit = units of product i to be produced in period t
                      Iit = units of product to be left over as inventory in period t
                      Wit = man hours of regular labor used during period t
                      Ot = man hours of overtime labor used during period t

                 Fixed work force cost model is:
                             N    T                   T
                         Minimize Z = ? ? (vit Xit+cit Iit) + ? (rt Wt + o tOt )
                             i =1 t = 1               t=1



                                      Subject to:
                                              Xit + Ii, t-1 - Iit = dit
                                               N
                                               ? ki Xit – Wt – Ot = 0
                                               i =1

                                               0 ?Wt ? (rm) t
                                               0 ? Ot ? (om) t
                                               Xit, Iit ? 0

                         The objective function expresses minimization of variable production, inventory,
                 regular and overtime labor costs.

                         Constraint one represent production – inventory balance. Second constraint
                 defines total manpower to be used in every period. Last two constraints impose lower
                 and upper bounds on the use of regular and overtime man hours in every time period.

                 Variable workforce models

                     When there is a change the workforce level to meet demand fluctuations, the
                 workforce becomes a decision variable and hiring and firing cost will be part of objective


     Anna University Chennai                                    150
DBA 1651                                                                           PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

function. The model below also includes backordering cost.
                                                                                             NOTES
     Ht = man hours of regular work force hired in period t
     Ft = man hours of regular work force laid off in period t
     I+t = units ending inventory of product I in period t
     I-t = units of product I backordered at the end of period t
     bt = cost per unit of backorder of product i carried from period t to t+1
     ht = cost of hiring one man hour in period t
     ft = cost of laying off one man hour in period t
     p = overtime allowed as a fraction of the regular hours

        Variable workforce model can be formulated as follows:
            N    T                        T
Minimize Z = ? ? (vit Xit+cit I+it+bit I-it) + ? (rt Wt + o tOt + ht Ht + ft Ft)
            i =1 t = 1                    t=1



        Subject to
               Xit + I+i, t-1 – I-i, t-1 + I+it+ I-it= dit
                     N
                     ? Ki Xit – Wt – Ot ? 0
                     i =1

                Wt – Wt-1– Ht + Ft = 0
                -pWt + Ot ? 0
                Xit, I+it, I-it ? 0
                Wt, Ot, Pt, Ht, Ft ? 0
                i = 1,….N
                t = 1,…N
        The first constraint represents the production inventory balance equation.
        The Second constraint limits the production to variable man power. It is possible
        at some point regular work force Wt will be partially idle therefore is justified.
        The Third constraint define the change in workforce during period t i.e. Wt -
               Wt-1= Ht - Ft. Labor is added when Ht>0 or subtracted whenever Ft > 0.
        The Fourth constraint imposes an upper bound on the total overtime available
                in period t as a function of regular work force size.

Example 3.2

     The following data pertain to demand forecast, production alternatives, and costs
for the XYZ Company which manufactures a cleaning fluid used in hospitals.


                                                 151                               Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                  PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                                                    Table 3.15

                  Capacity Limit, tons
                  Quarter      Estimated       Regular         Overtime Unit cost
                  Demand       Production      production      per ton
                      1          210             210            15          rt = Rs.2000
                      2          200             210            15          ot= Rs.3000
                      3          170             180            10          Cc = Rs.200 per period
                      4          230             210            15

                 Furthermore, the cost of hiring is Rs.4800 per unit increase in output (ht= Rs.4800 per
                 unit) while the cost of firing is Rs.72000 per unit decrease in output ( ft = Rs.72000 per
                 unit). The starting regular production rate is Po = 220 tons from the work-force level of
                 the previous period.
                 Formulate the aggregate planning problem as a linear programming problem using simplex
                 method and solve it if computer program is available.

                 Solution:

                           Demand data            Regular Time Capacity              Overtime Capacity

                           D1 = 210                      X1 = 210                       O1= 15
                           D2 = 200                      X2 = 250                       O2 = 15
                           D3 = 170                      X3 = 180                       O3 = 10
                           D4 = 230                      X4 = 210                       O4 = 15

                 Regular time cost per unit, rt = Rs. 2000
                 Over Time cost per unit, ot = Rs. 3000
                 Carrying cost per unit per period, Cc = Rs.200
                 Hiring cost per unit, ht = Rs. 4800
                 Firing cost per unit, ft = Rs. 72000
                 Starting regular production rate P0 = 220 tons
                 Initial inventory I0= 0 (assume)

                 A linear programming problem for the above aggregate planning problem is presented
                 below.
                 Xt, Ot = Units produced during regular time and overtime respectively.
                 At, Rt = Number of units increased or decreased respectively during consecutive periods.
                 Dt = Sales forecast

                 Minimize z = 2000 (X1+ X2+ X3) + 4800 (A1+ A2+ A3+ A4) + 7200 (R1+ R2+ R3+
                 R4) + 3000 (O1+ O2+ O3+ O4) + 200 (I1+I2+ I3+ I4)


     Anna University Chennai                             152
DBA 1651                                                                     PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Subject to constraints:
                                                                                       NOTES
                X1 ? 210
                X2 ? 250
                X3 ? 180
                X4 ? 210
                O1 ? 15
                O2 ? 15
                O3 ? 10
                O4 ? 15
                R1 + O1 - I1 = 210
                X2 + O2 + I1 - I2 =200
                X3 + O3 + I2 - I3 = 170
                X4 + O4 + I3 - I4 = 230
                X1 - A1 ? 220
                -X1 + X2 - A2 ? 0
                -X2 + X3 - A3 ? 0
                -X3 + X4 - A4 ? 0
                X1 + R1 ? 220
                -X1 + X2 + R2 ? 0
                -X2 + X3 + R3 ? 0
-X3 + X4 + R4 ? 0 Xt, R t, A t, O t, I t ?0 where t = 1,2,3,4

The results are given below :

                                      Table 3.16

        Quarter I          Quarter II       Quarter III         Quarter IV
        P1 = 210           P2 = 210         P3 = 180            P4= 180
        O1 = 0             O2 = 5           O3 =10              O4 =15
        I1=0               I2 = 15          I3 = 35             I4 = 0
        A1 = 0             A2 = 0           A3 = 0              A4 = 0
        R1 = 10            R2 = 0           R3 = 30             R4 = 0


Minimum Cost is = Rs. 19,48000
The above results are shown diagrammatically as follows:


                                          153                                Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES


                                                            Figure 3.14




                 3.4.4.3 Transportation Model
                      A generalized transportation model for more than one alternative (for production)
                 can be represented as follows:

                                           Table 3.17 - Aggregate Planning Methods

                                     I            II                III        IV        Cost   Supply

                     I               r            rt + Cc           rt+2 Cc    rt+3 Cc    rt    S1

                                     o            ot+ Cc            ot+2 Cc    ot+3 Cc    ot

                                     u            ut+ Cc            ut+2 Cc    ut+3 Cc    ut

                     II              rt + Cs      rt                rt+ Cc     ot+2 Cc    rt    S2

                                     o t + Cs     ot                ot+ Cc     vt+2 Cc    ot

                                     ut + Cs      ut                ut+ Cc     ut+2 Cc    ut

                     III             rt + 2Cs     rt + Cs           rt         ot + Cc    rt    S3

                                     Ot
                                         + 2Cs    Ot
                                                       + Cs         ot         vt + Cc    ot

                                     ut+ 2Cs      ut + Cs           ut         ut + Cc    ut

                     IV              r t+ 3Cs     rt+ 2Cs           R t+ Cs    rt         rt    S4

                                     Ot
                                         + 3Cs    ot + 2Cs          o t + Cs   ot         ot

                                     ut+ 3Cs      ut+ 2Cs           ut + Cs    ut         ut

                     Demand               D1           D2                D3     D4

                           Where
                                   rt = regular time cost
                                   ot = over time cost

     Anna University Chennai                                  154
DBA 1651                                                                         PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                    ut = subcontracting cost
                    Cs = shortage cost
                                                                                                NOTES
                    Cc = carrying cost
             In case of back ordering, for three periods in advance the shortage cost will be
    three times. i.e. 3Cs will be added to the existing labor cost. Similarly for two periods
    backordering 2Cs will be added to the existing labor cost.
           Cc represents carrying cost. Products produced during a period for usage in
    subsequent periods will have a carrying cost. For e.g. 3Cc indicates that product had
    been carried over three months.
    Example 3.3
            A producer is considering either producing or procuring a certain part. The
    relevant data are as follows:

                                          Table 3.18
                                                       PERIOD
                                             I         II  III IV
                Production capacity
                In house                     20        20    20        20
                Outside Vendor               40        40    40        40
∞
                Unit cost
                In House                     12        13    15        16
                Outside vendor               15        15    18        20
                Demand                       70        40    60        90

         Initial inventory is 20 units and the holding cost is Rs.8 per unit per period. What
    is the optimal aggregate plan?

                                          Solution:
                                          Table 3.19
                                    I       II         III        IV        Supply

               Initial Inventory    8       16         24         32        20
                         I          12      20         28         36        20
                                    15      23         31         39        40
                        II          ∞       13         21         29        20
                                            15         23         31        40
                        III                            15         23        20
                                                       18         26        40
                        IV                                        16        20
                                                                  20        40
                   Demand           70      40         60         90

                                                 155                                 Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                         The holding cost is Rs. 8 per period. Therefore for the second, period it will be
 NOTES           Rs.16 (8+8), for third period it will be Rs. 24 (8+8+8) and for the fourth period it will
                 be Rs 32.
                 In a similar manner it is calculate for subsequent periods.
                         Infinity symbol indicates that product produced during a period is sold during
                 that period or subsequent periods and not in previous periods. i.e. there is no back
                 order.

                          Solving the above, using Vogel’s approximation method

                                                       Table 3.20




                 Initial feasible solution:

                 Transportation cost = (20*8) + (12*20) + (30*15) + (23*10) + (13*20) + (10*15) +
                 (23*30) + (15*20) + (18*10) + (26*30) + (16*20) + (40*20)
                  = Rs. 4560

                 Optimality Test – Modi Method

                     Conditions:

                              Individual allocated cells should be equal to m+n-1
                                  m – number of rows
                                  n – number of columns

     Anna University Chennai                            156
DBA 1651                                                                                     PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                Test for optimality on initial feasible solutions                                           NOTES
                Write the matrix of the cost of allotted cells
                Determine a set of m+n numbers
                             Ui = 1,2….m
                             Vj = 1,2,….n
                             Crs = ur+vs, r- supply, s-demand

                                                  Table 3.21

                                    I            II             III         IV         Ui
            Initial Inventory       8                                                  U1 = 0
                                    12                                                 U2 = 4
                    I               15           23                                    U3 = 7
                                                 13                                    U4 = -3
                    II                           15                                    U5 = -1
                                                                15                     U6 = -9
                    III                                         18          26         U7 = -6

                    IV                                                      16         U8 = -16
                                                                20          U9 = -12
∞                   Vj              V1 = 8       V2 = 16        V3 = 24     V4 = 32

    Cost (Cij) of un-allotted cells

                                             Table 3.22

                                             I             II         III        IV
                  Initial Inventory                        16         24         32
                          I                                20         28         36
                                                                      31         39
                          II                 ∞                        21         29
                                                                                 31
                          III                                                    23


                          IV



    Ui + Vj for un-allotted cells




                                                      157                                         Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                                                       Table 3.23

                                                         I         II     III    IV
                               Initial Inventory                   16     24     32
                                       I                           20     28     36
                                                                          31     39
                                     II                  5                21     29
                                                         7                       31
                                     III                 -1        7             23
                                                         -2        10
                                     IV                  -8        0      8
                                                         -4        4      12


                 Cij – (Ui + Vj) for un-allotted cells

                                                             Table 3.24

                                                         I         II     III    IV
                               Initial Inventory                   0      0      0
                                     I                             0      0      0
                                                                          0      0
                                     II                                   0      0
                                                                                 0
                                     III                                         0


                                     IV




                         Since there are no negative values in the above table the initial feasible solution
                 is the optimal solution i.e. The optimal transportation cost = (20*8) + (12*20) +
                 (30*15) + (23*10) + (13*20) + (10*15) + (23*30) + (15*20) + (18*10) + (26*30)
                 + (16*20) + (40*20) = Rs. 4560.

                 Review Questions:

                     1. When do you go for the aggregate planning?

                     2. Discuss the optimal method when the cost behaves linearly?

                     3 .Discuss the optimal methods when the cost behaves non linearly?



     Anna University Chennai                                 158
DBA 1651                                                                         PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

3.5 PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT                                                             NOTES
        The Activity namely the new product design or development in the existing
product arises because of an opportunity available to tap the untapped market or a
thing required to solve the problem. Like medicine to cure the AIDS or Cancer, these
are opportunities to solve the problem. These kind of opportunity problem leads the
organization to manufacture new product. Sometimes the demand for the existing
product declining. The organization thinks of reviving the product by adding some
improvement or the features in the existing product. Both the functions come under the
process of product design and development.

3.5.1 Product life cycle

        Understating in which phase of the product life cycle, the product is there is the
basis for the any product design and development activity. As you know any product
has many brands, example, if you consider refer generator. You have Samsung, brands.
Each brand has the demand pattern the summation of the entire brand’s demand pattern
provides information in which phase the product is,

                          Figure 3.15 - The Pattern of PLC




Introduction
        In this phase there is a more risk involved there is possibility that the product is
not accepted by the customers. This results in early exit of the product. This is all
about the acceptability of the product.
        In this phase the competition will be less if the product in the introduction phase,
you should not think about going for heavy investment because of more chance for
infant mortality of the product.
Growth
       In this phase the people know more about the product that increases the
potentiality of the demand. The competition gradually picks up here you should

                                            159                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           concentrate more on the attributes like quality, performance, delivery time, serviceability
                 that helps the organization to establish the product as a leader among the players. At
                 present in Indian cell phone is in the growth stage of PLC. Comparatively the profit the
                 maturity stage will be high.
                 Maturity Stage
                        In this phase more competitors will be there and here all well established facilities
                 were available and everyone is enjoy is the economy scale. But profit margins of the
                 competitor are less. Because the facilities may be in reality at the end of their life cycle.
                 Because markets are matured, organization finds it difficult to capture a small increase
                 in market share. Packed mass consumption goods, soap are for examples which are in
                 the maturity state of the PLC.
                 Decline
                           After maturity phase, the product enters into the declining phase. The reasons
                 may be attributed to people would have found another alternative for the product,
                 usually for the most of the time the business cycle and product cycle go together. In this
                 case, if the economy is in the declining stage then there is a chance that product may
                 enter into the declining stage. In such a case the organization has to make all effort to
                 revive the product by adding some features in the product or family declining stage
                 early then this becomes big problem for the organization because you can not utilize
                 facility available. This problem is made in the case of mass production industry. This
                 problem is severe if the industry is of the mass production type because the less demand
                 the investment made in technology becomes turtle. At present the black and white TV
                 is in the declining phase of PLC.
                         Because of Organization and lot of development in the field of electronic goods
                 the product life cycle is so short may be three or four gems. The organization should be
                 more vigilant in introducing more number of products within short span of time.
                         With this understanding of product life cycle curve, another activity inter turned
                 with the use product life cycle namely the new product development process in this
                 next section.
                 3.5.2 New Product development process
                        In the last section you have studied about the product life cycle. Suppose the
                 produce is in the declining stage of life cycle course, if you allow the situation to continue
                 the demand for the product decline and the organizational resources are under utilized.
                 The cost of the product increases and your market share declines at faster rate and you
                 may have to close down the plant soon.
                          But as soon as the demand for the product starts declining, the organization has
                 to face different problems like-

     Anna University Chennai                              160
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

        1.   Under utilization of resources.                                                  NOTES
        2.   Cost of the product increase.
        3.   Price of your product increases.
        4.   More inventory.
        5.   Overhead burden etc.
         These problems are converted into an opportunity in terms of developing an
existing product by adding some features according to the requirement of the customers
or you can go for introducing a new product which could use the available facilities. So
the starting point for the new product development process is the concept generation.
3.5.2.1 Concept Generation
        To solve the problem or utilize the opportunity available the idea may come
from different sources, the sources may be-
        1.   The basic research in the field of physics, chemistry and biology etc.
        2.   Technology innovations.
        3.   Ideas from the staff in R & D Production, quality control etc.
        4.   Ideas from competitors consumers.
         The above ideas should be in line with the first organization’s mission statement,
or it should not disturb much the on going marketing or the idea should utilize the
existing state of inventory.
3.5.2.2 Concept testing
        A preliminary analysis different project ideas are screened using scoring models
ATR techniques etc.
        In the preliminary analysis different product ideas are screened using the
techniques
                                       Table 3.25




                                           161                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                  PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           ATR MODEL (Awareness – Trial – Repeat) model:
                 The basic formula is given below:
                         Profits = Buying units x percent aware x percent trial x percent availability x
                         percent repeat x annual units bought (revenue per unit – costs per unit).
                 For e.g: Assume that an organization is developing a new cleaning powder for washing
                 sports can
                     1. Number of owners: 1,00,000
                     2. Percentage who will become aware of the power: 30 percent
                     3. Percentage of those aware who will buy it: 10 percent
                     4. Percentage of the retail outlet store the powder : 30 percent
                     5. Percentage of the triers who like the product and but more : 40 percent
                 Number of pockets a typical user will but in a year: 10 pocket
                 Revenue the unit Rs.1000
                 Cost Per unit Rs.700
                 Profit according to ATR model
                          = 1, 00,000 x .3 x .10 x .3 x .4 x 10m (1000 – 700)
                          = 10,800
                 like ATR, scoring model and the best ideas are chosen for
                 The outcome of the screening is the product definition or the benefits the new item is to
                 yield.
                 3.5.2.3 Technical Development
                     After concept testing is over, ‘you should see that whether you have technical
                 capacity and resources appropriate to produce or provide the product / service.
                      In technical development, the output is the prototype of the product. In general, in
                 any product design & development activity the product specifications for the product
                 are to be arrived through market survey, for example, the product specification for a
                 car represent the color, the size of the car, fuel efficiency power of the engine. Product
                 specification usually collected from the customer. The customer may not be knowing
                 the technical details about the product, so his/her requirement is obtained through the
                 word of the mouth.
                         Then the product specifications are converted into engineering specification.
                 To start with, first what kind of material is to be purchased when you purchase the
                 material, it should be economical and the purchased material do not hamper the
                 performance, reliability of the final product were lot of value analysis and value
                 engineering application helps to choose the right material without affecting the function
                 for which it is indented for economically. Here you should see the product where it is


     Anna University Chennai                             162
DBA 1651                                                                          PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

positioned. For example: if you are manufacturing car for luxury purpose then you may           NOTES
prefer the leather seat rather than vinyl seat. So, when you design a product. To whom
the product is targeted for according the material selection and supplier selection take
place. When you select the material you should see the process or the resources
available because selecting the high quality material may demand high processing
requirement that results in high production cost which allows your product to become
less competitive.
       It is mentioned in the process paragraph now we can develop some time on the
product specification, tolerance and allowances.
         Allowable deviation from the targeted value is the tolerance, example, shaft
diameter designed by the designer to satisfy the final requirement of product aims a
target value of 2 cm but you can not produce 2 cm diameter consistently. So because
of in built nature of the processing system, there exists variety in the processing. For
that you need data like process capability input to fix the tolerance limit etc. for example:
the existing process capability of a productive system is to produce 2 ±.05 cm, then it
is the design demands for more than 2.05 and less 1.95 cms (10) 2 ±.10. This is the
specification required then there is no problem but if you design a shaft of 2 ±.03 cm,
then the productive system may produce more back quality product. So in the engineering
design one should have the input like process capability to fix tolerance engineering
specification.
3.5.2.4 Standardization and Inter-changeability
         When you design a product you should not design in such a manner that all the
parts sustainability are of your own design because after your product has been
purchased by the customer put into use, if there is a problem in the product, it is difficult
to service the product because of the components are of you own design and availability
of the components become problem. Even there is an availability you need to have
more components that result in more inventory cost at the same time the customers also
put into lot of trouble in terms of idle time of the product. The problem is a complex
one if your product is a capital equipment product. In this case your product design
consists of components subassembly of standard product available.
        In your product suppose if you have came to use standard components like tin
and steel sheets, nuts, bolts, washers transistors, capacitors etc. You try to use the
same. Instead you need not design on your own for those components you design
should be in such manner that the above mentioned standard products could be transit
may use. Usage of the standardized components or products lower the cost of production
reduces the inventory cost. It case the maintenance and repair that result in less cost. It
also helps in more easier and effective quality control.
      The concept of standardization spread to the service industry also, because
nowadays for fast food restaurant the standard mix is always speedy according to the


                                            163                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           type of order they mix. Different mix and service requires food at lesser time. Even in
                 the house you need not prepare all the cooking ingredients as it was done in the olden
                 day. Nowadays standard ingredients are available and only mix with less time you can
                 get what you want.
                          Here we are not saying that all the time your should use the standard components
                 if your product requires. If possible any new design of the components reduces the
                 cost of the product, and then instead of going for standard component you can use your
                 newly designed components. This serves the purpose of continuing innovation and design
                 of the organization.
                 3.5.2.5 Commercialization
                          In commercialization you must decide to whom this item will be targeted, what
                 will be the value of the product and how do we get the value into it, how it will be
                 positioned relative will be the product’s brand, building support around the organization
                 for the marketing actions to follow and overcoming problems that arise in the field and
                 which might cause the firm to fail to achieve the necessary awareness, that and repeat
                 use which are discussed in the concept testing phase.
                         Once market trial is over, then the products are produced according to the
                 plan. This involves detailed production plan, quality plan, and story and distribution
                 strategy. All the actions are carried out by keeping in the company’s strategy objectives
                 and goals.
                 The above explained new product development process is shown in a flow chart.

                                             Figure 3.16 : Commercialization




     Anna University Chennai                            164
DBA 1651                                                                            PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Review Question:
                                                                                                  NOTES
        1.       Highlight the stages of Product Life Cycle.
        2.       Why products fall into maturity stage?
        3.       How would you expand the life time of saturated product?
3.6 EXPERT SYSTEM IN PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT
        Strategy planning plays a vital role in defining where a corporation wants to be
in the near and long terms, how they will get there, and how they will monitor their
progress in getting there. These are derivations of the Total Manufacturing Assurance
three C’s: Create, Control, and Critique.
        The same applies to the product development test program. The test program
strategy must reflect the overall corporate business strategy.
        Combining strategic planning with expert system technology enables the engineer
or manager to quickly define the “best” or “optimal” test program for a given product
development effort. The expert system makes this happen by using “expert” knowledge
derived from its knowledge base of engineering, marketing, and customer requirements.
         To make money and enjoy long term survival, a company must be productive
and efficient. That statement is very simple and acceptable in light of the evermore
competitive business environments being experienced. It thus is imperative to eliminate,
or minimize, company bureaucracy. Bureaucracy causes aggravation. It directly
correlates to unnecessary company overhead. It is impractical to think that overhead
can ever be completely eliminated. It can be optimized and in this case that means
minimized. There is still overhead, but it is value-added overhead. To make this happen
three things must be readily available in the planning process:
        1.     Expert knowledge about testing,
        2.     Expert knowledge about customer market requirements and
        3.     A mechanism to get all this expert knowledge into one room to quickly
               make good decision(s).
         The expert system facilitates “Optimized strategic test program planning”. An
engineer or manager defines the “best’ or “optimal” test program for a given product
development effort. The expert system forces this by using “expert” knowledge derived
from its knowledge base of engineering, marketing, and customer requirements.
3.6.1 Expert System Development
         Product reliability, safety, and quality requirements are a key element of a strategic
business plan since they reflect what the customer needs. These product design
performance parameters in turn provide a basis for defining the test program necessary
as part of the overall product assurance strategy. The product assurance strategic plan
balances many interrelated variables and factors.


                                             165                                     Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                 These include:
 NOTES
                     1.     Establishing quantitative performance goals (LWBF, MTTR, service-life,
                            defect level, etc.).
                     2.     Implementing a product development management control and tracking
                            activity to ensure timely outputs consistent with major design and program
                            milestones.
                     3.     Performing and implementing analyses and quality checks, audits, and controls
                            to ensure that all test, inspection, and screen data are complete.
                     4.     Performing a fully coordinated product development program, which
                            emphasizes failure analysis and corrective action, and provides growth/
                            verification of specified design requirements.
                     5.     Exposing design deficiencies and initiating corrective action in a timely manner.
                     6.     Maximizing achieved availability to minimize overall life cycle costs and
                            enhance the probability of commercial success.
                     7.     Identifying, evaluating and eliminating design hazards and risks.
                     8.     Applying historical data and lessons learned into the design process.
                     9.     Minimizing unforeseen impacts on overall project cost and schedule.
                            It is desirable to assure that the above factors (and others) are adequately
                 considered during a product development test program. It is through the strategic planning
                 that it is possible to initiate the “best” program. That is, one that ensures critical project
                 decisions involving significant investment of resources are keyed to the achievement of
                 specific reliability, safety, and quality requirements, as well as other performance
                 requirements. Obviously, specific test program objectives are dependent on the
                 technology under consideration, the nature of the product, the customer, and other
                 factors as appropriate. But merely defining a test program strategy orients product
                 development, and ultimately manufacture, toward a practical, serviceable, and affordable
                 commercial product.
                           The expert system output is a baseline test program structure which includes
                 characteristic parameter values and ranges for each of the basic test categories. This
                 strategically defined test program is then tailored, as necessary, to meet the specific
                 product development project’s needs while adhering to cost and time constraints.
                 Regardless of which baseline structure is selected, the basic concept of a strategically
                 well-planned, logically structured and phased test program, where each subsequent
                 test is designed to reflect the knowledge gained during the proceeding test and design
                 effort, applies. The expert system provides assurance that the cornerstone (i.e., test
                 program) of a successful product development project is put in place.
                 3.6.2 Putting System Together
                        The very first task in the expert system development process is to identify the
                 domain, the domain expert and the knowledge expert. The domain of the system must

     Anna University Chennai                              166
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

be properly scoped out, well defined, sufficiently focused, and capable of solution by
the use of expertise. A domain expert, or experts, must be found; either a person who
                                                                                         NOTES
can solve the task, a collection of well documented case studies, or perhaps a good
textbook. A knowledge engineer, or someone willing to learn to become one, must be
appointed to the task. Finally, the appropriate development platform must be acquired
which can be an expert system shell with some sort of development environment. The
physical expert system is then developed via the following steps.
        Step I—Structural Design
        Step 2—Knowledge Acquisition
        Step 3—Coding
        Step 4—Validation
        Step 5—Growth
The result is a working expert system
Review Questions:
        1. Expand 3C’s.
        2. Discuss the steps through which the Physical Expert System is developed.
3.7 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND DRAWING
3.7.1 Introduction
        When we think of Computer Aided Design and Drafting (CADD), certain
questions arise that we never think of while working on the drawing board. We do not
use the essential drawing board tools: paper, pencil, T-square, compass, eraser or
scale, yet still have to design or make a drawing. When even one of these tools is
missing we know how aggravating it can be. With CADD we don’t need even one of
them!
        CADD is an electronic tool that enables you to make quick and accurate
drawings with the use of a computer. Unlike the traditional methods of making drawings
on a drawing board, with CADD you can sit back in an easy chair and create wonderful
drawings just by clicking the buttons of a keyboard. Moreover, drawings created with
CADD have a number of advantages over drawings created on a drawing board.
CADD drawings are neat, clean and highly presentable. Electronic drawings can be
modified quite easily and can be presented in a variety of formats.
         A decade ago, CADD was used only for specific engineering applications that
required high precision. Due to CADD’s high price, only a few professionals could
afford it. In recent years, however, computer prices have decreased significantly and
more and more professionals are taking advantage of CADD.


                                         167                                 Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                    There are hundreds of CADD programs available in the CADD industry today.
                 Some are intended for general drawing work while others are focused on specific
                 engineering applications. There are programs that enable you to do 2D drawings, 3D
                 drawings, renderings, shadings, engineering calculations, space planning, structural design,
                 piping layouts, plant design, project management, etc. There is a CADD program for
                 virtually every engineering discipline you can think of.
                         CADD is primarily intended for single-line drafting. It has very limited capabilities
                 to create artistic impressions. However, CADD’s 3D and rendering features are
                 fascinating. You can create a 3D model of an object and view it from any angle. With
                 proper shading and rendering, it can be made to look picture perfect!
                 3.7.2 What to Expect from CADD?
                         You can do amazing things with CADD that you never thought possible while
                 creating drawings with a pen or pencil. The following are some of the important
                 capabilities that make CADD a powerful tool:
                         o     Presentations
                         o     Flexibility in editing
                         o     Units & accuracy levels
                         o     Storage and access for drawings
                         o     Sharing CADD drawings
                         o     Project reporting
                         o     Engineering analysis
                         o     Computer Aided Manufacturing (CAM)
                         o     Design
                         o     Add-on programs
                 Presentations
                         You can create fine drawings with hundreds of colors, line types, hatch patterns,
                 presentation symbols, text styles, etc. Even if you don’t like something about your
                 presentation after you have finished it, you can instantly change it. It takes only a few
                 simple steps to change the text style, color or line type and you can print a fresh copy of
                 the drawing every time. This kind of luxury is available only when working with CADD.
                          There are a number of ready-made presentation symbols and hatch patterns
                 available in CADD that can be used to enhance the look of drawings. For example, a
                 site planner can instantly add tree symbols, shrubs, pathways, human figures, and other
                 landscape elements to create a site plan. Similarly, an architect can use ready-made
                 symbols of doors, windows, furniture, etc., to make a presentation.
                         In addition to preparing impressive presentations on paper, you can use CADD
                 to make on-screen presentations. You can plug your computer into a projector and
                 present your ideas on-screen. Advanced CADD programs allow you to created animated

     Anna University Chennai                              168
DBA 1651                                                                         PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

images as well. You can illustrate how a building would appear while walking through it,       NOTES
or how a machine assembly will operate when different machine parts move.
Flexibility in Editing
          CADD provides the flexibility to make quick alterations to drawings. You can
erase any portion of a drawing with pinpoint accuracy. It takes only seconds to do a
job that could take hours on a drawing board. In many cases, you do not even have to
erase to make the change. You can rearrange the existing components of the drawing to
fit the new shape. This enables you to analyze design options with minimal effort.
The following are some of the editing capabilities of CADD:
        o    Move or copy drawing elements.
        o    Enlarge or reduce parts of a drawing.
        o    Add one drawing to another.
        o    Stretch a drawing to fit new dimensions.
        o    Make multiple copies of a drawing element.
        o    Change the size, style and fonts of text.
        o    Change units of measure of dimensions.
Units & Accuracy Levels
        CADD allows you work with great accuracy. If you need to create highly
accurate geometrical shapes, CADD is the answer. It can help avoid time-consuming
mathematical calculations.
   You can work with different units of measure, such as architectural units, engineering
units, scientific units and surveyor’s units. These units can be represented in various
formats commonly used by professionals.
Example 3.4: When working with engineering units, you can specify whether all the
dimensions should be represented in inches, feet-inches, centimeters, or meters. Similarly,
you can choose angular units of measurement such as decimal degrees, minutes, seconds
or radians.
        You can set an extremely high accuracy for the units of measurement. You can
work with as high precision as 1/1000th of an inch! However, such accuracy is seldom
required; you will often need to set it to a lesser accuracy to avoid unnecessary fractions.
         In general, when you need to work on a large scale drawing such as a plan of
a township, you may want to set a lesser degree of accuracy, say 1'-0". The computer
will round off all the measurements to the next foot and you won’t see any fractions less
than a foot. When you need to work on a minute detail, you can set a higher degree of
accuracy such as 1/8th or 1/64th of an inch.


                                            169                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           Storage and Access of Drawings
                         It is quick and convenient to organize for a CADD drawing in the computer.
                 You can have thousands of drawings on a computer’s hard disk and can open any one
                 of them within seconds.
                          A computer’s electronic filing system has the following advantages over the
                 traditional filing system:
                       o       It enables you to create a highly organized environment
                       o       It contributes to large savings in working space
                      o     An electronic drawing never gets old and faded. Any time you need a
                 drawing, you can print a new copy from disks.
                 Sharing CADD Drawings
                        The electronic drawings can be shared by a number of users, allowing them to
                 coordinate their tasks and work as a team. This is accomplished by connecting different
                 computers via a network.
                 Example 3.5: In a building project, different professionals such as architects, engineers
                 and construction managers can use the same electronic drawings to coordinate building
                 services. If a change is made to the drawings, this information becomes available to all
                 the team members instantly.
                          With the use of modems and the Internet, it has become far easier to share
                 information. Professionals located in different cities can instantly send electronic drawings
                 via telephone lines.
                         You can publish your drawings on the Internet for anyone to see. Most CADD
                 programs include special functions that allow you to export drawings in a format that
                 can be viewed on the Internet.
                 Project Reporting
                      The computer can be used to prepare project reports such as records of areas,
                 quantities and cost estimates. Using the database capabilities of CADD, you can link
                 specific non-graphic information (such as text or value) with the graphic elements of the
                 drawing. The non-graphic information is stored in a database and can be used to prepare
                 reports.
                 Example 3.6: An architect can attach text attributes associated with the symbols of
                 doors and windows in a drawing. The attributes can describe the size of the door,
                 material, hardware, cost, etc. Later on the computer can automatically prepare a door
                 schedule listing all the doors and windows in the drawing!


     Anna University Chennai                              170
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

       The non-graphic information is directly linked with the graphics on the screen.        NOTES
When a change is made to the drawing, the values in the reports are updated automatically.
This provides a useful means to manage large projects from design through project
completion.
   There is a special category of software called Computer Aided Facility Management
(CAFM) designed for project management. These programs can import information
from CADD drawings and allow you to add attributes to drawing elements to build a
database. The database can be used to prepare project reports in a number of formats.
Engineering Analysis
        CADD drawings can be used to perform specific engineering analysis. There is
a separate category of programs called Computer Aided Engineering (CAE) that can
use CADD drawings for engineering analysis.
Example3.7: A structural engineer can use a CAE program to test the design of structural
components in different conditions. The engineer can instantly analyze the impact on
structural members when a different load is applied to the structure or the spacing
between the members is changed. Similarly, there are programs for mechanical engineers
to test machine assemblies. The mechanical engineer can create a prototype electronic
model and test it without building a physical model.
    The advanced engineering programs even provide the ability to link calculations
with the geometry on the screen. This capability is known as “parametric design” that
allows the computer to automatically update the graphics when the associated calculations
are changed and vice versa.
Computer Aided Manufacturing (CAM)
     CADD extends its power to yet another branch of engineering called Computer
Aided Manufacturing (CAM). CAM is a common method of manufacturing used by
large corporations. CADD and manufacturing programs are often integrated into one
system called CAD-CAM. These systems import CADD drawings into CAM programs
to automate the manufacturing process.
Example 3.8: An engineer can draw a machine part using CADD. The CADD drawing
is brought into a computer aided engineering (CAE) program for engineering analysis.
When the design is finalized, the drawing is brought into a CAD-CAM system that uses
numerical data from the CADD drawing for actual manufacturing.
Design
        CADD provides a convenient means to create designs for almost every
engineering discipline. It can be used for architectural design, landscape design, interior
design, civil and surveying, mechanical design, electrical engineering, plant design,


                                           171                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           industrial design, duct design, electronic circuit design, plumbing design, textile design
                 and product design.
                         CADD’s drafting capabilities provide ample means to create a design scheme.
                 You can create designs with great accuracy and have the flexibility to easily edit them.
                 This allows you to quickly prepare design alternatives.
                          In addition to the drafting capabilities of CADD, there are special programs
                 that can analyze designs or even create new ones. These programs use artificial intelligence
                 to “think” and make design decisions.
                        The design capabilities of CADD are available only in advanced CADD
                 programs. There are only a few such programs available. Design programs are usually
                 not generic. They often need to be custom-written to accomplish a specific task. See
                 Chapter 9 “Maximizing CADD” for discussion on design programs.
                 Add-on Programs
                         There are a number of separate programs available that can enhance the power
                 of CADD. The add-on programs work as an extension of CADD to accomplish specific
                 tasks. Today, there are hundreds of add-on programs available for popular CADD
                 programs.
                          An architectural add-on program can allow you to instantly draw symbols of
                 doors, windows, kitchens, bathrooms, staircases, etc. Shading and rendering program
                 can be used to enhance the look of 3D images. A plumbing design program includes
                 special functions to draw pipes, drains and plumbing joints. A civil engineering program
                 includes special features to work with contours and land development; the list goes on
                 and on.
                         Most manufacturers market CADD programs in separate modules. They sell a
                 basic drafting module for a certain price with the options to add on other modules.
                 There are a number of add-on programs available from independent vendors as well.
                 3.7.3 A Look at the CADD Industry
                         There are hundreds of CADD programs available in the CADD industry today.
                 Most of them are simply drafting programs, while some offer certain engineering analysis,
                 design or database capabilities. Some programs are more elaborate than others. You
                 can purchase a CADD program with just the basic drawing capabilities for as little as
                 $200. These are called low-end programs and are commonly used for general drawing
                 work.
                         Another category of software is mid-range. This category offers advanced
                 drafting techniques such as layers, 3D, basic database capabilities, advanced
                 dimensioning and many automated drawing features. Architecture and engineering design


     Anna University Chennai                              172
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

firms commonly use mid-range software. About 80% of all the CADD programs fall                NOTES
into this category and there is immense competition in this market. Their prices vary
significantly.
         There are a few advanced CADD programs available, which are commonly
used by large corporations for manufacturing. These programs include integrated features
such as solid modeling, engineering analysis, design, database and project management.
These are called high-end programs. Most of the time they are customized to meet the
specific requirements of the corporation. These programs are priced quite high.
Summary
          You would have now understood the differences between the 3 levels of
management and usage of CAD and Expert System in the strategic level activity, namely
product design and development. In this unit the exponential weighted average method,
for all the components of Time series analysis are discussed. In addition your exposed
to qualitative technique like Market survey, Expert opinion, Delphi technique. In this
section, the different methods of aggregate planning are elucidated for your understanding.
Review Questions:
1. What is CADD?
2. List the major capabilities of CADD.




                                           173                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                           PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                            UNIT IV
                              SCHEDULING AND
                       PROJECT MANAGEMENT METHODS

                 4.1 Introduction
                 4.2 Learning Objective
                 4.3 Scheduling
                     4.3.1 Resources Allocation
                 4.4 Sequencing
                     4.4.1 Sequencing “n” jobs / single machine problem
                     4.4.2 Sequencing “n” jobs / two machines problem - Johnson’s Algorithm
                     4.4.3 Extension of Johnson’s Rule
                     4.4.4 M machines and N jobs:
                 4.5 Project Scheduling
                     4.5.1 Planning
                     4.5.2 Project network scheduling
                 4.6 Resource scheduling




     Anna University Chennai                         174
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


                                   UNIT - 4                                                  NOTES



         SCHEDULING AND
  PROJECT MANAGEMENT METHODS
4.1 INTRODUCTION
      This unit deals with the operations levels of management namely scheduling
activity. The job shop scheduling and project scheduling are also discussed in detail.
4.2 LEARNING OBEJECTIVE
      1.     To understand the phases of scheduling namely resource allocation and
             scheduling.
      2.     To comprehend the resources allocation techniques.
      3.     To know the various sequencing technique to different job shop types.
      4.     To understand the project management techniques and their application.
4.3        SCHEDULING
        This is the lower level activity in the operation planning and control. The output
of aggregate planning goes as input to the scheduling activity. The aggregate demand is
broken down into individual product requirement.
                               Figure 4.1 - Scheduling




                                           175                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                     PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                  Based on the information mentioned in the figure, resource allocation and se-
                 quencing activities are carried out.
                          Scheduling is considered to be an important activity because if this activity is
                 not carried out properly, there is more waiting time that results in delayed delivery time
                 which in turn affects the customer satisfaction. The through put time increases because
                 of the more waiting time. Thus the longest through put time may be due to the more
                 waiting time of the product for the operation because the workcenter where the pro-
                 cess is demanded is engaged by the other product. The above situation paves the way
                 for more work in progress (WIP) inventory. Thus the scheduling activities determine
                 many important objectives of the organization. So, this is the activity which is getting lot
                 of importance nowadays.
                 4.3.1 Resources Allocation
                         Based on the process requirement and the available resources, in the first phase
                 of scheduling, resources are allocated for different jobs based on the availability and
                 time requirement when there is no splitting of the orders. This process may be carried
                 out using the Assignment method.
                 Assignment Model
                          Assignment model is considered to be one of the resource allocation tech-
                 niques. If you want to apply assignment model for resource allocation, the number of
                 process centers should be equal to the number of jobs to be assigned. This problem
                 could be treated as a maximization or minimization problem, based on the type of entry
                 in the cell. If the entry in the cell is profit etc., then it should be considered as a maximi-
                 zation problem. If the entry is processing time etc., then the problem is considered as a
                 minimization problem. In this model, once a job is assigned to a work center, then the
                 job and the assigned work center should not be considered for further assignment. This
                 kind of problem can be solved by a well known method called Hungarian method. You
                 would have studied Hungarian model in Operation research. Consider the following
                 resource allocation problem.
                 4.4 SEQUENCING
                 4.4.4.1 Sequencing “n” jobs / single machine problem
                          Normally, the total number of jobs exceeds the number of work centers.
                 Therefore, Priority Rules should be developing to determine the sequencing of ma-
                 chining operations. The Priority Rules come into picture when many jobs or opera-
                 tions are chasing for the same capacity.
                 Factors to be considered in setting priorities for jobs include:
                              a. Customer satisfaction.
                              b. Order urgency
                              c. Order profitability

     Anna University Chennai                               176
DBA 1651                                                                         PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

            d. Impact on capacity utilization
                                                                                           NOTES
            e. Shop performance
The most popular priority rules are
            •     First come fist served (FCFS)
            •     Shortest processing time (SPT)
            •     Earliest due date (EDD)
            •     Least slack (LS)
An example for working of these rules.
Example 4.1
       The following table is the required time and due time in days attached to Five
jobs waiting in queue to share a same work center.


                                       Table 4.1

            Job        Required Time (Days)       Due Date (Days hence)
            A                   2                          4
            B                   5                          5
            C                   1                          3
            D                   4                          6
            E                   6                          7


Solution
   • First come first served rule (FCFS)
   According to this principle, the job which comes first to the workcenter will occupy
   the machine first.

                                        Table 4.2

  Job Required          Due Date       Processing Period Completion       Days Late
  Time (Days)           (Days hence)   (Start+Req.)      date


  A         2             4              0+2                    2         0
  B         5             5              2+5                    7         2
  C         1             3              7+1                    8         5
  D         4             6              8+4                   12         6
  E         6             7             12+6                   18         11
  Sum      18                                                  47         24


                                            177                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                                 Average throughput time = 47/5 = 9.4 days
                             Average number jobs in the work center = 47/18 = 2.611 jobs
                                     Average number of days late= 24/5 = 4.8 days
                       • Shortest processing time (SPT)
                       According to this principle, the job which is having shortest processing time will
                       occupy the machine first.
                                                          Table 4.3

                  Job      Required      Due Date       Processing Period Completion    Days Late
                           Time (Days)   (Days hence)   (Start+Req.)      date


                   C          1             3             0+1                  1              0
                  A           2             4             1+2                  3              0
                  D           4             6             3+4                  7              1
                  B           5             5             7+5                 12              7
                  E           6             7            12+6                 18             11
                  Sum        18                                               41             19
                                       Average throughput time = 41/5 = 8.2 days
                              Average number jobs in the work center = 41/18 = 2.277 jobs
                                     Average number of days late= 19/5 = 3.8 days
                     • Earliest due date (EDD)
                          According to this principle the job with earliest due date will occupy the ma-
                 chine first regardless of job arrival or processing time.

                                                          Table 4.4

                  Job      Required       Due Date      Processing Period Completion    Days Late
                           Time (Days)   (Days hence)   (Start+Req.)        date


                   C          1             3             0+1                  1        0
                   A          2             4             1+2                  3        0
                   B          5             5             3+5                  8        3
                   D          4             6             8+4                 12        6
                   E          6             7            12+6                 18        11
                   Sum       18                                               42        20


                                      Average throughput time = 42/5 = 8.4 days
                              Average number jobs in the work center = 42/18 = 2.333 jobs
                                     Average number of days late= 20/5 = 4 days

                       •   Least slack (LS)


     Anna University Chennai                             178
DBA 1651                                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Least slack is the time difference between time remaining and work time required.
According to this principle, the job with least slack time will occupy the machine first.
                                                                                                       NOTES
Slack = time remaining until due date - process time remaining

                                         Table 4.5

 Job Required    Due Date     Slack Time Processing Period Completion Days
     Time (Days) (Days hence) (Days)     (Start+Req.)      date       Late
  B      5             5             0               0+5                    5            0
 E       6             7             1               5+6                   11            4
  C      1             3             2           11+1                      12            9
  A      2             4             2           12+2                      14           10
  D      4             6             2           14+4                      18           12
 Sum    18                                                                 60           35
                      Average throughput time = 60/5 = 12 days
             Average number jobs in the work center = 60/18 = 3.333 jobs
                     Average number of days late= 35/5 = 7 days

Summary Table:
Scheduling with Priority Rules
                                         Table 4.6

  Performance Dimension                     FCFS           SPT     EDD            LS
 Average throughput time                       9.4           8.2     8.4                12
  Average number jobs in the work center     2.611         2.277   2.333        3.333
 Average number of days late                   4.8           3.8      4            7

         Research has shown that Shortest processing time (SPT) has the good priority
rule to follow for job scheduling. This rule results in the shortest manufacturing lead
time, therefore, lowest work-in process inventory. It will often minimize the average
throughput time so minimum number jobs in the system. The queue position changes
with the arrival of new jobs, this makes to follow the Shortest processing time (SPT) in
real time scenario. First come first served (FCFS) becomes the only practical solution
to the scheduling. Earliest due date (EDD) might prefer when jobs must meet up with
other outputs later in an assembly.

Critical ratio
        Critical ratio is one of the priority rule which helps the scheduler to know about
which job should be given priority for the production in a job shop. The informations
required for using the technique are:

        1. The number of jobs to be processed.


                                           179                                               Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                       PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                         2. The production calendar.
 NOTES                   3. The requirement date for the jobs.
                         4. The processing time remaining.

                 From the above information, you can calculate the critical ratio-

                      Critical ratio = (date required – today’s date) / days needed to complete the job.
                       This ratio tells you about the urgency attached with the each job. If the critical ratio
                 is a dimensionless index. If the index = 1, that means the job is on schedule, if the index
                 is less than 1 that means that the job is behind the schedule. It needs much attention and
                 priority should be given for the job. If the index is greater than 1 then the job is ahead of
                 the schedule.

                 Problem

                         1. Suppose there are 6 jobs. Today is the 40th day on production calendar
                            other information are given in the table. Provide the sequence in which the
                            jobs are to be processed using critical ratio technique.

                                                           Table 4.7
                                  Job      Days required         Processing time remaining
                                                                       (days)
                                  1            50                            3
                                  2            48                            4
                                  3            45                            3
                                  4            43                            2
                                  5            42                            4
                                  6            41                            3
                                                           Solution
                                                           Table 4.8

                                                    Job      Critical ratio

                                                    1        (50-40)/3 = 3.3

                                                    2        (48-40)/3 = 2.0

                                                    3        (45-40)/3 = 1.6

                                                    4        (43-40)/3 = 1.0

                                                    5        (42-40)/3 = 0.5
                                                    6        (41-40)/3 = 0.3

                         From the above problem, you can conclude that jobs 1,2 and 3 are ahead of
                 schedules. Job 4 is on schedule. But job 5 and 6 are behind the schedules. So job 6
                 should be given first priority than job 5 should be given next priority.

     Anna University Chennai                               180
DBA 1651                                                                         PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

4.4.2 Sequencing “n” jobs / two machines problem - Johnson’s Algorithm                         NOTES
         The two machine flow shop problem with the objective of minimizing makespan
is also known as Johnson’s problem. The results originally obtained by Johnson are
now standard fundamentals in the theory of scheduling. In the formulation of this prob-
lem, job j is characterized by processing time tj1, required on machine 1, and tj2, required
on machine 2 after the operation on machine 1 is complete. An optimal sequence can
be characterized by the following rule for ordering pairs of jobs.
Johnson’s Rule:

                Job i proceeds job j in an optimal sequence if
                          Min (ti1, tj2) <= min (ti2, tj1)

In practice, an optimal sequence is directly constructed with an adaptation of this result.
The positions in sequence are filled by a one- pass mechanism that identifies, at each
stage, a job that should fill either the first or last available position.

Algorithm:

STEP 1 :         Find min (ti1, ti2).
STEP 2a:         If the minimum processing time requires machine 1, place the associated
                 job in the first available position in sequence. Go to step3.
STEP 2b :        If the minimum processing time requires machine 2, place the associated
                 job in the last available position in sequence. Go to step3.

STEP 3      :    Remove the assigned job from consideration and return to step 1 until
                 all positions in sequence are filled. (Ties may be broken arbitrarily.)
         To illustrate the algorithm, consider the five – job problem shown in table as
follows. The accompanying work- sheet shows how an optimal sequence is constructed
in five stages using the Algorithm. At each stage, the minimum processing time among
unscheduled jobs must be identified. Then step 2 assigns one or more positions in the
sequence, and the process is repeated.
Problem statement:
         The following table shows the five jobs to be allocated in two machines and
their respective processing time in the two machines.

                                          Table 4.9

                       Job j         1     2      3    4     5
                       Tj1(min)      3     5      1    6     7
                       Tj2(min)      6     2      2    6     5


                                            181                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                          PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           Solution:
                                                                 Table 4.10
                  Stages     Unscheduled jobs      Minimum tik        Assignment         Partial schedule
                    1            1,2,3,4,5             T31               3=[1]              3xxxx
                    2            1,2,4,5               T22               2=[5]              3xxx2
                    3            1,4,5                 T11               1=[2]              3-1 x x 2
                    4            4,5                   T52               5=[4]              3-1 x 5-2
                    5            4                     T41= T42          4=[3]              3-1-4-5-2


                           The sequence that emerges is 3-1-4-5-2.
                 4.4.3 Extension of Johnson’s Rule
                      Johnson’s Rule to Three machines:
                      Consider a three machines and n jobs problem.

                                                             Table 4.11
                           Job               1     2         3       .        .    i        .      n
                           Machine1          t11   t21       t31     .        .    ti1      .      tn1
                           Machine2          t12   t22       t32     .        .    ti2      .      tn2
                           Machine3          t13   t23       t33     .        .    ti3      .      tn3


                           Johnson rule can be applied to three machines when the problem exhibits ‘Domi-
                 nance’.

                         Dominance can be understood when a situation of n jobs with three machines
                 and a processing order requirement of M1, M2, M3 follows for all the jobs, with the
                 following condition holds good

                           Minimum of
                                or
                           Minimum of

                 Where       is the operation time for job i in machine j.

                    If any one of the above conditions satisfied then we say the problem exhibited
                 Dominance.

                 We will combine the operating times of machines as follows



     Anna University Chennai                                 182
DBA 1651                                                                          PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

      are the new operating time of machine1 and machine2.                                      NOTES
The optimal solution for the above problem is obtained through Johnson’s rule.
Converting the three machine problem into a two machine problem.

                                     Table 4.12
 Job            1        2             3         .       .      i      .      n
 Machine1    t11+t12   t21+t22       t31+t32     .       .   ti1+ti2   .    tn1+tn2
 Machine2    t12+t13   t22+t23       t32+t33     .       .   ti2+ti3   .    tn2+tn3

    Now apply Johnson’s rule to machine-1 and machine-2 to obtain optimal
sequence.
Practice problem:
                                       Table 4.13

   1. A company is faced with five tasks that have to be processed through
      three work centers. Assume work centers works continuously and that
      they are using Johnson’s rule. Data appear below in minutes:

             Task                A         B         C        D        E
             Workstation 1       10        8         15       7        12
             Workstation 2       6         4         3        2        5
             Workstation 3       8         11        6        10       9

Johnson rule can be applied to three machines when the problem exhibits ‘Domi-
nance’.
So check for Dominance.

      Minimum of
           or
      Minimum of
Minimum of    =7
Minimum of    =6
                =6

    The above conditions satisfied and the problem exhibited Dominance.
We will combine the operating times of machines as follows:




Converting a three machine problem into a two machine problem.



                                               183                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                               PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                                                 Table 4.14
 NOTES
                                   Task                 A          B         C         D     E
                                   Workstation 1        16         12        18        9     17
                                   Workstation 2        14         15        9         12    14


                 By applying Johnson’s rule the optimal sequence is as follows:
                             D - B - A - E - C (or) D - B - E - A - C
                 Finding of Make span is as follows :

                                                              Table 4.15

                      Task                Time     D         B          A         E     C
                      Workstation1        In       0         7          15        25    37
                                          Out      7         15         25        37    52
                      Workstation2        In       7         15         25        37    52
                                          Out      9         19         31        42    55
                      Workstation3        In       9         19         31        42    55
                                          Out      19        30         39        51    61
                      Idle Time of                                                               Total Idle time
                      W/S 2                        7         6          6         6     10            35
                      W/S 3                        9         0          1         3     4             17

                 The Make span of the above optimal sequence is 61 minutes.

                 4.4.4 M machines and N jobs:
                 Johnson’s algorithm and Multiple Machines

                         Johnson’s method only works optimally for two machines. However, since it is
                 optimal, and easy to compute. Johnson’s rule can be tried to adopt it for M machines,
                 (M > 2). All the methods developed for the m machines and n jobs are heuristic in
                 nature. The heuristics methods are based on a logic based and thumb rules.

                 Which may not be an optimal solution, but a better solution will be provide.
                         For jobs scheduled in flow shop of more than three machines, no optimal solu-
                 tion except exhaust search has ever been proposed. Campbell, Dudek and Smith
                 proposed a heuristic method named CDS algorithm to achieve a nearly minimum make
                 span in the CDS method.


     Anna University Chennai                                     184
DBA 1651                                                                       PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Assumptions:
                                                                                          NOTES
    1. Jobs are not preemptive.
    2. Each job has m tasks to be executed in sequence on m.
    3. Given a set of n independent jobs, each having m executed in the same se-
        quence on m machines
    (PI, Pz, ...,P,.), scheduling seeks the minimum completion time of the last job.

Algorithm:
     1. Create (m-1) stages.
     2. Each stage should have 2 workstations.
     3. Apply Johnson’s rule for each pair of workstations created by certain
        conditions.
     4. From all the (m-1) sequences find out the make span of each sequence.
     5. Choose the best among the (m-1) sequences which yields low make span or
        flow time.

NOTE: We should be careful in determining the make span. The original processing
time required by the job on m machines are to be taken into consideration in evaluating
the make span but not the converted time for the workstations.

Let us consider a four machines and n jobs problem.

                                       Table 4.16

 Job            1         2     3       .         .      i       .       n
 Machine1       t11       t21   t31     .         .      ti1     .       tn1
 Machine2       t12       t22   t32     .         .      ti2     .       tn2
 Machine3       t13       t23   t33     .         .      ti3     .       tn3
 Machine4       t14       t24   t34     .         .      ti4     .       tn4

Follow the CDS algorithm step by step.
In this problem the numbers of machines are 4.
We should generate (4-1) =3 sequences.

The first sequence will come from workstation-1 and workstation2. Here workstation-
1 is equals to machine-1 and workstation-2 equals to machine-4 in operating time.

                                       Table 4.17

 Job                1     2     3       .         .      i       .       n
 Workstation1       t11   t21   t31     .         .      ti1     .       tn1
 Workstation2       t14   t24   t34     .         .      ti4     .       tn4


                                            185                                Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                                PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                 The second sequence will come from workstation-1 and workstation2. Here worksta-
 NOTES           tion-1 is equals to machine-1&2 and workstation-2 equals to machine-4&3 in operat-
                 ing time.
                                                               Table 4.18

                    Job                    1           2             3      .       .             i    .       n
                    Workstation 1       t11+t12    t21+t22       t31+t32    .       .        ti1+ti2   .   tn1+tn2
                    Workstation 2       t14+t13    t24+t23       t34+t33    .       .        ti4+ti3   .   tn4+tn3


                         The third sequence will come from workstation-1 and workstation2. Here
                 workstation-1 is equals to machine-1+2+3 and workstation-2 equals to machine-4+3+2
                 in operating time.

                                                               Table 4.19

                 Job                1              2               3            .   .         i        .   n

                 Workstation1 t11+t12+t13 t21+t22+t23 t31+t32+t33 .                 . ti1+ti2+ti3 . tn1+tn2+tn3

                 Workstation2 t14+t13+t12 t24+t23+t22 t34+t33+t32 .                 . ti4+ti3+ti2 . tn4+tn3+tn2


                 Apply Johnson’s rule to the above feasible sequences. Choose the least make span
                 among the above sequences.
                 Practice problem:
                       1. A company is faced with four jobs that have to be processed through four
                          machines. Assume machines works continuously. Data appear below in min-
                          utes

                                                               Table 4.20

                                        Job                A         B      C            D
                                        Machine1           3         2      1            4
                                        Machine2           3         2      4            3
                                        Machine3           3         1      4            3
                                        Machine4           3         2      2            2

                 Follow the CDS algorithm step by step.
                 This problem is a 4 of machines. So we should generate (4-1) =3 sequences.
                         The first sequence will come from workstation-1 and workstation2. Here work-
                 station-1 is equals to machine-1 and workstation-2 equals to machine-4 in operating
                 tim.

     Anna University Chennai                                   186
DBA 1651                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                     Table 4.21
                                                                                        NOTES
                      Job            A           B       C       D
                      Workstation1   3           2       1       4
                      Workstation2   3           2       2       2


By applying Johnson’s rule the optimal sequence for the above setup is

                C - B -A– D
The second sequence will come from workstation-1 and workstation2. Here work-
station-1 is equals to machine-1&2 and workstation-2 equals to machine-4&3 in
operating time.

                                     Table 4.22

                Job                      A           B       C       D

                Workstation1             6           4       5       7

                Workstation2             6           3       6       5


By applying Johnson’s rule the optimal sequence for the above setup is
               C -A– D – B
The third sequence will come from workstation-1 and workstation2. Here worksta-
tion-1 is equals to machine-1+2+3 and workstation-2 equals to machine-4+3+2 in
operating time.

                                     Table 4.23


                  Job                        A           B       C       D
                  Workstation1               9           5       9       10
                  Workstation2               9           5       10      8

By applying Johnson’s rule the optimal sequence for the above setup is
               B -A– C – D
Find out the make span of each sequence obtained above.
For the first sequence C - B - A – D




                                             187                              Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                  PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                                          Table 4.24
 NOTES
                                 Job               Time         C    B     A    D
                                 Machine1          In           0    1     3    6
                                                   Out          1    3     6    10
                                 Machine2          In           1    5     6    10
                                                   Out          5    7     9    13
                                 Machine3          In           5    9     10   13
                                                   Out          9    10    13   16
                                 Machine4          In           9    11    13   16
                                                   Out          11   13    16   18



                        The make span time is 18. For the second sequence C - A – D – B

                                                          Table 4.25

                               Job           Time          C         A    D     B
                               Machine1      In            0         1    4     8
                                             Out           1         4    8     10
                               Machine2      In            1         5    8     11
                                             Out           5         8    11    13
                               Machine3      In            5         9    12    15
                                             Out           9         12   15    16
                               Machine4      In            9         12   15    17
                                             Out           11        15   17    19

                 The make span time is 19. For the third sequence B - A – C - D

                                                          Table 4.26

                               Job           Time          B         A    C     D
                               Machine1      In            0         2    5     6
                                             Out           2         5    6     10
                               Machine2      In            2         5    8     12
                                             Out           4         8    12    15
                               Machine3      In            4         8    12    16
                                             Out           5         11   16    19
                               Machine4      In            5         11   16    19
                                             Out           7         14   18    21

                 The make span time is 21.



     Anna University Chennai                              188
DBA 1651                                                                     PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Decision Table
                                                                                          NOTES
                                        Table 4.27
                 S.no.      sequence        Make span Selection
                     1      C-B-A-D                18           v
                     2      C-A-D-B                19           Õ
                     3      B-A-C-D                21           Õ

Among the feasible sequences C-B-A-D is the best sequence with the make span of
18 minutes.
Review Question:

    1. Explain the two phases of scheduling.

    2. Which priority rule is the best rule for sequencing for a single machine problem
       where the customer satisfaction is an important objective?
4.5 PROJECT SCHEDULING
        In the previous sections you have seen how do you schedule the mass produc-
tion, job shop production. In this section you can see how do you schedule project
type of production. To schedule project type of production, during the World War II
US defense people developed a technique known as PERT, stands for Program Evalu-
ation and Review Technique to develop a missile.
        Here the development of a missile is a project and to plan and schedule the
above said project, US defense personnel developed a PERT technique. After devel-
oping PERT technique, US defense people developed another technique known as
CPM. CPM stands for Critical Path Method to plan and schedule of certain type of
projects.
        PERT techniques is a applied mainly for new project at which you don’t have
any experience that is why the time estimate for each activity of the project revolves
around three time estimate (e.g.) PERT usually applied for the following projects,
                 -       Planning and scheduling of new product.
                 -       Development of missile.
                 -       Development of launching of rockets.
But CPM is applied for known projects like
                 -       The construction of building.
                 -       The manufacture and assembly of motors.
                 -       The maintenance project.


                                            189                              Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                          PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                 Difference between PERT and CPM
 NOTES
                                                              Table 4.28

                  S.No Characteristics                    CPM                             PERT
                  1.        Type of projects              Known                           Unknown
                  2.        Time estimate                 Single time estimate            Three time estimate
                  3.        Time                          Non random variable             Random variable
                  4.        Nature of the time estimate Deterministic                     Probabilistic
                  5.        Type of network               Activity oriented network       Event oriented network

                          A project as already mentioned consists of many activities. The activities are
                 interlinked together to achieve the common objectives like time, cost and standard of
                 performance. CPM and PERT techniques are considered to be project management
                 techniques which enable the project manager to plan and schedule the project. They
                 are also called project network planning and scheduling technique. In the next section
                 you can know about the network planning and scheduling.

                 4.5.1 Planning
                             Jobs to be carried out in the planning
                       1)    List the activities involved in the project,
                       2)    Estimate the time requirement and cost requirement for each activity,
                       3)    Find the relationship between the activities,
                       4)    Based on the relationship draw the precedence diagram,
                       5)    Draw the network based on the precedence diagram.
                 The output of the planning activities will be as follows :
                 Precedence relation with time and cost data

                                                              Table 4.29

                              Activities    Immediate predecessor        Cost     Time

                                   a.              -                     5000         4

                                   b.              -                     4000         5

                                   c.              -                     10,000       1

                                   d.              a, b                  7000         3
                                   e.              c                     6000         2

                                   f.              e                     10,000       5


                 In a project, the activity is represented as follows:


     Anna University Chennai                                    190
DBA 1651                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Figure 4.2
                                                                                           NOTES
                                Activity description
                      1                                    2
                                       Time


Suppose an activity consists of test marketing. This is represented as

Figure 4.3
                                  Test Marketing
                      1                                    2
                                      Time


        1. The tail node of the arrow should carry small number than the head of the
           arrow. In this case tail node carry number1 and the head node carry num-
           ber2.
        2. Two activities should not have common initial node and common end node.

                                       Figure 4.4
                                              a


                            1                                  2


                                              b

    This is not permitted if this kind of situation arises, then you should introduce a
    dummy activity as follows:

                                         Figure 4.5

                                                  d
                                  1                                3


    ‘d’ is the dummy ,it does not consume any resources. It is introduced just to show
    the relationship.

    1. When you draw the network, all the starting activities should start at one start-
       ing node. Similarly at the end all the ending activities should culminate at one
       node.



                                           191                                Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                                             Figure 4.6
 NOTES
                                                            2



                                            1
                                                            3           5              6



                                                                4

                           In the above network, all the starting activities are emanating from node 1 and
                 all the ending activities are namely (2 - 6, 5 - 6, 4 - 6) are culminated at node 6.

                 4.5.2 Project network scheduling

                            In this phase, you should decide about whether the network is treated as an
                 activity oriented network or event oriented network.

                            An event is nothing but, a milestone of a network. A project network could
                 be treated as an activity oriented network, only when, as a project manger, you should
                 know in detail about the every activity of the project, namely, the estimated time of the
                 each activity, and how to complete each activity etc. Otherwise, if you are not so
                 experienced with the project, then you should treat the project as an event oriented
                 project. In the event oriented project, you don’t bother about the progress of the activity.
                 You should bother about the starting and completion time of the activity and then the
                 project. For example- Test marketing. If you treat this job as an activity then the
                 description is test marketing. Then you should find out the earliest starting time, latest
                 starting time, earliest finishing time and latest finishing time. Suppose you treat the test
                 marketing as an event oriented one, then you should find out the earliest and latest
                 starting time, the earliest and latest finishing time of the test marketing event.

                           With this information, now you can see what you should do in the scheduling
                 of the project network.

                 Steps:

                     1. Find the earliest starting time, earliest finishing time for activity, and latest starting
                        time and latest finishing time for activity oriented network.
                     2. Find the earliest starting time, earliest finishing time for event, and latest starting
                        time and latest finishing time for event, for event oriented network.

     Anna University Chennai                               192
DBA 1651                                                                          PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

       Forward pass Method                                                                         NOTES
            In forward pass method, the earliest starting time and earliest finishing time are
       calculated.
               EFij = ESij + tij

              = Earliest finish time of activity i,j
       ESij = Earliest starting time of activity i,j
       tij = Time duration of the activity i,j

            You may have problem in calculation of ES of scheduled activity only when many
       activities lead into a particular node and one or many activities emanating from that
       particular node as shown below:

                                                Figure 4.7

                                                                              14
                                           5


                                                                 13



                                                                              15
                                   7
EFij
                                                        9




       Assume
                                                Table 4.30

                 Activity      Earliest Start          Earliest Finish   Time Duration
                                  (ES)                     (EF)
                 5-13                  4                     7               3
                 7-13                  7                     11              4
                 9-13                  6                     8               2

       Earliest start of activity 13 – 14

                                EF5−3         7 
                                               
               ES13−14   = max  EF7−13  = max 11 = 14
       (i.e)
                                EF            14
                                9−13           



                                                       193                               Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                     PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                    The reason for considering the maximum time is that as per the technological
                 constraint the succeeding activity will be started only after the completion of all the
                 preceding activities.

                 Backward pass method

                          In the backward pass method, from the end node of the project the latest
                 start and the latest finish are calculated. You should start with the earliest completion
                 time of the project as the latest completion time of the project then you should work
                 backward, so that you can deduce the latest starting time for each activity.
                  LS IJ = LFij − tij
                 LS IJ = Latest starting time for the activity i-j
                 LFij = Latest finishing time for the activity i-j
                 tij = Time duration of the activity i-j

                 In the latest finish time calculated, you may face some problem because many activities
                 may emanate from a particular node as shown in the diagram.

                                                                                6
                                       2                      4




                                           3


                                                                         5



                 Assume
                                                            Table 4.31

                                               Activity      Latest Start (LS)
                                               4-6                 15
                                               4-7                 20
                                               4-5                 18

                 Now, to find the latest finish of activity 2-4 and 3-4, consider all the latest start time of
                 all the activities emanating from the node four and consider the minimum latest starting
                 time because, In the worst case, if all the succeeding activities starts at the latest starting
                 time then the lowest latest starting time of the succeeding activity becomes latest finish-
                 ing time of the preceding activities.


     Anna University Chennai                               194
DBA 1651                                                                          PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


                                                                                                             NOTES
               (i.e)



                                     LS 4−6 = 15 
                                                 
                         LF34 = min  LS 4−7 = 20 = LF2−4 = 15
               Similarly
                                     LS = 18 
                                     4 −5        
                       3. Identify the critical path. The critical path is the longest path in the net-
                            work.
                       4. Identify the float or slack for each activity/ event of the network.
                       5. Carry out the time- cost trade off and if possible crash the project.
                       6. Carry out the resource scheduling.
                   In scheduling to carry out the above activity, you need to apply (PERT/ CPM)
              techniques. First you can see the application of the critical path method in the following
              example. Why a manger should know about latest start and latest finish of each
              activity of a project? This is because sometimes more than one activity may compete
              for one resource. In this case, if you know the latest start and latest finish, the resource
              which is in question will be immediately allocated to the activity which could not be
              delayed, rather than to the activity which could be delayed. This is one of the reasons
              for the usage of float.
               LS 4−6 = 15 
                            
              Identification of float:
LF2− 4   = min LS 4−7 = 20 = LF2− 4 = 15
               LS = Float is the leeway available for the manager to schedule the scarce re-
                             
              sources to18 activity based on the float availability. This means, if an activity has zero
                4−5 the
              float, that activity should be given preference in terms of allocating the resources, that
              too, when the other activities which possess float compete for the same resources.
                        Now, you can see how the above explained project network planning and
               scheduling is elucidated with an example.
               Problem statement
                                                    Table 4.32

               Consider the product development project. This project consists of following activities.
                Activity                             Symbol   Preceding Activity Time estimate (days)
                Demand estimation                      A            -                    3
                Development of pricing strategy        B            -                    1
                Product design                         C            -                    5
                Conduct, promotional cost analysis     D            -                    1
                Manufacture prototype model            E            C                    6
                Perform product cost analysis          F            E                    1
                Perform final pricing analysis         G            B,D,F                2
                Conduct Market test                    H            G                    8



                                                           195                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                                        Solution
 NOTES                                                 Figure 4.9




                 Earliest starting and finishing time calculation using forward pass method:
                 ESi = max [ 0, ES(i-1)], EFi = ESi + time duration.

                                                         Table 4.33
                                      Activity    Early start (ESi) Early finish (EFi)
                                      A                    0                 3
                                      B                    0                 1
                                      C                    0                 5
                                      D                    0                 1
                                      E                    5                 11
                                      F                    11                12
                                      G                    12                14
                                      H                    14                22

                         Since three activities B,F and D are to be completed before G, we have to
                 select the maximum of all the three early finish time of the predecessors. ESg = max [
                 EFb, EFf, EFd]
                 Latest starting and finishing time calculation using forward pass method:
                 LSa = Total completion time of the project - Ta, LFa = TCa

                                                       Table 4.34
                                      Activity    Latest start (LSi)   Latest finish (LFi)
                                          A               19                 22
                                          B               10                 11
                                          C               0                  5
                                          D               10                 11
                                          E               5                  11
                                          F               11                 12
                                          G               12                 14
                                          H               14                 22


     Anna University Chennai                            196
DBA 1651                                                                         PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

       Total float for each activity ‘i’ = LSi – ESi (or) LFi - EFi                            NOTES
                                        Table 4.35
                             Activity             Total Float
                                  A                    19
                                  B                    10
                                  C                    0
                                  D                    10
                                  E                    0
                                  F                    0
                                  G                    0
                                  H                    0


           The above method of planning and scheduling a network is called Critical
Path Method. The critical path for the mentioned problem is C- E- F-G-H. (The path
in the project which has the maximum completion time).

PERT:

          Suppose, if a project planner treats the problem, which is discussed in the
previous section, as an unknown project in some other new product launch, the project
planner has to estimate “three time estimate”, instead of “one time estimates”. The three
time estimates for each activity are called optimistic time (to), the most likely time (tm),
pessimistic time (tp).


               Optimistic time(to): It is the minimum time taken to complete the activity,
               if every thing goes well.

               Pessimistic time(tm): This is the maximum time to complete an activity, if
               most of the things go wrong.

               Most likely time (tp): In real life situation, not everything goes completely
               right or wrong. The most likely is the time with a more chance to complete
               the activity.

For example, consider the following activity.




                                            197                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                                                  Figure 4.10
                                                     Demand generation


                                                          2, 4, 6

                                                         Table 4.36

                                   Symbol              Activity               Probability
                                       to                2                      0.2
                                       tm                4                      0.7

                                       tp                6                      0.1


                 Beta distribution
                                                          Figure 4.11




                         It is proved that the time estimate in the PERT method follows a Beta distribution.
                 So the mean of the Beta distribution is

                                    Texpected = Te = (to + 4 x tm + tp) / 6

                 Variance for the activity,
                                                   á2 = ((tp – to) / 6)2
                                            2
                       A project planner, in addition to the estimation of standard, should know the
                 variance of each activity; variance is a measure to measure the uncertainty about that
                 activity. If the variance is high, this means that the project manager may not have much
                 idea about the progress and completion of the activity.
                 Let us see the application of PERT – model for the previous problem, with the informa-
                 tion provided in the following table.

     Anna University Chennai                              198
DBA 1651                                                                            PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                        Table 4.37
                                                                                               NOTES
  Activity                Symbol                       Time estimate (days)
                                     Optimistic (to)   Most likely (tm) Pessimistic (tp)
  Demand estimation         A             1                 3                  4
  Development of            B             1                 1                  2
  pricing strategy
  Product design               C          4                 5                  9
  Conduct, promotional
  cost analysis                D          1                 1                  1
  Manufacture
  prototype model              E          4                 6                 12
  Perform product cost
  analysis                     F          1                 1                  2
  Perform final pricing
  analysis                     G          1                 2                  3
  Conduct Market test          H          6                 8                 10
Step 1: Estimate the expected time and variance for each activity. Using 1 and 2
Table 4.38
                                    Table 4.38
                          Activity            ET                VT
                           A                  2.834             0.25
                           B                  1.167             0.027
                           C                  5.5               0.694
                           D                  1                 0
                           E                  6.67              1.78
                           F                  1.167             0.027
                           G                  2                 0.11
                           H                  8                 0.44

Step 2: Network model:
                                          Figure 4.12




                                              199                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           Step 3:
                        Earliest starting and finishing time calculation using forward pass method:
                 ESi = max [0, ES (i-1)], EFi = ESi + time duration.

                                                            Table 4.39
                                  Activity     Early start (ESi)    Early finish (EFi)
                                     A              0                     2.834
                                      B             0                     1.167
                                      C             0                     5.5
                                      D             0                     1
                                      E             5.5                   12.17
                                      F             12.17                 13.34
                                      G             13.34                 15.34
                                      H             15.34                 23.34


                          Since three activities B,F and D are to be completed before G, we have to
                 select the maximum of all the three early finish time of the predecessors. ESg = max
                 [EFb, EFf, EFd]
                 Latest starting and finishing time calculation using forward pass method:
                 LSa = Total completion time of the project - Ta, LFa = TCa

                 Latest starting and finishing time calculation using backward pass method:
                 LSa = Total completion time of the project - Ta, LFa = TCa

                                                            Table 4.40
                                  Activity     Latest start (LSi)   Latest finish (LFi)
                                     A              20.50                 23.34
                                      B             11.00                 12.17
                                      C             0                     5.5
                                      D             11.17                 12.17
                                      E             5.5                   12.17
                                      F             12.17                 13.34
                                      G             13.34                 15.34
                                      H             15.34                 23.34

                 Step 4:
                          Identify the critical path. The critical path is the longest path in the network. The
                 expected critical path is C – E - F – G – H. The duration is 23.34 days. The variance
                 of the critical path is 3.051 days. Therefore standard deviation is equal to 1.746.

     Anna University Chennai                                200
DBA 1651                                                                         PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Step 5:
                                                                                               NOTES
         Identify the float or slack for each activity/ event of the network.
Identification of float:
          Total float for each activity ‘i’ = LSi – ESi (or) LFi - EFi

                                          Table 4.41
                               Activity            Total Float
                                  A                   20.50
                                  B                   11.00
                                  C                   0
                                  D                   11.17
                                  E                   0
                                  F                   0
                                  G                   0
                                  H                   0


         You cannot claim that, the completion time of the project is 23.34 days in this
case, because this is the expected completion time attached with the probability. The
expected completion time is the sum of the expected completion time of the activity C,
E, F, G and H. But timing of each activity follows beta distribution. Now the summation
of all the time follows the normal distribution with the summation of all variance. This
principal is arrived based on the central limit theorem. It is shown in the figure4.13.


                                          Figure 4.13




From this above figure; you can answer for the following questions.

          1. What is the probability that the project will be completed within the mean
             time?
          2. What is the probability that the project will be completed within the specified
             time period?
          3. What is the probability that the project will be completed above the specified
             time period?
          4. To complete within the particular probability, how much time will be
             required?

                                             201                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                   5. To complete above the particular probability, how much time will be
                             required?
                             Let us determine the following probabilities for the above mentioned
                             problem.
                             A. The project will be completed in 22 days or less.
                             B. The project will be completed by its earliest expected completion date.
                             C. The project will be completed in more than 30 days.
                             D. The project will be completed between 25 and 30 days.
                             To answer the above problems you should find the Z- values using normal
                             distribution tables as follows.
                      Solution:
                         A. Xi = 22, (Xi = Project due date)
                                 = 23.34 ( = Project completion time)
                                = 1.746 ( = standard deviation of the project completion time)
                             Z = (Xi - ) /
                             Z = (22 – 23.34) / 1.746
                                = -1.053

                             Corresponding value for this Z from the normal tables is 0.1469
                             So the probability of completing the project with in 22 days is 14.69%

                 B.      Xi = 23.34,
                            = 23.34
                           = 1.746
                          Z = (Xi - ) /
                         Z = (23.34 – 23.34) / 1.746
                                = 0.00

                             Corresponding value for this Z from the normal tables is 0.5
                             So the probability of completing the project with in expected completion
                             time is 50 %.

                 C.      Xi = 30,
                            = 23.34
                           = 1.746
                         Z = (Xi - ) /
                         Z = (30 – 23.34) / 1.746
                                = 3.5281

                             Corresponding value for this Z from the normal tables is 0.99978.
                             Therefore to complete the project beyond 30 days = 1-0.99978 (ie) =
                             0.00022
                             So the probability of completing the project beyond 30 days is 0.022%

     Anna University Chennai                           202
DBA 1651                                                                          PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

D.             Xi = 30,
                  = 23.34
                                                                                                NOTES
                = 1.746
               Z = (Xi - ) /
               Z = (25 – 23.34) / 1.746
                = 0.66437

             Corresponding value for this Z from the normal tables is 0.7357.
             Therefore to complete the project between 25 and 30 days = 0.99978 –
             0.7357 = 0.26408
             So the probability of completing the project beyond 30 days is 26.41%

4.6 RESOURCE SCHEDULING
        As it is mentioned in the project scheduling, resource scheduling is another
important activity of project scheduling. As resource are scares, the project manager
efficiency and effectiveness can be measured through the way in which he allocate the
resource in various activities of the project but not much extending the completion time
of the project. Resource scheduling consists of two phases. Phase 1, deals about the
resource allocation and Phase 2 deals about the resource leveling.
Resource allocation
     It is the allocation of the resources for the activities that are critical in nature. If
some resources are required by more than one activity at a time, the resources are to
be allocated to the activity which is critical in nature and thereby delaying non critical
activity. Any how you should see that the critical activities are getting importance in
allocating the resources rather than the non critical activity. This is done based on the
availability of the float for each activity and this does not effect the project completion
time. If you proceed in this manner you will come across the situation in which all
activities become critical and resources allocation becomes a problem. In such a situa-
tion, the efficiency of a project manager even could be measured through how judi-
ciously he allocates the resources and at the some time without much extending the
completion time of the project.
Resource leveling
        As the name indicates if you draw a curve between the time Vs resource re-
quirement, the profile of the curve is almost constant then you need not carry out the
leveling of the resources because all the time almost you need to make use of a constant
resource requirement. This paves the way for continuous employment for the people
involved in the project. Suppose the profile of the resource requirement Vs time has
more peak & valley then you have to level the peak & valley of the resource require-
ment in such a manner that throughout the project period you are going to use constant


                                            203                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           resources with little variation. The process of doing so is called Project leveling. In this
                 the case of project leveling the project completion time should not be extended but the
                 objective of allocating constant workforce in all the days is achieved through a simple
                 logic that the activities which are having floats are to be moved front and back without
                 violating the precedence relationship. This is done with an objective of having constant
                 resource in all the project days. When you move the activity front and back based on
                 the availability of free float of each activity, that means the highest free float activity is
                 moved front and back to ensure constant
                 resources in all the days.

                 Free float for an activity is calculated as follows

                                                             Figure 4.14
                                                                  Lij
                                                i                               j


                 Free float for activity i-j= tj- (ti+Lij)

                 Where ti- is the earliest end time of the event i
                     tj- is the earliest end time of the event j
                     Lij- time duration of the activity i and j

                 Example 4.2
                 Consider the following network
                                                             Table 4.42

                             Activity       Immediate            Manpower           Time duration
                                            predecessor          requirement
                                 A                   -                9                  4
                                 B                   -                3                  2
                                 C                   -                6                  2
                                 D                   -                4                  2
                                 E                   B                8                  3
                                 F                   C                7                  2
                                 G                   F, D             2                  3
                                 H                   E, G             1                  4

                 Step1: -Draw the network and post the network in a time scale.



     Anna University Chennai                                  204
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                                                Figure 4.15
                                                                                                  NOTES
                                      A
                                      4
                                              2             E
                                B                           3
                                     2

                                C                       F               G         H
                       0                      2                  4            7       11
                                     2                  2               3         4   1
                                D


          You can verify that the path C-F-G-H is the critical path. Next you should draw it in
          time scale. To draw this, first you should post the critical path.

                                                                Figure 4.16
                                         A
                           9                                E    8

                                B    2
                                     2

 Time 0       1        2        3
                                C
                                          4       F5      6   7   8
                                                                  G
                                                                       9   10    11
                                                                                H
                   0                  2                  4             7              11
Manpower 22       22       24       152       10       2 2 2    1    1   1   41       1
                                                7                   3
Requirement                     D                            4




                   The number appears above the arrow indicates that the manpower requirement.

          Step2: - Draw the resource requirement Vs time profile




                                                                  205                 Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                                       Figure 4.17
 NOTES
                   24
                   22



                   15




                   10




                   2
                   1

                             1      2      3       4     5       6     7       8      9     10      11
                 If you see the above resource requirement profile, this profile has more peak & valley.
                 So this is to be leveled to have constant work force requirement.

                 Step3: - Find the float using the formula mentioned already for all the activities .This is
                 shown in the table.

                                                        Table 4.43

                                               Activities        Free float
                                                 A                  7
                                                 B                  0
                                                 C                  0
                                                 D                  2
                                                  E                 2
                                                  F                 0
                                                 G                  0
                                                 H                  0

                         Step 4: - Find the total requirement for all the days, this is equal to 101.Now
                 divide this by the number of days to find constant resource requirement
                          Constant resource requirement = 101/11=9.1
                 Every day you should see that the number of resources requirement should not exceed 10.
                 For doing so, you should give preference for the activity which has least free float.


     Anna University Chennai                             206
DBA 1651                                                                     PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                          Day1
                                        Table 4.44
                                                                                         NOTES
                Activity   Free float  Resource         Action to be
                           requirement performed
                   B            0          3            Scheduled
                   C            0             6         Scheduled
                   D            2             4         Postponed
                   A            7             4         Postponed


In the day1, even though the free float for activity D is more than B. You should give
preference to D because if you allot ‘D’ and ‘C’ on day1 it perfectly matches the
maximum resources requirement 10.
                                          Day2
                                        Table 4.45
                Activity   Free float     Resource      Action to be
                           requirement performed
                   B            0             3         Postponed
                   C            0             6         Continued
                   D            2             4         Continued
                   A            6             9         Postponed



                                          Day3
                                        Table 4.46
                Activity   Free float     Resource      Action to be
                           requirement performed
                   F            0             7         Scheduled
                   B            0             3         Scheduled
                   E            2             8         Postponed
                   A            5             9         Postponed



                                          Day4
                                        Table 4.47

                Activity   Free float     Resource      Action to be
                                          requirement   performed
                   F            0             7         Continued
                   B            0             3         Continued
                   E            1             8         Postponed
                   A            4             9         Postponed



                                           207                                Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                            PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                                         Day5
 NOTES                                                 Table 4.48

                               Activity   Free float     Resource   Action to be
                                          requirement performed
                                  E            0             8      Scheduled
                                  G            0             2      Scheduled
                                  A            3             9      Postponed



                                                         Day6
                                                       Table 4.49

                               Activity   Free float     Resource   Action to be
                                          requirement performed
                                  E            0             8      Continued
                                  G            0             2      Continued
                                  A            2             9      Postponed

                                                         Day 7
                                                       Table 4.50

                               Activity   Free float     Resource   Action to be
                                          requirement performed
                                  E            0             8      Continued
                                  G            0             2      Continued
                                  A            2             9      Postponed

                                                         Day 8
                                                       Table 4.51

                               Activity   Free float     Resource   Action to be
                                          requirement performed
                                  A            0             8      Scheduled
                                  H                          0      2 Scheduled

                                                         Day 9
                                                       Table 4.52

                               Activity   Free float  Resource      Action to be
                                          requirement performed
                                  A            0          8         Continued
                                  H            0          2         Continued


     Anna University Chennai                           208
DBA 1651                                                                  PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                         Day10
                                        Table 4.53
                                                                                       NOTES
               Activity    Free float      Resource   Action to be
                           requirement performed
                  A        0                  8       Continued
                  H        0                  2       Continued



                                         Day11
                                        Table 4.54

               Activity    Free float      Resource   Action to be
                           requirement performed
                  A             0             8       Continued
                  H             0             2       Continued


        Since for all the days the resources are scheduled as per the procedure men-
tioned. The requirement Vs time profile graph is as follows:
                                        Figure 4.18



             Resource
             requirement


                          10




                                                                11 days
                                              Time




                                           209                             Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                  PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           Summary
                      In this unit, the job shop scheduling for single machine n jobs, two machine n
                 jobs, 3 machine n jobs and n job m machine are discussed. The project scheduling
                 techniques namely the critical path method, program evaluation review technique are
                 elaborated. The application of float is interpreted and appreciated. The resource level-
                 ing is also highlighted.

                 Review Questions:
                    1. Draw the network for the given precedence diagram.



                                                       Table 4.55

                                          Activities          Immediate predecessor
                                             a                        -
                                             b                        -
                                             c                       b
                                             d                      a,c

                      2. How would you calculate the expected time and variance in the PERT model?
                      3. Expand CPM and PERT?




     Anna University Chennai                            210
DBA 1651                                                               PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT



                                   UNIT V
                                                                                     NOTES


       FACILITY, LAYOUT LOCATION AND
            WORK MEASUREMENT
5.1 Introduction
5.2 Learning Objectives
5.3 Facility Location:
    5.3.1 Selection of location:
         5.3.1.1 Phase 1:
         5.3.1.2 Phase – II
5.4 Plant location selection
    5.4.1 Rating Plan Method To Evaluate The Factors For Plant Location:
    5.4.2 Cost analysis method:
5.5 Types of Layout
    5.5.1 Fixed Product Layout
    5.5.2 Product Layout
    5.5.3 Group Layout
    5.5.4 Process Layout
    5.5.5 Design of Process Layout
5.6 Line Balancing
5.7 Time Study and Work Measurement
    5.7.1 Time Study
    5.7.2 Work sampling
5.8 Learning Curve
5.9 Productivity




                                      211                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                                                UNIT - 5



                    FACILITY, LAYOUT LOCATION AND
                         WORK MEASUREMENT
                 5.1 INTRODUCTION

                              The unit deals about one of the strategic decisions in the operations
                 management, namely plant location decision, the characteristics of different layouts are
                 discussed. The different techniques available to design the layout are also introduced.
                 Work measurement technique like time study, work sampling and methods time
                 measurement are elaborated to fix the standards for organizational activities. The impact
                 of learning curve on the standard and productivity improvement is also discussed.

                 5.2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES

                         1. To comprehend the factors to be considered for selecting the location.

                         2. To know the characteristics of different types of layout.

                         3. Understand the techniques to be adopted in designing the layout.

                         4. To establish the standards for different activities using standard techniques.

                         5. To construct learning curve and to comprehend the impact of learning curve
                            in standards and productivity.

                 5.3 FACILITY LOCATION

                      Facility location i.e. identifying the best location is a strategic decision in operation
                 management. This is a decision like any other strategic decisions like identifying the
                 product, choosing the technology, deciding the capacity etc. It is a long term decision.
                 Once the resources are committed taken back the resources involves more cost because
                 of change in the decision later. So you should be careful while identifying the various
                 locations and choosing the best one.

                 Need for the Decision

                     1. Research and development department of an organization come up with a new
                        product, to manufacture the product you need to incur the decision.


     Anna University Chennai                              212
DBA 1651                                                                           PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

    2. For the existing product, there is a lot of market potential so to tap the untapped       NOTES
       market you have to expand the capacity. To expand the capacity, you have to
       identify the location.
    3. Markets are served in a particular region, more competitions and high escalation
       of cost. It is difficult to survive then identifying the location where there is
       untapped market in the different regions.
    4. Relocation required because of Tsunami, fire, flood, earthquake natural holocaust
       etc.
5.3.1 Selection of location
        Selection of the best location involves two phases:
5.3.1.1 Phase 1
        In the phase I a preliminary feasibility study is carried out to assess the production
input, process technology, infrastructural facilities, social and cultural conditions and
legal and government considerations.
Production Input:
Raw material:
         It is important to assess the availability of raw material. The assessing is to be
carried out in the point of view of the transportation cost and the amount or deposit.
Suppose if you start a cement or aluminium industry the deposit of ore and how long it
will be lost, that is to be assessed. You have to see the present requirements and future
requirements and choose the place where the above conditions are fulfilled. The raw
material supplier is for away then the transportation cost dominates the price that makes
you less competitive.
Labour inputs:
        When you assess the labour input, the quality of the labour is important. You
may find the labours with fewer wages but the productivity of that labour may be low.
So in addition to bothering about that wages, you should assess then the skill level also.
        You can see now more foreign IT companies sources India. The main reasons
are those companies identify abundant IT skills in India at comparatively lesser cost. So
they sources India.

Process Technology:

        Some times the technology restricts the choice of location e.g. to start a pulp
and paper mills. You need water for processing so most of the pulp and paper mill
industry are started in the river banks.

                                            213                                     Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           Infrastructural facilities:

                         A study is very much required to asses well connected and land roads, parts,
                 out parts, railway lines telecommunication facilities etc. This is important because it
                 reduces the transportation cost and lead time. Lend time reduction show lot of saving
                 in other costs. It helps the organization to be a cost competitive.

                 Legal and political considerations:

                         Governments woo the corporate to start industry in their respective countries
                 or state through providing free land, exemption of taxes, subsided power tariffs, less
                 cumbersome licensing procedures. In addition, the prospective person has to see that
                 the legal formalities and complication. He / she has to study the government stipulation
                 about the pollution standards to be exercised, zoning codes to be adopted import and
                 export regulations prescribed and construction specifications etc.

                 Social and cultural conditions:

                         This is the process of exploring the attitude of the people towards the plant to
                 be started over there. This study involves the skill availability and accessibility.

                         This study also involves the study about their demographic variables like the
                 age distribution, income distribution, their status, their life conditions their tradition.
                 Here, you should explain in detail to make them aware of the usefulness of plant to up
                 lift them both economically and socially. At present, in India, since this process not
                 carried out systematically and scientifically, many important projects are stalled by the
                 people in many states like West Bengal, Orissa, Tamil Nadu, to state a few.

                 5.3.1.2 Phase – II

                         It there is a problem in the first phase, the second phase may not see the lime
                 light. In the phase 1 macro analysis is over, in the second phase the region, community
                 and site selection take place. Region include country to country or state-to-state within
                 a country or within a state different regions. The factors to be considered in the selection
                 of region, community and site are shown in the table.

                         The factors are considered under different major heading like infrastructure,
                 market, supply, and environment and internal. You should note that most of the factors
                 are considered in all the regional, community and site selection. For example, customer
                 concentration and trends are considered in all region, community and site selection.


     Anna University Chennai                              214
DBA 1651                                                                         PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                       Table 5.1
Regional selection             Community Decision          Site Decision
                                                                                            NOTES
                                   Infrastructure

Transportation network and Transportation network          Proximity to transpor
their costs                and their costs                 tation system
Utilities supply and costs     Utilities supply and costs Utilities supply and costs
                                        Market
Customer concentration and Customer concentration          Customer concentration
trends.                    and trends.                     and trends.
                                         Supply
Materials and supplies         Materials and supplies       Materials and supplies
availability & accessibility   availability & accessibility availability & accessibility
Labour availability &          Labour availability &
accessibility                  accessibility
Land and construction cost     Site availability cost &
                               construction cost
                                                           Size of the site
                                                           Site costs
                                     Environment
The intensity of unionization Community attitudes       Zoning restrictions
towards the new facilities
Climate                       Community service &       Proximally to related
taxes                         industry
                              Banking services          Environmental impact
Government SOPS               Government SOPS
Environmental regulations     Environmental regulations
                                        Internal
                               Preference of the
                               management

5.4 PLANT LOCATION SELECTION

        The selection of the plant is characterized by the subjective factors as well as
the objective factors. But it is very difficult to quantify subjective factors. The plant
location evaluation is done by considering both subjective and objective factors through
a subjective evaluation known as Rating Plan Method. You can see in the following
section, how the rating plan is applied to choose a place, where to start a Bio technol-
ogy plant, in India.

                                          215                                     Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                 To start a biotechnology plant what factors you consider and how do you evalu-
 NOTES           ate the same using rating plan method.

                 Selection Criteria

                 The important considerations for selecting a suitable location are given as follows:

                         a. Natural or climatic conditions.
                         b. Availability and nearness to the sources of raw material.
                         c. Transport costs-in obtaining raw material and also distribution or market-
                            ing finished products to the ultimate users.
                         d. Access to market: small businesses in retail or wholesale or services should
                            be located within the vicinity of densely populated areas.
                         e. Availability of Infrastructural facilities such as developed industrial sheds or
                            sites, link roads, nearness to railway stations, airports or sea ports, avail-
                            ability of electricity, water, public utilities, civil amenities and means of com-
                            munications are important, especially for small scale businesses.
                         f. Availability of skilled and non-skilled labour and technically qualified and
                            trained managers.
                         g. Banking and financial institutions are located nearby.
                         h. Locations with links: to develop industrial areas or business centers result
                            in savings and cost reductions in transport overheads, miscellaneous ex-
                            penses.
                         i. Strategic considerations of safety and security should be given due impor-
                            tance.
                         j. Government influences: Both positive and negative incentives to motivate
                            an entrepreneur to choose a particular location are made available. Posi-
                            tive includes cheap overhead facilities like electricity banking transport, tax
                            relief, subsidies and liberalization. Negative incentives are in form of re-
                            strictions for setting up industries in urban areas for reasons of pollution
                            control and decentralization of industries.
                         k. Residence of small business entrepreneurs want to set up nearby their home-
                            lands.

                          One study of the locational considerations from the small-scale units revealed
                 that the native place or homelands of the entrepreneur was the most important factor.

                         Heavy preference to homeland suggests that small-scale enterprise is not freely
                 mobile. Low preference for Government incentives suggests that concessions and in-
                 centives cannot compensate for poor infrastructure.

                        In the rating plan method, ideal rating is considered for the factors, then how
                 much rating each location scores against each factor is assessed and best location is
                 chosen based on the highest total point.


     Anna University Chennai                             216
DBA 1651                                                                             PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

      Table 5.2 - Rating Plan Method To Evaluate The Factors For Plant
                                  Location:
                                                                                                 NOTES
       Factors                        Ideal Point Lucknow Bangalore Pune
   Availability of technically
   qualified skilled labor.              30            25            28         20

   Availability and nearness to
   the source of material.               20            15            17         15

   Market Potential                      15            13            11         10

   Access to the market                   5              4            5          4

   Competitive Analysis                   5              5            2          3

   Site Economics                        10            10             5          6

   Positive Govt. Influences             10            10             6          6

   Strategic consideration of
   safety and security                    2              2            2          2

   Rent or buy the property               3              3            2          1

   TOTAL POINT                         100             87           78          67

In the above table, Lucknow scores more than the Pune and Bangalore.
5.4.2 Cost analysis method:

         In the previous section, you saw how the rating plan method is applied, to
choose the location. In this section, you can see a method, where only the objective
factor is considered, namely the cost factors i.e., to start a plant in a particular location,
based on the labour availability and accessibility, material availability and accessibility,
you may have different variable cost as well as fixed cost for each location. Now based
on the estimated fixed cost and variable cost, you can formulate for each location, a
different a total cost equation. Once the total cost equation is arrived for each location
by applying the cost volume profit analysis, you can estimate the range of production
quantity at which the locations are preferred. You can understand above method through
exapmle5.1.

Example 5.1

        Consider a corporate office, which wants to identify the best location. They
have identified 3 locations after a preliminary survey. They are locations A, B and C.
The corporate has estimated the variable cost and fixed cost and then the total cost for
the each location against the production quantity. This is shown in the table.

                                              217                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                                       Table 5.3
 NOTES
                                   SITE          Fixed cost                Variable cost
                                               (Rupees in lakhs)          (Rupees per unit)
                                    A                2.5                      1000
                                    B                3                         750
                                    C                4                         500
                 Solution:

                        Considering site A and B,

                 the total cost for site A for ‘x’ quantities = 250000 + 1000x. —— (1)
                 the total cost for site B for ‘x’ quantities = 300000 + 750x. —— (2)
                 Therefore from (1) and (2),
                                                     x = (300000 – 250000)/(1000-750)
                                                      = 200 units.
                 Considering site B and C,

                 the total cost for site B for ‘x’ quantities = 300000 + 750x. ——— (3)
                 the total cost for site C for ‘x’ quantities = 400000 + 500x. ——— (4)
                                  Therefore from (3) and (4),
                                                    x = (400000 – 300000)/(750-500)
                                                      = 400 units.
                 Result,

                          If ‘x’ < 200 units, select site A as it has minimum fixed value.
                    If 200 < ’x’ < 400 units, select site B as it has minimum variable cost
                    compared to A and minimum total cost compared to C.
                             If ‘x’ > 400 units, select site C as it has the least variable cost.
                 Graphical representation:
                 Figure 5.1




     Anna University Chennai                              218
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Review Questions:
   1) Define facility location.
                                                                                             NOTES
   2) When will you go for facility location?
   3) What are the phases in the facility location?
   4) What the methods used for plant location selection?

1.3 TYPES OF LAYOUT

      After selecting the plant location, based on the type of production system to
be adopted, the layout has to be decided. The types of layout are:
                     1. Fixed product layout
                     2. Product layout
                     3. Group (flexible) layout
                     4. Process layout

5.5.1 Fixed Product Layout

         The fixed product layout is developed by locating the workstations or produc-
tion centers on the fixed job. Fixed layout type is used when the job size is large.
Logistics are involved in ensuring that the right processes are brought to the product at
the right time and at the right place. This has been mainly used in electronic industry to
support computer systems integration and test; materials, sub assemblies, components,
peripherals are brought to the single workstation where finished system is built. This
type of layout requires generally higher number of personnel and equipments than the
other types, since the work piece remains stationary.

Figure 5.2 – Fixed Product Layout




                                           219                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                 Advantages:
 NOTES
                     1. This method is highly flexible and any changes in product design and product
                        mix can be easily accommodated.
                     2. Since work centers are independent, scheduling results in achieving minimum
                        total production time.
                     3. The teams of personnel are responsible for continuity of operations.
                     4. Movement of materials is reduced.
                     5. Job enlargement could be promoted by allowing individuals or teams to per-
                        form the whole job.

                 Limitations:

                     1.    Skilled labour is required.
                     2.    Supervision is required.
                     3.    Positioning of material and machinery is costly and complex.
                     4.    Equipment duplication may occur.
                     5.    Utilization of equipment is required.

                 5.5.2 Product Layout

                      In this layout the machines are arranged according to the processing sequence of
                 the product. Material flows directly from one workstation to other workstation. Ma-
                 chines are not shared by the products. This type of layout is used for high volume
                 production. For proper utilization of machines sufficient production volume is required.
                 Since the processes are located closed together in the production sequence, the layout
                 minimizes the distance between the work center.

                 Figure 5.3 – Product Layout




                 Advantages:
                          1. The total production time is short.
                          2. The material handling is reduced because of the location of the machines to
                             minimize the distances between the consecutive operations.

     Anna University Chennai                             220
DBA 1651                                                                       PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

      3. Less skilled operator is required. Thus training is simple and short.
      4. Less space is occupied by work in transit and temporary storage.
                                                                                            NOTES
      5. The flow is smooth and logical flow line results.
      6. Small in process inventory as the work is directly fed from one process to
         other.
Limitations:

      1. The production time is determined by the slowest machine.
      2. A general supervision is required.
      3. Since identical machines are arranged at various locations, initial investment
         is high.
      4. A change in the product design requires an entire change in the layout.
      5. A break down of one machine lead to complete stoppage of entire production.

1.5.3 Group Layout

    When production volume is not sufficient for product layout, group layout is used.
Here products are grouped in to logical product families. The groups of processes are
called cells. So it is also called as cellular layout. It is a compromise between product
and process layout. Since products are grouped into families this technology is also
called as group technology with each individual cells are called GT cells.

Figure 5.4 – Group Layout




Advantages:

      1. This supports the use of general purpose equipments.
      2. This is a compromise between product and process layout.
      3. Shorter travel distances and smoother flow lines than process layout.

                                          221                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                       4. Team attitude and job enlargement tend to occur.
 NOTES                 5. Utilization of each machine is increased.

                 Limitations:

                       1. Higher skilled employees are required
                       2. General supervision is required.
                       3. It depends on the balanced material flow through the cell otherwise buffers
                          and WIP storage are required.

                 1.5.3 Process Layout

                          In this type the machine are grouped and the product passes from one group to
                 other group based on the sequence of production. The groups of processes are called
                 cells. The process layout is used in the rapid changes in the product mix or production
                 volume as well as when both product and group layout cannot be used. Typically job
                 shop employs process layout due to the variety of products manufactured and their low
                 production volume. It has high degree of inter departmental flow.

                 Figure5.5 – Process Layout




                 Advantages:

                       1. Since the machines are grouped, only fewer machines are required; thus mini-
                          mum investment is required.
                       2. Better utilization of machines could be achieved.
                       3. High degree of flexibility exists.
                       4. Supervision could be specialized.
                       5. The working personnel find the job more satisfying and interesting since there
                          is a diversity of tasks.

                      Limitations:

                       1. Highly skilled labour is required.
                       2. Work in process inventory is increased.

     Anna University Chennai                           222
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

         3.   Total production time is longer
         4.   Planning and control of production system turns out to be tedious.
                                                                                             NOTES
         5.   Space and capital are tied up by the work in process.
         6.   Material handling is more expensive because of longer flow line.

5.5.5 Design of Process Layout

              To design a process layout there are some computerized techniques avail-
              able. Computerized techniques are classified into:
              •   Techniques which select the best process layout based on the material
                  cost comparison.
              •   Other computerized techniques which select the best process layout based
                  on the qualitative factors namely the closeness between the departments.

              Closeness ratings are as follows:

                          A – Absolutely essential
                          E - Ordinary closeness
                          I – Important
                          O – Ordinary importance
                          U – Un important
                          X – Not desirable.

CRAFT (Computerized Relationship Allocation of Facilities Techniques)

     CRAFT algorithm was originally developed by Armour and Buffa. CRAFT is
more widely used than ALDEP and CORELAP. It is an improvement algorithm. It
starts with an intial layout and improves the layout by interchanging the departments
pairwise so that the transportation cost is minimized. The algorithm continues until no
further interchanges are possible to reduce the transportation cost. The result given by
CRAFT is not optimum in terms of minimum in majority of applications. Hence, CRAFT
is mainly a heuristic algorithm.Unfortunately, plant layout problem comes under
combinatorial category. So, usage of efficient heuristic like CRAFT is inevitable for
such problem.

CRAFT Requirements:

    1. Initial layout.
    2. Flow data.
    3. Cost per unit distance.
    4. Total number of departments.
    5. Fixed departments.
         Number of such departments
         Location of those departments
    6. Area of departments.

                                             223                                   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                              PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                    CRAFT Procedure
 NOTES
                     The steps of CRAFT algorithm are summarized below:

                    Step 1. Input: 1. Number of departments
                                   2. Number of interchangeable departments
                                   3. Intial layout
                                   4. Cost matrix
                                   5. Flow matrix
                                   6. Area of departments

                    Step 2. Compute centroids of departments in the present layout.
                    Step 3. Forum distance matrix using the centroids.
                    Step 4. Given data on flow, distance and cost, compute the total handling cost of
                             the present layout.
                    Step 5. Find all the possible pairwise interchanges of departments based on
                              common border or eqal area criterion. For each possibility, interchange
                              the corresponding centroids and compute approximate costs.
                    Step 6. Find the pair of departments corresponding to the minimum handling cost
                             from among all the possible pairs of interchanges.
                    Step 7. Is the cost in the previous step less than the total cost of the present
                             layout? If yes, go to step 8.If not go to step 11.
                   Step 8. Interchange the selected pair of departments.Call this as the NEW
                             LAYOUT. Compute centroids, distance matrix and total cost.
                   Step 9. Is the cost of new layout less than the cost of the present layout?
                            If yes, go to Step 10.If not, go to Step 11.
                   Step 10.The new layout is hereafter considered as the present layout.its data on
                             centroids, layout matrix and the total cost is retained. Go to step 5.
                 Step 11. Print the present layout as the FINAL LAYOUT.
                 Step 12. Stop

                                                     LAYOUT:
                                                     Figure 5.6




     Anna University Chennai                          224
DBA 1651                                                             PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

           Figure 5.7                            Figure 5.8
                                                                                  NOTES




    1) Iteration 1: calculate the distance matrix.
      Distance between two departments = |x1-x2| + |y1-y2|
           Where,
               (X1, y1) is the centre of department 1

             Centroids of A,B and C,
                A(50,125)
                B(25,50)
                 C(75,50)

                               DISTANCE MATRIX:
                                 Figure 5.9




    1) Determine the total cost for all possible movements between each depart-
        ment.
   Cost between two departments = Distance matrix X Cost matrix



                                       225                            Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                              PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                                    Figure 5.10
 NOTES




                      1) Re allocation of departments,
                         In this step the departments are interchanged. For interchanging
                                1. Both departments should have the same area (or)
                                2. Both departments should share common boundary
                      2) After reallocating find the new centroid and repeat step 2 and 3.

                      ITERATION 2
                      Interchange A and C (Because A and C have common border and same area)
                      Therefore new Centroids are,
                                            C (50,125)
                                            B (25,150)
                                            A (75, 50)

                                                    Figure 5.11




     Anna University Chennai                         226
DBA 1651                                                            PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                          DISTANCE MATRIX:
                              Figure 5.12
                                                                                NOTES




                             COST MATRIX:
                               Figure 5.13




ITERATION 3:
      Interchange B and C (Because B and C have common border and same area).
       Therefore new centroid are,
                           B (50,175)
                           C (25, 50)
                           A (75, 50)
                                  Figure 5.14




                                    227                             Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                                DISTANCE MATRIX:
 NOTES                                              Figure 5.15




                                                    COST MATRIX:
                                                      Figure 5.16




                                                  TOTAL COST: 975

                       5) Check total cost for all the possible reallocations and select the layout with
                          minimum total cost.
                       6) Repeat the iterations till the least total cost is achieved. This layout is optimum
                          solution.

                         In the given problem layout seems to be optimal compared to other two
                          layouts. Now taking layout 2 as base layout, continue further iterations to
                          find the least cost. That layout is the optimal solution.
                 Corelap Algorithm

                 Input data requirement
                    1. Relationship chart and closeness rating.
                    2. Building description is given by maximum length to width ratio.



     Anna University Chennai                             228
DBA 1651                                                                            PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Objective
   1. Maximizing overall closeness rating.
                                                                                                  NOTES
How the software programs works

   First he found out the closeness rating between the departments. It has to be placed
   in layout. If there is any type select the department which is high in closeness rating.
   If there is again tie select the department which is larger in area. If the tie still exists
   then select any department randomly.

Output

   Computer printout shows final layout.

Determination of placement order of department:

     For the purpose of finding the order of placing the departments the following
   data are needed.

REL- chart and closeness ratings:

           REL –chart:

                                        Table 5.4




     CLOSENESS VALUES:

                            A=6, E-5, I=4, O=3, U=2, and X=1

       Using the closeness rating TCR (total closeness rating) is calculated thus:

                                            229                                     Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                                       Table 5.5
 NOTES




                      The following steps are carried out to select the placement order of the departments.

                      1. Department with the largest TCR is selected for the first placement. In case
                         of ties, the department with the largest area is selected. Department 5 is
                         selected.
                      2. Review the closeness relationship of department 5 with other departments to find
                         the department that has the highest closeness relationship with department 5.

                                                       Table 5.6




                         Department 6 has the highest closeness relationship with the department 5.
                          So it has to be placed next to department 5.

                       3. Check the closeness relationship for both the departments.

                                                           Table 5.7




     Anna University Chennai                            230
DBA 1651                                                                       PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

            In the above study department 7 has high closeness rating with 6. Thus it
       has to be placed in the layout next.
                                                                                             NOTES
            Similarly, if there is a tie in closeness rating, then select the department
       with the highest TCR.

     If there is a tie again, then select a department with larger area. In case of tie in
     both conditions, then select a department randomly. Order of placement:

           5       6      7      2         1         4   3


           PLACEMENT OF DEPARTMENTS IN THE LAYOUT:
                           Table 5.8




                                       5




    1. The first department to be placed is 5. it is placed in the centre of a (7x 15)
       layout. Each cell has an area of 6000 sq.mt.
    2. The second department from the list is department 6. It is thus placed.

                                      Table 5.9




                           6    6
                                5




   (Department 6 has two squares. It can be placed thus…)

                                               231                              Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                 3. Department 7 has to be placed. It has two squares. It can be placed thus in three
 NOTES           ways.

                 Table 5.10                    Table 5.11                          Table 5.12

                    7      7
                           6    6                   6     6      7                 6       6
                           5                              5      7             7       7   5


                 In the above case we have to find the weighted rating for each department.

                           WEIGHTED DEPARTMENT RATING

                                                        Table 5.13

                                Closeness relationship           Weighted rating.
                                       A                                 243
                                        E                                 81
                                        I                                 27
                                       O                                   9
                                       U                                   1
                                       X                             -729

                      a. Department 7 with department 6 = E = 81,
                         Therefore placement rating = 81.
                      b. Weighted rating of 7 with 6 = 81
                         Weighted rating of 7 with 5 = 27
                                                            —————
                                                   Total = 108
                                                            —————
                      Similarly, for the other layout also, the rating is 108.
                     Thus we have to select either b. or c. layouts… let us take c. layout…

                    1. Next department 2 has to be placed.

                                                        Table 5.14


                                                2         6          6
                                                7         7          5



     Anna University Chennai                             232
DBA 1651                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                      PLACEMENT RATING = (27+1) = 28.
                 No other allocation has maximum placement rating…
                                                                                           NOTES
   2. Next department 1 has to be placed. It has the following four possibilities.

                     Table 5.15                        Table 5.16




                  Table 5.17                           Table 5.18




PLACEMENT RATING:

     A.    Weighted rating with department 6 and 2 = 82
     B.    Weighted rating with department 6 and 5 = 10
     C.    Weighted rating with department 7 and 5 = 10
     D.    Weighted rating with department 7 and 2 = 82

                                      Table 5.19

                                  1      1
                                  2      6         6
                                  7      7         5


          The above arrangement is selected randomly (between A. & D.)

     6.     Next department 4 has to be placed. It has the following five possibilities.




                                             233                              Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                             PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                  Table 5.20             Table 5.21                        Table 5.22       Table 5.23
 NOTES
                  4    1 1                   1 1                               1 1          1 1
                  4 2 6 6                4   2   6       6                     2   6 6      2   6 6   4
                       7 7     5         4   7 7 5                             7   7 5      7 7 5     4
                                                                                   4 4


                      Table 5.24
                      1 1    4 4
                      2 6 6
                      7 7 5

                                    e.

                 PLACEMENT RATING:

                       A. Weighted rating with department 1 and 2 = 108
                       B. Weighted rating with department 2 and 7 = 82
                       C. Weighted rating with department 7 and 5 = 28
                       D. Weighted rating with department 6 and 5 = 28
                       E. Weighted rating with department 1 and 6 = 28

                                                                 Table 5.25
                                                 4           1       1
                                                 4           2       6     6
                                                             7       7     5



                 The above arrangement is selected.(A.)

                      1. The last department to be placed is department 3.

                                                                 Table 5.26

                                                     4           1     1       3
                                                     4           2     6       6
                                                     7           7     5



     Anna University Chennai                                     234
DBA 1651                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


        The above placement of department 3 has maximum placement rating. (Based         NOTES
on REL). Thus the layout is allocated with all the departments as follows.


                                       Table 5.27



                       4     1   1       3
                       4     2   6       6
                             7   7       5




Total Score of The Layout:


      Total score of the layout is the sum of the products found by multiplying the
length of the shortest path between all departments and the numerical closeness value
for the pairs.


        Total score = ΣFor all pairs (Closeness rating x length of shortest path)


    The path is calculated by the rectilinear distance from the border of one depart-
ment to the border of the other one.


    Therefore, if two departments are adjacent, they will have common border. The
path length will be zero.


Total score of the above layout is given as follows:




                                             235                               Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                    PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                                        Table 5.28
 NOTES
                                  Department to Distance            Closeness        Score
                        1                2             0                -              -
                        1                3             0                -              -
                        1                4             0                -              -
                        1                5             2                3              6
                        1                6             0                -              -
                        1                7             1                2              2
                        2                3             2                2              4
                        2                4             0                -              -
                        2                5             2                4              8
                        2                6             0                -              -
                        2                7             0                -              -
                        3                4             2                2              4
                        3                5             1                2              2
                        3                6             0                -              -
                        3                7             2                2              4
                        4                5             3                4             12
                        4                6             1                2              2
                        4                7             1                2              2
                        5                6             0                -              -
                        5                7             0                -              -
                        6                7             0                -              -
                                                    Total                             46

                         Thus the procedure to find the total score ends with this step. One can repeat
                 the procedure with different scales and pick up the best layout with the MINIMUM
                 TOTAL SCORE…

                 ALDEP (Automated layout Programming):

                           ALDEP is a construction type algorithm .This algorithm uses basic data on
                 facilities and builds a design by successively placing the departments in the layout. After
                 placing all the departments in the layout, a score is computed .This is nothing but the
                 sum of the closeness rating values of different neighbouring departments in the layout.
                 This algorithm is repeated for a prespecified number of times and the best layout is
                 selected based on the maximum layout score.

     Anna University Chennai                             236
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

The basic data required for this algorithm are listed below.
                                                                                             NOTES
   1. Total number of departments.
   2. Area of each department .
   3. Length and width of layout.
    1. Closeness ratings of various pairs of departments in the form of Relationship
       Chart.
    2. Minimum department preference (MDP) value.
    3. Sweep width.
    4. Number of iterations to be performed.
    5. Location and size of each restricted area in the layout if present.

Steps to be followed:

Step 0.INPUT:
    1) Number of departments in the layout.
    2) Area of each department.
    3) Length and width of the layout.
    4) REL-CHART (Relationship chart).
    5) MDP value.
    6) Sweep width.
    7) Number of iterations to be carried (N).
    8) Current iteration number(I),1.
    9) 9.Locations and sizes of fixed departments if present.
    10) 10.score of the current layout (It is assumed as a very high negative value
        before performing the first iteration).

Step 1. Select a department randomly and place it in the layout.
Step 2. Scan the relationship (REL) – chart and classify the unselected departments
         into two lists, namely List A and List B.

List A contains the unselected departments whose relationship values in relation to the
lastly selected department are less than the MDP value.
List B contains the unselected departments whose relationship values in relation to the
lastly selected department are greater than or equal to the MDP value.
Step 3. Is the List B empty? If so , go to step 4;otherwise,go to step 5.
Step 4. Select a department randomly from List A and place it in the layout.
          go to step 6
Step 5. Select a department from List B which has the maximum REL value in relation
          to the lastly selected department and place it in the layout.
Step 6. Whether all the departments are placed in the layout? If not go to step 2; if yes,
          go to step 7.
Step 7. Compute the score of the layout.


                                           237                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                  PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           Step 8. Is the score of the layout more than the score of the current best layout? If yes,
                          update the new layout as the current best layout and store the corresponding
                          score. otherwise, drop the new layout.
                 Step 9. Is the current iteration number I =N? if yes, go to step 10; otherwise, increment
                          the iteration number by one (I =I+1) and then go to step 1.
                 Step 10. Print the current best layout and the corresponding score.

                 STEPS OF ALDEP:

                 1. Get the inputs. (REL chart, Department area, layout plan)
                                       (A=64, E=16, I=4, O=1, U=0, X=-1024)
                             The REL diagram for a plant with 11 departments is as follows:

                                                       Table 5.29




                  1)    Based on the area of all the departments, fix an appropriate scale. Based on the
                        scale divide the departments in to number of square blocks.




     Anna University Chennai                             238
DBA 1651                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                     Table 5.30
                                                                                           NOTES
           DEPARTMENT                AREA          NO. OF SQUARES
               1                      600               12
               2                      400                8
                 3                    350                  7
                 4                    150                  3
                 5                    350                  7
                 6                    150                  3
                 7                    200                  4
                 8                    800                 16
                 9                    200                  4
                10                    350                  7
                11                   5000                 50

(SCALE: 1: 50, i.e. each cell in the layout is assumed to be a square of area 50 sq.
units).


    1. Draw an initial layout based on the layout area or based on the total area of all
       the departments. Divide the departments in to the basic number of squares.
       (Sum of all department squares).


   1)         ITERATION-1:
                  a. Initially assume a closeness rating of “0”.
                  b. Fix a cut-off value for the department selection. (i.e.) “A” or “E”
                     or “I”...
                  c. Initially place a department randomly or the department with the
                     max. area.
                  d. Then from the candidate (remaining) departments, select a de-
                     partment with the maximum cut-off value with the previously
                      placed department.


    2)        SERPENT TYPE ALLOCATION:
                   While allocating/placing each department in the layout, it has to be
              laid out in the following sequence. (Each cell is area of 50 in sq. units…
              based on the scale).



                                          239                                 Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                                        Table 5.31
 NOTES




                                                        Table 5.32


                  11       11      11     9        10      2        2       7       7        0      0
                  11       11      11     9        10      2        2       7       0        0      0
                  11       11      11     9        10      2        2       7       0        0      0
                  11       11      11     9        10      2        2       8       0        0      0
                  11       11      11     6        10      1        3       8       0        0      0
                  11       11      11     6        10      1        3       8       0        0      0
                  11       11      11     6        10      1        3       8       0        0      0
                  11       11      11     4        5       1        3       8       0        0      0

                  11       11      11     4        5       1        3       8       0        0      0
                  11       11      11     4        5       1        3       8       0        0      0
                  11       11      11     11       5       1        3       8       0        0      0
                  11       11      11     11       5       1        8       8       0        0      0
                  11       11      11     11       5       1        8       8       0        0      0
                  11       11      11     11       5       1        8       8       0        0      0
                  11       11      11     11       1       1        8       8       0        0      0


                 6) If in there is a tie or no department satisfies the cut-off value during the selection of
                       candidate department, then place a department randomly.
                 7) Calculation of TCR (Total Closeness Rating):
                       a. Once all the departments are placed, then the next step is to calculate
                       TCR.


     Anna University Chennai                              240
DBA 1651                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


    b. Make a note of all the pair of departments sharing common border with               NOTES
    each other. (Note a pair only once i.e. either 1-3 or 3-1).
    c. Now add up all the pairs’ REL points…
    d. Then multiply it by 2.
                                      Table 5.33
                            Pairs                REL points
                            11-1                        0
                            11-9                       16
                            11-6                       16
                            11-4                       64
                            11-5                        4
                            9-10                        1
                            9-64
                            6-10                        1
                             6-4                       16
                             4-5                        1
                            10-2                        0
                            10-5                        4
                             5-1                        1
                             2-8                        0
                             2-3                       16
                             2-1                       64
                             1-3                       16
                             1-8                        0
                             3-8                        1
                             7-8                       64
                             2-7                        0
                                                     290

Thus the Total Closeness Rating is (290*2) = 580

7)      This is the TCR value for the initial layout.
8)      Keeping this as the minimum value continue the steps (4-7) for all the possible
layouts and calculate the TCR value for all the layouts. Once iteration results in a TCR
value less than the immediately previous layout’s TCR value then that layout is the
optimal solution.


                                          241                                 Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                       PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                                           Table 5.34
 NOTES
                  11    11      11         8          8       6         9       1        1   0   0

                  11    11      11         8          8       6         9       1        0   0   0

                  11    11      11         8          8       6         9       1        0   0   0

                  11    11      11         8          8       4         9       1        0   0   0

                  11    11      11         8          8       4         3       1        0   0   0

                  11    11      11         8          8       4         3       1        0   0   0

                  11    11      11         7          8       5         3       1        0   0   0

                  11    11      11         7          8       5         3       1        0   0   0

                  11    11      11         7          8       5         3       1        0   0   0

                  11    11      11         7          8       5         3       1        0   0   0

                  11    11      11         11         10      5         3       1        0   0   0

                  11    11      11         11         10      5         2       2        0   0   0

                  11    11      11         11         10      5         2       2        0   0   0

                  11    11      11         11         10      10        2       2        0   0   0

                  11    11      11         11         10      10        2       2        0   0   0

                 Total Closeness Rating:

                                                           Table 5.35

                                           Pairs                            REL points
                                           11-8                                 64
                                           11-7                                 64
                                           11-10                                 4
                                               8-7                              64
                                               8-10                              1


     Anna University Chennai                               242
DBA 1651                                                                       PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


                              8-6                          1                                NOTES
                              8-4                          1
                              8-5                          0
                          10-5                             4
                          10-2                             0
                              6-9                          4
                              6-4                         16
                              4-5                          1
                              4-9                          1
                              4-3                          0
                              5-2                          0
                              5-3                          1
                              9-1                          0
                              9-3                          1
                              3-2                         16
                              3-1                         16
                              1-2                         64

                                                        319

Thus the Total Closeness Rating is (319*2) = 638.


        Thus Iteration 2 shows that layout 2 has high TCR value compared to layout 1.
Thus layout 2 is an optimal one compared to layout 1. Similarly, iterations are continued
to find the optimal layout.


a. LINE BALANCING


         This is a technique applied to design workplace of a plant, which adopts
flow line production system. You know that the productive system of flow line produc-
tion produces less variety and standardized products. So the capacity of the system is
to be established first or the no. of units produced per day.


                                          243                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                            Figure 5.17 – Line Balancing
 NOTES




                 Objective: To design an effective and efficient workplace.

                 Input:
                 Capacity:

                         The capacity as it is mentioned already that the capacity is measured through
                 the output. In an automobile industry it may be number of cars to be produced in a day.
                 To decide the capacity you need to have the information about the demand for the
                 product. Yearly demand has been converted into day to day capacity requirement.

                 Technological constraints:

                       Technological constraint that means when you are manufacturing a product,
                 there is a sequence in which the operation on the components is to be carried out then
                 the produced components are assembled according to the particular sequence. For
                 example in the case of electric motor manufacturing activity the activities and immediate
                 predecessor activity to be carried out are given below:

                                                       Table 5.36

                                      Activities              ImmediateActivities         Min

                    A Axile manufacturing                              -                   700
                    B Rotar manufacturing                              -                   800
                    C Rotar assembly                               A, B                    400
                    D Stator manufacturing                             -                   200
                    E Stator cashing manufacturing                     -                   400
                    F Stator assembly                              D, E                    300
                    G Protective shield manufacturing                  -                   500
                    H Final assembly                            C, E, F                    300

                 The above relationship could be shown in a network form as follows for clear under-
                 standing.

     Anna University Chennai                            244
DBA 1651                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                     Figure 5.18
                                                                                           NOTES




Available Working time:

        The available working time is the total working hours available based on the
time frame. Example: if the capacity calculation is done for the day then the available
hour’s calculation is done for day. If there is one shift of 8 hours duration then the
available time in seconds is calculated as 8 x 60 x 60 second.

                         = 28,800 seconds

Technological constraint continuation:

          Each activity is considered to be an element. An element is a distinct that of
a specified job. This is done for the purpose of observation, measurement and analysis.
Against each element the time for completing the activity is also estimated.

Output:
Number of stations:

        Based on the available working time per day, the no. of units to be manufac-
tured, and the total work content, the no. of stations are calculated as follows:

No. of stations = 3600 x 35 units

               [Total work content per unit] [Desired no. of units per day]
        =     ————————————————————————
              Total productive time available per day

        =    8 x 60- x 60

        =    4.375

        =   5 stations

                                          245                                 Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                  PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                 Maximum allowable time:
 NOTES
                 From this you can calculate the maximum allowable time for each station

                                    Total available hours
                          =    ———————————————————
                                   Desired no. of units per day

                         = 8 x 60 x 60 /35
                         = 823 seconds.

                 Minimum Allowable time:

                      This is the highest elemental time. In this example the highest elemental time is
                 800 seconds. The maximum and minimum allowable time helps you to assess the
                 efficiency and effectiveness of the proposed designs.

                 Assignment of the job elements to the workstations:

                          A method is to be adopted to assign the jobs to workstations. The method
                 may be an optimal method or heuristic method. In heuristic method, you may get best
                 solution but there is no guarantee that you may get a solution. But it helps to get nearer
                 to best solution. One such a procedure is the longest operation time (LOT) Remaining.
                 Longest Operation time remaining means after assigning a particular task to a work
                 station. You should find out the remaining unassigned elements and choose the element
                 with highest operation time. Then add the element with the already assigned element.
                 You should be careful enough that the total element time in a particular workstation
                 should not exceed the cycle time established. Suppose the element considered for
                 assigning could not be assigned because the total elemental time at the workstation
                 increased beyond the cycle time, then in such case, you should look for the next highest
                 remaining elemental time. The above mentioned caution is to be followed before as-
                 signing the element to the work station. Thus process is continued till all the elements
                 are assigned.

                 Assignment of elements for 823 seconds work station cycle time

                                                       Table 5.37

                          B         A         C&E D&F             G&H
                          I WS      II          III       IV         V
                                    WS          WS        WS       WS

                                          WS – Work



     Anna University Chennai                             246
DBA 1651                                                                          PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Station I:
                                                                                             NOTES
        Consider the highest elemental time. This is element B it could be straight away
assigned to station because it does not have any predecessor. Next 5 highest elemental
time is 700 that is element A. But element A could not be assigned because if you
assigned A the stations sum of elemental time exceeds the time cycle time 823 seconds.
This reason holds good for other remaining elemental times.

Station II:

       In Station II you can assign element A. This has elemental time of 700
second. You can not assign any remaining elements to station II because the total
elemental time exceeds the cycle time.

Station III:

         In Station III the remaining highest elemental time is 500 minutes that is of
element G. But before assigning the activities, you should complete other activities as
per the technological constraints. So next highest operational elements are C & E, so
C & E are
assigned to station III. No. other elemental could be assigned to station III.

                                         Station IV:
                                         Table 5.38

                    Line design for 800 seconds

                1      2    3       4   5 Effectiveness Efficiency
        B       A      C&D E&F     G&H Goal accomp-     Utilization
                                             lishment   of employee
Time requi-
red per unit    800 700      600   720   800     28800/800 = 36   3620
in each                                          Units
station

Available
time each       800 800      800   800   800                      4000    Utilization =
work station                                                              3620/4000 =
                                                                  90.5%

Idle time per   0      100   200   80    0                        380     Idle time =
cycle                                                                     380/4100 =
                                                                            9.26%

Next highest unassigned element is G. For the same reason spelt out previously. They
are not allotted to station IV then you can go for allocating next highest elements namely
D & F.

                                               247                                 Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                         PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                 Station IV:
 NOTES
                  Then In the remaining unallotted elements, element G is allotted first and then H.
                 The efficiency and effectiveness

                 The efficiency and effectiveness of the LOT method is shown below:

                 Suppose if you adopt minimum allowable cycle time 800 seconds. On the basis for the
                 allocation of elements, then the elements to be assigned will be as shown as below:

                    Next highest unassigned element is G. For the same reason spelt out previously.
                 They are not allotted to station IV then you can go for allocating next highest elements
                 namely D & F.

                 Station V:

                     Then In the remaining un allotted elements, element G is allotted first and then H.

                 The efficiency and effectiveness

                 The efficiency and effectiveness of the LOT method is shown below:

                 Suppose if you adopt minimum allowable cycle time 800 seconds. On the basis for the
                 allocation of elements, then the elements to be assigned will be as shown as below:

                                                                Table 5.40

                                       B         A        C&D         E&F      G&H
                                       I         II       III         IV       V

                                                                Table 5.41

                                   Line design for 800 seconds

                                  1        2    3          4   5   Effectiveness       Efficiency
                          B       A        C&D E&F        G&H Goal accomp-             Utilization
                                                                   lishment            of employee
                  Time requi-
                  red per unit    800 700         820     500   800   28800/800 = 35    3620
                  in each                                             Units
                  station

                  Available
                  time each       820 820         820     820   820                     4100         Utilization =
                  work station                                                                       3620/4100 =
                                                                                        88.29%
                  Idle time per   20       120        0   320   20                      480           Idle time =
                  cycle                                                                               480/4100 =
                                                                                                      11.71%


     Anna University Chennai                                    248
DBA 1651                                                                       PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

         As you have seen the second design consists of 800, as the cycle time stands
better in terms of efficiency and effectiveness compound to the first design. Employee
                                                                                            NOTES
idleness could be reduced tasks. Thus results in reduction in no. of the employee.

        Till now it is assumed that the elemental time is deterministic but there is a
possibility that the more manual elements involved in the task you can’t get the single
elemental time, in this case usually the elemental time follows certain distribution. You
can design the workplace or product layout by considering the stochastic time elements
also.

Review Question:

        1.   What are the types of layout?
        2.   What are the techniques used in layout planning?
        3.   Define line balancing and why is it required?
        4.   What is minimum allowable time?

5.7 TIME STUDY AND WORK MEASUREMENT

         Work study consists of two major phases namely method study and work
measurement. In an industry method study is applied with an objective of simplifying
the job and finding the best method of doing work. Method study paves the way to
reduce the work content due to bad working methods, bad layout, wrong selection of
tools etc. Work measurement is applied with an objective to reduce the ineffective time
and to set the standards. Usually in the industry the method study is applied to ensure
the correct methods, process etc. Then, for the best method - the measurement of the
method is carried out.

According to ILO, Work measurement is defined as follows:

      “Work measurement is the application of techniques designed to estab-
lish the time for a qualified worker to carry out the job at a defined level of
performance” Now each key term requires a kind of explanation:

Who is qualified worker?

        Qualified worker is one who has the requisite physical attributes, requisite in-
telligence and education, requisite skill and knowledge. With the above mentioned
qualities, he can complete the work to meet the satisfactory standards of safety, quality
and quantity.

Average worker:

   All the recruited workers are qualified workers. But if you analyze their perfor-
mance. The performance may be the time taken per unit by the worker. Assume that

                                          249                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                 there are 500 workers; if you analyze their performance; the performance against the
 NOTES           frequency mostly follows the normal distribution.

                                                      Figure 5.19




                           The shaded portion represents the majority of the worker that means more
                 workers take time to produce one unit between t1 and t2. The no. of employee fall in
                 the region you can consider as the qualified average workers. The unshaded portions
                 in the left side represent above average performance and the unshaded portion of the
                 right side represent the below average performer. Since most of the workers performance
                 falls in the shaded area. The organization has to set the time standard for the average
                 workers.

                 Work Measurement Techniques

                 There are many techniques available to measure the work. The techniques are listed
                 below:

                                                      Figure 5.20




                 Procedures to conduct work measurement technique: According to ILO


     Anna University Chennai                           250
DBA 1651                                                                     PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

 SELECT   : Select the job to be studied.                                                 NOTES
 RECORD   : Record all the relevant facts by direct observations or by means of
            suitable recording technique.
 EXAMINE : Examine critically the recorded elements.
 MEASURE : Measure each element by time measurement.
 COMPILE : Arrive at the normal time and standard time by adding allowance.
 INSTALL  : Implement the established standard time.

5.7.1 Time Study

Select:

      First you should select the job to be studied. Situations may lead you to conduct
the time study to fix the time standard.

    a) SITUATION:

   1. Organization requires time standard to introduce incentive scheme
   2. To determine the no. of equipment and no. of workers, you need to conduct
      work measurement technique.
   3. To fix the standard cost, particularly to determine the labor cost, you need time
      standard.
   4. To determine the selling price, tender price and to promise the delivery time
      you need to have time standard.
Record:

       After selecting the job you should note down the surrounding conditions like
working place, layout condition and see to that the worker adhere to the methods
suggested by the method study.

Examine:

         Next you should divide the job into different elements. Suppose you have to
fix time standard for the job which involves drilling operation. The elements are:

          1.   Selecting the work piece and placing it in jig.
          2.   Tightening the screw.
          3.   Advancing the drill towards the work piece.
          4.   Drilling.
          5.   Withdrawing the drill from the operation.
          6.   Loosening the screw.
          7.   Removing piece from jig.
          8.   Removing the chips.

                                            251                              Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           The purposes of the dividing jobs into different elements are to time the elements accu-
                 rately and also to have a distinguishable starting and ending points for each element.

                 Measure:

                            After dividing the jobs into different elements, the number of observations to
                 be made on each elements is to be determined. Here a trade off is to be made between
                 the accuracy of the result and the cost of the time / study. If you take more observa-
                 tions, results in more accuracy in the result. You can know now, how do you determine
                 the sample size statistically.

                          To determine the sample size statistically you have to specify the desired
                 accuracy and the confidence level. Suppose you need 5 % accuracy result and 95 %
                 confidence level. Assume that the sampling mean follows normal distribution. t is the
                 mean.

                                                      Figure 5.21




                         Of the elemental time, t is the standard error of the sampling distribution. A 95
                 % confidence level and ± 5% accuracy level means that the changes are at
                 least 95 out of 100 that the average value for the element will not be in error
                 when you allow more or less 5 % of true element time.


                 The above bold statements showed pictorially as below:



     Anna University Chennai                            252
DBA 1651                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


                                                                                               NOTES




    From the above figure, you can arrive Z σ t = (accuracy level) X ( t )

    At 95% confidence limit and 5% accuracy level, the Z value from the normal distribu-
    tion is 1.96.
σ
t
                  1.96 σ t     = .05 t           ————— 1

    You know the relationship between the population standard deviation and standard
    error of the sampling distribution.

                  σ t =σ/        n               ————— 2

    Where n is the sample size, σ is the population standard deviation. Substitute the
    value of     in equation 1.

                   1.96 σ /      n = .05 t

                  1.96 σ / .05 t =        n

                              n = (1.96 σ / .05 t )2

    Here, usually the population standard deviation is not known. In this cases is estimated
    from the pilot study. Suppose the number of samples to be taken is less than pilot
    study, then you need not go for further sample collection. But the number of samples to

                                               253                                Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                  PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           be determined is more than the pilot study samples, then more sample need to be
                 collected.

                       This process is continued for each element. But there is a possibility that in each
                 element you may end up with different sample size requirements. In this case you can
                 fix the number of cycles for the all the elements based on the element which demands
                 the highest sample size requirement.

                 Measure:

                    In this phase, the elemental time is recorded using stop watch which is specifically
                 designed for the time study.

                 Rating:

                   While measuring the time for each element, the time study person has to take note of
                 the pace in which the operator does the job. The accuracy of the judgment towards
                 the pace of the operator depends upon the experience and training of the time study
                 person. Rating is defined as the workers rate of working relative to the time
                 study person’s concept corresponding to the standard pace.

                       Rating is an adjustment factor, because when a time study person choose a quali-
                 fied, experience, trained worker there is a possibility that the operator may belong to
                 the below average group of that company in this case he may take more time to com-
                 plete the element. So to bring the time related to the average worker, which observed
                 time has to be multiplied with the adjustment factor i.e. or other wise to lessen the
                 observed time. In this case rating will be less than 1. This case becomes opposite
                 while the supposed selected operator is above average worker. In this case the rating
                 factor takes more than 1 to have higher observed time than what is available.

                                Rating = Observed rating / standard rating
                                Standard rating = 100

                 Compile:

                 After obtaining the observed time, rating for each element Normal time is calculated.

                 Normal time for element = observed time for the element x rating factor

                 All the normal elemental times are added to arrive at the normal time for the operation.

                        You should not consider this time as standard time because you should add
                 allowances with the normal time. Because allowances are to be given to compensate
                 for the energy that the operator spent while doing the job and also allowances are to be
                 added for meeting his / her personal needs like going for toilets etc. Allowance for these
                 reasons is beyond his control.

     Anna University Chennai                             254
DBA 1651                                                                        PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

    Allowances are personal allowances, fatigue allowances and delay allowances.             NOTES
Personal allowances for meeting his / her personal needs, fatigue allowances are al-
lowed for physical exertion. Delay allowances are due to lack of materials, random
inspection visits etc.

Now the standard time is arrived as follows:
Standard time = Normal time x 100 / [100 - % allowance]

5.7.2 Work sampling:

     Work sampling is another work measurement technique for measuring the following:

         •   To measure & control the percentage of idle time of an activity or
             productive resource
         •   To established the standard time
         •   To determine the performance index of the operator / department / unit

    When do you apply work sampling technique:

         •   Jobs consists of longer lead time
         •   To measure the team work

Let us consider the first application namely to measure & control the percent-
age of idle time of an activity or productive resources.

      Usually in any organization, the management bothers very much about the utili-
zation of key productive resources. Work sampling study used to identify the percent-
age of idle time and it helps the management to correct the excessive idle time. It helps
in fixing idle time control chart so that management can control the idle time percentage
of the so called critical resources every time.

    Consider in a hospital X- ray equipment is very critical. The management of the
hospital wants to establish a control chart to monitor and control the idleness of the
X- ray machine.

      To fix this standard, first nothing has to determine how many observations to be
made. To determine the no. of observations you should analyze the process of
conducting this study. This study is nothing but a random process. There are two out
comes of this random process, one is the X ray machine is working, and another out-
come is X- ray machine is not working. So there is every possibility that the outcome to
follow a binomial distribution. Based on the percentage of occurrence of activity (in
this case idle) ‘P’ and the no. of trails ‘n’ binomial distribution is approximated into a
normal distribution.

                                           255                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                                       Figure 5.23
 NOTES




                 σ p is the stand error of this sampling distribution
                                σ p = ? P (1-P)/n
                                n = sample size
                                p = percentage of occurrence of the activity to be measured.

                         As it is required in the Time study, here also to determine the no. of cycles to be
                 determined, you need to specify the two parameters namely the confidence interval and
                 accuracy. Assume 95% confidence limit and 10% accuracy value. ‘P’ is estimated
                 from the past record that p = 20% suppose ‘P’ is not available, then you should con-
                 duct a pilot study to determine the ‘P’ then the sample size is determined as follows:

                                                       Figure 5.24




     Anna University Chennai                             256
DBA 1651                                                                     PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

General formula                                                                           NOTES
                            Z . σ p = SP
                    Where S = accuracy level
                     Z . ? P (1 – p) / n = SP
                       n = Z2 P (1- p) / P2S2
                         = [Z2/S2] (1-p) / p

           For 95% confidence limit and 10% accuracy value

                         n = [1.96/.10]2 [1 - .20/.20]
                         n = 1537 observation

Timing of the activity to be measured

         Next you should decide to schedule the timing of the observation to be mea-
sured. For this you should generate random numbers through the computer or random
number tables. Assume that the hospital is working for 16 hours. Then generate three
digit random numbers. Working time of the hospital is given as below:

                                     Table 5.42
           Shifts    Starting time             Break         Ending time
              I       8 A.M.                   12- 1 P.M.         5 P.M.
             II       5 P.M.                   9- 10 P.M.         2 A.M.

         First digit represents the number of hours after 8 A.M. Second and third digit
help us to find the minutes. The following table shows the conversion of random num-
bers in to timing.

                                     Table 5.43

  Random            Hours after start     Observation         Chronological
  Number                                    time                order
    712                 7.12                    3.07          3
    473                 4.73                   12.44          Lunch hour
    482                 4.82                   12.49          Lunch hour
     116                1.16                    9.01          1
     311                3.11                   11.07          2


                                         257                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES                  You can know how do you convert the random number 712 into 3.07 AM. 7
                 represents the time after the starting of the factory. Namely, 8 AM then it is 3’o clock.
                 Second and third digit represents 1 and 2 represents 0.12 X 60 minutes 7.2 minutes,
                 that means the observer has to observe the position of X ray machine after 3.07 Hrs.
                 Similarly the no. of random numbers are converted into observer observable time.
                 Suppose you have got the results as shown in the table

                                                       Table 5.44

                                    Activity                       No.of observation
                             X Ray machine is working                      1227
                             X Ray machine is not working                   310
                             Total Observation                             1537

                 The percentage of idle time is calculated as follows:

                                                  ‘p’ = 310/1537 = 20%

                      In this case you need not go for further observations. Suppose the obtained ‘p’
                 value is more than the allowable limit, then you need to rework to find the no. of obser-
                 vations to be taken. Suppose, if it comes around 1600,m then further (1600 -1537) so
                 63 observations has to be taken to fix the standard


                                     − 2X .8
                      Now σ p =              = 0.1
                                      1537
                 You can fix the control limit using P and σ p value as follows:

                 Figure 5.25
                 Upper control limit P + 3 σ p = 0.23




                     Mean = P =2




                 Lower control limit P – 3 σ p = 17

     Anna University Chennai                            258
DBA 1651                                                                          PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

        This is kept as a standard and any particular day, proportion of idle time ex-
ceeds the limit you have fixed, then the reasons has to be analyzed and corrected. Thus
                                                                                                NOTES
the work sampling techniques used to fix the standard to monitor and control the key
resources.
Establishing Time Standard by Work sampling:
      Work sampling study in addition to finding the performance index, fixing the
control limits for delay and percentage of utilization of activities, it also used for estab-
lishing the time standard for operation or for the job.
Data required to be collected:
        Assume that an operator does a turning operation in a part. By work-sampling
study to determine the time standards the following information is to be collected.
        The percentage of working.
        The total working time.
        The Number of pieces to be produced.
        The average performance index.
        The allowance.
The normal time per unit is calculated using the following formula.
Normal Time = (The percentage of working) (Total working time) / No. of
                          Pieces product) x Average performance index.
Then standard time is calculated follow as:
Standard time
        = Normal time (100/100 - % Allowances)
E.g.: An operator does a turning operation in a product. An observer collected the
following information.
        The percentage of working = 85%
        The total working time = 480 min.
        The no. of pieces produced = 300 units
        The average performance index = 120
        Allowances from the time study manual is arrived at 15%
Normal time = (0.85 x 480)/300 (120/100)
                     = 1.632 min.
Standard time = 1.632 x 100/ (100-15) = 1.632 x 100/85
                       = 1.92 min.
Work Sampling study to establish the performance index:
      This study is applied to establish the average performance index. This average
performance index of the labour or department helps the management to control the

                                            259                                    Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES           labour cost. Let us see how you calculate the average performance index. The work
                 sampling study may be carried out for many periods for data collection. Then from the
                 data collected you can calculate the average performance index as follows:
                 Average Data per period from the data collected during the study.
                         Average no. of pieces produced during the period
                         Standard time per unit.
                         Average working time.
                 Performance index = [(Average no. of pieces produced during the period x Standard
                 time
                                      per piece in minutes) / Average hours worked during the
                                         period x 60] x 100
                 E.g. Assume that a drilling operation is carried out on a product. The organization
                 interested in knowing the average performance index of the operator who does the
                 drilling operation. Work sampling study has been conducted for several weeks. The
                 average data collected from the study are given below:

                 Average no of pieces produced during a week = 1500
                 Standard time per piece per min. = 5 min.
                 Average hours worked during the period = 36 hours
                 Performance index = [500 x 5 /36 x 60] x 100
                                            = 115 %
                 The average performance index helps the organization to control the labour cost.
                 a. LEARNING CURVE
                         In the case of more labour intensive mass production industry, mostly the labour
                 do repetitive type of job, that results in more learning due to experience of doing the
                 same job because of this, the time taken to produce subsequent units gets reduced
                 compared to the previous units. This phenomenon will not lose for longer period, at
                 some point of the time this learning effect ceases. After the learning effect ceases, the
                 time required to produce one unit or one batch will be the same irrespective of the
                 number of units or batches. The organization has to cash in the relevant range period,
                 the period in which the learning effect is there. During the learning effect period, the
                 standard time per unit is not constant it varies depends upon the quantity of the order
                 you get. Since the learning effect has impact on the standard time that is the reason to
                 study this concept in this section .
                 Learning Curve Model:
                         Consider the past data of a company manufacturing Aircraft components. For
                 a particular component the data are taken for ten situations.


     Anna University Chennai                            260
DBA 1651                                                                      PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                                      Table 5.45
                                                                                           NOTES
Situation   Quantity   Production Cumulative       Cumulative      Cumulative
              (Q)      Time (tp)  batches (1)       Production     Average Time
                                  Time (2)         (3)=(2) / (1)

    1          20         164          20             164              8.2
    2          30         228          50             392            7.84
    3          50         340         100             732            7.32
    4          80         453         180           1185             6.58
    5         120         655         300           1840             6.13
    6         150         767         450           2607             5.79
    7         210         863         660           3470             5.26
    8         260        1115         920           4595                5
    9         330       1488         1250           6083             4.86
   10         380       1311         1630           7394             4.37

Using (1) and (3) if you draw the curve, it appears as follows

                                     Figure 5.26




Since the nature of the curve is exponential, the general equation for exponential curve
is
Y= a × X b
Y= cumulative average time
X= Cumulative production quantity
a = The time required to produce the first quantity
 b = Exponent


                                          261                                 Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES            ‘b’ depends upon the operating condition. In the above model, for the particular cu-
                 mulative production quantity what will be the cumulative average time? This could be
                 easily calculated provided, if you know the two parameters namely ‘a’ and ‘b’. Since
                 the curve is exponential in nature, if you take the logarithm for the X value and Y value
                 then you can get a linear curve as follows:
                                  Log (Y) = Log (a) + b × Log(X)
                 Thus the curve is of the form
                                  Y = a + bx
                 Where
                     y= Log (Y)
                     x= Log(X)
                 So using the simple regression analysis you can find the values of ‘a’ and ‘b’. For the
                 given data, shown in the table, let us try to estimate the regression model,

                                                       Table 5.46
                                              log X                log Y
                                              2.995                2.104
                                              3.401                2.059
                                              3.912                1.99
                                              4.382                1.884
                                              4.787                1.813
                                              5.01                 1.756
                                              5.347                1.66
                                              5.56                 1.609
                                              5.799                1.581
                                              5.94                 1.513

                                                      If we solve
                                                      Figure 5.27




     Anna University Chennai                            262
DBA 1651                                                                       PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                log Y = 2.7555 – 0.263 ln x.                                                NOTES
                Where,
                          R2 = Coefficient of determination = 0.985
                          R2adjusted = 0.983

Since R2 value is approximately 99%, which means 99% of the variations in the original
data have been captured by the estimated regression line. Thus show that the estimated
line is the best fit for the original data.

Cumulative average time
               ln Y = 2.7555 – 0.203 ln X

        You know that
                  b = ln learning curve percent / ln2.
        -0.203 = ln learning curve percent / ln 2.

        ln learning curve percent = ln 2 * (-0.203)
                                   = 0.6931 * (-0.203)
                                   = -0.1407.

        Learning curve percent = Antilog of [-0.1407]
                                = 86.88%
                                = 87%.

        The practical meaning of learning effect or the learning curve percent is that if
the production quantity becomes double, then corresponding required time to produce
one unit of that doubled quantity gets reduced to that extent of (1- learning curve per-
cent). This is shown in the following table for the problem discussed already.
                                      Table 5.47


                   UNIT
           Assume 20 units = 1 units              Cumulative average time
                                                     (Y = a * b)
           20 = 1 units                           Y = 164 (1-0.203)
           40 = 2 units                           Y = 164 (2-0.203)
           60 = 3 units                           Y = 164 (3-0.203)
           80 = 4 units                           Y = 164 (4-0.203)


                                          263                                  Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                                                                 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

                          From the above table you can easily identify that when the production quantity
 NOTES           becomes double; the average time per unit gets reduced to the extent of 13%. So this
                 is to be taken into account while calculating the standard time for the product. Thus
                 way the standard time gets reduced.
                 Application of learning curve:
                         As it is mentioned already the reduced standard time could be made use of
                 estimating the following,
                     1. Learning curve concept could be applied in pricing the product.
                     2. This concept could be applied in standard costing.
                     3. This is applied in budgeting and production planning.
                 5.9 PRODUCTIVITY
                        Productivity is the ratio between the output and input. This is an index, the
                 output may be sales and input is the recourses utilized for getting the output. Example:
                 the output is sales value and the input is cost of goods sold.




                         If the Productivity Index is more than one, you can say that the performance of
                 the organization is good. If it is less than one you can say that the organization is not
                 doing well.

                 Impact of Learning Curve on the Productivity

                        Cost of the goods sold is the function of labour, material and overhead cost
                 because of learning effect the time required to produce one unit in the relevant range
                 decreases as the number of units produce is more. The result is less labour and variable
                 over heads. So the denominator decreases that leads to higher productivity. There are
                 many reasons for the improvement in the productivity. The increase may due to quality,
                 methods, materials, better management etc. in addition learning effect also have a source
                 for the productivity improvement.




     Anna University Chennai                            264
DBA 1651                                                                   PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Summary                                                                                 NOTES
        This unit would have helped you to know the factors to be considered while
selecting a location. The kind of system design, like layout design, work measurement
standards are exposed with an objective of complete understanding the nuances of the
system design techniques. At last, you are exposed to the construction and the impact
of the learning curve on the productivity.

Review Questions:

   1.   List the various work measurement techniques.
   2.   List out the procedures to carry out the work measurement.
   3.   What is time study?
   4.   Define work sampling?
   5.   What is impact of learning curve on productivity?




                                        265                                 Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                             PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES




     Anna University Chennai   266
DBA 1651         PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


                           NOTES




           267   Anna University Chennai
DBA 1651                             PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT


 NOTES




     Anna University Chennai   268

More Related Content

PPT
PRODUCTION CYCLE
PPTX
Demand forecasting
PDF
Industrial Engineering unit 4.Production planning and control Notes by badebhau.
PPT
Production Planning and Control
PPT
Quality systems
PPT
Unit i
PPTX
Group technology _ flexible manufacturing system_supply chain management
PPTX
MRP I and MRP II
PRODUCTION CYCLE
Demand forecasting
Industrial Engineering unit 4.Production planning and control Notes by badebhau.
Production Planning and Control
Quality systems
Unit i
Group technology _ flexible manufacturing system_supply chain management
MRP I and MRP II

What's hot (20)

PPTX
ZERO DEFECTS
PPT
Forecasting
PPT
Production Planning and Control
PPTX
Product & Process Layouts
PPTX
Production planning, routing, scheduling, Activating, Monitoring
PPTX
Presentation on supply chain management
PPT
Aggregate Planning
DOCX
Internal Supply Chain Management
PPTX
What is the role of marketing communication?
PPTX
Production and Operation Management
PPTX
Types of production system
PPTX
PPTX
Pricing Decisions
PPTX
Production & production system
PPTX
Industrial management & engineering economy.pptx
PPTX
Statistical quality control
PPTX
Production Management
PPTX
Axial Flow Compressor.
ZERO DEFECTS
Forecasting
Production Planning and Control
Product & Process Layouts
Production planning, routing, scheduling, Activating, Monitoring
Presentation on supply chain management
Aggregate Planning
Internal Supply Chain Management
What is the role of marketing communication?
Production and Operation Management
Types of production system
Pricing Decisions
Production & production system
Industrial management & engineering economy.pptx
Statistical quality control
Production Management
Axial Flow Compressor.
Ad

Viewers also liked (20)

DOC
Production and operations managment notes
DOC
Operation management-notes
PDF
Production and Operation Management Lecture Notes
PPTX
Introduction to production management
PPT
Production & operations management
PPTX
Production & Operarions Management Compre Review
PPTX
Production and Operations Management
PDF
C2 1 Systems And Creative Thinking
PDF
PPTX
Production meeting 4
PPT
Production management and direction (part 2)
PPTX
Technical analysis - By Sohan Khatri
PDF
Digging For The Bone: How to Jumpstart Creative Thinking
PPT
Mba8155 slides1
PDF
Introduction to Management by shas production
PPTX
Production management
PPTX
Mba ii pmom_unit-1.1 introduction to production & operation management a - copy
PPTX
Technical analysis Fundamentals
PPTX
Mba ii pmom_unit-2.2 facility location a
Production and operations managment notes
Operation management-notes
Production and Operation Management Lecture Notes
Introduction to production management
Production & operations management
Production & Operarions Management Compre Review
Production and Operations Management
C2 1 Systems And Creative Thinking
Production meeting 4
Production management and direction (part 2)
Technical analysis - By Sohan Khatri
Digging For The Bone: How to Jumpstart Creative Thinking
Mba8155 slides1
Introduction to Management by shas production
Production management
Mba ii pmom_unit-1.1 introduction to production & operation management a - copy
Technical analysis Fundamentals
Mba ii pmom_unit-2.2 facility location a
Ad

Similar to Dba1651 production management anna univ entire notes (20)

PDF
Unit-I.pdf
PPTX
Operation management
PPTX
Introduction To Operations Management.pptx
PPTX
Unit_1[2] POM.pptx
PPT
Ch01 om-intro
PPTX
Operation mangement concepts
PPT
V.p. arora operations mgmt
PDF
Operations management
PPT
Unit1
PDF
000975
PDF
PDF
Operation study note from MBA IIM TO CHE
PDF
Production and Operations Management.pdf
PDF
lecture1429900757.pdf
PPTX
15 operations, quality and productivity
PDF
Lecture1429900757gfg (1)
PDF
Lecture notes of production &amp; operation management
PDF
Production & Operation Management Lecture Notes
PDF
Lecture1429900757
PPTX
Production and Operation Management.pptx
Unit-I.pdf
Operation management
Introduction To Operations Management.pptx
Unit_1[2] POM.pptx
Ch01 om-intro
Operation mangement concepts
V.p. arora operations mgmt
Operations management
Unit1
000975
Operation study note from MBA IIM TO CHE
Production and Operations Management.pdf
lecture1429900757.pdf
15 operations, quality and productivity
Lecture1429900757gfg (1)
Lecture notes of production &amp; operation management
Production & Operation Management Lecture Notes
Lecture1429900757
Production and Operation Management.pptx

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
How to Get Funding for Your Trucking Business
PPTX
HR Introduction Slide (1).pptx on hr intro
PDF
NewBase 12 August 2025 Energy News issue - 1812 by Khaled Al Awadi_compresse...
PPTX
New Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation - Copy.pptx
PPTX
Lecture (1)-Introduction.pptx business communication
PPT
Chapter four Project-Preparation material
PPTX
Principles of Marketing, Industrial, Consumers,
PDF
SIMNET Inc – 2023’s Most Trusted IT Services & Solution Provider
PDF
Nidhal Samdaie CV - International Business Consultant
PPTX
3. HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVE UNIIT 3^..pptx
PDF
COST SHEET- Tender and Quotation unit 2.pdf
PDF
Tata consultancy services case study shri Sharda college, basrur
PDF
Laughter Yoga Basic Learning Workshop Manual
PPTX
svnfcksanfskjcsnvvjknsnvsdscnsncxasxa saccacxsax
PDF
Outsourced Audit & Assurance in USA Why Globus Finanza is Your Trusted Choice
PDF
Cours de Système d'information about ERP.pdf
PDF
Solara Labs: Empowering Health through Innovative Nutraceutical Solutions
PDF
Deliverable file - Regulatory guideline analysis.pdf
PPTX
Dragon_Fruit_Cultivation_in Nepal ppt.pptx
PDF
Digital Marketing & E-commerce Certificate Glossary.pdf.................
How to Get Funding for Your Trucking Business
HR Introduction Slide (1).pptx on hr intro
NewBase 12 August 2025 Energy News issue - 1812 by Khaled Al Awadi_compresse...
New Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation - Copy.pptx
Lecture (1)-Introduction.pptx business communication
Chapter four Project-Preparation material
Principles of Marketing, Industrial, Consumers,
SIMNET Inc – 2023’s Most Trusted IT Services & Solution Provider
Nidhal Samdaie CV - International Business Consultant
3. HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVE UNIIT 3^..pptx
COST SHEET- Tender and Quotation unit 2.pdf
Tata consultancy services case study shri Sharda college, basrur
Laughter Yoga Basic Learning Workshop Manual
svnfcksanfskjcsnvvjknsnvsdscnsncxasxa saccacxsax
Outsourced Audit & Assurance in USA Why Globus Finanza is Your Trusted Choice
Cours de Système d'information about ERP.pdf
Solara Labs: Empowering Health through Innovative Nutraceutical Solutions
Deliverable file - Regulatory guideline analysis.pdf
Dragon_Fruit_Cultivation_in Nepal ppt.pptx
Digital Marketing & E-commerce Certificate Glossary.pdf.................

Dba1651 production management anna univ entire notes

  • 1. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT UNIT - I NOTES INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCTION AND OPERATION MANAGEMENT 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Learning objectives 1.3 System 1.3.1 Business System 1.3.2 Production System 1.3.3 Production and Operations Managements 1.4 History of operations Management 1.5 Types of operation system 1.5.1 Flow Shop 1.5.1.1Continuous Production 1.5.1.2Mass Production 1.5.1.3Batch Production 1.5.2 Job Shop 1.5.3 Project Production 1.6 Production activities and communication link 1.7 Computer Integrated Manufacture ring (CIM) 1.7.1 CIM sub systems 1.7.2 Functional Areas of CIM 1.7.2.1 Computer aided production planning 1.7.2.2 Computer aided process planning 1.7.3 Conceptual frame work of CIM 1.7.4 Group Technology 1.7.4.1 Definition 1.7.4.2 History of GT 1.7.4.3 Advantages of GT 1.7.4.4 Organizational Suitability for GT 1.7.4.5 Group technology in CIM 1.8 Global Supply Chain 1.8.1 Global Complexities 1.8.2 How to transform into Global Supply Chain 1 Anna University Chennai
  • 2. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES UNIT - I INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCTION AND OPERATION MANAGEMENT 1.1 INTRODUCTION This unit starts with a definition of a system. In this unit production system and its objectives are explained along with the components of a system. The history of operations management is portrayed. The various functions of production system and their interlinking are explained through a flow chart. The components of computer, integrated manufacturing and their purpose are dealt. Finally, the recent trend in the operations, namely, Global Supply Chain is introduced in this unit. 1.2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES • To know the importance of the production system in an organization. • To understand the link between various activities of the production system. • To comprehend the history of operations management. • To understand the components of computer integrated manufacturing 1.3 SYSTEM It consists of elements or components. The elements or components are interlinked together to achieve the objective for which it exists. Eg: human body, educational institutions, business organizations. Components of a system: The input, processing, output and control of a system are called the components of a system. Anna University Chennai 2
  • 3. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 1.1 - Components of a system NOTES Input Output Processing Feedback Control Control: There are two types of control, namely Proactive Control and Reactive Control. Proactive Control: When an operation is carried out on a product in a workstation, the quality inspector goes to the workstation and inspects the product. When the samples that he has taken for the inspection are not confirming to the quality, he stops the machine and identifies the reason for the deviation and corrects the problem, so that the produced product thereafter conform to the specifications. This type of control prevents any major quality setback after the production. This is an example for proactive control. Reactive Control: In a planning period, usually the quality target is fixed. Suppose, an organization feels to fix 5% defective is safe in the targeted production quantity and assumes that at the end of the planning period it finds that the defective output exceeds the targeted defective products. Then, it has to find out the reason for the deviations, namely, whether the problem is due to the method of doing the work or the resources used in the process. Then the planner uses this knowledge to prevent any problem in the future. Thus a Reactive Control is a post morterm case. 1.3.1 Business System: The business organization is classified into different subsystems based on the functions like marketing, production/operation, finance and human resource etc. 3 Anna University Chennai
  • 4. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 1.2 – Business System NOTES Marketing Finance Human Resource Production/Operation Each subsystem will have more sub subsystems. 1.3.2 Production / Operation System Figure 1.3 – Production / Operation System Input Transformation Output Objectives Process 1. To produce the required quantity. Capital Man Power Goods 2. To achieve the required quantity. Material 3. To meet the delivery time. Information Services 4. Economical way of doing Operations Management Operation system is either manufacturing sector or service sector. The input requirements are shown in figure1.3 The transformation process, in which part of the value addition takes place to get the required quantity of the product or services with the targeted quality within the specified time period, is carried out in a most economical way. Operation Management Plan coordinates and controls all the activities in the operation system to achieve the stated objectives. Thus (the activities listed in the diagram) the Operations Management activities, ensure the objective of quantity, quality, delivery time and economical way of doing work. The communication link between the various activities are shown in the figure1.3. Each activity is dealt in detail in different sections of this material. This figure (figure1.3) will be very much appreciated after getting a clear understanding of all the activities. Anna University Chennai 4
  • 5. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 1.3.3 What is operation management (OM)? NOTES Operation Management is a way or means through which the listed objectives of an operating system is achieved. There is always a confusion between the word OM & PM (Production Management). It is accepted norm that OM includes techniques which are enabling the achievement of operational objectives in an operation system. The operation system includes both manufacturing sector as well as service sector, but when you use the word PM, you should be careful to note that it refers to the manufacturing sector but not the service sector. Suppose, you are designing a layout for the hospital you should say that you are applying Operations Management Technique not the Production Management Technique. When you design a layout for a manufacturing sector you can say that you are applying Production Technique or Operation Technique or vice versa. From, the above discussion we can come to a conclusion that production management is a subset of Operations Management. Review questions – 1. What are the components of a system? 2. What are the differences between the Production Management and the Operations Management? 3. List the objectives to be fulfilled by an Operation System. 1.4 HISTORY OF OM Table 1.1 – History of OM Year / Period of Concept/Tools and System Used Developers/ Concept Originators (14-16) Evolution of Production system Century 18th New Technology for Production Process Adam Smith and Century Management harles Babbage 1895 Scientific Management Principles (Work Study) F.W.T. Taylor Motion Study for Psychological Factors Frank & Lillian Activity Scheduling Chart Gilbreth Henry Gantt 1935 Hawthrone Studies of Worker Motivation Elton Mayo 1950’s Operation Research for Decision Making Long Many Researcher term Medium term, Short term decision by 5 Anna University Chennai
  • 6. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Critical Path Method (CPM), Program Evaluation NOTES and…… Technique (PERT), Waiting-Line Theory 1970’s Computers for Inventory Control Material IBM, Joseph Resource Planning (MRP) Orlicky, Oliver Wieght 1980’s Just In Time (JIT), Total Quality Control (TQC) Toyota Kanban System, CAD/CAM, Computer Integrated Manufacturing (CIM) Flexible Manufacturing System (FMS) 1990’s 1.Total Quality Asqc(U.S.). IOS Management (TQM), Concurrent (CIM), (England), Engineering, Value Engineering Michael Hammer 2. Business Process Engineering Oracle, SAP 3. Supply Chain Management (Germany) 2000’s Logistics, Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP), E-Commerce, E-Business Review questions - 1. What is the contribution of GANTT? 2. Who is the father of Scientific Management? 1.5 TYPES OF OPERATION SYSTEM The type of Operation System to be adopted should be known to the people, and then only you may choose the system based on the nature of the product that you are going to manufacture. The types of operation system are classified based on the following criteria. Product flow pattern in conversion system Output of the product Specification of the output Figure 1.5 - Types of Operation System Production Flow Pattern Output of the product Specification of the output Customized Standard Flow shop Job shop Flow shop Continuous Batch Mass Goods Production Production Production Services Anna University Chennai 6
  • 7. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT The characteristics of the Operation System based on the product flow pattern: NOTES 1.5.1 Flow Shop In this kind of production, the productive resources are arranged according to the sequence of operation required by the product design. Assume that you are engaged in the ready to wear clothing, if you want to adopt the flow shop production, then the productive resources are kept according to the sequence of operations required by the product like Cutting Joining by sewing Adding, buttons, zippers etc Quality checking Packaging Mostly Flow shop production are adopted when there is untapped market for the product, customers are price sensitive and more competition in the market. Flow shop production as shown in the figure is further divided into Continuous Production, Mass Production and Batch production. 1.5.1.1 Continuous Production The industries involved in the following activities are classified as Continuous Production • Oil refining. • Fertilizer production. • Chemical processing etc. • In this type of production the product flows continuously without much interruption. • This type of production lacks in flexibility. 1.5.1.2 Mass Production The industries involved in the following activities are classified as the Mass Production Industries: Auto Manufacturing TV Manufacturing Cigarettes This kind of flow shop produces the same type of output, it has little flexibility compared to Continuous Production. 1.5.1.3 Batch Production The industries involved in the following activities are classified as the Intermittent Production. • Shoe manufacturing • Bottling plant • Cloth manufacturing 7 Anna University Chennai
  • 8. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Here the basic design of the product is the same but the specification of the product NOTES differs. The production gets interrupted when the system switches over to other type of the product specification. The products are similar in nature but not identical. The Characteristics of Flow Shop Production: Refer Table1.2 Table 1.2 - The Characteristics of Flow shop Production Product The products are standardized. Conversion Special purpose equipments, designed for the specific Resources process of the product. Work force Specialized people, doing the repetitive jobs. Workforce Job satisfaction among the employee is low because of Job satisfaction the repetitive nature of job, results in boredom, more turnover and absentees. Work-in-progress Productive resources are balanced that result in less work inventory in progress inventory. Cycle time Cycle time per unit is relatively low Cost of production Cost of production per unit is relatively low. Quantity of production Comparatively quantity of production is more Varieties Products to be produced of less variety. Flexibility This kind of production lacks in flexibility. Small change in the product design needs the change in production system abnormally. Production planning and Since less varieties of product are produced for longer control period, the production planning and control activities are inbuilt in the system itself, so the production planning and control activities are not a complex one. 1.5.2 Job Shop In the case of Job Shop Production, the products are mostly customized products. Based on the customer requirements, the products are produced. The productive resources are kept according to the function. Anna University Chennai 8
  • 9. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT The industries involved in the following activities are classified as the Job Shop production: NOTES • Auto repairing • Hospital • Machine shop The Characteristics Of Job Shop Production. Table 1.3 Product The products are of order based mostly non standardized. Conversion of Resources General purpose equipment, grouped according to their functions. Work Force Skilled people, doing multi skilled work. Work force satisfaction Job satisfaction among the employee is high because the operator role is multifaceted. Work in Progress There is lot of waiting time for the product to be Inventory manufactured in the system that results in more in process inventory. Cycle time Because of more waiting time for the product in the production line that results more manufacturing cycle time comparatively. Cost of Production Cost of production per unit is relatively high. Quantity of production Since it is order based production, quantity produced per unit type is relatively less. Varieties The production system capable of producing more type of products. Flexibility This system has more flexibility any change in the design of the product could be incorporated without much problem. Production Planning The arrival, the operations demanded and the operations and Control time required by the order mostly uncertain. This makes the jobs of production planning and control difficult. 1.5.3 Project Production This refers to the industries involved in the production of one type of complex products like, ship construction, dam construction, bridge construction, research and development etc. 9 Anna University Chennai
  • 10. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Project production consists of many activities where the activities are interlinked, time phased and resources committed. In this kind of production, scheduling the activities is important so that you can complete the project within the time and budget constraint. The resources, namely, manpower, machines, material are brought to the workplace where the product is manufactured. There is no movement of the product. Review Questions 1. Which type of the production system in the process inventory is less? 2. In which type of production system flexibility is more? 3. Tell the important characteristic of Batch Production about the product? 4. In which type of production system there is no product movement? 1.6 COMMUNICATION IN POM As it is mentioned in the above section, operation management is meant to achieve the objectives for which the operation system is intended for. Based on the objective set by the top management, the system design is established. The system design involves designing the product and process, designing the methods, measuring the work, identifying the location, and designing the layout. By keeping the system design as a framework in the aggregate planning various production alternatives are analyzed and the best feasible production alternatives are chosen. Then keeping the aggregate planning as a input, resource allocation and sequencing of day to day activities are done. The inventory also kept at minimum to satisfy the organization’s inventory objectives. The maintenance activity ensures the availability workstations. Quality control ensures the quality in the input, processing and output stages of production system. (See figure 1.4- Communication in POM). Review Questions- 1. List the activities in system design? 2. What are the phases of scheduling? Anna University Chennai 10
  • 11. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 1.4- Communication in POM NOTES External: Socio, Political, Economic environment Figure1.4 Top Management Strategy Top M ana ge me nt Marketers Financial Policy Policy Human Production Resource Policy Policy Forecasting Long term forecast System Design Medium term forecast Product Design Capacity Planning Short term O p e r a tio n M a n a g e m e n t Forecasting Aggregate Planning Process Design Plant location & layout Inventory Control Work Design and measurement Scheduling Maintenance Quality Control P r o d u c tio n S y s te m Material Product Capital Information Service Manpower 1.7 COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURINGAND SERVICE SYSTEM Computer Integrated Manufacturing (CIM), a strategic thrust, is an operating philosophy. Its objective is to achieve greater efficiencies within the business, across whole cycle of product design, manufacturing and marketing. International competition has intensified the requirement for high quality products that can compete in the global market place. As a result of this increased competition, the pace of development has been quickened and thus forcing manufacturers to enter into an era where the continuous 11 Anna University Chennai
  • 12. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES quality improvement is maintained as a matter of survival, not simply being competitive As the time scale of product life cycle has decreased and the demand for the quality increased, attention has focused on improving the product quality and promoting the competitive ability of industries through better design, manufacturing, management and marketing. Global manufacturing industry is now undergoing a rapid structural change. As this process is continuous, manufacturing industry is encountering difficulties as it confronts with a more changed and more competitive environment and also the market place. In order to share the international market, manufacturers need to implement two strategies. The first is, to improve the Enterprise Management. The second one is, to develop and apply a Systematic and Scientific Technology, i.e.., CIM. With the rapid growth of the complexity of manufacturing process and the demand for high efficiency, greater flexibility, better product quality and lower cost, industrial practice has approached the more advanced level of automation. Nowadays, much attention has been given by both industry and academia to CIM. Currently, most of the industries have highly automated facilities. To stimulate industrial companies for utilizing the newest manufacturing technology, this has compelled to develop a system architecture that does not only replace the existing manufacturing facilities, operational environments, but effectively utilizes the knowledge and facilities that are available in the industry. To overcome the difficulties and solve the problems mentioned above automatic techniques and methodologies should be Introduced into real industrial manufacturing. 1.7.1 CIM Subsystems Significant progress has been made in the manufacturing technology in recent years. Numerically control machine tools, automated material handling systems and controlled systems have been widely used in industrial companies. The Flexible Manufacturing System (FMS), Computer Integrated Manufacturing (CIM) or Systems or Automated Manufacturing Systems (AMS) can be attributed to and increasing number of companies. The advancing manufacturing and computer technology has brought new challenges to the designers of products, processes and system as well as to the managers. The traditional design and management tools can not effectively cope with problems arising in the modern manufacturing systems. Anna University Chennai 12
  • 13. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 1.7.2 Functional areas of CIM NOTES CIM system has emerged as a result of the development in manufacturing and computer technology. The computer plays an important role integrating the following areas of CIM system. • Part (component) and product design • Tool and fixture design • Process planning • Programming of numerically controlled (NC) machines, material handling system (MHS), etc. • Production planning • Machining • Assembly • Maintenance • Quality control • Inspection • Storage and retrieval To emphasis the computer aspects, the terms Computer Aided Design (CAD), Computer Aided Process Planning (CAPP), Computer Aided Manufacturing (CAM), Computer Aided Quality Control (CAQC), Automatic Storage Retrieval (ASR), have used. Each term refers to one or more of the listed functional areas. CAD refers to the part and product design and tool and fixture design, CAPP refers to Process Planning, CAM refers to the programming of manufacturing hardware, production planning machining, assembly and maintenance, CAQC refers to the quality control and inspection and ASR involves the storage and retrieval of raw materials, finished products work in process inventory. The computer plays a leading role in the automation and integration of hardware component i.e. machines, material handling carriers and the software components of manufacturing systems. In order to understand the CIM subsystems and the importance of integrating them, it is first necessary to explore the functional areas by these subsystems. 1.7.2.1 Computer Aided Production Planning Production planning involves establishing production levels for a known length of time. This forms the basis for the following two functions: 1. Material requirement planning 2. Loading and scheduling Based on the information regarding the type and quantity of parts or products to be manufactured, the materials required to produce the parts or products must be ordered with an appropriate lead time to ensure their availability for production. This function constitutes material requirement planning. Based on the material required, capacity- for example, machine hours and labor hours can be calculated. 13 Anna University Chennai
  • 14. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Machine loading involves assignment of parts and products to machines and machine cell in order to distribute the production loads. Scheduling determines the sequence in machines perform the operations. 1.7.2.2 Computer Aided Process Planning Process planning for a part involves the preparation of a plan that outlines the routes, operations, machines and tools required to produce the component. Since the process is a tedious task, there has been a trend to automate it. As a result, a number systems have been developed. There are three basic approaches to the automated process planning. They are - a. Variant Approach b. Generative Approach c. All based Approach CIM Subsystems Intelligent Manufacturing Development in artificial intelligence has had an impact on the manufacturing systems. All most all the areas of the computer integrated manufacturing have been effected by the artificial intelligence. Researchers and engineers are developing the intelligent systems ranging from application in machining and assembly to long term planning. 1.7.3 Conceptual framework of CIM The conceptual framework of CIM is shown in Figure.1.6 are six major being integrated by computing technology. Note that one of these is Group Technology (GT). Figure 1.6 – Conceptual framework of CIM GROUP TECHNOLOGY [GT] MANUFACT. COMPUTER PLANNING & AIDED CONTOL DESIGN [MPC] COMPUTER [CAD] TECHNOLOGY AUTOMATED ROBOTICS MATERIALS HANDLING [AMH] COMPUTER AIDED MANUFACT. [CAM] Anna University Chennai 14
  • 15. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT According to Arthur D.Little and Co., GT is the important technology among NOTES the others and it will play a major role in the factory of the future. The GT concept is considered a center road towards a higher level of CIM. 1.7.4 Group Technology Group technology (GT) is a concept that is currently attracting a lot of attention from the manufacturing community. GT offers a number of ways to improve productivity in the batch manufacturing. The essence of GT is to capitalize on similarities on recurring tasks. GT is, very simply, a philosophy to exploit similarities and achieve efficiencies grouping like problems. 1.7.4.1 Definition of GT “Group technology is the realization that many problems are similar and that, by grouping similar problems, single solution can be found to a set of problems, thus saving time and effort” 1.7.4.2 History of GT Prior to 1913, the era of Henry Ford and his model T, all machining models were similar to our present job shop techniques with machines laid out usually in lines or blocks of similar machines. The work was loaded onto the machines usually by the manual progress control system. Ford introduced the assembly line and that, in turn, led to automated transfer machines. However, the majority of engineering do not produce items in quantity that justify such methods and so the jobbing shop philosophy continued. GT is mainly a coordination of normal good engineering practices. It is impossible to say who first practiced GT. There are reports of it having been used in Germany in the 1930s. In an international Conference held in Stockholm in 1947, the basic groups were explained by C.B.Nanthorst. In Italy M. Patrignany was an early exponent of this technology. However, little of this appears to have been in English. First published work was from the USSR by S.P.Mitrofanov in 1959 and there after subsequent books were published by F.S.Denyanyuk and E.K. Ivanov.The first reported work on GT outside Russia was done by a French Forges et Ateliers de Construction Electriques de Jeurmont - and this was about in Machinery in 1962. Subsequently, several British companies conducted considerable work in this field. There have also been considerable studies done by various consultants in the Universities. The significant contribution by J.L.Burbidge in the 1 960s led to GT as A total Manufacturing Philosophy. 15 Anna University Chennai
  • 16. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES 1.7.4.3 Advantages of GT According to Burbidge, following are the advantages after introducing GT in manufacturing. a. Short throughput times because machines are closed together. b. Better quality because groups complete parts and the machines are closed together under one foreman. c. Lower material handling costs because machines are closed together under one foreman. d. Better accountability because machines complete parts. The foreman can be made responsible for costs, quality, and completion by due date. e. Training for promotion for promotion since GT provides a line of succession, because a group is a mini-department. f. Automation GT is a first evolutionary step in automation. g. Reduced set up time since similar parts brought together on the same h. Morale and job satisfaction since most workers prefer to work in groups. Studies undertaken by N.L.Hyer indicate the following significant savings after implementing GT Snead prepared a summary matrix, listing the benefits listing benefits achieved for the various GT. Table1.4 - Advantages of GT Applications implemented set up time 20-60% Planned labor 15-25% Tooling 20-30% Rework & scrap 15-75% Machine tool expenditures 15-75% WIP carrying costs 20-50% 1.7.4.4 Organizational suitability for GT The suitability of a firm for the introduction of GT depends on several factors. The survey of Willey and Dale give a tentative description of a company profile likely to achieve the greatest benefits from GT, some of these are: Anna University Chennai 16
  • 17. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT a. The company must be a relatively small organization with a reasonably small machine NOTES tools, and manufacturing equipment. b. The company should not be typified by either large or small component variety. c. The batch sizes and the batch size range of products of the companies it is relatively small. Athersmith and Crookall Rajagopal and Smith Gupta Andand Grayson have suggested another way of finding out the suitability of GT for a batch production industry. Computer simulation has been used by the effect of introduction of GT in the batch production industries based on the parameters such as throughput time, WIP inventory and plant utilization Further GT is considered a desirable stepping stone for establishing Just-In-Time production. 1.7.4.5 Group Technology in CIM One may question whether a cellular concept is applicable to CIM systems. Some studies have shown that grouping machines to machine cells may limit the manufacturing system flexibility. However, industrial applications have proven that it is virtually impossible to implement a large scale CIM subsystem using a cellular concept. Here after, the automated manufacturing systems that cellular approach can be called as, Cellular Automated Manufacturing (CAMS). Four crucial factors of CAMS as identified by Kusiak are: 1. Volume of information Volume of information a large-scale CIM subsystem is typically large, and it is too expensive to effectively process information without the system’s decomposition. 2. Material handling system In a typical CIM subsystem, automated material handling carriers are used (AGVs and Robots). Each of the two carriers can tend a limited number of machines. 3. Technology Requirement Some machines have to be grouped together due to technological requirements. For example, a forging machine and a heat treatment section. 4. Management Although in most of the currently CIM subsystems, the degree of automation is higher than in classical manufacturing systems, humans will be, for a long time, an integral 17 Anna University Chennai
  • 18. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES part of these new manufacturing systems. Due to limited size of each machine cell, a CAMS is easier to manage than the entire system. Review Question: Following stands for : 1. CRM 2. FMS 3. AMS 4. AS/RS 5. CAD 6. GT 1.8 GLOBAL SUPPLY CHAIN Even though the countries fought for border issues, but there is no trade barrier for the trade is concerned. GATT agreements and WTO paves the way for the Global Supply Chain in trading. (See Figure1.7). Overall Objective of Global Supply The objective of global supply chain configuration is in meeting or exceeding worldwide customer (internal and/or external) expectations at the lowest cost. Specific Objectives and Expectations of Global Supply Achievement of the transformation of supply chains into value chains will normally include some combination of the following objectives and expectations: • Leverage spend (across business units and geographic boundaries). • Align Incentives for integration of activities (buyers, suppliers, end-users) to support organizational goals and strategies. • Optimize supply chain operation (no. of members, capabilities, costs). • Reduce inventories across the chain. • Reduce all costs (item costs and supply chain operational costs). • Assurance of supply of right quality items to support operations. Anna University Chennai 18
  • 19. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 1.7- Global Supply Chain in trading NOTES Country A Country B Supplie Manufacturer Custom Supplie Manufacturer Custom r er r er Manufacturer Manufacturer Supplie Manufacturer Custom Supplie Manufacturer Custom r er r er Manufacturer Manufacturer Supplie Manufacturer Custom Supplie Manufacturer Custom r er r er Manufacturer Manufacturer Supplie Manufacturer Custom r er Manufacturer Supplie Manufacturer Custom r er Manufacturer Supplie Manufacturer Custom r er Manufacturer Country C For simplicity only one supplier, manufacturer and customer of each country is taken in the above diagram, same can be possible for others. 1.8.1 Global Complexities If the supply/value chain involves sourcing in multiple countries, additional considerations need to be addressed. Some of these include: 19 Anna University Chennai
  • 20. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES ~ Currency exchange and risk. ~ Counter trade opportunities and requirements. ~ Varying laws and jurisdictional questions. ~ Cultural differences. ~ Language differences. ~ Labor and training availability, practices, laws, regulations. ~ Transportation, packing, shipping, storing, import, export, customs. ~ Security: materials, products, personnel, intellectual property. Challenges and Barriers to Transforming Global Supply Chains into Value Chains In the varying environments encountered internationally, there are a number of challenges and barriers involved in building global supply chains. Many of these are rarely concerned with the domestic supply chains. Some of these include: ~ Uncertain political stability, self-serving governments. ~ Lack of infrastructure in some countries (roads, port facilities, trained labor, utilities, communications). ~ Lack of critical market mass in particular countries. ~ High transaction costs. ~ Requirements to use in-country agents or partners and local content requirements. ~ Lack of potential for repeat purchases. ~ Slower adoption of e-business than in the domestic market. ~ No or limited free trade zone availability. ~ Partner/contract limitations requiring bidding for all procurement activities and alliance-building. ~ High logistics and transportation costs. ~ Different time zones (communication difficulties). ~ Financial risks are higher, e.g. potential for war, terrorism, government changes. ~ The nature of global activity (may be fragmented and/or scattered). ~ Long/unpredictable supplier lead times. ~ Protectionism (tariffs, duties, quotas, inspections). ~ Limited number of qualified global suppliers. ~ Difficult to link global project work to “run and maintain” global activities. ~ Limited availability of trained personnel for purchasing or supply management positions inhibiting. Anna University Chennai 20
  • 21. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 1.8.2 How to Transform Global Supply Chains NOTES Improve the quality/cost ratio of your supply chain. Strive for the highest quality at the lowest cost. Leverage value across the supply chain Understand what constitutes value and to whom it is valuable in your supply chain. Identify and evaluate trade-offs between value added and profitability. Leverage knowledge to create and deliver the value. Where commodity markets are involved, be proactive in initiating change that will benefit you. Redefine the boundaries of business Redefine the boundaries of your business in the context of what provides continuing competitor and customer advantage. Evaluate any existing vertical integration structures and replace with virtual sourcing if value can be added by doing so. Evaluate what to insource and what to outsource. Use all capabilities of existing or potential supply chains in the development of new products. Develop relational competence View relationships with other members of your supply chains as a continuum ranging from spot relationships to strategic alliance or co-ownership but recognizing that most relationships will be somewhere between these extremes. Determine where more competition will add value and where more collaboration will add value and seek the best combination of competition and collaboration. Manage at the right level Determine which strategies and activities best add value with global management and which best add value with local management. Determine the best level of autonomy for local management within supply chain activities. Analyze supply chains for each category of material or service that is significant to the organization to determine the best value -adding approach for management and control. Develop supply chain responsiveness Determine how the degree of responsiveness to customer needs such as re- supply time or product mix adjustment matches with customer requirements in each such area. Consider techniques such as supplier managed inventory, supplier integration, 21 Anna University Chennai
  • 22. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES and consignment stocking. Pay particular attention to the quality of demand forecasts throughout the supply chain. Drive down purchase costs. Capture cost saving opportunities and share benefits with contributing supply chain members. Pay attention to the differing cost management and purchase strategy needs of various categories of purchases. For example, commodities, specialty items, custom-made items, MRO materials. Service purchases can be similar. Bring About Change Change Management 1-1. It refers to transforming supply chains which involves a collateral change management. Consider purchases in the broadest possible sense - do not exclude anything which is purchased by the organization, material or service effort. This includes the following activities: ~ Seek Top Management mandate with visible support. ~ Identify the local sponsors and supporters of the supply chain, change early in the transformation process. ~ Use coordinated communication efforts to develop a dialog about the benefits and obstacles for implementation. ~ Target quick wins and immediate opportunities. ~ Focus on overcoming obstacles to implementation by creating a cross functional approach (Team) to address issues. ~ Perform a competitive advantage review in order to leverage the core competencies of the supply chain members . ~ Develop a supply chain agenda, manage the overall program and frame goals to address major gaps in supply chain performance. ~ Develop a business plan that will integrate the activities of the supply chain members. ~ Formulate key performance metrics and measurements, tracking quarterly. ~ Review results and make modifications as necessary to achieve supply chain optimization. Anna University Chennai 22
  • 23. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Summary NOTES • This unit helps the reader to understand the importance of the production / operation system in an organization. • Characteristics of the different production / operation system are detailed out in addition to when one should prefer what type of system. • The components of computer integrated manufacturing system and the introduction of Global supply chain network are highlighted. Review Questions: 1. State any five Global Complexity. 2. Give any three steps to develop Global Value Chain? 23 Anna University Chennai
  • 24. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES UNIT II MATERIAL AND INVENTORY MANAGEMENT 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Learning objectives 2.3 Materials Management 2.3.1 Definition and Scope 2.3.2 Objectives 2.3.2.1 Primary objectives 2.3.2.2 Secondary Objectives 2.4 Material Handling 2.4.1 Introduction 2.4.2 Robotics 2.4.2.1 Advantages of Robots in Industry 2.4.2.2 Components of a robot 2.4.2.3 Industrial applications of robotics 2.4.2.4 Applications of robotics in other fields 2.4.2.5 Dangers and disadvantages 2.4.3 Automatic Storage and Retrieval system (AS/RS) 2.4.3.1 Types of AS/RS 2.4.3.2 Technical and Economic benefits of AS/RS 2.4.4 Automated Guided Vehicle 2.4.4.1 Component of AGV 2.4.4.2 Applications of AGV 2.5 Just In Time (JIT) 2.5.1 Problems of Conventional Production System 2.5.2 Conventional vs. JIT attributes 2.5.3 JIT as a waste elimination tool 2.5.4 KANBAN production control system 2.5.4.1 Working of KANBAN 2.5.5 Uniform loading 2.5.6 Quality Control 2.6 ABC analysis 2.6.1 Kind of Control Anna University Chennai 24
  • 25. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 2.7 Inventory models NOTES 2.7.1 Need for Inventory 2.7.2 Types of Inventory 2.7.3 Inventory costs 2.7.4 Deterministic model 2.7.4.1 EOQ model 2.7.4.2 EBQ model 2.7.4.3 Quantity discount model 2.7.5 Probabilistic model 2.7.5.1 ‘Q’ model 2.8 Material Requirement Planning (MRP) 2.8.1 Introduction 2.8.2 Overview of MRP system 2.8.3 Inputs of MRP system 2.8.4 MRP Process 2.8.5 MRP output 2.9 Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRPII) 2.9.1 Introduction 2.9.2 Closed loop MRP system 2.9.3 Master Production Schedule 2.9.4 Capacity planning 2.9.5 Forward scheduling and backward scheduling 2.9.6 Benefits of MRPII 2.9.7 Drawbacks of MRPII 2.10 Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) 2.10.1 Need for ERP 2.10.2 Evolution of ERP 2.10.3 Advantages of ERP system 2.10.4 Disadvantages of a ERP system 2.10.5 Limitation of ERP 2.11 E-Business and E-Commerce 25 Anna University Chennai
  • 26. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES UNIT - II MATERIAL AND INVENTORY MANAGEMENT 2.1 INTRODUCTION In this unit the productivity of material resources is discussed. The role of materials management in an organization and the latest material handling devices like Automated Guided Vehicle (AGV), Automatic Storage and Retrieval System (AS / RS) and Robots are illustrated. The deterministic and probabilistic inventory models are illustrated with examples. Detailed discussions are carried out about material requirement planning and manufacturing resource planning. The evolution of ERP system is dealt. In addition, introduction about e-business and e-operation strategies are also explained. 2.2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES • To know the importance of material resources. • To understand functions of materials management. • To understand the computer controlled material handling devices. • To know the importance of deterministic and probabilistic inventory models. • To know the working of MRP – I and MRP – II systems. • To highlight the E-business and e-operation strategies. 2.3 MATERIAL MANAGEMENT 2.3.1 Definition and Scope We can define Materials Management as the function responsible for the coordination of planning, sourcing, purchasing, moving, storing and controlling materials in an optimum manner so as to provide a pre-decided service to the customer at a minimum cost. 2.3.2 Objectives However, within the broader management objectives of any industry or business, Materials Management’s contribution towards objectives may be divided into two categories: Anna University Chennai 26
  • 27. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 1) Primary and NOTES 2) Secondary. The former contributes directly to the Materials Management function and the latter, helps other departments to achieve their objectives. 2.3.2.1 Primary Objectives Purchasing: Materials play a vital part in the field of cost-control and operating expenditure of any organization and therefore, materials have a direct bearing on the cost of a product, manufactured. If the Materials Department can reduce the overall materials cost through an efficient system of buying, it can directly contribute its share to the enhancement of profit. Thus lower prices, lower procurement and possession costs are important objectives of Materials Management. Price consciousness or less materials cost means more profit as embodied in the phrase, “Purchasing for Profit” which is readily recognized by Management. It is therefore a prime functional responsibility of the Materials Management department. Stores and inventory management: Arriving at the right balancing point in the inventory investment like investment in any other capital assets has always been a perplexing problem to industries. Inventory Management function is more complex, more subtle and the balance of costs and gains is much more difficult to find out. Briefly, Materials Management objective here is to have the correct quantity and right quality of material on hand at the time required with a minimum of investment expenditure, consistent with business experience. When inventory turnover is high, storage and carrying costs are low. Continuity of supply: This is an other important objective of Materials Management. Specially in automated processes, where costs are rigid and are not easily amenable to reduction due to lack of production materials, the question of continuity of supply gains prominence. This foreshadows all other objectives, because idle-time costs of men and machines push up overall costs of production and expediting supply means additional transport costs. Quality of materials: Where quality of materials presents cost plus production engineering problems, it may well become one of the prime objectives of Materials Management, where other objectives are sacrificed at quality-cost. Good supplier relations: A good supplier relation, on which depends much of the product-reputation of the company, is also one of the key objectives of Materials Managers. Suppliers respond 27 Anna University Chennai
  • 28. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES to fair treatment but are uncooperative and unwilling if indifferently treated. The Materials Management department can improve relations by providing the required stimuli for their better performance. 2.3.2.2 Secondary Objectives Secondary objectives are so varied that they limit the possibility of listing exclusively in one breath. In one way or the other, they help to achieve the primary objectives, but different organizations put different emphasis on them. The following are a few examples. Make-or-Buy decisions: Since the Materials Management department is immediately concerned with the selection of supply sources, materials-cost, procurement-cost and the availability of materials. it influences heavily the Make-or-Buy decision. Often, this is a Committee action where other departments are also involved. However, the Materials’ department’s contribution is still substantial and more direct. Value analysis and Value engineering: Any item that is produced or bought is to serve a specific purpose. Before making or buying any material or equipment, engineers and buyers must decide what purpose they are to serve in order to find out whether a lower-cost design would work well or a less costly item could fill the need. Both engineering department and purchase department may watch the specifications for the best value of the money spent. ‘Value engineering’ and Value Analysis’ are close to the same thing. They are approaches to cost-saving goals that deal primarily with product design. The first usually refers to what the engineering department is doing in this direction and the second usually refers to the work that the buyer is doing in this area. If value analysis is designed to reduce the cost of an item, standardization may often eliminate the item entirely. Standardization: Standardization is essential to a mass production system which is defined as “that which has been established as a model to which an object or action can be compared”. However, one should take note that even when a substitute is technically feasible, it is not always economical to use it. The economics of standardization is not necessarily so complex. All that is required is to compare costs of acquisition and carrying before the substitution was made with the costs after it was made. A standardized program is primarily designed to root out unneeded inventories. The buyer who knows who made the original components, need not pay a premium price for it to another equipment manufacturer for the same thing. Anna University Chennai 28
  • 29. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT The Engineering department is primarily responsible for standards and NOTES specifications. However, the Materials department can promote incorporation of standard components into product design to reduce cost. The fewer the items that need be managed, the simpler and more efficient is the Materials Management process, so that the Materials Management department can periodically review the stock to suggest weeding out of non-standard items. Product development and new products: Since the discovery and improvement of materials frequently lead to a new product and lower costs on existing products, the Materials department can suggest materials and components that will do better or equivalent jobs at lower cost. Product efficiency is basically a compromise between engineering design and economic objective of Management. The Materials Manager’s economic knowledge can supplement the technical skill of engineering through a product change for bigger profits. Again, a program designed to find ways and means of utilizing the by-products or wastes is always profitable and here the Materials department can render substantial help by adding new products to the existing product-line. Price, demand and requirements forecasting: In large concerns this is a functional responsibility of economists. They make forecasts both for sales and purchases. Materials Management personnel translate them into specific purchase actions. Because of their intimate knowledge of the market conditions through daily contacts with suppliers, in medium or small-size organizations, Materials Management departments do this job. By analyzing and interpreting data of past sales, seasonal variations in prices, availability and demand for materials, they forecast future trends and plan material requirements accordingly. An organization structure is an essential tool of management: As a system of responsibility and of formal interrelations, it is concerned with two of the elements, namely, planning and coordination. Its chief purpose is to ensure smooth and balanced working of the organization. Obviously the size of the unit must affect the way in which management and other activities are carried out. Clearly, a large organization will be able to use and will need to use techniques and procedures of a different kind and higher degree of complexity than those of the medium or smaller firm. In other words, there will be differences in methods or routines according to differences in size, but the fundamental principles of management and the approach necessary for the attainment of effective management are the same, irrespective of size. 1. The determination of the basic objectives: The basic objectives of an organization determine the organization structure for they determine the type, stability, structure and permanency of the organization. The 29 Anna University Chennai
  • 30. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES objectives of an organization play, therefore, a vital part in determining how quickly the structure should be developed, what it should look like, its operating cost and permanency. What we want to accomplish should be kept clearly in mind while determining and setting up its structure. Obviously, the organization structure of a large corporation is much more complex, and therefore, slowly developed. Here too, objectives affect the structure. Once the objectives are clearly determined, the development of structure will follow the natural path dictated by the desire to reach these objectives. An organization structure should never hinder the achievement of these objectives; instead it should facilitate the mechanism that will enable the organization to accomplish things more easily and effectively than when left in unorganized things more easily and effectively than when left in an unorganized fashion. Thus, if it is decided that the company should add to a new line of product, and therefore, expand its marketing territory, such an objective and its concomitant Materials Management activities would necessarily affect the final structure of the organization. 2. Determination of the areas of activity: Organization itself is nothing but the application of the universal law of specialization. Through organization, a person’s actions and responsibilities are narrowed to one or a few functions, specializing in these few and thereby, increasing efficiency. Specialization by division of work into functional areas enables one to understand his job more thoroughly. Therefore, effective organization must include specialization as an element of efficiency for the performance of one or a very few leading functions. As far as possible, similar functions should be combined into one position. Although its advantages are universally recognized, yet it has its limits which should not be exceeded. 3. Determination of the ideal structure to accomplish the desired activities: Physical listing of activities will in itself suggest possible areas within which it needs to consolidate work. Each of the groupings will then lead to an ‘ideal’ organization structure to carry out the functions. Products, tools and processes may be considered as possible areas of functional activities. This ‘ideal’ structure may then represent the long range or ultimate organization with available personnel, funds, etc., so as to reconcile the ‘ideal’ with the ‘working’ organization. 4. Authority and Responsibility: Authority is the right to give orders and the power to exact obedience. Authority is not to be conceived apart from responsibility, that is, apart from sanction – reward or penalty, which goes with the exercise of that power. Delegation of authority is the key point of organization. Without delegation there would be no organization and this is the core of all formal processes of organization. A major task of top management is the delegation of authority to proper individuals in order to secure appropriate actions. But often, we hear of responsibility being delegated without power to command or act. Anna University Chennai 30
  • 31. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Such an organization set-up makes for ease and efficiency in determining responsibility NOTES and delegating necessary authority. Since it would not be just to hold a person responsible for performance of a task without first giving him the authority, responsibility should always be coupled with commensurate authority. Here, authority can be delegated, responsibility cannot. 5. Span of Control: By span of control, we mean the number of individuals one supervises and directs. There is a definite limit to this number and this, to a great extent, determines the units of an organization. There may be a tendency to over supervise and this may, in effect, mean scant or ineffective supervision. On the other hand, when too few report to one supervisor, his time is not effectively used. However, no hard and fast rule can be established and it depends upon the type of work performed. 6. Personal Ability: Simply assigning jobs to individuals does not mean that they will be accomplished. Individuals differ in capacity and ability and these differences as well as personal limitations should be considered before placing an individual in an organization. In developing an organization, therefore, proper regard should be paid to the personal ability of individuals assigned to various components. An organization is referred to the people and its structure reflects the ability of its members which again largely determines the structure. 7. Unity of Command: For any action whatsoever, an employee should receive orders from one superior only. Such is the rule of unity of command. No one in any organization should report to more than one line supervisor and everyone should know to whom he reports and who reports to him. In fact, receiving directions from more than one individual may easily result in confusion, conflict, lack of action and poor morale. Each member of an organization, therefore, should receive directions from only one boss, his immediate superior and should be responsible to him alone. 8. Job Assignment: Logical groupings or related functions should be made in developing the organization structure. It is often desirable to have the responsibility for each of these functions assigned to specific individuals with these persons turning to the leader charged with the accomplishment of the overall function. 9. Regulations: Rules and regulations aid improper operation of an enterprise. A complete statement of the operating objective of an enterprise as well as the responsibility and 31 Anna University Chennai
  • 32. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES the authority of each individual should be formulated and should be made available in writing to all personnel in the organization. They may be broad and specific. Even detailed methods manuals to describe how the tasks are to be carried out may be valuable. They define the authority which certain individuals have over particular functions. 10. Two way communication: Despite the fact that line of authority provides channels downward and upward, they are often used only to pass directives downward and never as a means of communicating attitudes, feelings or ideas upward. Such blocks in communication occur in a great many organizations. In fact, one of the most immediate and costly results of poor organization is the breakdown of intra-organizational communication. In as much as an organization is developed to aid in accomplishing an objective, good communication is necessary if all employees are to know what to do to reach this objective. 11. Flexibility: The environment in which an organization exists and the individuals who make it up are constantly changing. Organizations change because of technological, economic or personnel changes or changes in the objectives. An organization possessing flexibility withstands minor pressures, but gives way to the demand for genuine change permitting their expansion or contraction without seriously altering the basic functions of various segments of the structure. 12. Line and Staff activity: Line and staff functions should not be combined in one individual where separation of functions is possible. Line functions, as has been said before, are those which directly affect the product or service. Staff functions are those that aid the line or, are auxiliary to the line function. Because confusion may result, line and staff functions should be separate wherever possible. Staff specialists are useful and there will always be a need for them. Especially in large materials organizations, where materials management is treated as an integrated activity, there should be less need for staff experts in a variety of functions. Among the major staff services value analysis, economic forecasting and administrative planning may be essential. A staff expert on ‘trade relations’ is also a common feature in large-scale industrial purchasing. Leadership Question: Leadership is obviously more than personal ability and skill. Leadership is important to the effective set up and operation of every organization because leadership is the one force that charts and makes possible the economic accomplishment of the objectives. A ‘weak’organization structure with effective leaders will probably accomplish more than a so called ‘strong’ organization with weak leaders. Anna University Chennai 32
  • 33. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Structural balance: NOTES An organization conceived and developed along the principles detailed above, will more than reward its leaders, as well as its members. In the process of forming a new organization structure or of reorganizing an existing one, these principles should be considered. But the consideration of these principles, rules and types will not in itself result in the development of a new organization. Instead a new organization structure must be visualized and developed step by step. Although no series of rules can assure an effective organization, this objective can be approached in a systematic fashion without much difficulty. In a balanced organization, each function of the structure should be large enough, but not overly developed in relation to other functions of the organization. Without such a balance, the objective of the organization cannot be achieved economically. Review Questions: 1. List any two Primary functions. 2. List any two Secondary functions. 2.4 MATERIAL HANDLING 2.4.1 Introduction For an ideal operation system, material handling is not a desirable activity. The reason is it does not add any value to the product but it adds only cost to the product. So when you design a layout you should see that the movement of materials should be minimum. The material handling equipment used mostly depends upon the type of production system to be adopted. In the case of flow line production system, the following material handling equipments are used. Conveyors 1. Slat conveyor 2. Pusher bar conveyor 3. Roller conveyor 4. Belt conveyor 5. Wheel conveyor 6. Screw conveyor 7. Pivoted bucket conveyor 8. Apron conveyor 9. Spiral chute 10. Pneumatic conveyor 11. Trolley conveyor 33 Anna University Chennai
  • 34. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES In the case of job order/intermittent type production systems, the material handling equipment used are 1. Fork Truck 2. Platform Truck 3. Industrial Truck 4. Straddle carrier 5. Hand operated vehicles In addition, CRANES and HOISTS are also used in the production system. Thus is not specifically related to particular system. All types of production system uses/this kind of material handling equipment. The types of CRANES and HOISTS are : 1. Overhead traveling bridge cranes 2. Jib crane 3. Gantry crane 4. Air hoist 5. Electric Hoist 6. Chain hoist There is no hard and fast rule that particular material handling system used only by the particular production system. But you can find that the trucks used in the flow ıline. Production as well as the conveyors used in the job order and intermitted production system. Diagram 2.1 – Material handling equipments Anna University Chennai 34
  • 35. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES 35 Anna University Chennai
  • 36. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES 2.4.2 Robot The word “robot” is also used in a general sense to mean any machine that mimics the actions of a human, in the physical sense or in the mental sense. It comes from the word robota, labor or work. The word robot first appeared in Karel Capek’s science fiction play R.U.R. (Rossum’s Universal Robots) in 1921. The word was brought into popular Western use by famous science fiction writer Isaac Asimov. A robot is an electro-mechanical or bio-mechanical device or group of devices that can perform autonomous or preprogrammed tasks. A robot may act under the direct control of a human or autonomously under the control of a programmed computer. Robots may be used to perform tasks that are too dangerous or difficult for humans to implement directly, such as radioactive waste clean-up, or may be used to automate mindless repetitive tasks that should be performed with more precision by a robot than by a human, such as automobile production. Robot can also be used to describe an intelligent mechanical device in the form of a human, a humanoid robot. The word robot is used to refer to a wide range of machines, the common feature of which is that they are all capable of movement and can be used to perform physical tasks. Robots take on many different forms, ranging from humanoid, which mimic the human form and way of moving, to industrial, whose appearance is dictated by the function they are to perform. Anna University Chennai 36
  • 37. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Asimov proposed three ‘laws’ which for many years were recognized as NOTES principles in the use of robotics: A robot must not harm a human being or, through inaction, allow a human to come to harm. A robot must always obey human beings unless this is in conflict with the first law. A robot must protect itself from harm unless this is in conflict with the first or second law. Robots can be grouped generally Mobile robots (e.g. autonomous vehicles) Manipulator robots (e.g. industrial robots) Self reconfigurable robots, which can conform themselves to the task at hand. An industrial robot has been defined as: “A reprogrammable multifunctional manipulator designed to move material, parts, tools, or specialized devices through various programmed motions for the performance of a variety of tasks”. The definition says the robot is a reprogrammable and multifunctional. The reprogrammability means, through computer the programmed instructions can be written fed and also can be edited. Multifunctional is in the sense of its versatility. It can perform various activities. 2.4.2.1 Advantages of Robots in Industry: We can analyze the various advantages of robots in three perspectives. Technical factors: When comparing robot and human performance it is generally considered that humans cannot match the speed, quality, reliability, endurance and predictability of robotics systems. However, robots cannot compete with hard automation if the cycle times are short and flexibility is not an important factor. Robots therefore provide a link between the rigidity of dedicated automation and the flexibility of the human operator, in that they offer: High flexibility of product type and variation. Lower preparation time than hard automation. Better product quality. Fewer rejects and less waste than labor-intensive production. 37 Anna University Chennai
  • 38. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Economic factors: Major factors in considering the possible implementation of robotics systems include: • The need to increase production rates to remain competitive. • Pressure from the marketplace to improve quality. • Increasing costs. • Shortage of skilled labor. In general, robotics can increase profitability by: • Providing maximum utilization of capital-intensive production facilities for up to 24 hours per day, seven days per week; • Reducing production losses due to absenteeism and skilled labor shortage, reducing the amount of inventory which is being processed with resulting savings in work in progress. • Reducing the manufacturing lead time of the product or processes; • Reducing scrap and increasing product quality, with resulting reduction in the number of customer complaints. Social factors: • Robots are employed to do mindless, repetitive tasks so that the human capital can be utilizied in more interesting work. • Many low-level tasks can be carried out by robots. • Robots can be utilized to perform undesirable work in dangerous or hazardous environments and work requiring heavy physical effort. E.g.: spot-welding car bodies, applying spray paint. • Robots are successfully implemented in the nuclear industry for carrying out the maintenance work on reactors and for the handling of dangerous waste products. 2.4.2.2 Components of a robot: A robot has many components which include: A base- fixed or mobile. A manipulator with several degrees of freedom (DOF). An end-effector or gripper for holding a part or a tool. Drives or actuators causing the manipulator arm or end-effector move in a space. Controller with hardware and software support for giving commands to drivers Sensors to feed back the information for subsequent actions of the arm as well as to interact with the environment in which the robot is working. Interfaces connecting the robotic subsystems to the external world. Anna University Chennai 38
  • 39. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 2.2 – Movements of a Robot NOTES 2.4.2.3 Industrial applications of robotics: Material handling: Depalletizing/palletizing Transporting components Transfer of components/tools Bottle loading Parts handling Machine loading and unloading components: Loading parts to CNC machine tool Loading a punch press Loading a die casting machine Loading electron beam welding and laser beam welding machines Loading/orientating parts to transfer machines Spray painting Loading parts on the test machine Painting of trucks/automobiles Painting of agricultural equipment Painting of appliance components Arc welding Spot welding Arc welding Seam welding of variable width Machining Drilling 39 Anna University Chennai
  • 40. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Deburring Sanding Grinding Cutting Forming Assembly Mating components Riveting small assemblies Inspection In-process measuring and quality control, searching the missing parts Others Heat-treatment, applications of adhesives etc. 2.4.2.4 Applications of robotics in other fields: 1. Hazardous environments Mining Exploration Search and rescue Tunneling for main roadways Operations in short passages Municipal services Fire fighting Underground (dangerous gas-filled) Sewer clearing Maintenance of atomic reactors Space Space vehicles Undersea Oil/mineral exploration Salvage operations 2. Medical Rehabilitation engineering for handicapped Non-invasive diagnostics Surgery 3. Distribution Warehousing Retailing (for food industry or for retail industry) Anna University Chennai 40
  • 41. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 4. Agriculture NOTES 5. Hobby/household purposes 6. Military applications of robots may be in both manufacturing and non-manufac- turing areas. 2.4.2.5 Dangers and disadvantages: Although robots have not developed to the stage where they pose any threat or danger to society, fears and concerns about robots have been repeatedly expressed in a wide range of books and films. The principal theme is the robots’ intelligence and ability to act could exceed that of humans that they could develop a conscience and a motivation to take over or destroy the human race. Currently, malicious programming or unsafe use of robots may be the biggest danger. Although industrial robots may be smaller and less powerful than other indus- trial machines, they are just as capable of inflicting severe injury on humans. However, since a robot can be programmed to move in different trajectories depending on its task, its movement can be unpredictable for a person standing in its reach. Therefore, most industrial robots operate inside a security fence which separates them from human workers. Even without malicious programming, a robot, especially a future model mov- ing freely in a human environment, is potentially dangerous because of its large moving masses, powerful actuators and unpredictably complex behavior. Designing and programming robots to be intrinsically safe and exhibit safe be- havior in a human environment is one of the great challenge in robotics. Some people suggest that developing a robot with a conscience may be helpful in this regard. 2.4.3 Automated Storage and Retrieval System (AS/RS) An integrated FMS, AGVS, and AS/RS system provides an efficient and ef- fective production system for manufacturing. Receiving, identification and sorting, dis- patching, placing in storage, retrieving from storage, packing, shipping, and record keeping have traditionally been considered the functions of storage systems. An AS/RS attempts to achieve these functions by automating most of these procedures in a cost- effective and efficient manner. An automated storage and retrieval system is defined as: A combination of equipment and controls, which handles, stores and retrieves materials with precision, accuracy and speed under a defined degree of automation. Different operations of AS/RS: • Automatic removal of an item from a storage location • Transportation of this item to a specific processing or interface point 41 Anna University Chennai
  • 42. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES • Automatic storage of an item in a predetermined location, having received an item from a processing or interface point. An automated storage and retrieval system comprises the following: • A series of storage aisles having storage racks. • Storage and retrieval (SIR) machines, normally one machine per aisle, to store and retrieve materials • One or more pickup and delivery stations where materials are delivered for entry to the system and materials are picked up from the system. 2.4.3.1 Types of AS/RS Several types of AS/RSs are distinguished based on certain features and applications. Some of the important categories include: 1. Unit load 2. Miniload 3. Person-on-board 4. Deep-lane 5. Automated item retrieval system 1. Unit Load AS/RS The unit load AS/RS is used to store and retrieve loads that are palletized or stored in standard-size containers. In general, a unit load system is computer con- trolled; having automated machines designed to handle unit load containers. Each ma- chine is guided by rails in the floor. These are the load-supporting mechanisms that moves loads to and from storage locations and the pickup-and-deposit stations. 2. Miniload AS/RS: A miniload system is designed to handle small loads such as individual parts, tools, and supplies. The system is suitable for use where there is a limit on the amount of space that can be utilized and where the volume is too low for a full-scale unit load system and too high for a manual system. A smaller investment and flexibility of handling small items make it a popular choice in industry. 3. Person-on-Board Systems The person-on-board system allows storage of items in less than unit load quantities. A person rides on a platform with the S/R machine to pick up individual items from a bin or drawer. This provides in-aisle order-picking ability, which can reduce the time it takes to fill an order. The operator can select the items and place them in a tote or module, which is then carried by the S/R machine to the end of the aisle or to a conveyor to reach its destination. Anna University Chennai 42
  • 43. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 4. Deep-Lane AS/RS: NOTES The deep-lane AS/RS is another variation on the unit load system. The items are stored in multideep storage with up to 10 items per row rather than single or double deep. This leads to a high density of stored items, permitting high usage of the unit. Each rack permits flow-through of items; that is, an item is deposited on one side of the storage rack and removed from the other side. The S/R machine is similar to the unit load S/R machine, except that S/R machines have specialized functions such as controlling rack-entry vehicles. 5. Automated Item Retrieval System: This system is designed for automatic retrieval of individual items or cases for storage. The storage system consists of items stored individually in a flow-through system that can be automatically released from storage and automatically brought to a required point. The items are stored from the rear, as in the deep-lane system, and are retrieved from the front. 2.4.3.2 Technical and Economic Benefits of AS/RS There are several benefits of AS/RS for an organization, which include: • An AS/RS is highly space efficient. Space now occupied by raw stock, work in process, or finished parts and assemblies can be released for valuable manufacturing space. • Increased storage capacity to meet long-range plans. • Improved inventory management and control. • Quick response time to locate, store, and retrieve items. • Reduced shortages of inventory items due to real-time information and control. • Reduced labor costs due to automation. • Improved stock rotation. • Improved security and reduced pilferage because of closed storage area. • Flexibility in design to accommodate a wide variety of loads. • Flexibility in interfacing with other systems such as AGVS, FMS, and inspection systems such as coordinate measuring machines. • Reduced scrap and rework due to automatic handling of parts. • Reduced operating expenses for light, power, and heat. • Helps implement just-in-time (JIT) concepts by getting the right parts, tools, pallets, and fixtures to the right place at the right time because of automatic control of storage and retrieval functions and accurate inventory management. 43 Anna University Chennai
  • 44. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES 2.4.4 Automated Guided Vehicle Automated Guided Vehicles (AGV), popularly known as battery-powered driverless vehicles. AGVs are becoming an integral part of automated manufacturing systems. They are with programming capabilities for destination, path location, and positioning. The AGVS belong to a class of highly flexible, intel1igent versatile material- handling systems used for materials loading and unloading throughout the facility. Automated Guided Vehicle (AGV) is the advanced material handling applications. AGV play an important part in automating the manufacturing unit because they not only connect all faces of the factory by the horizontal movement of materials, but allow management to control and direct manufacturing processes. The AGV can be defined as a vehicle equipped with automatic guidance equipment, either electromagnetic or optical. Such a vehicle is capable of following prescribed guidepaths and may be equipped for vehicle programming and stop selection, blocking, and any other special functions required by the system. One of the interesting feature of AGVs is the collision avoidance capability. That is, the vehicle comes to a dead stop before any damage is done to personnel, materials, or structures. 2.4.4.1 The Components of AGV There are four main components of an automated guided vehicle system: 1. The vehicle: It is used to move the material within the system without a human operator. 2. The guide path: It guides the vehicle to move along the path. 3. The control unit: It monitors and directs system operations including feedback on moves, inventory, and vehicle status. 4. The computer interface: It interfaces with other computers and systems such as the mainframe host computer, the automated storage and retrieval system (AS/RS), and the flexible manufacturing system (FMS). AGV’s Control Systems There are three types of AGVS control systems. They are 1-1 • Computer-controlled system: In this system, all the transactions and AGVS vehicle movements are controlled and monitored by the system controller. The guide path controller controls the guide path of the AGVS and transfers the information to the AGVS process controller. The AGVS process controller directs the movement of the AGVS vehicles. Anna University Chennai 44
  • 45. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT • Remote dispatch control system: NOTES In this system a human operator is required to issue instructions to the vehicle through a remote control station. The control system sends destination instructions directly to the vehicle. Therefore, the human operator does not have any direct control over the AGVS vehicle. • Manual control system: In the manually controlled system, the operator gives commands to AGVS. The operator gives instructions like loading the vehicle, entering a destination and unloading. A manually controlled system is simple and the least expensive of all control systems. The efficiency of the system depends on the skill and performance of the operator. 2.4.4.2 Applications of AGVS AGVS have numerous applications and have already been applied by many manufacturing plants and companies. New applications are being developed as technology improves and as experience is gained. Some of the most common applications of the AGVS are: • Raw material storage • Finished goods storage • Assembly operations • Flexible manufacturing systems • Manufacturing operations Technical and Economic Benefits of AGVs • Economic Justification: AGV systems are proving to be the most economical method of moving material. • Interface with Other Systems: AGV systems are designed to interface with other material-handling systems including conveyors, automatic storage/retrieval systems, production lines, and other devices. • System Accountability: Computer control means planned delivery, transaction audit records, on-line interface to production and inventory control systems and management information on the vehicle and workstation production. • Reduced Labor/increased Productivity: In cases where driverless vehicles are used, substantial savings are realized due to labor reduction. • Guide path Easily Expanded: As material movement needs change or plant size increases, AGV systems can be expanded or modified quickly and at low cost. 45 Anna University Chennai
  • 46. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES • Expandable System Capacity: As material movement needs an increase, load movement capacity in the AGV system is easily accomplished by adding one or more vehicles. • Unobstructed Aisles: Control wires for AGV systems are installed in the floor and therefore, leave no ‘above-floor obstructions’. • Destinations Unlimited: AGV systems can be designed with an unlimited number of pick-up and delivery points. • Less Equipment Damage: There is less product and equipment damage when AGV systems are used to move material because the vehicles travel on a predetermined route. • Reliable System Control: All automatic guided vehicles are equipped to allow manual override for the special material or vehicle movement situations. • Energy Conservation: AGV systems require very little energy to operate. • Ease of Installation: AGV systems can be installed in less time than most other material handling systems. • Installation in Existing Buildings: AGV systems can be installed in existing buildings with minimum interference to ongoing operations. Review Questions: 1. Name any two Conveyors. 2. List any two component of Robotics. 3. Name any two trucks. 4. Name any two cranes. 5. State any two advantages of Robots in Industry. 6. Name any two components of Robots. 7. List three benefits of AS/RS. 8. Expand AGV. 2.5 JUST IN TIME Just In Time (JIT) is a philosophy, wherever an organization adopts this philosophy to strive for excellence in their activities. JIT is considered to be a production strategy which enables to identify the non value added activities and eliminate those activities. The activities include the activities starting from the design to delivery of the product. JIT helps in achieving the listed objectives like. Zero defects Zero lead time Zero Breakdowns Zero Handling Zero Set uptime Zero lot excesses Zero Surging Anna University Chennai 46
  • 47. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 2.5.1 Problems of Conventional Production Systems: NOTES The well known Conventional Production Systems like Continuous Production System and the Intermittent Production System have their own limitations as you have read in the previous sections. The continuous production system has the shortcomings like for eg; this kind of system is not suitable for variety production. If there is a change in the product design, this system needs to be changed as it lacks in flexibility. The work forces are specialized work forces. But the workstations are properly balanced, comparatively you need less work in progress inventory. The manufacturing cycle time is comparatively low. In the case of intermittent production system, the system is more of process based. Since, it does the variety of products. The product has to wait for long time in the queue for the processing. This results in more in process inventory. But this system has the advantage of producing more no of variety production. Flexibility is in built in this system. Since the traditional system have these kinds of problems, so we need a system incorporating flexibility, balanced work station with multi skilled work force, with less waiting time of the products. JIT provides solution for the problems of conventional production system. 2.5.2 Conventional Vs. JIT Attitudes Table2.1 - Conventional Vs. JIT Attitudes Conventional Attitudes JIT Attitudes Some defects are acceptable Zero defects are necessary and attainable Large lots are efficient (more better) Ideal lot size is one (less is better) Fast production is efficient Balanced production is efficient Inventory provides safety Safety stock is a waste Inventory smoothes production Inventory is undesirable Inventory is an asset Inventory is a liability Queues are necessary Queue should be eliminated Suppliers are adversaries Suppliers are partners. Supply sources lead to safety Sources of supply lead to control Breakdown maintenance is enough Preventive maintenance is essential Long lead time is better Short lead time is better Setup time is given Setup time should be zero Management is by edict Management is by consensus Work force is specialized Work force is multifunctional 47 Anna University Chennai
  • 48. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES The above table illustrates the difference between Conventional System and JIT system. JIT is also considered as Inventory System in addition to considering it as production strategy. The reason for considering JIT as an Inventory System is that the main emphases of the JIT is the product, should flow in the production system without any impediments. But Inventory hides much type of impediments like:- Bad raw materials- Machine break downs- Poor quality- Worn tools- Delayed deliveries Unavailable material handling equipment Unavailable inspectors or setup persons If you have Inventory, the above problem will not come to the lime light very much. So JIT focus on mainly on inventory reduction to pave the way for the smooth flow of product in the system. 2.5.3 JIT as a waste elimination tool As it is mentioned, JIT emphasis on the inventory reduction. You can see in this section what re-engineering by the JIT requires in the input, processing and output sides of an operation system. Figure 2.3 - JIT as a waste elimination tool Input Processing Output - Customer order - Group Technology - Customer order - Accurate Forecasting - Uniform plant loading - Accurate forecasting - Reliable supplier - Kanban type production - Control system - Quality Control Raw Material inventory reduction: The following situations lead the organization to invest less in Raw Material inventory. • The exact proportion of the input requirement is known, provided the organi- zation produces the product based on customer order. • Accurate finished good forecasting enables the organization to stock less. • Fewer but better suppliers. • Partnership with the supplier. Anna University Chennai 48
  • 49. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT • More local suppliers to reduce lead time. NOTES • Frequent delivery of parts directly to the point of use. • Quality at the source by preventing defects and doing it right the first time. Work in Progress reduction: Work in Progress is the result of long manufacturing lead time, improper bal- ance of the workstations. First let us analyze the constituents of manufacturing lead time. Manufacturing lead time consists of Figure 2.4 - Work in Progress reduction Process time Wait time Move time Queue time Manufacturing lead time Except process time, all other times are non value added times. The organization should re-engineer first to reduce non value added times. Setup time: It is the time to setting up the machine. It involves the time included - in bringing the raw material and tools to the work place. - in cleaning and lubricating the machines. - in changing the die and jigs & fixture etc. The relationship between setup time, setup cost and production is given below: Setup time is Proportional to Setup cost. Production quantity = f (Setup cost) So, reduction the set up time in enables the reduction in set up cost. This in turn reduces the economic production quantity to be produced. So JIT advocates one unit, is the economic production quantity. The setup time reduction is Possible through adopting the following means: - Method analysis - Quick disconnects - Tinged bolts - Clamps - Roller platforms - Tool carouses 49 Anna University Chennai
  • 50. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Process time: It is the actual operation time on a product. This usually contributes less than 10% of the total manufacturing time. Wait time: This is the waiting time of the product to be moved for the next operation. This time is reduced provided the movement of material and the completion of operation are synchronized. This time is reduced through proper material handling planning. Move time: This is the movement time from one work station to another work station. This time is lessened if the work stations are adjacent. Queue time: This represents major portion of the manufacturing cycle time. This is the idle time of the product, waiting for the operations because the machine center from which the processing sought for, engaged by another product. This time depends upon the routing procedure adopted, priority rule assigned for the product. If you reduce the non value added times by the way and means mentioned above, the investment on, namely, the material, labor and manufacturing overhead in work in progress, inventory gets reduced. This is possible by adopting the group technology principle, Kanban production control, assuming machine reliability through preventive maintenance. Finished Good Inventory Reduction: Finished good inventory is reduced if you reduce the uncertainty related with the timing and the quantity of the customer requirement. The means for the uncertainty reduction: • Production based on the customer orders. • Accurate forecasting or free from errors . • Through better customer relationship, retaining the customer helps in executing agreement. • To fulfill the customers future requirement. • Retaining the customer through better customer relationship enables the organization in executing agreement to fulfill his future requirement. Anna University Chennai 50
  • 51. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Group Technology: NOTES This is already explained in the previous unit‘s section (1.7.4 Group Technology) 2.5.4 KANBAN Production control system: KANBAN is a Japanese word, meaning, CARD. There are two types of KANBAN one is called CONVENANCE KANBAN and the other one is PRODUCTION KANBAN CONVENANCE KANBAN acts as a move order authorizing the movement of material from one center to another work center. PRODUCTION KANBAN acts as a work order authorizing the work center to start production. You can understand the working of KANBAN Production control systems by considering intermediary work centers n-1, n and n+1 in a manufacturing. 2.5.4.1 Working of KANBAN 1. The production centers know in advance the production schedule. 2. The operator in the production center ‘n+1’ goes with conveyance KANBAN to the production center ‘n’. Where a container have the parts required for the production center ‘n+1’. Then he removes the production KANBAN and keeps it in the rack of the production center ‘n’. 3. Then he keeps the conveyance KANBAN in the container and move with the container to his work station n+1. 4. The order in which the production KANBAN in the rack gives indication to the operator in the work center ‘n’ about the priority based on which the product have to be processed in the centre ‘n’. 5. In the production center ‘n’ based on the production schedule, when the time for starting his operation reaches. - He goes with conveyance KANBAN to the production center ‘n-1’. - Remove the production KANBAN in the container and keep it in the rack of center n-1 and keep the conveyance KANBAN in the container and move with the container to the workstation ‘n’ to start further processing on the product. The whole sequences of activities are portrayed in the figure2.5. 51 Anna University Chennai
  • 52. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Figure2.5 - Working of KANBAN From the above sequence you can understand that the JIT operates in the pull system basis. That is the down stream pulls the components from the upper stream for the production. But, in the case of traditional production system, it operates, based on Anna University Chennai 52
  • 53. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT the push system. In this case, whether the down stream requires the component at the NOTES time or not, the upper stream simply pushes the component to down stream as and when it completes the component that results in comparatively more work in progress inventory. 2.5.5 Uniform Loading: You can understand the concept of uniform loading through an example, suppose a product ‘x’ of 2000 quantity is required in a month. Assume that the organization works for 20 days in a month, then 2000/20 = 100 units, the organization has to produce in a day. Uniform loading means, the organization never produces the product excess of 100 units in a day even though there is an idle capacity available in a day. This means that JIT insists not on the efficiency (Utilization of resources) because if the product is produced faster than the required, then it adds more costs to the organization through the following: - Containers are needed to hold them. - Trucks are needed to move them. - Warehouse space is needed to store them. - Money is needed to finance the inventory. - Accountants are needed to keep track of it. - Schedulers are needed to indicate when to produce more. Quality Control: In JIT, as par as in process inspection concerned, the worker act as a inspector and he is responsible for the quality. As it is mentioned, the work force is a multi 1-1 skilled workforce. The worker is trained in the inspection process also, if there is any problem regarding the quality, the whole production stops. After, the quality problem is rectified, the production starts. In JIT, the quality improvement is done through Total Employee Involvement (TEI), quality circles. The emphasis is more on the quality but not on the quantity. Workers are responsible for feeding only good quality parts to the downstream operations. The machines are kept in good working conditions so that it produces good quality part. The worker acts as a maintenance man to get defect free product. JIT operates on the policy of prevention better than cure. Review Questions: 1. What does JIT aim for? 2. How do you achieve flexibility and less work in progress inventory? 53 Anna University Chennai
  • 54. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES 3. What is meant by wait time? 4. What is meant by queue time? 5. What does KANBAN stand for? 2.6 ABC ANALYSIS (ALWAYS BETTER CONTROL) Any organization usually deals with lots of items. It is very difficult to exercise control over all the items. Controlling means transactions related to inventory, degree of control, type of records to be maintained, lot sizes, frequency of review, size of safety stock to be maintained etc. ABC analysis helps to classify the thousands or even millions of individual items into three groups namely items belonging to A group, B group, C group items respectively. ABC analysis is done based on the Pareto’s principle. Consumption value is the basis for ABC classification. Consumption value is the product of unit price and consumption. Mechanism of doing ABC classification: Steps involved: 1. Collect previous year consumption and unit price for each item. 2. Multiply the consumption and unit price for each item to get the consumption value. 3. Rank the items corresponding to the consumption value. 4. Calculate cumulative consumption value against each item. 5. Find the percentage of cumulative consumption value. Usually to classify the items into ‘A’ class there is leverage available. The leverage is 60 to 70 percentage of the consumption value. This means the cut-off value can be fixed in between 60 to 70 percentage of consumption and the corresponding items which contribute up to the cut-off value are classified as a class items. Similarly, to classify the items into B class, there is a leverage of the consumption value to the extent of 10 to 20 percentage of the consumption value. To classify the items into C class, there is a leverage of the consumption value to the extent of 10 to 20 percentage of the consumption value. Table 2.1 Class of items Cut-off % of Consumption Value A 60-75 B 10-20 C 5-10 Anna University Chennai 54
  • 55. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Illustrated Example: 2.1 NOTES 1. Bulchand & Co. company inventories 20 items. The company decides to setup an ABC inventory system with 10 % of A items, 20% of B items and 70% of C items. The company records provides the information, which is as follows: Table 2.2 Item Code Annual usage in units Cost per unit (Rs) G 2,500 150 H 15,000 90 I 12,000 100 J 8,000 50 K 1,00,000 50 L 25,000 300 M 80,000 500 N 2,000 300 O 3,000 70 P 6,500 60 Q 10,000 75 R 6,000 20 S 20,000 50 T 40,000 90 U 1,20,000 350 V 20,000 200 W 1,500 350 X 4,000 100 Y 4,500 200 Z 7,000 40 Analyze the above items into ABC categories on the basis of the information and prepare a report showing your findings with comments. 55 Anna University Chennai
  • 56. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Solution NOTES Table 2.3 Item code Annual usage Cost per unit Consumption Ranking in units (Rs.) Value G 2,500 150 3,75,000 17 H 15,000 90 13,50,000 7 I 12,000 100 12,00,000 8 J 8,000 50 4,00,000 14 K 1,00,000 50 50,00,000 4 L 25,000 300 75,00,000 3 M 80,000 500 400,00,000 2 N 2,000 300 6,00,000 12 O 3,000 70 2,10,000 19 P 6,500 60 3,90,000 16 Q 10,000 75 7,50,000 11 R 6,000 20 1,20,000 20 S 20,000 50 10,00,000 9 T 40,000 90 36,00,000 6 U 1,20,000 350 420,00,000 1 V 20,000 200 40,00,000 5 W 1,500 350 5,25,000 13 X 4,000 100 4,00,000 15 Y 4,500 200 9,00,000 10 Z 7,000 40 2,80,000 18 Table2.4 Ordered Item Consumption Cumulative Percentage of Ranking Code Value consumption Cumulative Class value consumption value 1 U 420,00,000 420,00,000 37.90 A 2 M 400,00,000 820,00,000 74.14 3 L 75,00,000 895,00,000 80.92 B 4 K 50,00,000 945,00,000 85.44 Anna University Chennai 56
  • 57. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 5 V 40,00,000 985,00,000 89.05 NOTES 6 T 36,00,000 1021,00,000 92.31 7 H 13,50,000 1034,50,000 93.53 C 8 I 12,00,000 1046,50,000 94.62 9 S 10,00,000 1056,50,000 95.52 10 Y 9,00,000 1065,50,000 96.33 11 Q 7,50,000 1073,00,000 97.01 12 N 6,00,000 1079,00,000 97.55 13 W 5,25,000 1084,25,000 98.03 14 J 4,00,000 1088,25,000 98.39 15 X 4,00,000 1092,25,000 98.75 16 P 3,90,000 1096,15,000 99.10 17 G 3,75.000 1099,90,000 99.44 18 Z 2,80,000 1102,70,000 99.70 19 O 2,10,000 1104,80,000 99.89 20 R 1,20,000 1106,00,000 100 Table2.5 Class No. of items % of items Consumption Cut-off % of Value in Lac Rs. Consumption value A 6 30 450 73.48 B 7 35 120 19.59 C 7 35 42.25 6.9 57 Anna University Chennai
  • 58. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 2.6 - Graphical representation of ABC analysis NOTES 92 74 % of Consumption value C A B 10 30 % of items 2.6.1 Kinds of Control Purpose of classifying the items into ABC is to control over each item. The degree of control required for A class is not same for B and C class items. The following table helps the material manager in the kind of control to be exercised on these items. Advantages of ABC Analysis: 1. Better exercise of control over all materials. 2. The capital invested in inventory can be reduced to minimum levels. 3. Warehouse and storage costs can be reduced. Limitations of ABC Analysis: • ABC analysis mainly provides a guideline for inventory management. It needs to be supplemented by basic understanding and judgment as there are certain items which may fall into category C or category B due to their low usage value but are otherwise very critical for the production process of the firm. Their inventory levels have to be carefully monitored. • The ABC analysis, to be effective, needs to be constantly undertaken and pe- riodically reviewed by the management, as the number of items and value of items keep on undergoing changes. • The practical problem in the usage of ABC analysis is that generally, thousands of items fall in category C, as a result, a lot of time is spent on managing inventory of items of this category (even if it needs simple control). The time left for controlling the inventory stocks of categories A is therefore much shorter than that required for their effective management. Anna University Chennai 58
  • 59. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Review Questions: NOTES What is consumption value? 2.7 INVENTORY MODELS Inventory: Organizations spend lot of money in materials. Material cost represent 20 to 60 percent of the cost of production, even a small saving in material will reflect in profit. Idle scarce material resource is called inventory. Since we invest lot of money in materials and if materials are idle for long time, it is not good for the health of the organization. So it is a must to exercise a control over Idle Scarce Resources, otherwise, lot of money is tied in inventory. So had you not invested this money on material, it would have fetched return from the other source. Therefore, an opportunity of earning the return is lost by investing in the inventory, you can see now how can you control the inventory. Figure 2.7 – Inventory System Constraint Inventory Policy - Demand Objective - Inventory Costs Minimize Cost 2.7.1 Need for Inventory Decision - Lead time 1. How much to Inventory is required for taking care of uncertainty in business, Ex: raw material order ? inventory is required because of the uncertainty of supply .i.e. .supplier may not be 2. When to order? prompt in supplying goods or the supply may also be lesser than expected. Therefore, to take care of these, you need raw material inventory. 2.7.2 Types of inventory 1. Raw material inventory. 2. Work in process inventory. 3. Finished goods inventory. 4. Supplies. 5. Pipeline inventory. 6. Buffer stock or Safety stock. 7. Decoupling inventory. 59 Anna University Chennai
  • 60. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES 1,2,3,4 are the basic types of Inventory whereas others are named based on their usage. Supplies: Materials which are used other than those used for production of finished goods. Ex: lubricants, pencil, pen, paper, spare parts. Pipeline inventory: It can be raw material, work in progress or finished goods inventory. Ex: Assume supplier is far away. Consumption per day is 20 units, 5 days for transportation 20X5= 100 units are required for the period of transportation. So if you keep 100 units in your stock it becomes your pipeline inventory. Decoupling inventory Inventory “decouples” in different stages. It might be raw material, WIP, finished goods inventory. Ex: customer has inventory for 10 days for the consumption. For 10 days the customer is decoupled from the producer. So, decoupling inventory is the one which decouples the customer and the producer. Safety stock: This stock may be raw material, WIP or finished goods which are extra stock required to take care of fluctuation or uncertainties in the demand or lead time. Usually in a business organization two things are uncertain namely, · Demand · Lead time Inventory models adopted by organizations depend upon the level of uncertainty with the lead time or demand. The following table portrays the type of inventory model of organizations has to be adopted against the lead time and demand situations. Table 2.6 – Demand and lead time in different types of model to be adopted Situations Demand Lead time Type of Model to be adopted 1 Constant Constant Deterministic Model 2 Constant Variable Probabilistic Model 3 Variable Constant Probabilistic Model 4 Variable Variable Probabilistic Model Anna University Chennai 60
  • 61. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Lead time: NOTES There are two types of leadtime - Supply lead time - Manufacturing lead time Supply lead time: This time refers to the time lapse between placing of order with the supplier and receiving it by the customer. Manufacturing Lead time: The average time consumed by the product in the plant. Supply lead time (l) L=T1+T2+T3+T4+T5 T1= order genesis time and transit time (selection of supplier). T2= manufacturing time of the product by suppliers. T2= 0 If the product is readily available with the supplier. T3= inspection time. T4= transit time. T5=receiving time. If L is high, more inventory is needed to take care of high lead time. 2.7.3 Inventory cost: Types of inventory cost are -Ordering cost / setup cost. -Carrying cost. - Shortage cost / Back ordering cost. - Purchase cost. Inventory cost varies according to decisions namely. Ordering quantity Ordering cost: (Co) It is measured per order. Fig: Ordering Cost behavior against the Ordinary Quantity. Figure 2.8 – Ordering Cost Curve Component of Ordering Cost • Tender and Bidding Cost • Purchase negotiations • Selection of vendor • Preparation and sending of order etc. 61 Anna University Chennai
  • 62. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Suppose we produce internally without ordering, then there is no ordering cost . It NOTES becomes Setup cost. Setup cost: (Co) It is measured per setup. Figure 2.9 – Setup cost Curve Component of setup cost are • Cost of cleaning and adjusting production equipment • Inspection • Bringing required raw materials. • Changing dies etc. As we have seen in both cases, it varies with decision making i.e. how much to order? Carrying cost: (Cc) It is the penalty cost which organization incurs because of carrying inventory. Components of carrying cost: • Capital Cost • Storage Cost • Insurance • Obsolescence • Deterioration • Tax etc Cc = cost of holding one unit per unit time* avg. amount of inventory held per unit time. Carrying cost is measured in terms of percentage. Example 2.2 Assume that the average inventory in a year for an item = 2000 units Price of the item = Rs. 100 Average Investment on Inventory = 2000X100 = Rs. 2, 00,000 Anna University Chennai 62
  • 63. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT By having the average inventory, the organization involves the following additional Cost. NOTES Capital Cost (Opportunity Cost) = 500 Storage = 1000 Insurance = 5000 Obsolescence = 1000 Deterioration = 4000 Tax = 4000 Total = 20,000 Rs. 20,000 contributes 10 percent of the Average investment of Rs, 2,00,000. So the inventory carrying cost for this organization is valued at 10 percent ( 10 percent of Rs. 100) per unit per year. Figure 2.10 – Carrying Cost Behavior Carrying Cost Behavior against the ordering cost Shortage Cost (Cs) Shortage cost is the result of the customers demand not met from the existing stock. Shortage costs are of two types, the one is lost sale and another is the back ordered. In the case of the lost sale the customers demand is not mate. But in the case of the back ordering the customers demand is met at delayed date. The components of shortage cost are the – 1. cost involved in taking steps to expedite the procurement of the purchased material. 2. cost involved in rearranging the shop schedule to permit the earlier completion of order under consideration. 3. cost involved in working overtime and so on. 4. loss of customers goodwill because of not meeting the customer requirement (future profit loss). 5. present profit loss etc. 63 Anna University Chennai
  • 64. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Some of the components of the shortage cost is difficult to quantify but roughly it is possible to estimate the shortage cost. Shortage cost = [shortage cost per unit time] * [average shortage per unit time] = Cs .Is Cs = shortage cost per unit time Is = average shortage per unit time Example2.3 Assume that the average shortage cost is calculated per ordering cycle Figure 2.11 – Inventory level fluctuations for determining average shortage Excess Inventory 2/3t 0 Minimum 1/3t Shortage Shortage 500 Maximum Shortage Suppose t is the ordering cycle. Assume that in that ordering cycle 2/3t time the i demand is not met from the stock. The average shortage in the cycle = [(minimum shortage during cycle + maximum shortage during cycle)/2]X [Proportion of time shortage occurs during cycle] = (0+500)/2X (2/3t)/t =500/3 Assume that shortage cost per unit time = Rs. 9 Shortage cost = 9X500/3 =1500 Purchase Cost (Cp) Purchase cost is the cost of purchase/price of product to be produced. Cp becomes the production cost if it is produced inside the organization. Anna University Chennai 64
  • 65. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Decision NOTES The decision regarding inventory will be mostly of how much to order?, and when to order? How much to order is related with ordering the quantity but when to order is related with the frequency of ordering and reorder level. Relevant Cost The relevant costs, namely, ordering cost, carrying cost, shortage costs are relevant cost. A cost is said to be relevant cost, provided the cost varies with the decision. If the ordering quantity (Q) is more that results in less shortage cost and ordering cost but the inventory carrying cost will be high. The purchase price is considered to be relevant only when the supplier offers discount. The purchase cost becomes relevant because the decision, namely, the ordering quantity varies according to the offers provided by the supplier. 1.7.4 Deterministic Model 2.7.4.1 Figure below portrays EOQ model the deterministic inventory model. This is shown time vs. inventory Level. Figure 2.12 - Deterministic Model D e t e r m i n s t ic m o d e l ( E O Q m o d e l ) Inventory Level R e o rd e r L e ve l q u a n t i ty L e a d t im e Demand (D) Demand rate is uniform and is known. D is the annual demand. Lead time (L) Lead time is known and constant. Costs Ordering cost, carrying cost are known. Purchase cost is irrelevant it means no price discount is offered. Shortage cost is not permitted. 65 Anna University Chennai
  • 66. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Decision to be taken: NOTES How much to order? - Ordering quantity (Q) When to order? - Reorder Level To answer for the questions related with the decisions, you have to proceed as follows: • Any organization, it has to minimize the total inventory cost. • Total annual inventory cost = ordering cost +carrying cost+ purchase cost +short age cost • With regard to this model, the shortage cost is not permitted. • Total annual inventory cost = ordering cost + carrying cost + purchase cost Since you should find the ordering quantity and re-order level, next you should consider relevant cost. (i.e.) total annual relevant cost = ordering cost + carrying cost = (no. of orders) (ordering cost per order) + (average inventory) (Carrying Cost) D/Q=No. of Orders Average inventory according to the figure = (min. inventory+ max. inventory)/2 = (0+Q)/2 = Q/2 Total annual relevant inventory cost = (D/Q)×Co+ (Q/2)×Cc Since you have to establish ‘Q’ Differentiating w.r.t. Q and equate it to zero. = - (D/Q)×Co+ Cc/2=0s Or Or = 2DCo/Cc Or Q=?[2DCo/Cc] Answer to the question how much to order Anna University Chennai 66
  • 67. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Total annual relevant inventory cost NOTES = (D/Q)Co+(Q/2)Cc Substituting q=?[2DCo/Cc] =(D/?[DCoCc/Cc])Co + (?[DCoCc/Cc]/2)Cc = =(?[DCoCc])/?2+?[DCoCc]/?2 =(2/?2) ?[DCcCO] =?[2DCoCc] Total annual inventory cost = Total annual ordering cost + Total annual carrying cost + Total annual purchase cost D Q TC= Co + CC + D.C Q 2 = Purchase cost + total annual relevant inventory cost = DCp+ ?[2DCoCp] Graphically also you can approximate, find out EOQ as follows. Figure 2.13 – Economic Order Quantity Example 2.4 The demand for a certain item is 4800 unit per year. Each unit cost Rs.100. Inventory cost charges are estimated at 15%. No shortage cost is allowed. The order- ing cost Rs. 400 per order. Lead time is one day. Assume 250 working days. Find the following: 1. EOQ 2. Time between the orders. 67 Anna University Chennai
  • 68. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES 3. Number of orders required each year. 4. Minimum relevant Inventory cost. 5. Minimum total inventory cost. 6. Reorder Level. 7. Plot a graph for inventory level fluctuation with time. Solution (i) EOQ=v (2DCo/Cc) =v (2×48000×400)/ (.15×100) Cc=(15/100) ×100 =1600 (ii) To determine reorder level = L× (D/12) =2×(48000/12250)=192 units (iii) Time between orders Q/t =D t =Q/D Figure 2.14 – Inventory Level =1600/48000 =.033 years =.033 ×250 =8.33 days (iv) Number of orders =D/Q =48000/1600 =30 orders (v) Total minimum relevant cost Inventory cost=v2DcoCc =v2×48000×400× .15× 100 =Rs. 24,000 (vi) Total minimum inventory cost = DCp+v(2CoCc) =48000×100+24000 =4824000 Rs. Anna University Chennai 68
  • 69. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 2.15 – Inventory level vs. Time NOTES Above problem is solved scientifically, but this problem can be also be solved graphically. Table 2.2 69 Anna University Chennai
  • 70. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 2.16 – Graphical Calculation of EOQ NOTES 2.7.4.2 Economic Batch Quantity Model: 1. Demand: -It is known and constant. -It is nothing but the annual production requirement. 2. Production rate: -It is known and is estimated based on the capacity of the plant. 3. Lead time: It is known and constant. 4. Cost: Setup/ordering cost: Since there is no purchase there is no ordering cost. Only setup cost comes into picture in the place of ordering cost .this is known. Carrying cost: It is known and constant. Product cost: assume that product cost per unit does not vary with the production i.e. unit is irrelevant of the quantity of production. Decision How much to produce? When to produce? The inventory model for this case will be as shown in the figure2.16. Anna University Chennai 70
  • 71. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 2.17 – Inventory Model (Economic Batch Quantity) NOTES tp - It is the production period. t - It is the time interval between the two productions. From the fig. it is concluded that up to the period, both production and consumption take place and inventory is built up at the rate of (p-d). Where ‘d’ is the demand rate. Once the tp period is reached there is no production, there is only consumption at the rate of ‘d”. Next production starts after ‘tth’ period. To find the quantity of production ‘Q’, production time period tp and time interval between production ‘t’. The following procedure is carried out. Total inventory cost= setup cost+ carrying cost + production cost + shortage cost. Total relevant inventory cost= setup cost + carrying cost. Shortage and production costs are zero because no shortage is allowed and the pro- duction cost becomes an irrelevant cost. From the fig. the average inventory is calculated as follows: Avg.inventory = (Imax +Imin)/2. = (Imax+0)/2 = Imax/2. 71 Anna University Chennai
  • 72. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES To find Imax , from the fig. Imax/tp = (p-d). So, Imax=(p-d)tp. To find tp, tp×p=Q tp=Q/p Imax = (p-d) Q/p Imax = (1-d/p) Q. Total relevant inventory cost =setup cost + carrying cost Setup cost = (number of setup ) × setup cost per setup = (D/Q) Co Carrying cost = (Average inventory)× carrying cost per unit = [(Imax+Imin)/2 ]×Cc =(1-d/p)×(Q/2) Cc Total relevant inventory cost = (D/Q)Co+(1-d/p)(Q/2)Cc For cost minimization, differentiate w.r.t. Q and equate it to zero. DC0/Q2=(1-d/p)Cc Q=?[2DCo/Cc(1-d/p) Total annual relevant inventory cost = D/v [2DCo/ (1-d/p) Cc] + v [2DCO/ (1-d/p] Cc)/2 =v [DCoCc(1-d/p)/v2 + v[DCoCc(1-d/p)]/v2 = (2/v2) v[DCoCc(1-d/p)] =v[2DCoCc(1-d/p)] Total annual inventory cost =v2DCcCo(1-d/p)+CpD Deducing EOQ from EBQ model It is known that in case of EOQ model, the production rate is infinity i.e. there is an instantaneous replenishment. Now EBQ=v [(2DCo)/(1-d/p)Cc] So when p = 8 EBQ=EOQ Anna University Chennai 72
  • 73. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Example 2. 5 NOTES ABC Power Company has planned to cover the demand for electricity using coal. Annual demand for the coal input is estimated to be 8lakh tones. It is used uni- formly throughout the year. Coal can be strip mined at the rate of 5000 tonnes per day. The setup cost for mining is 200 rupees per run. The inventory holding cost is 5 rupees per tone per day. The total numbers of working days are given as 250. Determine. 1. EBQ. 2. Duration of mining run. 3. Time between runs. 4. Minimum relevant inventory cost. 5. Plot graph showing whole inventory fluctuation Vs time. Solution: To find EBQ, EBQ = v[2DCo/Cc(1-d/p)] Where D = 8.00,000 tones per year D = 8, 00,000/250 = 3200 tones per day p = 5000 tones/day Co = Rs2000 /run Ch = Rs 5 /tones/day (i) EBQ = v[(2×8,00,000×2500)/(5×(1-3200/5000))] (ii)Duration of each mining run Q/p = tp tp = 42164/5000 = 8.43 = 8.5 days (approx) (iii) Time between runs Q=t*d T = Q/d = 42164/3200 = 13.17 days. (iv) Minimum relevant inventory cost = v [2DCoCc (1-d/p) = v [2×8,00,000×2500×5×(1-3200/5000)] = Rs. 84853 73 Anna University Chennai
  • 74. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 2.18 – Graphical representation of above the example NOTES 2.7.4.3 Quantity Discount Model As it is mentioned already, the purchase cost becomes relevant with respect to the quantity of order only when the supplier offers discounts. Discounts means if the ordering quantity exceeds particular limit supplier offers the quantity at lesser price per unit. This is possible because the supplier produces more quantity. He could achieve the economy of scale, the benefit achieved through the economy of scale, he wants to pass it onto the customer. This results in lesser price per unit if the customer orders more quantity. If you look at in terms of the customer’s perspective, the customer should also see that whether it is advisable to avail the discount offered. This is done through a trade off between his carrying inventory by the result of acquiring more quantity and the benefit achieved through purchase price. Anna University Chennai 74
  • 75. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 2.19 – Quantity Discount Model NOTES Solution: Start with the lowest price i.e. Rs 9 and to find whether Q is more than or equals to 5000. EOQ= v(2DCo/ Cc) = v(2×25000×60)/ 2.7) = 1054.06 approx. 1055 units This is not a feasible solution because we expected that Q will be more than or equals to 5000 but the EOQ came as 1055. By taking the next least value i.e. Rs 11 and to find whether Q is more than 1000 and less than 5000. EOQ=v (2×25000×60)/ 3.3) =956 units This is also not a feasible solution because we expected Q will be more than 1000 and less than 5000 but the EOQ came as 956. By taking the next least value i.e. Rs 12 and to find whether Q is equals to 1000. 75 Anna University Chennai
  • 76. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES EOQ=v (2×25000×60)/ 3.6) =912.87 approx. is 913units This is a feasible solution The total cost of inventory at EOQ is TC=v (2×D×Cc×Co) + D×P = v (2×25000×60×3.6) + (25000×12) = Rs 303286.33 Total inventory cost at other ordering quantities are - Total inventory cost for Q equals to 5000 TC= (D/Q) ×Co + (Q/2) ×Cc + D×P = (25000/5000) 60 + (5000/2) 2.7 + (25000*9) = 232000 Total inventory cost for Q between = 1000 and 5000 TC= (D/Q)*Co + (Q/2)*Cc + D*P = (25000/1000) 60 + (1000/2) 3.3 + (25000*11) = 278150. The possible savings is equal to total inventory cost at feasible EOQ, total inventory cost at 5000 units. The possible savings are = 303286-232000 = 71,286 A ordinary quantity 5000, the total annual inventory cost is 2, 32,000 2.7.5 Probabilistic Models In the previous section, it is assumed that the lead time and demand are constant. But in real life situations it is not so. The demand is always uncertain because it is difficult to exactly estimate the required quantity by the customer and the supplier is also usually not reliable. In the sense, he doesn’t supply in the specified time period. Considering this kind of situation, the decision should be taken regarding the quantity of ordering, time at which the order to be placed, the time between the orders and how much inventory to be kept against the uncertainty of demand and the lead time become cumbersome. To deal with the above scenarios, the inventory model to be adopted is known as Probabilistic Inventory Model. Anna University Chennai 76
  • 77. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT The inventory models called probabilistic inventory model because the demand NOTES or lead time or both are random variables. The probability distribution of demand and lead time should be estimated.. The inventory models answers for questions related to the decision raised above are called Probabilistic Inventory Model. 2.7.5.1 One such model is Fixed Order Quantity Model (FOQ). In this model, 1. The demand (D) is uncertain, you can estimate the demand through any one of the forecasting techniques and the probability of demand distribution is known. 2. Lead time (L) is uncertain, probability of lead time distribution is known. 3. Cost(C) all the costs are known. -Carrying costs Cc -Ordering costs Co Stock out Cost It is difficult to calculate stock out cost because it consists of components diffi- cult to quantify so indirect way of handling stock out cost is through service levels. Service levels means ability of organization to meet the requirements of the customer as on when he demands for the product. It is measured in terms of percentage. For example: if an organization maintains 90% service level, this means that 10% is “stock out” level. This way the stock out level is addressed. Safety stock It is the extra stock or buffer stock or minimum stock. This is kept to take care of fluctuations in demand and lead time. If you maintain more safety stock, this helps in reducing the chances of being “stock out”. But at the same time it increases the inventory carrying cost. Suppose the organization maintains less service level that results in more stock out cost but less inventory carrying cost. It requires a tradeoff between inventory carrying cost and stock out cost. This is explained through the following figure2.19 77 Anna University Chennai
  • 78. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 2.20 – Safety Stock NOTES Safety stock (S.S*) is to be stocked by the organization. Working of fixed order quantity model Fixed order quantity system is also known as continuous review system or perpetual inventory system or Q system. In this system, the ordering quantity is con- stant. Time interval between the orders is the variable. The system is said to be defined only when if the ordering quantity and time inter- val between the orders are specified. EOQ provides answer for ordering quantity. Reorder level provides answers for time between orders. The working and the fixed order quantity model is shown in the figure2.20 (next page). Anna University Chennai 78
  • 79. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 2.21 – Fixed Order Quantity Model NOTES 79 Anna University Chennai
  • 80. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Application of fixed order quantity system NOTES 1. It requires continuous monitoring of stock to know when the reorder point is reached. 2. This system could be recommended to” A” class because they are high consumption items. So we need to have fewer inventories. This system helps in keeping less inventory comparing to other inventory systems. Advantages 1. Since the ordering quantity is EOQ, comparatively it is meaningful. You need to have less safety stock. This model relatively insensitive to the forecast and the parameter changes. 2. Fast moving items get more attention because of more usage. Weakness 1. We can’t club the order for items which are to be procured from one supplier to reduce the ordering cost. 2. There is more chance for high ordering cost and high transaction cost for the items, which follow different reorder level. 3. You can not avail supplier discount. While the reorder level fall in different time periods. Illustrative Example 2.7 1. ABC company requires components at annual usage rate of 1200 units. The cost of placing an order is Rs 100 and has a five day lead time. Inventory holding cost is estimated as Rs 30 per unit per year. The plant operates 250 days per year. The daily demand is normally distributed with a standard deviation of 1.2 units. It has been decided at to use fixed quantity inventory system based on a 95% service level. Specify the following 1. Ordering quantity 2. Re order level Solution: Given data Demand 1200 units Ordering Cost Rs 100 Carrying cost Rs 30 per unit per year Lead Time 5 days Operating days 250 per year. Standard deviation of demand per day is 1.2 units. Anna University Chennai 80
  • 81. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT To determine the ordering quantity EOQ = v(2DCo/ Cc) NOTES = v2×1200×100/30 = 89.4 approx. = 90 units To determine the reorder level Reorder level = average demand during lead time +safety stock. Safety stock calculations: To find out the safety stock as it is mentioned already that you need to use the service level. As per this problem it is given 95% service level that means 5% stock out level. We need to have safety stock level against this 5% stock level. It is also given in the problem that consumption of items follows normal distribution. The mean lead time demand distribution is = (1200/250) ×5=24 units = XL The mean of the distribution is (1200/250) ×5 = 24 units Variance of the distribution, since per day standard deviation is given. First it is to be converted into variance by taking the square (1.2)*(1.2)= 1.44 units From the per day variance, the five days variance determined as follows because leadtime equal to 5 days. If V is the variance of one day then the five day variance is V+V+V+V+V=5*V Standard deviation = ?(5V) = ?5?v=?5ó For 5 days = ?(5 ó ó = standard deviation per day In common, to convert the per unit standard deviation into lead time standard deviation, Based on above calculation it could be deduced that óL=vL × ó Where is the standard deviation of demand during lead time. ? is the standard deviation of demand per unit time Since the demand during lead time follows the normal distribution. It is given that 95% service level and 5%stock out level. For 5% stock out level, the safety level is estimated as follows: From the distribution you can calculate the safety stock using the formula K× K is the safety factor for 5% stock out level; the K value is calculated using the standard distribution table. 81 Anna University Chennai
  • 82. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT To calculate K at 5% stock out level NOTES K=1.65 from the table Safety stock= K × = 1.65*2.68 = 4.42 To find the re order level = 24+4.42 = 28.42 units Figure 2.22 – Graphical Presentation of Example 2.7 Review Questions: 1. Define Inventory 2. What is pipe line inventory? 3. Give formulae for EOQ? 4. Give formulae for EBQ 5. When purchase cost become relevant? 6. In which situations one has to adopt probabilistic model? Anna University Chennai 82
  • 83. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 2.8 MATERIAL REQUIREMENT PLANNING NOTES 2.8.1 Introduction Material Requirements Planning (MRP) is a computer-based production planning and inventory control system. MRP is concerned with both production scheduling and inventory control. It is a material control system that attempts to keep adequate inventory levels to assure that required materials are available when needed. MRP is applicable in situations of multiple items with complex bills of materials. The major objectives of an MRP system are to simultaneously:- 1. ensure the availability of materials, components and products for planned production and for customer delivery, 2. Maintain the lowest possible level of inventory, 3. Plan manufacturing activities, delivery schedules and purchasing activities. MRP is especially suited to the manufacturing settings where the demand of many of the components and subassemblies depend on the demands of items that face external demands. Demand for end items is independent. In contrast, the demand for components used to manufacture end items depend the on the demands for the end items. This is known as Derived Demand. The distinctions between the independent and derived demands are important in classifying the inventory items and in developing systems to manage items within each demand classification. MRP systems were developed to cope better with derived demand items. 2.8.2 Overview of MRP system The following figure shows the general overview of an MRP system. Figure 2.23 – MRP system MRP Inputs MRP Processing MRP Outputs Changes Order releases Master Schedule Planned-order Schedules Primary Reports Exception Bill of Material Planning reports Materials Requirements Secondary Reports Performance- Planning Control Reports Inventory Records Inventory Transaction 83 Anna University Chennai
  • 84. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES 2.8.3 Inputs to MRP system There are three major inputs for an MRP system. They are 1. Master production schedule, 2. Bill of Material 3. Inventory status records Without these basic inputs the MRP system cannot function. 1. Master production schedule The demand for end items is scheduled over a number of time periods and recorded on a master production schedule (MPS). The master production schedule expresses how much of each item is wanted and when it is wanted. The MPS is devel- oped from forecasts and firm, the customer orders for end items, safety stock require- ments and internal orders. MRP takes the master schedule for end items and translates it into individual time-phased component requirements. Overview of the Master Production Schedule Figure 2.24 - Overview of Master Production Schedule Forecasted Demand Capacity Master Planning Production Schedule Customer Order (Delivery Time) Anna University Chennai 84
  • 85. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Master Production Schedule- Example NOTES Table 2.7 2. Bill of Materials A bill of materials (BOM) file gives the complete product descriptions and documents quantities of each component, part, ingredient, or raw material needed to make that product or sub-assembly. It is also called as the product structure tree. A sample product structure tree is shown below. For producing 1 unit of product A, 4 units of B and 2 units of C are re- quired. For producing 1 unit of product B, 2 units of D and 1 unit of E are required. For producing 1 unit of product C, 3 units of D and 2 units of F are required Product Structure Tree. Figure 2.25 - Product Structure Tree A B C (4) (2 D E D F (2) (1) (3 (2 85 Anna University Chennai
  • 86. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Explosion If 20 nos. of product A is required then we require 80 nos. of B, 40 nos. of C, 280 nos. of D, 80 nos. of E and 80 nos. of F. This process of finding out the require- ment of sub components based on the requirement of final product is known as Explo- sion. 3. Inventory status records The following inventory status records goes as input to the MRP system 1. Item 2. Supplier 3. Lot size 4. Safety stock 5. Lead time 6. On hand inventory 7. Allotted 8. Level i) Item: Name or number for the item being scheduled. ii) Supplier: Name or number for the of the supplier for the scheduled item. iii) Lot size: Several lot sizing techniques are available. Few of them are listed below. a) Lot-For-Lot (LFL) ordering. The lot-for-lot (LFL) is the simplest approach and it calls for producing in period t the net requirements for period t. The LFL approach minimizes the holding cost by pro- ducing just-in-time. b) Economic Ordering Quantity (EOQ): EOQ is a fixed quantity which is ordered whenever the inventory level reaches prede- termined level. 2 ×D × Cs Q= Cc (1- d/p) Where, Q – Economic ordering quantity D – Annual demand Co – Ordering Cost (Rs. /Order) Anna University Chennai 86
  • 87. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Cc – Holding cost (Rs./Unit/Unit time) NOTES Economic Production Quantity (EPQ) EOQ is a fixed quantity which is produced whenever the inventory level reaches a predetermined level. 2 ×D × Cs Q= Cc (1- d/p) Where, Q – Economic Production quantity D – Annual demand Cs – Setup Cost (Rs. /Setup) Cc – Holding cost (Rs./Unit/Unit time) d – Demand rate p – Production rate There are also other algorithms available for lot sizing like Wagner-Whitin (WW) algorithm, Silver-Meal (SM) heuristic, part period balancing (PPB) heuristic etc. The lot sizing technique which incurs the lowest cost is chosen. 1. Safety Stock: It is the additional stock carried in order to protect against any uncertainty in demand. 2. Lead time: It is the time gap between placing an order and receiving the order. 3. On hand inventory: It is the actual quantity on hand during scheduling period. 4. Allotted: It the quantity of inventory allocated to other orders from the on hand inventory. 5. Level: It indicates the level occupied by the particular product/component in the product structure file. Figure 2.26 – Levels in the product structure file 87 Anna University Chennai
  • 88. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES If a component comes in more than one level then it should be assigned the lowest level code. For example, in the above figure R comes in both level 2 and level 3. But it should be assigned level code 3 as it is the lowest level. MRP Process The process of scheduling the Production of all items is done using an MRP Matrix. The MRP matrix is as shown below. MRP Matrix Table 2.8 – MRP matrix Item: Low-Level Code: PD 1 2 3 4 5 Lot Size: Lead Time: Gross Requirements Scheduled Receipts Projected on Hand Net Requirements Planned Order Receipts Planned Order Releases Gross Requirements is the anticipated usage of demand for each period. Scheduled Receipts is the existing replenishment orders at the beginning of period. Projected on Hand is the projected inventory status at the end of period after taking into account the inventory to be provided for safety stock and already allotted for other orders. Net Requirements is the actual number of items to be provided and when it is to be provided. This is calculated taking into account scheduled receipts and projected on hand inventory. Planned Order Receipts shows when actually net requirements are expected to be received. Planned Order Releases shows when the order has to be released if the order has to be received as per planned order receipt. Anna University Chennai 88
  • 89. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Process Flow NOTES Calculate the exact requirements for each item managed by the MRP system by the explosion process explained previously, and proceed as follows: 1. Retrieve level 0 item requirements (gross requirements) from the master schedule. 2. Use projected on-hand balances and schedule receipts to calculate net requirements. This process is called Netting. 3. Calculate when orders should be received to meet net requirements, developing planned-order receipts schedule. 4. Planned-order release schedule is calculated by offsetting the planned-order receipts by the items’ lead times. 5. Repeat steps 1-4 for level 1 items. 6. Repeat steps 1-4 for all items in each subsequent level of the bill of materials. MRP Output The primary outputs of MRP are the following: 1. Recommendations of planned order releases. 2. Rescheduling notices changing open-order due dates. 3. Notices to cancel or suspend open orders. 4. Item-status-analysis backup data. 5. Future planned order schedules. A variety of secondary or byproduct outputs can be generated by MRP at the user’s option. It is not practical to list and describe all possible outputs and formats generated by MRP found in industry; MRP lends itself to tailoring, individualization, and infinite modification of outputs. MRP files (database), particularly inventory status records, contain a wealth of data, providing almost unlimited opportunities for the supplying of these data to a whole spectrum of possible outputs. Here are some of the common secondary outputs: 1. Exception notices, reporting errors, incongruities, and out-of-limits situations. 2. Inventory-level projections (inventory forecasts). 3. Purchase commitment reports. 4. Tracers to demand sources (pegged requirements reports). 5. Performance reports for people and functional groups. Six categories of outputs by functional use are: 1. Inventory order action. 2. Replanning order priority. 89 Anna University Chennai
  • 90. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES 3. Safeguarding priority integrity. 4. Capacity requirements planning. 5. Performance control. 6. Reporting errors, incongruities, and out-of-limits situations. Inventory order action outputs occur when planned orders appear in current time-buckets. Other types of order action are increases, reductions, or cancellations of order quantities. Re-planning order priority outputs alert inventory planners to cases of diver- gence between open-order due dates and dates of actual need, resulting from changed timing of net requirements. Outputs to help Safeguard priority integrity aims at keeping order priorities honest, revealing inventory status problems caused by overstated MPS. Some compa- nies use these reports to provide guidance for planners when accepting customer or- ders for guaranteed delivery. A “trialfit” of the order as an MPS item enables a net change MRP program to determine potential component shortages. If the order does not fit (too many shortages), the planner can recommend an alternative delivery date. Capacity requirements planning outputs of MRP are open and planned shop orders in individual time periods, which are input into the load projection program. To keep load projections up-to-date and valid, they must be recomputed as MRP order schedules change. Performance control outputs are comparisons of MRP plans with actual performance, enabling management to monitor the performance of inventory planners, buyers, the shop, suppliers, and cost accounting. Outputs reporting errors, incongruities, and out-of-limits situations are called exception or action reports. Some examples: 1. Date of gross requirement is beyond the planning horizon. 2. Number of digits of quantity in gross requirement exceeds size of the field. 3. Planned order is offset into a past period but placed in current period. 4. Number of digits of quantity of open order exceeds size of the field. 5. Number of digits of quantity of net requirements exceeds size of the field. 6. Number of digits of quantity of receipt overflows size of quantity-on hand field. 7. Due date of open order is outside of planning horizon. 8. Allocated on-hand quantity exceeds current quantity on hand (potential shortage). 9. Past-due gross requirement has been included in the current period. Anna University Chennai 90
  • 91. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT In addition to such exception reports, individual exception messages can be NOTES generated at the time inventory transaction are entered, listing reasons for transaction rejections. Some typical messages are 1. Part number is nonexistent. 2. Transaction code is nonexistent. 3. Part number is incorrect (using self checking digits). 4. Actual receipt exceeds quantity of scheduled receipt by x percent (test of reasonableness). 5. Quantity of reported scrap exceeds quantity on hand. 6. Quantity of disbursement exceeds quantity on hand. 7. Order being released exceeds planned quantity. Sample MRP Problem: Orders have been received for 20 units of product A and 50 units of product R with the product structures shown below for period 8. The on hand stock levels are A=1, R=4, B=74, C=19, D=190 and E=160. What is the low level code for each item? If the components are ordered as required (no fixed lot sizes), what should be the size of each order? When should the orders be released for each item? Figure 2.27 A LT=3 R LT=4 B (2) C (3) E (4) B (4) LT=2 LT=3 LT=1 LT=2 D (2) E (3) D (2) E (3) LT=1 LT=1 LT=1 LT=1 Solution Table2.8 Item Low Level Code A 0 R 0 B 1 C 1 D 2 E 2 91 Anna University Chennai
  • 92. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Figure 2.28 A R Level 0 LT=3 LT=4 B (4) Level 1 B (2) C (3) E (4) LT=2 LT=2 LT=3 LT=1 D (2) E (3) Level 2 D (2) E (3) LT=1 LT=1 LT=1 LT=1 Table 2.9 Item Lot Lead Safety Allotted Level Period Sizing time Stock PD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Gross Requirements 20 Scheduled Receipts A Lot 3 — — 0 Projected for Lot on Hand 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Net Require- ments 19 Planned Order Receipt 19 Planned Order Release 91 Table 2.10 Item Lot Lead Safety Allotted Level Period Sizing time Stock PD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Gross Requirements 50 Scheduled Receipts R Lot 4 — — 0 Projected for Lot on Hand 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Net Require- ments 46 Planned Order Receipt 46 Planned Order Release 46 Anna University Chennai 92
  • 93. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Table 2.11 NOTES Item Lot Lead Safety Allotted Level Period Sizing time Stock PD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Gross Requirements 184 38 Scheduled Receipts B Lot 2 — — 1 Projected for Lot on Hand 74 74 74 74 74 0 Net Require- ments 110 38 Planned Order Receipt 110 38 Planned Order Release 110 38 Table 2.12 Item Lot Lead Safety Allotted Level Period Sizing time Stock PD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Gross Requirements 57 Scheduled Receipts C Lot 3 — — 1 Projected for Lot on Hand 19 19 19 19 19 19 Net Require- ments 38 Planned Order Receipt 38 Planned Order Release 38 Table 2.13 Item Lot Lead Safety Allotted Level Period Sizing time Stock PD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Gross Requirements 220 76 Scheduled Receipts D Lot 1 — — 2 Projected for Lot on Hand 190 190 190 0 Net Require- ments 30 76 Planned Order Receipt 30 76 Planned Order Release 30 76 93 Anna University Chennai
  • 94. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Table 2.14 Item Lot Lead Safety Allotted Level Period Sizing time Stock PD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Gross Requirements 330 114 76 Scheduled Receipts E Lot 1 — — 2 Projected for Lot on Hand 160 160 160 0 0 0 Net Require- ments 170 114 76 Planned Order Receipt 170 114 76 Planned Order Release 170 114 76 Review Questions: 1. List input of MRP system. 2. List two MRP outputs. 2.9 MANUFACTURING RESOURCE PLANNING (MRP II) 2.9.1 Introduction Till the early sixties, reorder point (ROP) systems was used by many manufacturing organizations. In this system the component stocks were reordered whenever stock fell to a pre-defined reorder level. Components were often ordered when not actually needed, and because of which ROP systems resulted in very high inventory levels. In the sixties, customers became demanding, competition became tougher and the interest rates began to increase. This made organizations to realize the necessity to develop a much better response to the customer needs. At the same time the increase in interest rates made money tied up in inventory into a serious financial burden for manufacturing organizations. In this period, computers were brought into planning and production systems. As a result, several new manufacturing systems were developed. They were. • Material requirements planning systems. • Heavily reliant on computers and most frequently applied to batch or mass production. Comprising of: • Material requirements planning (MRP or MRP I). • Closed loop material requirements planning (Closed Loop MRP). • Manufacturing resource planning (MRP II). Anna University Chennai 94
  • 95. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT • Just-in-time (JIT). NOTES • Optimized Production Technology / Theory of Constraints (OPT/TOC) • Project control • Evolution of Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP II) Figure 2.29- Evolution of Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP II) Materials Closed loop Manufacturing Requirement MRP Resource Planning Planning 2.9.3 Closed Loop MRP System In an open loop MRP system the plans are sent to buyers and production personnel but it is not possible to get feedback. As a result of which the adjustments could not be made to plans in order to keep schedules valid. For example, it assumed that infinite capacity was available, and that suppliers always delivered correctly and on time. And when there is a change in sales demand it will take excessive amount of re- planning. Also, much of the demands from other sources are left out of the system and shortages become inevitable. Material requirements planning generates valid schedule that follow logically from the demand. But after planned orders are launched, some of the planning factors may begin to stray off course. Some of the examples that cause problem because of using MRP systems are shown below: Lead time estimates differ if: machine breaks down, deliveries are delayed, goods are damaged, power fails etc. If the system plans for 1000 of a component but 200 fail a quality inspection, this shows that the orders are arrived on time but there will be a shortage of material. The demand that drives material requirements planning consists of both forecast orders and actual customer orders. The forecasts may turn out to be wrong and customers may change their actual orders, for example, by asking for earlier or later delivery. This throws out all component orders. In summary, ‘open loop’ material requirements planning could result in some or all of these problems: • Uncontrollable costs. • Late deliveries to customers. • Late deliveries from suppliers. • Unplanned overtime/offloading. 95 Anna University Chennai
  • 96. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT • High work-in-progress levels. NOTES • Mismatched inventories. • Over- or under-utilized resources. • Disruptions on the shop floor. • Many full-time expeditors. • Customer complaints. • High ‘past dues’. • Long queues. This is clearly not a list that any manufacturing organization could regard as acceptable.Something had to change, and so open loop MRP evolved into closed loop MRP. Closed loop MRP Material requirements planning is useful but due to the problems that are faced by the organization after implementation of MRP and lack of awareness of other re- lated production and business functions, the organization started to shift towards closed loop MRP system. The diagram below shows the much wider data horizon that is now opened up for organizations which have started using better information technology to upgrade their MRP system. Closed loop MRP Figure 2.30 – Closed loop MRP Anna University Chennai 96
  • 97. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Closed loop MRP has made feedback possible by including new functions NOTES such as file control, a master production schedule, rescheduling actions and shop floor control. It thus ‘closed the loop’, overcoming the fundamental weakness of ‘open loop’ material requirements planning. The closed loop diagram shows several additions to the open loop diagram: The long-term production plan. This feeds information into the master production schedule about the organization’s long-term manufacturing expectations. The master production schedule passes information to a separate rough cut capacity planning module, which estimates the amount of work achievable in a given time period. Orders generated by MRP are split into purchase orders and work orders. Manufacturing orders are passed to the capacity requirements planning module to see if there is sufficient labor and machine time available to carry them out in the time proposed by the master production schedule. This is a more detailed evaluation than rough cut capacity planning; it looks at individual work centers and their proposed workloads. The shop-floor execution phase is also shown; this is used to control the on-time completion of work orders. 2.9.4 Manufacturing Resources Planning (MRP II) Manufacturing resources planning (MRP II) is an extended form of closed loop MRP that also incorporates strategic planning processes, business planning, and a number of other business functions such as human resources planning, profit calculation and cash flow analysis. MRP II uses the master production schedule as the basis for scheduling capacity, shipments, tool changes, some design work, and cash flow. Hence it requires several additions to the reference files. One is a bill of resources, which details key resources needed to produce one unit of product. These resources may include labour, machinery, tools, space and materials. The MRP II system can use the bill of resources to project shortages at specific times, giving departments advance notice of required remedial action: for example, of the need to hire or train labour. MRP II can also project needs for support resources; for example, design engineering support if a customer order entails prior design work. This additional resource is added to the bill of resources. Given still more reference data, MRP II can keep track of tool wear and recommend when to replace or reshape tooling. It can also keep track of machine loads and project machine capacity shortages, which may signal a need for more machines or a subcontractor. 97 Anna University Chennai
  • 98. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES For financial planning, MRP II treats cash flow almost like materials. The MPS is first exploded into component parts requirements; the system then calculates the cost and payment dates of all planned order releases, effectively creating a cash flow forecast. This includes not just payments to suppliers, but also wages, power and other consumables associated with production. Cash outflows may be projected for a year or more by expense category, work centre or department, making budgeting much simpler than it would be without an MRP II system. Figure 2.31 - Framework of MRP II 2.9.3 Master Production Schedule The MPS is a statement of the planned production of finished products that will meet the demand on time, within the organization’s capacity. The master production Anna University Chennai 98
  • 99. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT schedule expresses. What we intend to make, how much we intend to make and when we intend to make. NOTES The demand for end items is scheduled over a number of time periods and recorded on a master production schedule (MPS).The MPS is developed from forecasts and firm customer orders for end items, safety stock requirements and internal orders. MRP takes the master schedule for end items and translates it into individual time-phased component requirements. Overview of Master Production Schedule: Figure 2.32 - Overview of Master Production Schedule Forecasted Demand Capacity Master Planning Production Schedule Customer Order (Delivery Time) Capacity Planning: Capacity planning essentially involves the following categories. Resource Requirements Planning: Resource requirements planning refers to the planning of the overall capacities of the firm. This planning is done to validate the aggregate production plans of the firm. Rough Cut Capacity Planning (RCCP): Rough cut capacity planning (RCCP) involves planning capacities at key / bottleneck work centers and broadly balancing workloads. It thus validates the MPS. Material requirements planning (MRP) uses a master production schedule (MPS) of end items to determine the quantity and timing of component part production. MRP is capacity insensitive; it implicitly assumes that sufficient capacity is available to produce components at the time they’re needed. A problem commonly encountered in operating MRP systems is the existence of an overstated MPS. An overstated master production schedule is one that orders 99 Anna University Chennai
  • 100. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES more production to be released than production can complete. An overstated MPS causes raw materials and WIP inventories to increase because more materials are purchased and released to the shop than are completed and shipped. It also causes a buildup of queues on the shop floor. Since jobs have to wait to be processed, actual lead times increase, causing ship dates to be missed. As lead times increase, forecast accuracy over the lead-time gets affected because forecasts are more accurate for shorter periods than for longer ones. Thus, overstated master production schedules lead to missed due dates and other problems. Validating the MPS with respect to capacity is an extremely important step in MRP. This validation exercise has been termed rough cut capacity planning (RCCP). For example: consider the man hour requirement for three components over a three week period as follows: Table 2.15 Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Component A 70 70 70 Component B 100 100 120 Component C 80 75 80 Let us now check the total man hours required to produce this master produc- tion schedule. From the above illustrated resource requirements, a rough cut analysis can be done as follows: Table 2.16 Week 1 Week 2 Week3 Required standard hours 250 245 270 Available standard hours 250 250 250 Negative deviation -20 Positive deviation +5 RCCP DECISIONS In this section, we discuss how to determine the amount of capacity that is available, how to compare the capacity available to the capacity required and the options that exist for adjusting the capacity available and/or the capacity required. Anna University Chennai 100
  • 101. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Determining the Capacity Available NOTES The plastic molding department of Al’s Lamps, presented in the previous sec- tion, has three plastic molding machines. Since Al’s works one eight-hour shift each day and there are 21 working days in an average month, it might seem that the capacity available to the plastic molding department is 504 hours per month (3 machines times 8 hours/day/machine times 21 days/month). However, two additional factors must be considered. First, the plastic molding machines may not be available all the time. The machines may break down, the worker may be absent, and the mold needed or the material needed may not immediately be available. Second, there must be an adjustment between the time standard average and the actual average production rate of the department. The first adjustment factor is known as utilization. Utilization is a number between 0 and 1 that is equal to 1 minus the proportion of time typically lost due to machine, worker, tool, or material unavailability. The second adjustment factor is known as efficiency. Efficiency is formally defined to be the average of standard hours of production per clock hour actually worked. If a time standard is exactly right, efficiency is 1. If the time actually required to perform the work is less than the standard, efficiency is more than 1. If the time actually required to perform the work is more than the standard, efficiency is less than 1. As mentioned previously, time standards tend to be slightly pessimistic due to continual improvement in production methods. Capacity available is found by multiplying time available times utilization and times time efficiency: Capacity Available = Time Available x Utilization x Efficiency Assume that for the plastic molding department of Al’s Lamps, utilization is 0.756 and efficiency is 1.05. The time available in a month having 168 working hours (21 eight- hour days) is 504 (3 machines times 168 hours/month/ machine). Thus, Capacity Available = 504 x 0.756 x 1.05 = 400 hours (rounded to the nearest hour). When capacity is inadequate, four basic options are available to increase capacity: overtime, subcontracting, alternate routing, or adding personnel. If no combination of the four options can provide sufficient capacity, the MPS will have to be reduced. Options to adjust capacity required or available are discussed next. • Increase Capacity – Additional shifts – Overtime – Additional resources 101 Anna University Chennai
  • 102. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES • Reduce Load – Subcontract – Reduce lot sizes if possible • Redistribute Load – Use alternate work centers or routings if possible – Shift production to earlier periods that have additional capacity – Temporarily use safety stocks and shift load to later period • If all else fails, revise MPS 2.9.4 Capacity Requirements Planning Capacity requirements planning (CRP) is a computer-based extension of the MRP process that uses the results of MRP along with detailed production information and labor information to calculate planned workloads. It is a detailed capacity analysis that helps in validating the MRP schedule. CRP arises mainly due to batching of production work orders in the course of MRP. It is thus a computerized system that projects load from material requirements plan. CRP Inputs & Outputs Figure 2.33 MRP planned order releases Capacity Open Routing requirements orders file planning file Load profile for each machine center Anna University Chennai 102
  • 103. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Key Inputs NOTES • Schedule of open orders and planned order releases (from MRP). A typical example would be as follows: Table 2.17 Release date Due date Planned orders Number of batches of 20 week 5 week 7 40 2 week 8 week 10 80 4 • BOM with routing data: A typical example would be as follows: Table 2.18 • Work center data A typical example would be as follows: Table 2.19 Work centre 201 Queue time 2.5 hours Available capacity 440.0 hours • Work order status Key Outputs • Work center load report. • Possible revised schedule of planned order releases. 103 Anna University Chennai
  • 104. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES 2.9.5 Forward Scheduling And Backward Scheduling Forward scheduling: In forward scheduling, we identify the earliest start date for the operation in question through consideration of the planned order release date generated by MRP. We then use the lead time to calculate the completion date. If the completion time is prior to the due date then we have slack time available. If completion date is after due date, we have a delay. Backward scheduling: In backward scheduling, we identify the due date for the operation in question and use the operation lead time to calculate the latest operation start date. If the latest start time is after the earliest start date then we have slack time available. If the operations start time is prior to the earliest start date then we have negative slack. An Illustration of Capacity Requirements Planning: Consider a component-A which has a planned order as follows: Table 2.20 Release date Due date Planned orders Number of batches of 20 week 5 week 7 60 3 This component has to undergo three process namely assembly, painting and inspection. the data for these work centers is as follows: Table 2.21 Work center Assembly Queue time 10.0 hours Available capacity 60.0 hours Set up time 0.40 hours Processing time 0.30 hours Transport time 1.30 hours Table2.22 Work center Painting Queue time 18.0 hours Available capacity 60.0 hours Set up time 0.60 hours Processing time 0.45 hours Transport time 1.30 hours Anna University Chennai 104
  • 105. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Table 2.23 NOTES Work center Inspection Queue time 42.0 hours Available capacity 60.0 hours Set up time 0.04 hours Processing time 0.30 hours Transport time 1.30 hours Calculation of department loads: Assembly department: Load from component-A (Batch size X processing time) + Set-up 60 X 0.30 + 0.4 = 18.4 Hours Painting department: Load from component-A (Batch size X processing time) + Set-up 60 X 0.45 + 0.6 = 27.6 Hours Inspection department: Load from component-A (Batch size X processing time) + Set-up 60 X 0.30 + 0.04 = 18.04 Hours Calculations of operation lead time: Operation lead time is calculated as Operation lead time = Load from component + Queue time + Transport time For assembly, Operation lead time = 18.4 + 10 + 1.3 =29.7 For Painting, Operation lead time = 27.6 + 18 + 1.3 =46.9 For Inspection, Operation lead time = 18.04 + 42+ 1.3 =61.34 105 Anna University Chennai
  • 106. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Now we use backward scheduling .The inspection has a lead time of 61.34 hours and NOTES hence is loaded for the due date, which is week 7.Therefore the previous operation (painting) is scheduled for the previous week (week 6).Painting only has a lead time of 46.9 hours, which means the assembly operation can be scheduled for completion in week 6. These load projections can be represented as follows: Figure 2.34 Load projection for assembly work center 18.4 week1 week2 week3 week4 week5 week6 week7 Figure 2.35 - load projection for painting work center 27.6 week1 week2 week3 week4 week5 week6 week7 Anna University Chennai 106
  • 107. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure2.36 NOTES Load projection for inspection work center 18.04 week1 week2 week3 week4 week5 week6 week7 Shop floor control The system is provided with information on how many units were sent onwards and the date as each work centre completes a job. This information enables the MRP system to provide each work centre with daily notices of priority changes. After rescheduling, new due dates and quantities go out to the factory and supplier companies, who must act on them so that the previous schedule, with the jobs in progress, is updated. The shop floor control thus provides information on the reschedules with the help of which the existing schedules can be updated. Production Activity Control (PAC) PAC, Production Activity Control, is concerned with converting plans into action, reporting the results achieved and revising plans and actions as required achieving desired results. Thus, PAC converts plans into action by providing the required direction. This requires the appropriate prior master planning of orders, work force personnel, materials, and capacity requirements. They are useful in the management of lead-time, queue length, work center idle time, and scheduled order completion. The three primary functions of PAC Order release Dispatching Progress reporting 107 Anna University Chennai
  • 108. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Order Release Order release initiates the execution phase of production; it authorizes production and/or purchasing. The planned order becomes a released (open) order. Placement of a purchase order or the initiation of manufacturing follows shortly. Order release planning may take place until the moment of order release. Authorization of order release is based on the planned orders in the MRP output, the current priority, the availability of materials and tooling, and the loads specified by I/O planning. Release of an order triggers the release of the following: 1. Requisitions for material and components required by the order. If some of these items are not required immediately and have not been allocated previously, they are allocated now. 2. Production order documentation to the plant. This documentation may include a set of both engineering drawings and manufacturing specifications and a manufacturing routing sheet. 3. Requisitions for tools required in the first week or so of production. Tooling, including tapes for numerically controlled machines, required in later operations is reserved for the appropriate period. Tooling can be included in the master production schedule and the bill of material. Its availability is thus coordinated with material and equipment availability. The time required to deliver production order documentation, tooling and materials to the first operation is included in the normal planned lead time for the order. An order is released by adding it to the dispatch list. Dispatching Dispatching informs first-line supervision of the released orders and their priority, that is, the sequence in which orders should be run. This information can be transmitted via a hard copy (handwritten, typed, or computer printout) or via video output on a cathode ray tube (CRT). In a job shop a dispatch list should be prepared for each work center with the frequency of updating depending on the typical order-processing time. If orders take a day or less to process, dispatch lists usually are prepared daily. If orders take a few days, lists may be prepared weekly with midweek revisions handled on an exception basis with on-line processing. In a flow line process environment, a single list indicating the rate of flow (or in a batch flow line, the sequence in which orders are to be started) will control work on the entire line, which may be viewed as a single work center. An example of simple dispatch list information identifies the date, the plant, and the work center; it includes the work center capacity; and it lists the orders, their quantity, their capacity requirements, and their priority. Orders usually are listed in descending priority for a specified period. Anna University Chennai 108
  • 109. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT The list also may include jobs at upstream work centers to provide the supervisor NOTES with information concerning orders that will arrive shortly and an indication of their priority upon arrival. A computerized system may produce relative rankings on the basis of criteria such as critical ratio and earliest due date, as described earlier, but review by a planner is required to determine if other considerations are overriding. The planner determines the final dispatch list ranking of orders on the basis of the multiple criteria including a formal priority index such as, the critical ratio or the due date, input control at downstream work centers, the availability of tooling, the status of other parts required in the same assembly, energy consumption patterns, and sequencing and assignment criteria. Production Reporting Reports describing the actual production status are necessary for control. Dynamic response to the changing conditions is possible only if timely, accurate, and adequate information is available. The information must enable management to take meaningful corrective action concerning production schedules. The production environment influences the design of the production reporting system. Reporting in a line flow environment with long production runs, may take place on an exception basis with feedback occurring only when the output rate falls below an acceptable level. All reporting systems should have an exception reporting capability to inform management whenever machine failure, material shortages, or similar events threaten planned output. 2.9.6 Benefits of MRP II In the narrow sense, the main benefit of MRP II is its ability to generate valid schedules and keep them valid. But valid schedules have broader benefits for the whole organization. These include, more or less in order of importance: 1. Improved on-time completion A typical manufacturing organization using MRP II should be able to achieve on-time completion rates of 95 per cent or more, because completion of a parent item is less likely to be delayed for lack of a component. On-time completion helps improve customer service. 2. Reduced inventories Inventory falls - typically by 20-35 per cent - because parts are not ordered until needed. 109 Anna University Chennai
  • 110. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES 3. Capacity requirements planning data Work centre capacity requirements can be planned for many periods into the future. 4. Improved direct labour productivity Fewer shortages mean significantly less lost time and overtime, and less disruption to accommodate shortage-list jobs. 5. Improved productivity of support staff MRP II cuts expediting (or ‘firefighting’) and allows more time for planning. For example, purchasing can start looking for alternative or better suppliers; materials management can plan inventory needs better. 6. Total business planning The ability to use one common set of data to help plan and control the whole business. 2.9.7 Drawbacks of MRPII Though Manufacturing Resource Planning has a number of benefits, it has a few limitations too. They are:- · MRP II system is complex. · MRP II implementation programmer, takes a lot of time, effort and commitment at all levels of the organization to set up a successful MRP II system. The benefits, however, should very quickly make the exertion worthwhile. Review Questions: 1. MRPII stand for? 2. List the various phases of evaluation of MRPII 3. Discuss the input requirement of the capacity requirement planning. 4. What is dispatching? 5. List any two benefits of MRP 2.10 ENTERPRISES RESOURCE PLANNING It is a system which integrates all the procesess and data of an organization. It uses the hardware and software to integrate the activities of manufacturing, supply chain, Financials, Customer Relationship Management (CRM), Human Resources and Warehouse Management. Anna University Chennai 110
  • 111. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 2.10.1 Need for ERP NOTES In the past, then available software applications that don’t talk to each other and do not effectively interfaces, so the organizations were in the pursuit of identifying a new software to eliminate the above limitation that result in the invention of ERP system. ERP acts as a single database that includes all data for the software modules, which would include manufacturing, supply chin management, finance, projects, customer relationship management, data warehouse. This is shown in figure 2.36. Manufacturing: Engineering, Bills of Material, Scheduling, Capacity, Workflow Management, Quality Control, Cost Management, Manufacturing Process, Manufacturing Projects, Manufacturing Flow. Supply Chain Management: Inventory, Order Entry, Purchasing, Product Configurator, Supply Chain Planning, Supplier Scheduling, Inspection of goods, Claim Processing, Commission Calculation etc. Finance: General Ledger, Cash Management, Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable, Fixed Assets. Projects: Costing, Billing, Time and Expense, Activity Management Human Resources: Human Resources, Payroll, Training, Time & Attendance, Benefits Customer Relationship Management: Sales and Marketing, Commissions, Service, Customer Contact and Call Center Support etc. Data Warehouse: Various Self-Service interfaces for Customers, Suppliers, and Employees. The framework of ERP is shown in the figure 2.36 111 Anna University Chennai
  • 112. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Figure 2.36 - ERP System Anna University Chennai 112
  • 113. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 2.10.2 Evolution of ERP: NOTES MRP – Material Requirement planning focused mostly in the plant production level, started, emphasizing the controlling of inventory for the dependent items. It acts as a production scheduling system also. Because of change in business scenario like more competition, more Global suppliers, warehousing, Global product demand, at different count, changing environment business currency complexities etc. Focus has been shifted from beyond the production level, to include all the activities that results in the development of manufacturing resource planning, MRP II includes the sub modules manufacturing, logistics, distribution, inventory, shipping, involving and accounting for a company. Then further, improvement in the MRP II leads to the birth of ERP. 2.10.3 Advantages of ERP system 1. ERP effectively interfaces all the activities of the organization. 2. Computer security is included within an ERP to protect against both outsider crime, such as industrial espionage and insider crime, such as embezzlement. 2.10.4 Disadvantages of ERP system 1. High investment required in buying and implementing the ERP system. 2. Problem due to a lack of corporate policy protecting the integrity of the data in the ERP system and how it is used. 2.10.5 Limitations of ERP include 1. There are compatibility problem with the various legacy system of the implementing organizations. 2. Hesitance in sharing sensitive internal information between departments can reduce the effectiveness of the software. 3. The blurring of company boundaries can cause problems in accountability, lines of responsibility, and employee morale. 4. ERP system can be difficult to use 5. ERP system is considered to be too rigid and too difficult to adapt to the specific work flow and business process of some companies. 6. Annual license renewal change is constant irrespective of the size of the company using the ERP. 7. Re-engineering of business processes to fit the “Industry Standard” prescribed by the ERP system may lead to lots of competitive advantages. 8. Customization of ERP software is limited. 9. The success of an ERP system depends on the skill and experience of the workforce. 10. Lack of training to the workforce result in failure of the ERP system. 113 Anna University Chennai
  • 114. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Review Questions: NOTES 1. What does ERP stands for? 2. List the Major phases in evaluation of ERP. 2.11 E-BUSINESS AND E-COMMERCE Like any emerging field, e-business is changing fast and so is the thinking behind it. A firm’s e-commerce strategy should aim to help organizations establish stronger ties with customers and business partners. These strategies should also focus on helping organizations acquire and retain customers efficiently. An electronic market not only offers a cheaper, more cost effective way to transact business but also brings about a more efficient market clearing mechanism, because it is not constrained by geographical distance or time. The beginning of the second millennium will almost certainly be remembered as a time of unprecedented change in the business world. In the space of a few years entire industries have been radically transformed. New technologies such as Internet, digital televisions, intelligent home appliances have all reached critical mass at the same time and are poised to revolutionize business. To begin it’s useful to describe what is meant by electronic business and electronic commerce. It is defined as ‘the conduct of business on the Internet, not only buying and selling but also servicing customers and making strategic alliances with business partners.’ At this stage of development of e-commerce, everything that constitute a market products, industrial structure, trade is in the process of being redefined. This raises the issues of developing new strategies to answer questions like, how will the new networks affect industries and the economy at large, how should firms compete in the new market places that are developing, how can firm integrate the network into existing business operations and how they should manage the new organizations. This makes business strategy specialists to understand the networks and their business implications. One of the advantages of using an electronic channel is the efficiency gain. E-business can generate tremendous efficiencies through reduced transaction costs, faster through out and better information to all members of the chain. Traditional strategy development process is difficult to be followed in the case of e-businesses, as it has to contend with additional issues of virtual transactions, unstable market, highly interconnected firm and high uncertainty in the markets. The most striking features of competitive strategies in e-business is that often new entrants have been able with limited resources to undermine existing competitions in the industry through the use of new business models. Strategy is driven by what is valued by the customer without being constrained by existing industry rules. E-business strategy makers build on the powerful commonalities in the features that customers value. This ensures these companies to capture the core of the market, even if it means that they lose some of the customers. Apart from the instability of the market, one of the greatest challenges for e- business strategies is the sheer speed of change. Two processes are critical in time pacing. The first one is managing transitions or the shifts from one activity to the next. The second is managing rhythm, or the pace at which organizations change. Another Anna University Chennai 114
  • 115. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT area where e-strategists should concentrate is the ability to connect individuals, groups and organizations worldwide. Complementary product providers and allies play a NOTES significant role in determining success in the industry. Uncertainty is another characteristic which the e-business strategies maker has to cop up with. A firm’s posture in state of uncertainty defines the intent of a strategy relative to the current and future state of an industry. Strategies are aimed at creating new opportunities in a market, either by shaking up relatively stable industries or by trying to control the direction of the market in industries with higher level of uncertainty. Many e-commerce firms adopt the strategic posture of reserving the right to play, which involves making incremental investments now that will put a company in a position of advantage in the future. This allows the company to wait until the environment becomes less uncertain before formulating a strategy. As e-business technologies, coupled with continued advances in voice recognition and artificial intelligence, become more commonplace, even more radical changes in the use of information are expected. Just as there has been a paradigm shift in e-business strategy, this requires a shift from information management to knowledge management. This will require systems that move beyond simply capturing past experiences to using that information creatively. Another strategy that can be adopted to cop with the speed of change and uncertainty of e-business is to establish a separate e-business unit. Speed and flexibility are required to compete successfully in e-business, something that is difficult to achieve in large organizations. The strategies of dot.com business are best seen as a tradeoff between operational decisions and financial decisions. We are on the verge of a revolution that is just as profound as the change in the economy that came with the industrial revolution named ‘E-revolution’. So the e- strategies should be formulated such that it allows people to rise above the barriers of time and distance and take advantage of global markets and business opportunities. SUMMARY • This unit helped the reader to know the importance of one of the inputs of production system, namely, the material resource. • The functions of materials management is dealt. • Types of computer controlled material handling devices and their applications are discussed. • The operation of Just in Time (JIT) system and the prerequisites to implement JIT in an organization are discussed. • The deterministic inventory models and probabilistic inventory model and when do you adopt which model is elaborated. • The working of MRP – I and MRP – II is illustrated with examples. • Introduction of ERP, e-business and e-operation strategies are outlined. Review Question: What is e-business and e-commerce? 115 Anna University Chennai
  • 116. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES UNIT III PLANNING AND FORECASTING 3.1 Introduction 3.1.1 Learning Objectives 3.2 Forecasting 3.2.1 Importance of forecasting 3.2.2 Forecasting model: 3.2.3 Forecasting methods: 3.2.3.1 Quantitative methods: 3.2.3.1.1 Time Series Analysis 3.2.3.1.2 Econometric models 3.2.3.1.3 Economic Indicators 3.2.3.2 Qualitative Methods 3.2.3.2.1 Market Survey 3.2.3.2.2 Expert Opinion 3.2.3.2.3 Delphi Technique 3.2.4 Forecasting evaluation 3.3 Capacity Planning 3.4 Aggregate Production Planning 3.4.1 Introduction 3.4.2 Objectives of Aggregate Planning 3.4.3 Strategies to Meet Demand Fluctuations 3.4.4 Aggregate Planning Methods 3.4.4.1 Error Method 3.4.4.2 Linear programming Model 3.4.4.3 Transportation Model 3.5 Product Design and Development 3.5.1 Product life cycle 3.5.2 New Product development process 3.5.2.1 Concept Generation 3.5.2.2 Concept testing 3.5.2.3 Technical Development 3.5.2.4 Standardization and Inter-changeability 3.5.2.5 Commercialization 3.6 Expert System in Product Development 3.6.1 Expert System Development 3.6.2 Putting System Together 3.7 Computer Aided Design and Drawing 3.7.1 Introduction 3.7.2 What to Expect from CADD? 3.7.3 A Look at the CADD Industry Anna University Chennai 116
  • 117. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT UNIT - 3 NOTES PLANNING AND FORECASTING 3.1 INTRODUCTION In this unit the three levels of management are discussed. Product design and development activities are also discussed. The enablers of product design and development namely Expert system, Computer Aided Design (CAD) are also elaborated. Forecasting activity is dealt to provide the input for the capacity planning and aggregate planning activities. Capacity planning overview is done with the explanations of aggregate planning. 3.1.1 Learning Objectives 1. You should understand the three levels of the management and their characteristics. 2. Different forecasting methods and forecasting evaluation tools are to be understood. 3. To understand the capacity planning and the strategies for aggregate planning and then different methods of aggregate planning. 4. To comprehend the new product development process and the utility of computer aided design and the expert system in the new product development process. 3.1.2 Levels of Management Generally, business activities can be classified into strategic, tactical and operational level activities. All the three levels are involved in all the subsystems, namely, production, finance, personnel and marketing. The characteristics of the decisions to be taken in all the three levels are shown in the table 3.1.2 117 Anna University Chennai
  • 118. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Table 3.1.2 - Characteristics of decision making at Strategic, Tactical and Operational Levels of Management Level of Management Characteristics Strategic Tactical Operational Time frame to “future” – Extremely “Current” – Year, quarter, “Instant” – day which decisions long time or month to day, or real-time apply Persons primarily Executive management Middle management First line manage involved and staff ment Focus of decision On one aspect of the On organization only, On small part of organization/environ- either in its entirely or the organization ment relationship at a major portion of it a time Complexity of Numerous variables, Moderate number of Small number of decisions most of which cannot variables; most of variables, all of be quantified which can be quantified which can be quantified Degree of struc- Occurs at irregular Rhythmic; specifically Rhythmic; specifi ture in decision- intervals, based prescribed procedures; cally prescribed making process almost exclusively repetitive problems procedures; repeti- on judgment; each tive problems problem differs. Nature of infor- External; predictive; Internal; Historical or Internal; historical mation qualitative; not real-time; often non- or real-time; often particularly accurate financial; precise non-financial; precise Use of information Prediction Action Action You can see how the type of activities to be carried out in the strategic, tactical and operational levels of production system is shown below for your clarity. Strategic level decisions in the production system are : • Plant location decision • New product introduction • Technology Selection • Supply chain network strategy Anna University Chennai 118
  • 119. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Tactical level decisions in the production system are : NOTES • Markets to be supplied • Aggregate planning - overtime estimation - inventory decision - subcontracting decision - hiring and firing decision Operational level decisions in the production system are : - deciding about the individual customer order - allocation of inventory or production to individuals order - deciding a date that an order is to be filled - allocated can order to a particular shipping mode - set delivery schedule of trucks Review Questions : 1. What are the three levels of management? Give an example in each level of the management 3.2 FORECASTING Forecasting activity is an important activity in the business. This is considered to be an important input for many activities in the organization. Forecasting is of two types, namely, long ranges forecasting and short range. The Long range forecast goes as input for long range decision making like technology selection, capacity planning. From the long range forecasts, the medium term forecasts are derived and used as input for the activity like aggregate planning. From the medium term forecasts the short range forecasts are outlined and go as input for activity like scheduling. Selection and usage of forecasting method differs according to whether the company needs forecast to the existing product or for a new product. When you forecast for the existing product, the past demand data is taken into consideration, the pattern for the demand is analyzed, then appropriate forecasting technique is chosen to predict the future. From the predicted demand the manager adds his own intuitions and experience based on the situation to change the estimated demand to suit the real life situation. In the case of new product, since there is no past data available, the organization depends upon the qualitative methods of forecasting. Experts, customers, sales persons opinions are solicited. 3.2.1 Importance of forecasting Forecasting activity plays major role in activities like budget preparation, cash flow preparation, balance sheet and income statement. In marketing it does play a role in product life, pricing and promotional decisions. In production it provides information in capacity planning, aggregate planning and scheduling activities. 119 Anna University Chennai
  • 120. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES 3.2.2 Forecasting model Figure 3.1 - Forecasting model Constraint 1. Advertisement Budget 2. Management Policies 3. Available Resources 4. Technology Inputs Output 1. Past Data 1. Demand Estimation 2. Demand Pattern a. Long Range 3. Market Situation b. Medium Range 4. Market Research c. Short Range Environmental Factors for Considering Long-term Forecast 1. Social 2. Economical 3. Political Before selecting any forecasting methods, you should see that whether you require forecasting for long range; then whole frame work given in the model is useful that is in addition to market and internal analysis you need to consider the environmental factors like social, economic and political factors for the long term forecasting. 3.2.3 Forecasting methods In this material the forecasting methods are classified into quantitative and qualitative type. The past data and demand pattern play key role in selecting the best quantitative method and providing good forecasting results. Quantitative methods are very much used for forecasting the existing products. Qualitative method used for the new product forecast. The classification of different methods is shown below figure 3.1 Figure 3.2 - Classification of forecasting method Forecasting Methods Quantitative Qualitative Time Series Economic Econometric Analysis Indicators Models Expert Market Delphi Options Survey Anna University Chennai 120
  • 121. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 3.2.3.1 Quantitative methods: NOTES The method is called quantitative methods because forecasting is done based on the data. Time series analysis: In this method, the past data is analyzed against time scale. Figure 3.3 - Time series analysis 5 4 2 3 Past demand 1 Time If you analyze the demand pattern against a time scale, usually it consists of the following components. 1. Level 2. Trend 3. Seasonal 4. Cyclic 5. Random Before selecting a particular forecasting, the past data is plotted against their respective year or month or week the pattern analyzed in terms of what component the pattern posses, then the appropriate forecasting technique is chosen. The combination of components is shown in figure3.4. Figure 3.4 Data (Level + Random) (Level+ Trend+ Random) 121 Anna University Chennai
  • 122. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES (Level+Seasonal+Random) (Level+Trend+Seasonal+Random) Cycle component usually considered for the long term forecasting. The cycle means business cycle or economy cycle. The different phases of this cycle are growth, maturity and depression. Usually each phase may prevail for at least more than three years. 3.2.3.1.1 Time Series Analysis For after analyzing the pattern of data, you can choose relevant method for forecasting. In this material important and complicated time series analysis methods are discussed. Moving Average The moving average technique generates the next period’s forecast by averaging the actual demand for the last ‘n’ time periods. n ∑Y t −1 ˆ Y + Y + ......Yt − n = Yt = t −1 t − 2 i =1 n n Where = forecast for period ‘t ’ = actual demand in period ‘t ’ n = Number of periods included in each average Moving average problem – 1 From the data below, determine the forecast for period 7 using two month moving average technique. Table 3.2 Month 1 2 3 4 5 6 Demand 20 30 40 30 50 58 Solution: Moving average period (n) = 2 50 + 58 Forecast for period 7 would be = = 54 2 Anna University Chennai 122
  • 123. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Moving Average – Problem 2 NOTES From the data below, determine MAD for the following forecasting techniques: (a) last period demand, (b) arithmetic average, and (c) three month moving average. What is the forecast for period 13? Table 3.3 Period Demand Period Demand 1. 93 7. 100 2. 105 8. 101 3. 114 9. 81 4. 111 10. 118 5. 106 11. 103 6. 116 12. 114 Last Period Demand Arithmetic Average Three Month Moving Average Month Demand Forecast Absolute Forecast Absolute Forecast Absolute demand deviation demand deviation demand deviation 1 93 - - 105.16 12.16 - - 2 105 93 12 105.16 0.16 - - 3 114 105 9 105.16 8.84 - - 4 111 114 3 105.16 5.84 104.00 7.00 5 106 111 5 105.16 0.84 110.00 4.00 6 116 106 10 105.16 10.84 110.33 5.67 7 100 116 16 105.16 5.16 111.00 11.00 8 101 100 1 105.16 4.16 107.33 6.33 9 81 101 20 105.16 24.16 105.67 24.67 10 118 81 37 105.16 12.84 94.00 24.00 11 103 118 15 105.16 2.16 100.00 3.00 12 114 103 11 105.16 8.84 111.67 13.30 13 114 Total 105.16 Total 111.67 Total 139 96.00 98.97 123 Anna University Chennai
  • 124. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES 139 = = 12.63 11 n ˆ Yi − Yi 96 MAD = ∑ = =8 i =1 n 12 n Yi − Yˆ 98.97 MAD = ∑ i = = 10.99 i =1 n 9 Forecast for period 13 using last period demand = 114 Forecast for period 13 using arithmetic average = 105.16 Forecast for period 13 using three month moving average = 111.67 Exponentially weighted moving average In the simple moving average technique, recent ‘n’ data have to be taken while calculating the forecast. ‘n’ represents, ‘n’ month moving average’, exponentially weighted moving average gives more weightage to the recent data and less weightage to the old data moreover if you apply this technique to forecast the future, there is no need to store recent ‘n’ data as you did in the moving average method. Because all the data will be in one single value that is the previous forecast value. Simple exponentially moving weightage average model Forecast for period t = α (Actual demand of period t-1) + (1- α ) (forecasted value of t-1) This model is applicable only when the past data follows a horizontal pattern with error component. Figure 3.5 - Simple exponentially moving weightage average model Sales Time Where ‘ α ’ is the exponential smoothening constant, α varies between 0 to 1.let us analyze why this method is called exponential weighted moving average. Anna University Chennai 124
  • 125. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Forecast for period t NOTES = (actual demand for period t-1) + (1- α ) (forecasted value for t-1) ˆ X t = forecast for the level component for period t Xˆ t [ = Y t − 1α + (1 − α ) Y t − 2 α + (1 − α ) Xˆ t−2 ] = α Y t − 1 + α (1 − α ) Y t − 2 + (1 − α ) 2 Xˆ t−2 [ ˆ = α Y t −1 + α (1 − α )Y t − 2 + (1 − α ) 2 Y t − 3 α + (1 − α ) X t − 3 ] From the above expressions, you can easily understand that the past data gets less weightage than the recent data as follows: DATA WEIGHTAGE FOR α =0.4 Yt-1 α 0.4 Yt-2 α (1- α ) 0.24 Yt-3 α (1- α )^2 0.144 αˆ = Xˆ If you plot the weightage against the time data, it follows exponential pattern, βt ˆ t − ˆ Yˆ t −= Y1 ˆ t −1α + (1 − α ) X t −1 X X X so the method is called as exponentially weighted moving average. t Exponentially weighted moving average with trend correction (Level + Trend) When you analyze the past data and if you have a feeling that the past data contains both the level(X) and trend component (T), then the model is used for adjusting trend and level component is = α Yt-1 + (1 - α ) ( -1 + Tt-1) Tt = β ( ) + (1 - β ) Tt-1 Tt = Trend adjustment for period‘t’. β is a smoothing constant for trend. This varies between 0 and 1. Now the forecast for period t + Tt If you want to forecast for ‘n’ period from the period‘t’ where in the forecast value ˆ available are X t and Tt, then the formula to be used ˆ ˆ Yt +n = X t + (n + 1) Tt Exponentially weighted moving average Problem - 3 Using exponential smoothing and the data in the previous problem, forecast monthly demand if α = 0.2 and = 0.4. Assume that the actual demand in the first 125 Anna University Chennai
  • 126. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT month is the same as the forecasted demand and the initial level and the initial trend for NOTES month 1 both are 10. From these results forecast the demand for period 8. Table 3.5 Month Yt Demand Forecast Level Tt Trend Forecast 1 20 10 10 20 2 30 20 10 30 3 40 30 10 40 4 30 40 10 50 5 50 46 8.4 54.4 6 58 53.52 8.048 61.568 7 54 60.85 7.752 68.602 8 65.68 6.583 72.263 α = 0.2, = 0.4 Table 3.6 Month Yt Tt Trend ˆ Yt Forecast Demand Forecast Level 1 20 10 10 20 2 30 3 40 4 30 5 50 6 58 7 54 8 ˆ X t = α Yt-1 + (1 - α ) ( + Tt-1) -1 Tt = β ( ˆ - X t -1) + (1 - β ) Tt-1 Tt = Trend adjustment for period‘t’. ˆ = X t + Tt Forecast demand level for the 2nd month is obtained in the following manner ˆ X 2 = 0.2 * (20) + 0.8 * (10 + 10) = 4 + 16 = 20 Anna University Chennai 126
  • 127. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Trend for the 2nd month is obtained in the following manner: NOTES T2 = 0.4 * (20 - 10) + 0.6 * (10) =4+6 = 10 Forecast for month 2 is ˆ Y2 = X 2 + T2 = 20 + 10 = 30 Forecast demand level for the 3rd month is obtained in the following manner: ˆ X 3 = 0.2 * (30) + 0.8 * (20 + 10) = 6 + 24 = 30 Trend for the 3rd month is obtained in the following manner: T3 = 0.4 * (30 - 20) + 0.6 * (10) =4+6 = 10 Forecast for month 3 is ˆ ˆ Y3 = X 3 + T3 = 30 + 10 = 40 Forecast demand level for the 4th month is obtained in the following manner: ˆ X 4 = 0.2 * (40) + 0.8 * (30 + 10) = 8 + 32 = 40 Trend for the 4th month is obtained in the following manner: T4 = 0.4 * (40 - 30) + 0.6 * (10) =4+6 = 10 Forecast for month 4 is ˆ ˆ Y4 = X 4 + T4 = 40 +10 = 50 Forecast demand level for the 5th month is obtained in the following manner: ˆ X 5 = 0.2 * (30) + 0.8 * (40 + 10) = 6 + 40 = 46 127 Anna University Chennai
  • 128. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Trend for the 5th month is obtained in the following manner: T5 = 0.4 * (46 - 40) + 0.6 * (10) = 2.4 + 6 = 8.4 Forecast for month 5 is ˆ ˆ Y5 = X 5 + T5 = 46 + 8.4 = 54.4 Forecast demand level for the 6th month is obtained in the following manner: ˆ X 6 = 0.2 * (50) + 0.8 * (46 + 8.4) = 10 + 43.52 = 53.52 Trend for the 6th month is obtained in the following manner: T6 = 0.4 * (53.52 - 46) + 0.6 * (8.4) = 3.008 + 5.04 = 8.048 Forecast for month 6 is ˆ ˆ Y6 = X 6 + T6 = 53.52 + 8.048 = 61.568 Forecast demand level for the 7th month is obtained in the following manner: ˆ X 7 = 0.2 * (58) + 0.8 * (53.52 + 8.048) = 11.6 + 49.25 = 60.85 Trend for the 7th month is obtained in the following manner: T7 = 0.4 * (60.85 - 53.52) + 0.6 * (8.048) = 2.932 + 4.82 = 7.752 Forecast for month 7 is ˆ ˆ Y7 = X 7 + T7 = 60.85 + 7.752 = 68.602 Forecast demand level for the 8th month is obtained in the following manner: ˆ X 8 = 0.2 * (54) + 0.8 * (60.85 + 7.752) = 10.8 + 54.88 = 65.68 Anna University Chennai 128
  • 129. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Trend for the 8th month is obtained in the following manner: NOTES T8 = 0.4 * (65.68 - 60.85) + 0.6 * (7.752) = 1.932 + 4.651 = 6.583 Forecast for month 8 is ˆ ˆ Y8 = X 8 + T8 = 65.68 + 6.583 = 72.263 Exponentially weighted moving average with seasonal correction (Level + Seasonal) When you analyze the past data, if you identify that the past data contains level and seasonal pattern. The seasonal pattern means that you can find the similarity in the demand pattern with respect to each period. This similarity occurs within a year. (e.g.).Demand of Air-conditioning equipment, Heating equipment, Ice Cream, Etc... The last year demand in the month of January may have the similarity with the demand of January of this year. If you have monthly data, then the seasonal period = γY Xtt 12, if you have quarterly data, then the seasonal period = 4. ˆ Xt When there is no trend, the model used for forecasting ˆ ˆ Yt = X t It Where ˆ Yt = forecast for the period‘t’ ˆ X t = level forecast for the period‘t’ It = seasonal index for the period‘t’ The seasonal index also are updated by the following model: It+m = γ + (1 - γ ) It Where is the seasonal smoothing constant, it varies between 0 and 1. If you want to forecast for the ‘n’ period, where in you have then the forecast for the period ‘n’ after t ˆ ˆ Y t+n = X t It+n Exponentially weighted moving average Problem -4 Quarterly data for 12 periods is given below: 129 Anna University Chennai
  • 130. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Table 3.7 Quarter Demand Quarter Demand 1. 497 7. 821 2. 454 8. 1017 3. 624 9. 709 4. 764 10. 715 5. 631 11. 1794 6. 624 12. 1242 Using the data from the first eight quarters, compute the quarterly seasonal indices. Solutions - Table 3.8 Period Demand Average of same quarter Seasonal Index of each year 1 497 564 0.83 2 454 539 0.793 3 624 722.5 1.064 4 764 890.5 1.311 5 631 564 0.83 6 624 539 0.793 7 821 722.5 1.064 8 1017 890.5 1.311 Total 5432 7.996 5432 Overall quarterly average = = 679 8 Average of same quarter of each year Seasonal Index = Overall quarterly average 564 Seasonal Index for Quarter 1 = = 0.83 679 539 Seasonal Index for Quarter 2 = = 0.793 679 Anna University Chennai 130
  • 131. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Seasonal Index for Quarter 3 = 722.5 = 1.064 NOTES 679 890.5 Seasonal Index for Quarter 4 = = 1.311 679 Exponentially moving average with seasonal and trend corrections (Level + Trend + Seasonal) If the past data consists of the level, seasonal and trend pattern, then you need three expressions to estimate the three components:- ˆ Xt = α + (1 - α ) ( + Tt-1) -1 Tt = β ( ˆ - X t -1) + (1 - β ) Tt-1 It+m = + (1 - γ ) It The forecast model ˆ =(X +T )I t t t To forecast for the ‘n’ period γY β ˆ ˆ Y = [ X + ( n + 1) T ] I Yˆtt−1 ˆ Yt t X t +n t t t+n It −t1 X Exponentially moving average Problem – 5 Using the data from the last four quarters in the previous problem and the initial seasonal indices computed in the previous problem, determine MAD and bias of an Exponential weighted moving average with α = 0.2, = 0.4, = 0.5, an initial forecast of 720, an initial trend of 65, and an initial level of 801. What is the forecast for quarter 13? For quarter 15? (Assume period 9 as the initial period). Given Table 3.9 Quarter Yt Tt Trend Seasonal Demand Forecast Index Forecast Level It I t+m 9 709 801 65 0.83 720 10 715 0.793 11 1794 1.064 12 1242 1.311 131 Anna University Chennai
  • 132. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES = 0.2, = 0.4, = 0.5 New seasonal Index, It+m 9th quarter is obtained as follows: New seasonal Index, It+m = γ + (1 - γ ) It = + 0.5 * 0.83 = 0.4425+0.415 = 0.8575 Forecast demand level for the 10th quarter is obtained in the following manner: ˆ Xt = α + (1 - α ) ( + Tt-1) -1 0.2 * 709 = + 0.8 * (801+65) 0.83 = 170.84 + 692.8 X 10 = 863.64 Trend for the 10th quarter is obtained as follows: ˆ Tt = β ( - X ) + (1 - β ) Tt -1 t-1 = 0.4 * (863.64 - 801) + 0.6 * (65) T10 = 64.056 Forecast for quarter 10 is ˆ =(X +T )I t t t = (863.64 + 64.056) * 0.793 ˆ Y10 = 735.66 Forecast demand level for the 11th quarter is obtained in the following manner: ˆ Xt = α + (1 - α ) ( + Tt-1) -1 0.2*715 = + 0.8* (863.64 + 64.056) 0.793 = 180.32 + 742.156 ˆ X 11 = 922.47 Trend for the 11th quarter is obtained as follows: ˆ Tt = β ( - X ) + (1 - β ) T t -1 t-1 = 0.4 * (922.47 - 863.64) + 0.6 * (64.056) T11 = 61.96 Anna University Chennai 132
  • 133. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Forecast for quarter 11 is NOTES ˆ = ( X t + Tt ) It = (922.47 + 61.96) * 1.064 ˆ Y11 = 1047.43 Forecast demand level for the 12th quarter is obtained in the following manner: ˆ Xt = α + (1 - α ) ( + Tt-1) -1 0.2 *1794 = + 0.8 * (922.47+61.96) 1.064 = 337.21 + 787.54 X 12 = 1124.75 Trend for the 12th quarter is obtained as follows: ˆ Tt = β ( - X ) + (1 - β ) T t -1 t-1 = 0.4 * (1124.75 – 922.47) + 0.6 * ( 61.96) T12 = 118.08 Forecast for quarter 12 is ˆ =(X +T )I t t t Yˆt −1 ˆ Yt t X = (1124.75 + 118.08) * 1.311 It −1 ˆ Y12 = 1629.35 Forecast demand level for the 13th quarter is obtained in the following manner: ˆ Xt = α + (1 - α ) ( + Tt-1) -1 0.2 *1242 = + 0.8 * (1124.75 + 118.08) 1.311 = 189.47 + 994.26 ˆ X 13 = 1183.73 Trend for the 13th quarter is obtained as follows: ˆ Tt = β ( - X ) + (1 - β ) T t -1 t-1 = 0.4*(1183.73 – 1124.75) + 0.6 * (118.08) T13 = 93.43 Forecast for quarter 13 is ˆ =(X +T )I t t t = (1183.73 + 93.43) * 0.8575 ˆ Y13 = 1096.02 133 Anna University Chennai
  • 134. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Forecast for quarter 13 is 1096.02 NOTES New seasonal Index, It+m for 10th quarter is obtained as follows: New seasonal Index, It+m = γ + (1 - γ ) It = + 0.5* 0.793 = 0.413 + 0.396 = 0.809 It+m for 11th quarter, It+m = γ + (1 - γ ) It = + 0.5 * 1.064 = 0.972 + 0.532 = 1.504 It+m for 11th quarter, It+m = γ + ( 1 - γ ) It = + 0.5 * 1.311 = 0.552 + 0.655 = 1.207 Table 3.10 Quarter Yt ˆ Xt Tt Trend Seasonal Demand Forecast Index Forecast Level It It+m 9 709 801 65 0.83 0.8575 720 10 715 863.64 64.056 0.793 0.809 735.66 11 1794 922.47 61.96 1.064 1.504 1047.43 12 1242 1124.75 118.08 1.311 1.207 1629.35 13 1183.73 94.43 0.8575 1096.02 Forecast for Quarter 15 is t+2 = [1183.73 + 3 * (94.43) ] * 1.504 = 1467.02 * (1.504) ˆ Y15 = 2206.39 Anna University Chennai 134
  • 135. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Forecast for quarter 15 is 2206.39 NOTES n ˆ Yi − Yi Mean Absolute Deviation, MAD = ∑ i =1 n 11 + 20.66 + 746.57 + 387.35 MAD = 4 1165.58 = 4 MAD = 291.39 ∑ n ˆ (Yi − YI ) i =1 Bias = n (−11 − 20.66 + 746.57 − 387.35) = 4 = Bias = 81.89 327.56 3.2.3.1.2 Econometric models 4 Econometric models may be designed as social science in which the tools of economic theory, mathematics, and statistical inference are applied to the analysis of economic phenomena. The traditional econometric methodology proceeds along the following steps: 1. Statement of theory. 2. Development of model. 3. Specification of econometric model. 4. Obtaining the data. 5. Estimation of the parameters of the econometric model. 6. Hypothesis testing. 7. Forecasting. 8. Using the model for central or policy purpose. The above steps can be explained by an example:- 135 Anna University Chennai
  • 136. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES 1. Economic theory says, other things remaining the same, a reduction of price of a commodity results in increase of quantity demanded for that commodity. 2. You can find an inverse relationship and a mathematical model can be developed. 3. Use of mathematical model which enables you to develop an economical equation. 4. Get the past data for the price and quantity. 5. Estimate the parameters for the economic model. 6. Use the model as well as parameters. 7. The predicted data further used for decision making purpose. Thus econometric models are developed and used for decision making purpose. 3.2.3.1.3 Economic Indicators In this kind of model the independent and dependents variables are economic indicators. The variables may be GNP, Personal income, Bank deposits, Inflation, Pre-capita income, Purchasing Power Parity, Wholesale price index, Consumer price index, etc. You should develop a relationship . Y = f (x1, x2, …., xp) Then develop a model using the variable and treat the problem as simple linear regression or multiple regression model. Then use the model to forecast for the future and test the model and parameters using ANOVA and ‘t’ test. The difference between econometric models and economic indicators are, in econometric model you may have more than one equation which you may get to show the relationship between the economic variables and the parameters estimated and it is used for forecasting, but in the case of economic indicator model you will be having single regression model to predict the future. 3.2.3.2 Qualitative Methods Qualitative methods of forecasting are adopted where you don’t have past data for projections. But, these techniques are adopted to forecast for new products. These techniques also adopted to validate the forecast which is derived from the quantitative methods mentioned in the early sections. 3.2.3.2.1 Market Survey is a technique, where the market / consumer are surveyed to estimate the potential market through various techniques like direct survey, questionnaire, interview methods etc. 3.2.3.2.2 Expert Opinion has a method in which the experts are called and they are allowed to discuss to arrive at the decisions related to market potential. This method has a disadvantage of the dominating expert – who may sway away the whole discussion in his way. The docile expert view may not find a remarkable place in the discussion. Anna University Chennai 136
  • 137. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 3.2.3.2.3 Delphi Technique - the short coming of the expert opinion method is NOTES eliminated in the Delphi technique method. In this method, the experts are not invited for the discussion, instead the questions is prepared for which is indented and circulated to all experts. The responses of experts are collected and then the reasoning for their response will also be collected and then same such process is continued until the consensus is arrived at. The whole task is carried out by a person called Facilitator. Review Questions: 1.List the techniques under qualitative methods. 2.List the different techniques used in the quantitative methods. 3.2.4 Forecasting evaluation Forecasting evaluation tools are many. But each tool is the function of forecast error that is the difference between the actual sales and the forecasted value. The forecasting methods are evaluated based on the forecasting evaluation tool. The best method is chosen where the forecast error is minimum.Different forecasting evaluation tools are: 1. Sum of squared error 2. Mean squared error 3. Mean absolute deviation 4. Tracking signal Let us assume that Ft Forecast for the period‘t’ At Actual for the period‘t’ n number of observation 1. Sum of Squared Error (SSE) n = ∑ ( Ft − At ) 2 t =1 2. Mean Squared Error (MSE) n = ∑ ( Ft − At ) 2 / n t =1 3. Mean Absolute Deviation (MAD) n = ∑ Ft − At / n t =1 137 Anna University Chennai
  • 138. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT | Ft – At | is the absolute value NOTES Tracking Signal (TS) n ∑F t =1 t − At TS = MAD 3.3 CAPACITY PLANNING Capacity planning is a process, which is to be carried out after deciding the product and the long range demand for the product. Suppose if you produce custom made product, the demand is not estimated through the product but in terms of hours. Once if you know the long range demand, the effort needed to determine the amount of resources needed to meet the demand requirement is all about capacity planning. Capacity Measure In this section, you can learn a method of measuring a capacity of system. Consider anything for which you need to measure the capacity, as a system. Figure 3.6 – Capacity Measures Analyze the system into input, processing and output. When you analyze, see to that, where there is a less variability, choose that side and identify the product, process- resources, the input resources and attach time frame to provide the capacity measure. Measure of Capacity through output Consider an automobile mass production industry. You can’t find much variation in the output side compared to the input resources and processing parts. So the number of cars/time is considered as the measure. Mostly in the case of mass production industry, the output side is considered to measure the capacity. Measure of the capacity through Input Consider an educational institution; here the output side is not taken into consideration because the number of outgoing students per time may vary depending upon the pass result. But the intake is always constant because the intake depends upon the government approved. So, the capacity of educational institution is measured through the input, namely, the number of students intake. Anna University Chennai 138
  • 139. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Measure of the capacity through processing NOTES Consider a sugarcane industry, the capacity of that industry is not measured in terms of the output and input. There is a variability in terms of yield rate that means some times “y” tons of sugarcane may give “x” tons of sugar or some times same “y” may give more than or less than the “x” tons of sugar. Since variability is existing in both the input side and output side. Inputs and outputs are not considered for measuring the capacity. But in the processing side there is a less variability namely the crushing capacity or the number of tons of sugarcane could be crushed by the crushing machine is considered to be a best measure to measure the capacity of the sugarcane industry from the processing point of view. In summary, if you want to fix the measure for the capacity, then see the system as input, processing and output. Find where there is a less variability choose that side and correspondingly choose the product or the resources to estimate the measure. The table- 3.11 provides some of the systems and their corresponding measure to measure the capacity. Table 3.11 - Capacity planning involves three stages of planning. System Components of Unit of Measure System considered for capacity measure Automobile Industry Output Number of Automobiles Bottling Plant Output Gallons / Day University Input Number of students intake per year Auto repair shop Processing Number of machines hour per day Restaurant Processing Seating Capacity Stage 1 involves resource planning this is considered to be long range planning. In the long range planning, mostly the type and amount of man power requirement, the capital equipment requirements are to be decided. Stage 2 is by considering the resource planning; the rough cut capacity planning is carried out. Here it is not discussed in detail because it has been discussed in unit II. Stage 3 is capacity requirement planning this is lower level planning. This is carried out with the input of rough cut capacity planning. This is also discussed in the unit II. 139 Anna University Chennai
  • 140. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Review Questions: 1. How do you measure the capacity planning? 2. Give an example for the capacity measure based on output? 3.4 AGGREGATE PRODUCTION PLANNING 3.4.1 Introduction In the operational planning, the long range planning involves capacity planning which involves the determination of long range capacity needs of an organization. Next to the capacity planning is the process of aggregate planning which comes under intermediate range planning. Aggregate planning is done considering capacity planning as a framework. Aggregate Planning Aggregate Planning includes identifying different feasible production alternatives and selecting the best one in order to reduce the production cost to minimum. First let us analyze what is meant by aggregate planning? And why this is called aggregate planning? There are organizations which involve the production of various products and each product has its own measurable dimension. For e.g. Assume that an organization produces three products – Product A, Product B and Product C. Product A is measured in terms of tons, product B is measured in terms of length and Product C in terms of number of units. As you know aggregate planning is a medium range planning, you need not plan the capacity of individual products. Instead you should plan the capacity for aggregate demand by converting the different product demand into an aggregate demand. For doing so, you need to find out a common unit, for the above mentioned three products. If possible you can convert into total hours of production. Here the dimension becomes time. Hence time becomes the aggregate unit. After finding the aggregate requirement then you should plan the capacity for the aggregate requirement. This is a planning done at a broader level and does not include details of individual product. Aggregate planning includes: Staffing plan – related to staff and labor related factors. Production plan – related to production level and inventory. 3.4.2 Objectives of Aggregate Planning The main objective is to minimize the cost. The others include: To maximize 1. customer service and. 2. utilization of resources. Anna University Chennai 140
  • 141. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT To minimize 1. changes in workforce and. NOTES 2. changes in production. 3.4.3 Strategies to Meet the Demand Fluctuations Suppose the annual requirement is 1200 units, then you can establish a constant capacity for production as 1200/12 = 100 units per month. Figure 3.7 Figure 3.8 In reality, the demand fluctuates. It could follow seasonal, trend pattern. To meet these demand fluctuations there are certain strategies to be adopted with regard to capacity to meet the demand. They are: Inventory carrying through constant workforce. Subcontracting. Variable workforce. Variable Working hours. Promotional Activities. Backordering. a. Inventory Carrying Through the Constant Workforce In this strategy a constant workforce is maintained throughout the planning period, because of which there is a constant output. But the demand may vary. So during certain periods there will be excess output and at certain times decreased output. The excess demand is met through excess output produced through constant workforce in the previous demands by carrying the inventory. 141 Anna University Chennai
  • 142. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Figure 3.9 - Inventory Carrying Through Constant Workforce Inventory carrying through constant workforce Subcontracting Variable workforce Variable Working hours Promotional Activities Backordering a. Inventory Carrying Through Constant Workforce In this strategy a constant workforce is maintained throughout the planning period, because of which there is a constant output. But the demand may vary. So during certain periods there will be excess output and at certain times decreased output. The excess demand is met through excess output produced through constant workforce in the previous demands by carrying the inventory. Figure 3.9 - Inventory Carrying Through Constant Workforce Advantages: This method provides a stable workforce who can give better quality products because of their experience. The employees feel secured about their job and hence high productivity level is maintained. It avoids hiring and firing cost. Disadvantages There will be inventory carrying cost when there is excess output during a period. Anna University Chennai 142
  • 143. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT There is a difficulty in finding a stable workforce that will keep the inventory cost at its minimum. NOTES This strategy cannot be followed for perishable goods. b. Subcontracting This is one of the strategies to meet demand fluctuation in which a portion of the production is placed with a subcontractor or subcontractors. Figure 3.10 - Subcontracting Advantages During the period of the peak demand this is a good alternative if the company is unable to produce the demand needs in a given time period. Disadvantages Unless the company has good relations with the suppliers it cannot have much a control on the product quality and delivery time. If practiced extensively it will result in increased competition among subcontractors which in turn leads to subcontractors becoming competitors for the firm. c. Variable Workforce This strategy involves hiring and firing of employees based on demand fluctuations. When the demand increases workforce is hired and when the demand decreases some amount of workforce is fired. 143 Anna University Chennai
  • 144. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 3.11 Figure 3.12 NOTES Advantages Variable workforce enables to match between production quantity and demand because of which inventory cost can be kept at minimum. Disadvantages There is a cost involves in hiring and firing the employees. Newly hired employees need training and hence initially productivity might be lowered. Workers might feel unsecured about their job which may in turn affect productivity. d. Variable Working Hours Under this strategy, workforce remains constant but working hours would vary as per the demand. During periods of increased demand employees are made to work overtime. If the demand is low workers are idle but the firm would be paying them full salary. This is a loss to the company. Figure 3.13 - Variable Working Hours Anna University Chennai 144
  • 145. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Advantages NOTES It helps to maintain a stable workforce. The company can save the cost on inventory. Disadvantages In case of very large demand it is difficult to follow this strategy. Overtime wages are higher than regular time wages. Employees are idle during periods of low demand. During overtime, if the employees are very much stressed, it will lead to a decrease in their efficiency of working. e. Promotional Activities During off seasons, there is a decrease in demand. At such times firms can promote the sales by offering discounts, selling at a lower price, “buy one get one free” sales, etc. This can be adopted to sell the excess inventory. Example: Giving off-season discounts for soft drinks during winter season. f. Backordering Here products are supplied to the customers only after a period of waiting time. i.e., customers are made to wait for the product. As soon as the goods are produced they are first supplied to back orders. It is the same as shortage of a product. Figure 3.14 - Backordering 145 Anna University Chennai
  • 146. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT If any one of the above strategies is used it is called pure strategy. If a combination of NOTES the above strategies are used it is then called mixed strategy. The Cost Aspects Various costs are associated with aggregate planning strategies. They are explained as follows: Production cost This includes the fixed cost and variable cost associated with production activities Fixed cost – Cost such as rent for the building, salaries, property tax, insurance etc. These cost that does not vary with the volume pf production. Variable cost – The cost of labor, material or overhead and this changes according to the change in volumes of unit produced. Hiring and Firing cost The cost associated with variable workforce size. Costs involved with termination of employee will come under firing cost. Similarly if an employee is recruited temporarily during increased demand there will be cots of training, wages to the new employees. These come under the hiring cost. Hiring cost would include employer expenses on job advertising, screening cost and training of newly hired employees. For employee lay-off, the firm incurs certain cost such as compensation, expenses on legal advice for settlement, counseling of fired employees, etc. Back-order cost This is nothing but the shortage cost, when the demand for a product is met later. In other words, customer is made to wait for the product. This may result in any one of the following The customer may wait for the product, but there is a cost associated with this which is proportional to the waiting time of the customer. The customer may be dissatisfied, and the cost associated with this is independent of waiting time. This is called fixed shortage cost. The customer may also switch to competitor’s products and hence the sale is lost. This may result in loosing the goodwill of the customer also. Overtime Cost In case of variable work hours, the employees may be asked to work overtime during periods of peak demand. This results in paying the employee for the overtime. This cost is usually much more than the regular time cost. 3.4.4 Aggregate Planning Methods In this section you can see about the different methods used for aggregate planning. The methods are classified based on the above discussed cost varying linearly Anna University Chennai 146
  • 147. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT or non- linearly against the activities to be measured. It is also based on whether you need optimal solution or non-optimal solution. NOTES The aggregate planning methods can be represented as follows: Table 3.12 - Aggregate Planning Methods Cost Behavior Solution Requirement Linear Non-Linear Optimal Linear Programming Linear Decision rule - Transportation model Dynamic Programming - Simplex method Non-Optimal Trial and Error method Heuristic method Computer research Real life aggregate planning problem consist of more complex interacting variable and constraints. So it is difficult to formulate the optimal model. Here, planner resorts to non-optimal solution. In this section you can understand the Trial and Error method, Simplex method and Transportation model. Other methods are out of scope and thus not included. 3.4.4.1 Error Method The following example is solved through the Trial and error method. This method is called as the Trial and Error method because you are following a particular logic to solve the problem, but there is no guarantee that whether the solution that you got is optimal or not. Example 3.1 A company has estimated the demand for each product for 12 months as follows: Table 3.13 Month Demand 1 1200 2 2400 3 3000 4 3200 5 3500 6 4000 7 4500 8 4700 9 3200 10 2900 11 4800 12 5000 147 Anna University Chennai
  • 148. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT These demands can be met through Regular Time, Overtime and Subcontracting. NOTES Regular Time capacity – 200 units Overtime capacity – 1500 units Subcontracting capacity – infinity Regular Time cost, rt = Rs.30 per unit per period Overtime cost, ot = Rs.50 per unit per period Subcontracting cost, ut = Rs.100 per unit per period It is possible to carry inventory from one period to another and carrying cost Cc = Rs. 10 per unit. Provide feasible production alternatives. Solution: Table 3.14 Month Demand RT OT ST (2000) (1500) (infinity) 1 1200 1200, 500 (6), 300 (7) - 500 700 (7), 800 (8) 700 units units required in 6th month is required in 7th month is produced in 1 month and carried produced in 1st month st as inventory. 300 (7) - 300 units and carried as inventory. required in 7th month is produced 800 (8) - 800 units in 1st month. required in 8th month is st produced in 1 month. 2 2400 2000 1400, 400 (8), 700 (11) 400 units required in 8th month is produced in 2nd month and carried as inventory. 700 (11) - 700 units required in11th month is produced in 2nd month. 3 3000 2000 1000, 500(11) 500 units required in11th month is produced in 3rd month and carried as inventory. 4 3200 2000 1200, 100(11), 200(12) 100 units required in11th month is produced in 4th month and carried as inventory. 200 (12) - 200 units required in12th month is produced in 4th month. 5 3500 2000 1500 6 4000 2000 1500 7 4500 2000 1500 8 4700 2000 1500 Anna University Chennai 148
  • 149. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 9 3200 2000 1200, 300 (12) 300 units required in 12th month is NOTES produced in 9th month and carried as inventory. 10 2900 2000 900, 600 (12) 600 units required in 12th month is produced in 10th month and carried as inventory. 11 4800 2000 1500 12 5000 2000 1500 400 12 Total production cost = ∑ C t, where Ct is the cost incurred for the month ’t’. t=1 C1 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) = Rs. 135000 C2 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) = Rs. 135000 C3 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) = Rs. 135000 C4 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) = Rs 135000 C5 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) = Rs 135000 C6 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) + (500*50) = Rs 160000 C7 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) + (300*60) + (700*60) = Rs 195000 C8 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) + (800*70) + (400*60) = Rs 215000 C9 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) = Rs 135000 C10 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) = Rs 135000 C11= (2000*30) + (1500*50) + (700*90) + (500*80) + (100*70) = Rs 245000 C12 = (2000*30) + (1500*50) + (200*80) + (300*30) + (600*20) + (400*100) = Rs 212000 Total Production cost = Rs.19, 721,000 3.4.4.2 Linear programming Model The aggregate planning problem can be formulated as a Linear Programming Model when cost behavior is linear and the optimal solution is required you can Two kinds of linear programming model. One is for constant workforce and the other for variable workforce as shown below. Fixed Work Force Model The following notation is used to describe the above model. vit = unit production cost for product I in period t (exclusive of labor cost) cit = inventory carrying cost per unit of product I held in stock from period 149 Anna University Chennai
  • 150. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT t to t+1 NOTES rt = cost per man hour of regular labor in period t ot = cost per man hour of overtime labor in period t d it = forecast demand for product i in period t ki = man hours required to produce one unit of product i (r m) t = total man hours of regular labor available i period t (o m) t = total man hours of overtime labor available i period t Iio = initial inventory level for product i Wo = initial regular work force level T= time horizon, in periods N = total number or products Decision variables Xit = units of product i to be produced in period t Iit = units of product to be left over as inventory in period t Wit = man hours of regular labor used during period t Ot = man hours of overtime labor used during period t Fixed work force cost model is: N T T Minimize Z = ? ? (vit Xit+cit Iit) + ? (rt Wt + o tOt ) i =1 t = 1 t=1 Subject to: Xit + Ii, t-1 - Iit = dit N ? ki Xit – Wt – Ot = 0 i =1 0 ?Wt ? (rm) t 0 ? Ot ? (om) t Xit, Iit ? 0 The objective function expresses minimization of variable production, inventory, regular and overtime labor costs. Constraint one represent production – inventory balance. Second constraint defines total manpower to be used in every period. Last two constraints impose lower and upper bounds on the use of regular and overtime man hours in every time period. Variable workforce models When there is a change the workforce level to meet demand fluctuations, the workforce becomes a decision variable and hiring and firing cost will be part of objective Anna University Chennai 150
  • 151. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT function. The model below also includes backordering cost. NOTES Ht = man hours of regular work force hired in period t Ft = man hours of regular work force laid off in period t I+t = units ending inventory of product I in period t I-t = units of product I backordered at the end of period t bt = cost per unit of backorder of product i carried from period t to t+1 ht = cost of hiring one man hour in period t ft = cost of laying off one man hour in period t p = overtime allowed as a fraction of the regular hours Variable workforce model can be formulated as follows: N T T Minimize Z = ? ? (vit Xit+cit I+it+bit I-it) + ? (rt Wt + o tOt + ht Ht + ft Ft) i =1 t = 1 t=1 Subject to Xit + I+i, t-1 – I-i, t-1 + I+it+ I-it= dit N ? Ki Xit – Wt – Ot ? 0 i =1 Wt – Wt-1– Ht + Ft = 0 -pWt + Ot ? 0 Xit, I+it, I-it ? 0 Wt, Ot, Pt, Ht, Ft ? 0 i = 1,….N t = 1,…N The first constraint represents the production inventory balance equation. The Second constraint limits the production to variable man power. It is possible at some point regular work force Wt will be partially idle therefore is justified. The Third constraint define the change in workforce during period t i.e. Wt - Wt-1= Ht - Ft. Labor is added when Ht>0 or subtracted whenever Ft > 0. The Fourth constraint imposes an upper bound on the total overtime available in period t as a function of regular work force size. Example 3.2 The following data pertain to demand forecast, production alternatives, and costs for the XYZ Company which manufactures a cleaning fluid used in hospitals. 151 Anna University Chennai
  • 152. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Table 3.15 Capacity Limit, tons Quarter Estimated Regular Overtime Unit cost Demand Production production per ton 1 210 210 15 rt = Rs.2000 2 200 210 15 ot= Rs.3000 3 170 180 10 Cc = Rs.200 per period 4 230 210 15 Furthermore, the cost of hiring is Rs.4800 per unit increase in output (ht= Rs.4800 per unit) while the cost of firing is Rs.72000 per unit decrease in output ( ft = Rs.72000 per unit). The starting regular production rate is Po = 220 tons from the work-force level of the previous period. Formulate the aggregate planning problem as a linear programming problem using simplex method and solve it if computer program is available. Solution: Demand data Regular Time Capacity Overtime Capacity D1 = 210 X1 = 210 O1= 15 D2 = 200 X2 = 250 O2 = 15 D3 = 170 X3 = 180 O3 = 10 D4 = 230 X4 = 210 O4 = 15 Regular time cost per unit, rt = Rs. 2000 Over Time cost per unit, ot = Rs. 3000 Carrying cost per unit per period, Cc = Rs.200 Hiring cost per unit, ht = Rs. 4800 Firing cost per unit, ft = Rs. 72000 Starting regular production rate P0 = 220 tons Initial inventory I0= 0 (assume) A linear programming problem for the above aggregate planning problem is presented below. Xt, Ot = Units produced during regular time and overtime respectively. At, Rt = Number of units increased or decreased respectively during consecutive periods. Dt = Sales forecast Minimize z = 2000 (X1+ X2+ X3) + 4800 (A1+ A2+ A3+ A4) + 7200 (R1+ R2+ R3+ R4) + 3000 (O1+ O2+ O3+ O4) + 200 (I1+I2+ I3+ I4) Anna University Chennai 152
  • 153. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Subject to constraints: NOTES X1 ? 210 X2 ? 250 X3 ? 180 X4 ? 210 O1 ? 15 O2 ? 15 O3 ? 10 O4 ? 15 R1 + O1 - I1 = 210 X2 + O2 + I1 - I2 =200 X3 + O3 + I2 - I3 = 170 X4 + O4 + I3 - I4 = 230 X1 - A1 ? 220 -X1 + X2 - A2 ? 0 -X2 + X3 - A3 ? 0 -X3 + X4 - A4 ? 0 X1 + R1 ? 220 -X1 + X2 + R2 ? 0 -X2 + X3 + R3 ? 0 -X3 + X4 + R4 ? 0 Xt, R t, A t, O t, I t ?0 where t = 1,2,3,4 The results are given below : Table 3.16 Quarter I Quarter II Quarter III Quarter IV P1 = 210 P2 = 210 P3 = 180 P4= 180 O1 = 0 O2 = 5 O3 =10 O4 =15 I1=0 I2 = 15 I3 = 35 I4 = 0 A1 = 0 A2 = 0 A3 = 0 A4 = 0 R1 = 10 R2 = 0 R3 = 30 R4 = 0 Minimum Cost is = Rs. 19,48000 The above results are shown diagrammatically as follows: 153 Anna University Chennai
  • 154. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Figure 3.14 3.4.4.3 Transportation Model A generalized transportation model for more than one alternative (for production) can be represented as follows: Table 3.17 - Aggregate Planning Methods I II III IV Cost Supply I r rt + Cc rt+2 Cc rt+3 Cc rt S1 o ot+ Cc ot+2 Cc ot+3 Cc ot u ut+ Cc ut+2 Cc ut+3 Cc ut II rt + Cs rt rt+ Cc ot+2 Cc rt S2 o t + Cs ot ot+ Cc vt+2 Cc ot ut + Cs ut ut+ Cc ut+2 Cc ut III rt + 2Cs rt + Cs rt ot + Cc rt S3 Ot + 2Cs Ot + Cs ot vt + Cc ot ut+ 2Cs ut + Cs ut ut + Cc ut IV r t+ 3Cs rt+ 2Cs R t+ Cs rt rt S4 Ot + 3Cs ot + 2Cs o t + Cs ot ot ut+ 3Cs ut+ 2Cs ut + Cs ut ut Demand D1 D2 D3 D4 Where rt = regular time cost ot = over time cost Anna University Chennai 154
  • 155. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT ut = subcontracting cost Cs = shortage cost NOTES Cc = carrying cost In case of back ordering, for three periods in advance the shortage cost will be three times. i.e. 3Cs will be added to the existing labor cost. Similarly for two periods backordering 2Cs will be added to the existing labor cost. Cc represents carrying cost. Products produced during a period for usage in subsequent periods will have a carrying cost. For e.g. 3Cc indicates that product had been carried over three months. Example 3.3 A producer is considering either producing or procuring a certain part. The relevant data are as follows: Table 3.18 PERIOD I II III IV Production capacity In house 20 20 20 20 Outside Vendor 40 40 40 40 ∞ Unit cost In House 12 13 15 16 Outside vendor 15 15 18 20 Demand 70 40 60 90 Initial inventory is 20 units and the holding cost is Rs.8 per unit per period. What is the optimal aggregate plan? Solution: Table 3.19 I II III IV Supply Initial Inventory 8 16 24 32 20 I 12 20 28 36 20 15 23 31 39 40 II ∞ 13 21 29 20 15 23 31 40 III 15 23 20 18 26 40 IV 16 20 20 40 Demand 70 40 60 90 155 Anna University Chennai
  • 156. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT The holding cost is Rs. 8 per period. Therefore for the second, period it will be NOTES Rs.16 (8+8), for third period it will be Rs. 24 (8+8+8) and for the fourth period it will be Rs 32. In a similar manner it is calculate for subsequent periods. Infinity symbol indicates that product produced during a period is sold during that period or subsequent periods and not in previous periods. i.e. there is no back order. Solving the above, using Vogel’s approximation method Table 3.20 Initial feasible solution: Transportation cost = (20*8) + (12*20) + (30*15) + (23*10) + (13*20) + (10*15) + (23*30) + (15*20) + (18*10) + (26*30) + (16*20) + (40*20) = Rs. 4560 Optimality Test – Modi Method Conditions: Individual allocated cells should be equal to m+n-1 m – number of rows n – number of columns Anna University Chennai 156
  • 157. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Test for optimality on initial feasible solutions NOTES Write the matrix of the cost of allotted cells Determine a set of m+n numbers Ui = 1,2….m Vj = 1,2,….n Crs = ur+vs, r- supply, s-demand Table 3.21 I II III IV Ui Initial Inventory 8 U1 = 0 12 U2 = 4 I 15 23 U3 = 7 13 U4 = -3 II 15 U5 = -1 15 U6 = -9 III 18 26 U7 = -6 IV 16 U8 = -16 20 U9 = -12 ∞ Vj V1 = 8 V2 = 16 V3 = 24 V4 = 32 Cost (Cij) of un-allotted cells Table 3.22 I II III IV Initial Inventory 16 24 32 I 20 28 36 31 39 II ∞ 21 29 31 III 23 IV Ui + Vj for un-allotted cells 157 Anna University Chennai
  • 158. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Table 3.23 I II III IV Initial Inventory 16 24 32 I 20 28 36 31 39 II 5 21 29 7 31 III -1 7 23 -2 10 IV -8 0 8 -4 4 12 Cij – (Ui + Vj) for un-allotted cells Table 3.24 I II III IV Initial Inventory 0 0 0 I 0 0 0 0 0 II 0 0 0 III 0 IV Since there are no negative values in the above table the initial feasible solution is the optimal solution i.e. The optimal transportation cost = (20*8) + (12*20) + (30*15) + (23*10) + (13*20) + (10*15) + (23*30) + (15*20) + (18*10) + (26*30) + (16*20) + (40*20) = Rs. 4560. Review Questions: 1. When do you go for the aggregate planning? 2. Discuss the optimal method when the cost behaves linearly? 3 .Discuss the optimal methods when the cost behaves non linearly? Anna University Chennai 158
  • 159. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 3.5 PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT NOTES The Activity namely the new product design or development in the existing product arises because of an opportunity available to tap the untapped market or a thing required to solve the problem. Like medicine to cure the AIDS or Cancer, these are opportunities to solve the problem. These kind of opportunity problem leads the organization to manufacture new product. Sometimes the demand for the existing product declining. The organization thinks of reviving the product by adding some improvement or the features in the existing product. Both the functions come under the process of product design and development. 3.5.1 Product life cycle Understating in which phase of the product life cycle, the product is there is the basis for the any product design and development activity. As you know any product has many brands, example, if you consider refer generator. You have Samsung, brands. Each brand has the demand pattern the summation of the entire brand’s demand pattern provides information in which phase the product is, Figure 3.15 - The Pattern of PLC Introduction In this phase there is a more risk involved there is possibility that the product is not accepted by the customers. This results in early exit of the product. This is all about the acceptability of the product. In this phase the competition will be less if the product in the introduction phase, you should not think about going for heavy investment because of more chance for infant mortality of the product. Growth In this phase the people know more about the product that increases the potentiality of the demand. The competition gradually picks up here you should 159 Anna University Chennai
  • 160. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES concentrate more on the attributes like quality, performance, delivery time, serviceability that helps the organization to establish the product as a leader among the players. At present in Indian cell phone is in the growth stage of PLC. Comparatively the profit the maturity stage will be high. Maturity Stage In this phase more competitors will be there and here all well established facilities were available and everyone is enjoy is the economy scale. But profit margins of the competitor are less. Because the facilities may be in reality at the end of their life cycle. Because markets are matured, organization finds it difficult to capture a small increase in market share. Packed mass consumption goods, soap are for examples which are in the maturity state of the PLC. Decline After maturity phase, the product enters into the declining phase. The reasons may be attributed to people would have found another alternative for the product, usually for the most of the time the business cycle and product cycle go together. In this case, if the economy is in the declining stage then there is a chance that product may enter into the declining stage. In such a case the organization has to make all effort to revive the product by adding some features in the product or family declining stage early then this becomes big problem for the organization because you can not utilize facility available. This problem is made in the case of mass production industry. This problem is severe if the industry is of the mass production type because the less demand the investment made in technology becomes turtle. At present the black and white TV is in the declining phase of PLC. Because of Organization and lot of development in the field of electronic goods the product life cycle is so short may be three or four gems. The organization should be more vigilant in introducing more number of products within short span of time. With this understanding of product life cycle curve, another activity inter turned with the use product life cycle namely the new product development process in this next section. 3.5.2 New Product development process In the last section you have studied about the product life cycle. Suppose the produce is in the declining stage of life cycle course, if you allow the situation to continue the demand for the product decline and the organizational resources are under utilized. The cost of the product increases and your market share declines at faster rate and you may have to close down the plant soon. But as soon as the demand for the product starts declining, the organization has to face different problems like- Anna University Chennai 160
  • 161. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 1. Under utilization of resources. NOTES 2. Cost of the product increase. 3. Price of your product increases. 4. More inventory. 5. Overhead burden etc. These problems are converted into an opportunity in terms of developing an existing product by adding some features according to the requirement of the customers or you can go for introducing a new product which could use the available facilities. So the starting point for the new product development process is the concept generation. 3.5.2.1 Concept Generation To solve the problem or utilize the opportunity available the idea may come from different sources, the sources may be- 1. The basic research in the field of physics, chemistry and biology etc. 2. Technology innovations. 3. Ideas from the staff in R & D Production, quality control etc. 4. Ideas from competitors consumers. The above ideas should be in line with the first organization’s mission statement, or it should not disturb much the on going marketing or the idea should utilize the existing state of inventory. 3.5.2.2 Concept testing A preliminary analysis different project ideas are screened using scoring models ATR techniques etc. In the preliminary analysis different product ideas are screened using the techniques Table 3.25 161 Anna University Chennai
  • 162. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES ATR MODEL (Awareness – Trial – Repeat) model: The basic formula is given below: Profits = Buying units x percent aware x percent trial x percent availability x percent repeat x annual units bought (revenue per unit – costs per unit). For e.g: Assume that an organization is developing a new cleaning powder for washing sports can 1. Number of owners: 1,00,000 2. Percentage who will become aware of the power: 30 percent 3. Percentage of those aware who will buy it: 10 percent 4. Percentage of the retail outlet store the powder : 30 percent 5. Percentage of the triers who like the product and but more : 40 percent Number of pockets a typical user will but in a year: 10 pocket Revenue the unit Rs.1000 Cost Per unit Rs.700 Profit according to ATR model = 1, 00,000 x .3 x .10 x .3 x .4 x 10m (1000 – 700) = 10,800 like ATR, scoring model and the best ideas are chosen for The outcome of the screening is the product definition or the benefits the new item is to yield. 3.5.2.3 Technical Development After concept testing is over, ‘you should see that whether you have technical capacity and resources appropriate to produce or provide the product / service. In technical development, the output is the prototype of the product. In general, in any product design & development activity the product specifications for the product are to be arrived through market survey, for example, the product specification for a car represent the color, the size of the car, fuel efficiency power of the engine. Product specification usually collected from the customer. The customer may not be knowing the technical details about the product, so his/her requirement is obtained through the word of the mouth. Then the product specifications are converted into engineering specification. To start with, first what kind of material is to be purchased when you purchase the material, it should be economical and the purchased material do not hamper the performance, reliability of the final product were lot of value analysis and value engineering application helps to choose the right material without affecting the function for which it is indented for economically. Here you should see the product where it is Anna University Chennai 162
  • 163. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT positioned. For example: if you are manufacturing car for luxury purpose then you may NOTES prefer the leather seat rather than vinyl seat. So, when you design a product. To whom the product is targeted for according the material selection and supplier selection take place. When you select the material you should see the process or the resources available because selecting the high quality material may demand high processing requirement that results in high production cost which allows your product to become less competitive. It is mentioned in the process paragraph now we can develop some time on the product specification, tolerance and allowances. Allowable deviation from the targeted value is the tolerance, example, shaft diameter designed by the designer to satisfy the final requirement of product aims a target value of 2 cm but you can not produce 2 cm diameter consistently. So because of in built nature of the processing system, there exists variety in the processing. For that you need data like process capability input to fix the tolerance limit etc. for example: the existing process capability of a productive system is to produce 2 ±.05 cm, then it is the design demands for more than 2.05 and less 1.95 cms (10) 2 ±.10. This is the specification required then there is no problem but if you design a shaft of 2 ±.03 cm, then the productive system may produce more back quality product. So in the engineering design one should have the input like process capability to fix tolerance engineering specification. 3.5.2.4 Standardization and Inter-changeability When you design a product you should not design in such a manner that all the parts sustainability are of your own design because after your product has been purchased by the customer put into use, if there is a problem in the product, it is difficult to service the product because of the components are of you own design and availability of the components become problem. Even there is an availability you need to have more components that result in more inventory cost at the same time the customers also put into lot of trouble in terms of idle time of the product. The problem is a complex one if your product is a capital equipment product. In this case your product design consists of components subassembly of standard product available. In your product suppose if you have came to use standard components like tin and steel sheets, nuts, bolts, washers transistors, capacitors etc. You try to use the same. Instead you need not design on your own for those components you design should be in such manner that the above mentioned standard products could be transit may use. Usage of the standardized components or products lower the cost of production reduces the inventory cost. It case the maintenance and repair that result in less cost. It also helps in more easier and effective quality control. The concept of standardization spread to the service industry also, because nowadays for fast food restaurant the standard mix is always speedy according to the 163 Anna University Chennai
  • 164. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES type of order they mix. Different mix and service requires food at lesser time. Even in the house you need not prepare all the cooking ingredients as it was done in the olden day. Nowadays standard ingredients are available and only mix with less time you can get what you want. Here we are not saying that all the time your should use the standard components if your product requires. If possible any new design of the components reduces the cost of the product, and then instead of going for standard component you can use your newly designed components. This serves the purpose of continuing innovation and design of the organization. 3.5.2.5 Commercialization In commercialization you must decide to whom this item will be targeted, what will be the value of the product and how do we get the value into it, how it will be positioned relative will be the product’s brand, building support around the organization for the marketing actions to follow and overcoming problems that arise in the field and which might cause the firm to fail to achieve the necessary awareness, that and repeat use which are discussed in the concept testing phase. Once market trial is over, then the products are produced according to the plan. This involves detailed production plan, quality plan, and story and distribution strategy. All the actions are carried out by keeping in the company’s strategy objectives and goals. The above explained new product development process is shown in a flow chart. Figure 3.16 : Commercialization Anna University Chennai 164
  • 165. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Review Question: NOTES 1. Highlight the stages of Product Life Cycle. 2. Why products fall into maturity stage? 3. How would you expand the life time of saturated product? 3.6 EXPERT SYSTEM IN PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT Strategy planning plays a vital role in defining where a corporation wants to be in the near and long terms, how they will get there, and how they will monitor their progress in getting there. These are derivations of the Total Manufacturing Assurance three C’s: Create, Control, and Critique. The same applies to the product development test program. The test program strategy must reflect the overall corporate business strategy. Combining strategic planning with expert system technology enables the engineer or manager to quickly define the “best” or “optimal” test program for a given product development effort. The expert system makes this happen by using “expert” knowledge derived from its knowledge base of engineering, marketing, and customer requirements. To make money and enjoy long term survival, a company must be productive and efficient. That statement is very simple and acceptable in light of the evermore competitive business environments being experienced. It thus is imperative to eliminate, or minimize, company bureaucracy. Bureaucracy causes aggravation. It directly correlates to unnecessary company overhead. It is impractical to think that overhead can ever be completely eliminated. It can be optimized and in this case that means minimized. There is still overhead, but it is value-added overhead. To make this happen three things must be readily available in the planning process: 1. Expert knowledge about testing, 2. Expert knowledge about customer market requirements and 3. A mechanism to get all this expert knowledge into one room to quickly make good decision(s). The expert system facilitates “Optimized strategic test program planning”. An engineer or manager defines the “best’ or “optimal” test program for a given product development effort. The expert system forces this by using “expert” knowledge derived from its knowledge base of engineering, marketing, and customer requirements. 3.6.1 Expert System Development Product reliability, safety, and quality requirements are a key element of a strategic business plan since they reflect what the customer needs. These product design performance parameters in turn provide a basis for defining the test program necessary as part of the overall product assurance strategy. The product assurance strategic plan balances many interrelated variables and factors. 165 Anna University Chennai
  • 166. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT These include: NOTES 1. Establishing quantitative performance goals (LWBF, MTTR, service-life, defect level, etc.). 2. Implementing a product development management control and tracking activity to ensure timely outputs consistent with major design and program milestones. 3. Performing and implementing analyses and quality checks, audits, and controls to ensure that all test, inspection, and screen data are complete. 4. Performing a fully coordinated product development program, which emphasizes failure analysis and corrective action, and provides growth/ verification of specified design requirements. 5. Exposing design deficiencies and initiating corrective action in a timely manner. 6. Maximizing achieved availability to minimize overall life cycle costs and enhance the probability of commercial success. 7. Identifying, evaluating and eliminating design hazards and risks. 8. Applying historical data and lessons learned into the design process. 9. Minimizing unforeseen impacts on overall project cost and schedule. It is desirable to assure that the above factors (and others) are adequately considered during a product development test program. It is through the strategic planning that it is possible to initiate the “best” program. That is, one that ensures critical project decisions involving significant investment of resources are keyed to the achievement of specific reliability, safety, and quality requirements, as well as other performance requirements. Obviously, specific test program objectives are dependent on the technology under consideration, the nature of the product, the customer, and other factors as appropriate. But merely defining a test program strategy orients product development, and ultimately manufacture, toward a practical, serviceable, and affordable commercial product. The expert system output is a baseline test program structure which includes characteristic parameter values and ranges for each of the basic test categories. This strategically defined test program is then tailored, as necessary, to meet the specific product development project’s needs while adhering to cost and time constraints. Regardless of which baseline structure is selected, the basic concept of a strategically well-planned, logically structured and phased test program, where each subsequent test is designed to reflect the knowledge gained during the proceeding test and design effort, applies. The expert system provides assurance that the cornerstone (i.e., test program) of a successful product development project is put in place. 3.6.2 Putting System Together The very first task in the expert system development process is to identify the domain, the domain expert and the knowledge expert. The domain of the system must Anna University Chennai 166
  • 167. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT be properly scoped out, well defined, sufficiently focused, and capable of solution by the use of expertise. A domain expert, or experts, must be found; either a person who NOTES can solve the task, a collection of well documented case studies, or perhaps a good textbook. A knowledge engineer, or someone willing to learn to become one, must be appointed to the task. Finally, the appropriate development platform must be acquired which can be an expert system shell with some sort of development environment. The physical expert system is then developed via the following steps. Step I—Structural Design Step 2—Knowledge Acquisition Step 3—Coding Step 4—Validation Step 5—Growth The result is a working expert system Review Questions: 1. Expand 3C’s. 2. Discuss the steps through which the Physical Expert System is developed. 3.7 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND DRAWING 3.7.1 Introduction When we think of Computer Aided Design and Drafting (CADD), certain questions arise that we never think of while working on the drawing board. We do not use the essential drawing board tools: paper, pencil, T-square, compass, eraser or scale, yet still have to design or make a drawing. When even one of these tools is missing we know how aggravating it can be. With CADD we don’t need even one of them! CADD is an electronic tool that enables you to make quick and accurate drawings with the use of a computer. Unlike the traditional methods of making drawings on a drawing board, with CADD you can sit back in an easy chair and create wonderful drawings just by clicking the buttons of a keyboard. Moreover, drawings created with CADD have a number of advantages over drawings created on a drawing board. CADD drawings are neat, clean and highly presentable. Electronic drawings can be modified quite easily and can be presented in a variety of formats. A decade ago, CADD was used only for specific engineering applications that required high precision. Due to CADD’s high price, only a few professionals could afford it. In recent years, however, computer prices have decreased significantly and more and more professionals are taking advantage of CADD. 167 Anna University Chennai
  • 168. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES There are hundreds of CADD programs available in the CADD industry today. Some are intended for general drawing work while others are focused on specific engineering applications. There are programs that enable you to do 2D drawings, 3D drawings, renderings, shadings, engineering calculations, space planning, structural design, piping layouts, plant design, project management, etc. There is a CADD program for virtually every engineering discipline you can think of. CADD is primarily intended for single-line drafting. It has very limited capabilities to create artistic impressions. However, CADD’s 3D and rendering features are fascinating. You can create a 3D model of an object and view it from any angle. With proper shading and rendering, it can be made to look picture perfect! 3.7.2 What to Expect from CADD? You can do amazing things with CADD that you never thought possible while creating drawings with a pen or pencil. The following are some of the important capabilities that make CADD a powerful tool: o Presentations o Flexibility in editing o Units & accuracy levels o Storage and access for drawings o Sharing CADD drawings o Project reporting o Engineering analysis o Computer Aided Manufacturing (CAM) o Design o Add-on programs Presentations You can create fine drawings with hundreds of colors, line types, hatch patterns, presentation symbols, text styles, etc. Even if you don’t like something about your presentation after you have finished it, you can instantly change it. It takes only a few simple steps to change the text style, color or line type and you can print a fresh copy of the drawing every time. This kind of luxury is available only when working with CADD. There are a number of ready-made presentation symbols and hatch patterns available in CADD that can be used to enhance the look of drawings. For example, a site planner can instantly add tree symbols, shrubs, pathways, human figures, and other landscape elements to create a site plan. Similarly, an architect can use ready-made symbols of doors, windows, furniture, etc., to make a presentation. In addition to preparing impressive presentations on paper, you can use CADD to make on-screen presentations. You can plug your computer into a projector and present your ideas on-screen. Advanced CADD programs allow you to created animated Anna University Chennai 168
  • 169. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT images as well. You can illustrate how a building would appear while walking through it, NOTES or how a machine assembly will operate when different machine parts move. Flexibility in Editing CADD provides the flexibility to make quick alterations to drawings. You can erase any portion of a drawing with pinpoint accuracy. It takes only seconds to do a job that could take hours on a drawing board. In many cases, you do not even have to erase to make the change. You can rearrange the existing components of the drawing to fit the new shape. This enables you to analyze design options with minimal effort. The following are some of the editing capabilities of CADD: o Move or copy drawing elements. o Enlarge or reduce parts of a drawing. o Add one drawing to another. o Stretch a drawing to fit new dimensions. o Make multiple copies of a drawing element. o Change the size, style and fonts of text. o Change units of measure of dimensions. Units & Accuracy Levels CADD allows you work with great accuracy. If you need to create highly accurate geometrical shapes, CADD is the answer. It can help avoid time-consuming mathematical calculations. You can work with different units of measure, such as architectural units, engineering units, scientific units and surveyor’s units. These units can be represented in various formats commonly used by professionals. Example 3.4: When working with engineering units, you can specify whether all the dimensions should be represented in inches, feet-inches, centimeters, or meters. Similarly, you can choose angular units of measurement such as decimal degrees, minutes, seconds or radians. You can set an extremely high accuracy for the units of measurement. You can work with as high precision as 1/1000th of an inch! However, such accuracy is seldom required; you will often need to set it to a lesser accuracy to avoid unnecessary fractions. In general, when you need to work on a large scale drawing such as a plan of a township, you may want to set a lesser degree of accuracy, say 1'-0". The computer will round off all the measurements to the next foot and you won’t see any fractions less than a foot. When you need to work on a minute detail, you can set a higher degree of accuracy such as 1/8th or 1/64th of an inch. 169 Anna University Chennai
  • 170. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Storage and Access of Drawings It is quick and convenient to organize for a CADD drawing in the computer. You can have thousands of drawings on a computer’s hard disk and can open any one of them within seconds. A computer’s electronic filing system has the following advantages over the traditional filing system: o It enables you to create a highly organized environment o It contributes to large savings in working space o An electronic drawing never gets old and faded. Any time you need a drawing, you can print a new copy from disks. Sharing CADD Drawings The electronic drawings can be shared by a number of users, allowing them to coordinate their tasks and work as a team. This is accomplished by connecting different computers via a network. Example 3.5: In a building project, different professionals such as architects, engineers and construction managers can use the same electronic drawings to coordinate building services. If a change is made to the drawings, this information becomes available to all the team members instantly. With the use of modems and the Internet, it has become far easier to share information. Professionals located in different cities can instantly send electronic drawings via telephone lines. You can publish your drawings on the Internet for anyone to see. Most CADD programs include special functions that allow you to export drawings in a format that can be viewed on the Internet. Project Reporting The computer can be used to prepare project reports such as records of areas, quantities and cost estimates. Using the database capabilities of CADD, you can link specific non-graphic information (such as text or value) with the graphic elements of the drawing. The non-graphic information is stored in a database and can be used to prepare reports. Example 3.6: An architect can attach text attributes associated with the symbols of doors and windows in a drawing. The attributes can describe the size of the door, material, hardware, cost, etc. Later on the computer can automatically prepare a door schedule listing all the doors and windows in the drawing! Anna University Chennai 170
  • 171. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT The non-graphic information is directly linked with the graphics on the screen. NOTES When a change is made to the drawing, the values in the reports are updated automatically. This provides a useful means to manage large projects from design through project completion. There is a special category of software called Computer Aided Facility Management (CAFM) designed for project management. These programs can import information from CADD drawings and allow you to add attributes to drawing elements to build a database. The database can be used to prepare project reports in a number of formats. Engineering Analysis CADD drawings can be used to perform specific engineering analysis. There is a separate category of programs called Computer Aided Engineering (CAE) that can use CADD drawings for engineering analysis. Example3.7: A structural engineer can use a CAE program to test the design of structural components in different conditions. The engineer can instantly analyze the impact on structural members when a different load is applied to the structure or the spacing between the members is changed. Similarly, there are programs for mechanical engineers to test machine assemblies. The mechanical engineer can create a prototype electronic model and test it without building a physical model. The advanced engineering programs even provide the ability to link calculations with the geometry on the screen. This capability is known as “parametric design” that allows the computer to automatically update the graphics when the associated calculations are changed and vice versa. Computer Aided Manufacturing (CAM) CADD extends its power to yet another branch of engineering called Computer Aided Manufacturing (CAM). CAM is a common method of manufacturing used by large corporations. CADD and manufacturing programs are often integrated into one system called CAD-CAM. These systems import CADD drawings into CAM programs to automate the manufacturing process. Example 3.8: An engineer can draw a machine part using CADD. The CADD drawing is brought into a computer aided engineering (CAE) program for engineering analysis. When the design is finalized, the drawing is brought into a CAD-CAM system that uses numerical data from the CADD drawing for actual manufacturing. Design CADD provides a convenient means to create designs for almost every engineering discipline. It can be used for architectural design, landscape design, interior design, civil and surveying, mechanical design, electrical engineering, plant design, 171 Anna University Chennai
  • 172. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES industrial design, duct design, electronic circuit design, plumbing design, textile design and product design. CADD’s drafting capabilities provide ample means to create a design scheme. You can create designs with great accuracy and have the flexibility to easily edit them. This allows you to quickly prepare design alternatives. In addition to the drafting capabilities of CADD, there are special programs that can analyze designs or even create new ones. These programs use artificial intelligence to “think” and make design decisions. The design capabilities of CADD are available only in advanced CADD programs. There are only a few such programs available. Design programs are usually not generic. They often need to be custom-written to accomplish a specific task. See Chapter 9 “Maximizing CADD” for discussion on design programs. Add-on Programs There are a number of separate programs available that can enhance the power of CADD. The add-on programs work as an extension of CADD to accomplish specific tasks. Today, there are hundreds of add-on programs available for popular CADD programs. An architectural add-on program can allow you to instantly draw symbols of doors, windows, kitchens, bathrooms, staircases, etc. Shading and rendering program can be used to enhance the look of 3D images. A plumbing design program includes special functions to draw pipes, drains and plumbing joints. A civil engineering program includes special features to work with contours and land development; the list goes on and on. Most manufacturers market CADD programs in separate modules. They sell a basic drafting module for a certain price with the options to add on other modules. There are a number of add-on programs available from independent vendors as well. 3.7.3 A Look at the CADD Industry There are hundreds of CADD programs available in the CADD industry today. Most of them are simply drafting programs, while some offer certain engineering analysis, design or database capabilities. Some programs are more elaborate than others. You can purchase a CADD program with just the basic drawing capabilities for as little as $200. These are called low-end programs and are commonly used for general drawing work. Another category of software is mid-range. This category offers advanced drafting techniques such as layers, 3D, basic database capabilities, advanced dimensioning and many automated drawing features. Architecture and engineering design Anna University Chennai 172
  • 173. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT firms commonly use mid-range software. About 80% of all the CADD programs fall NOTES into this category and there is immense competition in this market. Their prices vary significantly. There are a few advanced CADD programs available, which are commonly used by large corporations for manufacturing. These programs include integrated features such as solid modeling, engineering analysis, design, database and project management. These are called high-end programs. Most of the time they are customized to meet the specific requirements of the corporation. These programs are priced quite high. Summary You would have now understood the differences between the 3 levels of management and usage of CAD and Expert System in the strategic level activity, namely product design and development. In this unit the exponential weighted average method, for all the components of Time series analysis are discussed. In addition your exposed to qualitative technique like Market survey, Expert opinion, Delphi technique. In this section, the different methods of aggregate planning are elucidated for your understanding. Review Questions: 1. What is CADD? 2. List the major capabilities of CADD. 173 Anna University Chennai
  • 174. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES UNIT IV SCHEDULING AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT METHODS 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Learning Objective 4.3 Scheduling 4.3.1 Resources Allocation 4.4 Sequencing 4.4.1 Sequencing “n” jobs / single machine problem 4.4.2 Sequencing “n” jobs / two machines problem - Johnson’s Algorithm 4.4.3 Extension of Johnson’s Rule 4.4.4 M machines and N jobs: 4.5 Project Scheduling 4.5.1 Planning 4.5.2 Project network scheduling 4.6 Resource scheduling Anna University Chennai 174
  • 175. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT UNIT - 4 NOTES SCHEDULING AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT METHODS 4.1 INTRODUCTION This unit deals with the operations levels of management namely scheduling activity. The job shop scheduling and project scheduling are also discussed in detail. 4.2 LEARNING OBEJECTIVE 1. To understand the phases of scheduling namely resource allocation and scheduling. 2. To comprehend the resources allocation techniques. 3. To know the various sequencing technique to different job shop types. 4. To understand the project management techniques and their application. 4.3 SCHEDULING This is the lower level activity in the operation planning and control. The output of aggregate planning goes as input to the scheduling activity. The aggregate demand is broken down into individual product requirement. Figure 4.1 - Scheduling 175 Anna University Chennai
  • 176. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Based on the information mentioned in the figure, resource allocation and se- quencing activities are carried out. Scheduling is considered to be an important activity because if this activity is not carried out properly, there is more waiting time that results in delayed delivery time which in turn affects the customer satisfaction. The through put time increases because of the more waiting time. Thus the longest through put time may be due to the more waiting time of the product for the operation because the workcenter where the pro- cess is demanded is engaged by the other product. The above situation paves the way for more work in progress (WIP) inventory. Thus the scheduling activities determine many important objectives of the organization. So, this is the activity which is getting lot of importance nowadays. 4.3.1 Resources Allocation Based on the process requirement and the available resources, in the first phase of scheduling, resources are allocated for different jobs based on the availability and time requirement when there is no splitting of the orders. This process may be carried out using the Assignment method. Assignment Model Assignment model is considered to be one of the resource allocation tech- niques. If you want to apply assignment model for resource allocation, the number of process centers should be equal to the number of jobs to be assigned. This problem could be treated as a maximization or minimization problem, based on the type of entry in the cell. If the entry in the cell is profit etc., then it should be considered as a maximi- zation problem. If the entry is processing time etc., then the problem is considered as a minimization problem. In this model, once a job is assigned to a work center, then the job and the assigned work center should not be considered for further assignment. This kind of problem can be solved by a well known method called Hungarian method. You would have studied Hungarian model in Operation research. Consider the following resource allocation problem. 4.4 SEQUENCING 4.4.4.1 Sequencing “n” jobs / single machine problem Normally, the total number of jobs exceeds the number of work centers. Therefore, Priority Rules should be developing to determine the sequencing of ma- chining operations. The Priority Rules come into picture when many jobs or opera- tions are chasing for the same capacity. Factors to be considered in setting priorities for jobs include: a. Customer satisfaction. b. Order urgency c. Order profitability Anna University Chennai 176
  • 177. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT d. Impact on capacity utilization NOTES e. Shop performance The most popular priority rules are • First come fist served (FCFS) • Shortest processing time (SPT) • Earliest due date (EDD) • Least slack (LS) An example for working of these rules. Example 4.1 The following table is the required time and due time in days attached to Five jobs waiting in queue to share a same work center. Table 4.1 Job Required Time (Days) Due Date (Days hence) A 2 4 B 5 5 C 1 3 D 4 6 E 6 7 Solution • First come first served rule (FCFS) According to this principle, the job which comes first to the workcenter will occupy the machine first. Table 4.2 Job Required Due Date Processing Period Completion Days Late Time (Days) (Days hence) (Start+Req.) date A 2 4 0+2 2 0 B 5 5 2+5 7 2 C 1 3 7+1 8 5 D 4 6 8+4 12 6 E 6 7 12+6 18 11 Sum 18 47 24 177 Anna University Chennai
  • 178. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Average throughput time = 47/5 = 9.4 days Average number jobs in the work center = 47/18 = 2.611 jobs Average number of days late= 24/5 = 4.8 days • Shortest processing time (SPT) According to this principle, the job which is having shortest processing time will occupy the machine first. Table 4.3 Job Required Due Date Processing Period Completion Days Late Time (Days) (Days hence) (Start+Req.) date C 1 3 0+1 1 0 A 2 4 1+2 3 0 D 4 6 3+4 7 1 B 5 5 7+5 12 7 E 6 7 12+6 18 11 Sum 18 41 19 Average throughput time = 41/5 = 8.2 days Average number jobs in the work center = 41/18 = 2.277 jobs Average number of days late= 19/5 = 3.8 days • Earliest due date (EDD) According to this principle the job with earliest due date will occupy the ma- chine first regardless of job arrival or processing time. Table 4.4 Job Required Due Date Processing Period Completion Days Late Time (Days) (Days hence) (Start+Req.) date C 1 3 0+1 1 0 A 2 4 1+2 3 0 B 5 5 3+5 8 3 D 4 6 8+4 12 6 E 6 7 12+6 18 11 Sum 18 42 20 Average throughput time = 42/5 = 8.4 days Average number jobs in the work center = 42/18 = 2.333 jobs Average number of days late= 20/5 = 4 days • Least slack (LS) Anna University Chennai 178
  • 179. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Least slack is the time difference between time remaining and work time required. According to this principle, the job with least slack time will occupy the machine first. NOTES Slack = time remaining until due date - process time remaining Table 4.5 Job Required Due Date Slack Time Processing Period Completion Days Time (Days) (Days hence) (Days) (Start+Req.) date Late B 5 5 0 0+5 5 0 E 6 7 1 5+6 11 4 C 1 3 2 11+1 12 9 A 2 4 2 12+2 14 10 D 4 6 2 14+4 18 12 Sum 18 60 35 Average throughput time = 60/5 = 12 days Average number jobs in the work center = 60/18 = 3.333 jobs Average number of days late= 35/5 = 7 days Summary Table: Scheduling with Priority Rules Table 4.6 Performance Dimension FCFS SPT EDD LS Average throughput time 9.4 8.2 8.4 12 Average number jobs in the work center 2.611 2.277 2.333 3.333 Average number of days late 4.8 3.8 4 7 Research has shown that Shortest processing time (SPT) has the good priority rule to follow for job scheduling. This rule results in the shortest manufacturing lead time, therefore, lowest work-in process inventory. It will often minimize the average throughput time so minimum number jobs in the system. The queue position changes with the arrival of new jobs, this makes to follow the Shortest processing time (SPT) in real time scenario. First come first served (FCFS) becomes the only practical solution to the scheduling. Earliest due date (EDD) might prefer when jobs must meet up with other outputs later in an assembly. Critical ratio Critical ratio is one of the priority rule which helps the scheduler to know about which job should be given priority for the production in a job shop. The informations required for using the technique are: 1. The number of jobs to be processed. 179 Anna University Chennai
  • 180. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 2. The production calendar. NOTES 3. The requirement date for the jobs. 4. The processing time remaining. From the above information, you can calculate the critical ratio- Critical ratio = (date required – today’s date) / days needed to complete the job. This ratio tells you about the urgency attached with the each job. If the critical ratio is a dimensionless index. If the index = 1, that means the job is on schedule, if the index is less than 1 that means that the job is behind the schedule. It needs much attention and priority should be given for the job. If the index is greater than 1 then the job is ahead of the schedule. Problem 1. Suppose there are 6 jobs. Today is the 40th day on production calendar other information are given in the table. Provide the sequence in which the jobs are to be processed using critical ratio technique. Table 4.7 Job Days required Processing time remaining (days) 1 50 3 2 48 4 3 45 3 4 43 2 5 42 4 6 41 3 Solution Table 4.8 Job Critical ratio 1 (50-40)/3 = 3.3 2 (48-40)/3 = 2.0 3 (45-40)/3 = 1.6 4 (43-40)/3 = 1.0 5 (42-40)/3 = 0.5 6 (41-40)/3 = 0.3 From the above problem, you can conclude that jobs 1,2 and 3 are ahead of schedules. Job 4 is on schedule. But job 5 and 6 are behind the schedules. So job 6 should be given first priority than job 5 should be given next priority. Anna University Chennai 180
  • 181. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 4.4.2 Sequencing “n” jobs / two machines problem - Johnson’s Algorithm NOTES The two machine flow shop problem with the objective of minimizing makespan is also known as Johnson’s problem. The results originally obtained by Johnson are now standard fundamentals in the theory of scheduling. In the formulation of this prob- lem, job j is characterized by processing time tj1, required on machine 1, and tj2, required on machine 2 after the operation on machine 1 is complete. An optimal sequence can be characterized by the following rule for ordering pairs of jobs. Johnson’s Rule: Job i proceeds job j in an optimal sequence if Min (ti1, tj2) <= min (ti2, tj1) In practice, an optimal sequence is directly constructed with an adaptation of this result. The positions in sequence are filled by a one- pass mechanism that identifies, at each stage, a job that should fill either the first or last available position. Algorithm: STEP 1 : Find min (ti1, ti2). STEP 2a: If the minimum processing time requires machine 1, place the associated job in the first available position in sequence. Go to step3. STEP 2b : If the minimum processing time requires machine 2, place the associated job in the last available position in sequence. Go to step3. STEP 3 : Remove the assigned job from consideration and return to step 1 until all positions in sequence are filled. (Ties may be broken arbitrarily.) To illustrate the algorithm, consider the five – job problem shown in table as follows. The accompanying work- sheet shows how an optimal sequence is constructed in five stages using the Algorithm. At each stage, the minimum processing time among unscheduled jobs must be identified. Then step 2 assigns one or more positions in the sequence, and the process is repeated. Problem statement: The following table shows the five jobs to be allocated in two machines and their respective processing time in the two machines. Table 4.9 Job j 1 2 3 4 5 Tj1(min) 3 5 1 6 7 Tj2(min) 6 2 2 6 5 181 Anna University Chennai
  • 182. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Solution: Table 4.10 Stages Unscheduled jobs Minimum tik Assignment Partial schedule 1 1,2,3,4,5 T31 3=[1] 3xxxx 2 1,2,4,5 T22 2=[5] 3xxx2 3 1,4,5 T11 1=[2] 3-1 x x 2 4 4,5 T52 5=[4] 3-1 x 5-2 5 4 T41= T42 4=[3] 3-1-4-5-2 The sequence that emerges is 3-1-4-5-2. 4.4.3 Extension of Johnson’s Rule Johnson’s Rule to Three machines: Consider a three machines and n jobs problem. Table 4.11 Job 1 2 3 . . i . n Machine1 t11 t21 t31 . . ti1 . tn1 Machine2 t12 t22 t32 . . ti2 . tn2 Machine3 t13 t23 t33 . . ti3 . tn3 Johnson rule can be applied to three machines when the problem exhibits ‘Domi- nance’. Dominance can be understood when a situation of n jobs with three machines and a processing order requirement of M1, M2, M3 follows for all the jobs, with the following condition holds good Minimum of or Minimum of Where is the operation time for job i in machine j. If any one of the above conditions satisfied then we say the problem exhibited Dominance. We will combine the operating times of machines as follows Anna University Chennai 182
  • 183. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT are the new operating time of machine1 and machine2. NOTES The optimal solution for the above problem is obtained through Johnson’s rule. Converting the three machine problem into a two machine problem. Table 4.12 Job 1 2 3 . . i . n Machine1 t11+t12 t21+t22 t31+t32 . . ti1+ti2 . tn1+tn2 Machine2 t12+t13 t22+t23 t32+t33 . . ti2+ti3 . tn2+tn3 Now apply Johnson’s rule to machine-1 and machine-2 to obtain optimal sequence. Practice problem: Table 4.13 1. A company is faced with five tasks that have to be processed through three work centers. Assume work centers works continuously and that they are using Johnson’s rule. Data appear below in minutes: Task A B C D E Workstation 1 10 8 15 7 12 Workstation 2 6 4 3 2 5 Workstation 3 8 11 6 10 9 Johnson rule can be applied to three machines when the problem exhibits ‘Domi- nance’. So check for Dominance. Minimum of or Minimum of Minimum of =7 Minimum of =6 =6 The above conditions satisfied and the problem exhibited Dominance. We will combine the operating times of machines as follows: Converting a three machine problem into a two machine problem. 183 Anna University Chennai
  • 184. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Table 4.14 NOTES Task A B C D E Workstation 1 16 12 18 9 17 Workstation 2 14 15 9 12 14 By applying Johnson’s rule the optimal sequence is as follows: D - B - A - E - C (or) D - B - E - A - C Finding of Make span is as follows : Table 4.15 Task Time D B A E C Workstation1 In 0 7 15 25 37 Out 7 15 25 37 52 Workstation2 In 7 15 25 37 52 Out 9 19 31 42 55 Workstation3 In 9 19 31 42 55 Out 19 30 39 51 61 Idle Time of Total Idle time W/S 2 7 6 6 6 10 35 W/S 3 9 0 1 3 4 17 The Make span of the above optimal sequence is 61 minutes. 4.4.4 M machines and N jobs: Johnson’s algorithm and Multiple Machines Johnson’s method only works optimally for two machines. However, since it is optimal, and easy to compute. Johnson’s rule can be tried to adopt it for M machines, (M > 2). All the methods developed for the m machines and n jobs are heuristic in nature. The heuristics methods are based on a logic based and thumb rules. Which may not be an optimal solution, but a better solution will be provide. For jobs scheduled in flow shop of more than three machines, no optimal solu- tion except exhaust search has ever been proposed. Campbell, Dudek and Smith proposed a heuristic method named CDS algorithm to achieve a nearly minimum make span in the CDS method. Anna University Chennai 184
  • 185. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Assumptions: NOTES 1. Jobs are not preemptive. 2. Each job has m tasks to be executed in sequence on m. 3. Given a set of n independent jobs, each having m executed in the same se- quence on m machines (PI, Pz, ...,P,.), scheduling seeks the minimum completion time of the last job. Algorithm: 1. Create (m-1) stages. 2. Each stage should have 2 workstations. 3. Apply Johnson’s rule for each pair of workstations created by certain conditions. 4. From all the (m-1) sequences find out the make span of each sequence. 5. Choose the best among the (m-1) sequences which yields low make span or flow time. NOTE: We should be careful in determining the make span. The original processing time required by the job on m machines are to be taken into consideration in evaluating the make span but not the converted time for the workstations. Let us consider a four machines and n jobs problem. Table 4.16 Job 1 2 3 . . i . n Machine1 t11 t21 t31 . . ti1 . tn1 Machine2 t12 t22 t32 . . ti2 . tn2 Machine3 t13 t23 t33 . . ti3 . tn3 Machine4 t14 t24 t34 . . ti4 . tn4 Follow the CDS algorithm step by step. In this problem the numbers of machines are 4. We should generate (4-1) =3 sequences. The first sequence will come from workstation-1 and workstation2. Here workstation- 1 is equals to machine-1 and workstation-2 equals to machine-4 in operating time. Table 4.17 Job 1 2 3 . . i . n Workstation1 t11 t21 t31 . . ti1 . tn1 Workstation2 t14 t24 t34 . . ti4 . tn4 185 Anna University Chennai
  • 186. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT The second sequence will come from workstation-1 and workstation2. Here worksta- NOTES tion-1 is equals to machine-1&2 and workstation-2 equals to machine-4&3 in operat- ing time. Table 4.18 Job 1 2 3 . . i . n Workstation 1 t11+t12 t21+t22 t31+t32 . . ti1+ti2 . tn1+tn2 Workstation 2 t14+t13 t24+t23 t34+t33 . . ti4+ti3 . tn4+tn3 The third sequence will come from workstation-1 and workstation2. Here workstation-1 is equals to machine-1+2+3 and workstation-2 equals to machine-4+3+2 in operating time. Table 4.19 Job 1 2 3 . . i . n Workstation1 t11+t12+t13 t21+t22+t23 t31+t32+t33 . . ti1+ti2+ti3 . tn1+tn2+tn3 Workstation2 t14+t13+t12 t24+t23+t22 t34+t33+t32 . . ti4+ti3+ti2 . tn4+tn3+tn2 Apply Johnson’s rule to the above feasible sequences. Choose the least make span among the above sequences. Practice problem: 1. A company is faced with four jobs that have to be processed through four machines. Assume machines works continuously. Data appear below in min- utes Table 4.20 Job A B C D Machine1 3 2 1 4 Machine2 3 2 4 3 Machine3 3 1 4 3 Machine4 3 2 2 2 Follow the CDS algorithm step by step. This problem is a 4 of machines. So we should generate (4-1) =3 sequences. The first sequence will come from workstation-1 and workstation2. Here work- station-1 is equals to machine-1 and workstation-2 equals to machine-4 in operating tim. Anna University Chennai 186
  • 187. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Table 4.21 NOTES Job A B C D Workstation1 3 2 1 4 Workstation2 3 2 2 2 By applying Johnson’s rule the optimal sequence for the above setup is C - B -A– D The second sequence will come from workstation-1 and workstation2. Here work- station-1 is equals to machine-1&2 and workstation-2 equals to machine-4&3 in operating time. Table 4.22 Job A B C D Workstation1 6 4 5 7 Workstation2 6 3 6 5 By applying Johnson’s rule the optimal sequence for the above setup is C -A– D – B The third sequence will come from workstation-1 and workstation2. Here worksta- tion-1 is equals to machine-1+2+3 and workstation-2 equals to machine-4+3+2 in operating time. Table 4.23 Job A B C D Workstation1 9 5 9 10 Workstation2 9 5 10 8 By applying Johnson’s rule the optimal sequence for the above setup is B -A– C – D Find out the make span of each sequence obtained above. For the first sequence C - B - A – D 187 Anna University Chennai
  • 188. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Table 4.24 NOTES Job Time C B A D Machine1 In 0 1 3 6 Out 1 3 6 10 Machine2 In 1 5 6 10 Out 5 7 9 13 Machine3 In 5 9 10 13 Out 9 10 13 16 Machine4 In 9 11 13 16 Out 11 13 16 18 The make span time is 18. For the second sequence C - A – D – B Table 4.25 Job Time C A D B Machine1 In 0 1 4 8 Out 1 4 8 10 Machine2 In 1 5 8 11 Out 5 8 11 13 Machine3 In 5 9 12 15 Out 9 12 15 16 Machine4 In 9 12 15 17 Out 11 15 17 19 The make span time is 19. For the third sequence B - A – C - D Table 4.26 Job Time B A C D Machine1 In 0 2 5 6 Out 2 5 6 10 Machine2 In 2 5 8 12 Out 4 8 12 15 Machine3 In 4 8 12 16 Out 5 11 16 19 Machine4 In 5 11 16 19 Out 7 14 18 21 The make span time is 21. Anna University Chennai 188
  • 189. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Decision Table NOTES Table 4.27 S.no. sequence Make span Selection 1 C-B-A-D 18 v 2 C-A-D-B 19 Õ 3 B-A-C-D 21 Õ Among the feasible sequences C-B-A-D is the best sequence with the make span of 18 minutes. Review Question: 1. Explain the two phases of scheduling. 2. Which priority rule is the best rule for sequencing for a single machine problem where the customer satisfaction is an important objective? 4.5 PROJECT SCHEDULING In the previous sections you have seen how do you schedule the mass produc- tion, job shop production. In this section you can see how do you schedule project type of production. To schedule project type of production, during the World War II US defense people developed a technique known as PERT, stands for Program Evalu- ation and Review Technique to develop a missile. Here the development of a missile is a project and to plan and schedule the above said project, US defense personnel developed a PERT technique. After devel- oping PERT technique, US defense people developed another technique known as CPM. CPM stands for Critical Path Method to plan and schedule of certain type of projects. PERT techniques is a applied mainly for new project at which you don’t have any experience that is why the time estimate for each activity of the project revolves around three time estimate (e.g.) PERT usually applied for the following projects, - Planning and scheduling of new product. - Development of missile. - Development of launching of rockets. But CPM is applied for known projects like - The construction of building. - The manufacture and assembly of motors. - The maintenance project. 189 Anna University Chennai
  • 190. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Difference between PERT and CPM NOTES Table 4.28 S.No Characteristics CPM PERT 1. Type of projects Known Unknown 2. Time estimate Single time estimate Three time estimate 3. Time Non random variable Random variable 4. Nature of the time estimate Deterministic Probabilistic 5. Type of network Activity oriented network Event oriented network A project as already mentioned consists of many activities. The activities are interlinked together to achieve the common objectives like time, cost and standard of performance. CPM and PERT techniques are considered to be project management techniques which enable the project manager to plan and schedule the project. They are also called project network planning and scheduling technique. In the next section you can know about the network planning and scheduling. 4.5.1 Planning Jobs to be carried out in the planning 1) List the activities involved in the project, 2) Estimate the time requirement and cost requirement for each activity, 3) Find the relationship between the activities, 4) Based on the relationship draw the precedence diagram, 5) Draw the network based on the precedence diagram. The output of the planning activities will be as follows : Precedence relation with time and cost data Table 4.29 Activities Immediate predecessor Cost Time a. - 5000 4 b. - 4000 5 c. - 10,000 1 d. a, b 7000 3 e. c 6000 2 f. e 10,000 5 In a project, the activity is represented as follows: Anna University Chennai 190
  • 191. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 4.2 NOTES Activity description 1 2 Time Suppose an activity consists of test marketing. This is represented as Figure 4.3 Test Marketing 1 2 Time 1. The tail node of the arrow should carry small number than the head of the arrow. In this case tail node carry number1 and the head node carry num- ber2. 2. Two activities should not have common initial node and common end node. Figure 4.4 a 1 2 b This is not permitted if this kind of situation arises, then you should introduce a dummy activity as follows: Figure 4.5 d 1 3 ‘d’ is the dummy ,it does not consume any resources. It is introduced just to show the relationship. 1. When you draw the network, all the starting activities should start at one start- ing node. Similarly at the end all the ending activities should culminate at one node. 191 Anna University Chennai
  • 192. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 4.6 NOTES 2 1 3 5 6 4 In the above network, all the starting activities are emanating from node 1 and all the ending activities are namely (2 - 6, 5 - 6, 4 - 6) are culminated at node 6. 4.5.2 Project network scheduling In this phase, you should decide about whether the network is treated as an activity oriented network or event oriented network. An event is nothing but, a milestone of a network. A project network could be treated as an activity oriented network, only when, as a project manger, you should know in detail about the every activity of the project, namely, the estimated time of the each activity, and how to complete each activity etc. Otherwise, if you are not so experienced with the project, then you should treat the project as an event oriented project. In the event oriented project, you don’t bother about the progress of the activity. You should bother about the starting and completion time of the activity and then the project. For example- Test marketing. If you treat this job as an activity then the description is test marketing. Then you should find out the earliest starting time, latest starting time, earliest finishing time and latest finishing time. Suppose you treat the test marketing as an event oriented one, then you should find out the earliest and latest starting time, the earliest and latest finishing time of the test marketing event. With this information, now you can see what you should do in the scheduling of the project network. Steps: 1. Find the earliest starting time, earliest finishing time for activity, and latest starting time and latest finishing time for activity oriented network. 2. Find the earliest starting time, earliest finishing time for event, and latest starting time and latest finishing time for event, for event oriented network. Anna University Chennai 192
  • 193. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Forward pass Method NOTES In forward pass method, the earliest starting time and earliest finishing time are calculated. EFij = ESij + tij = Earliest finish time of activity i,j ESij = Earliest starting time of activity i,j tij = Time duration of the activity i,j You may have problem in calculation of ES of scheduled activity only when many activities lead into a particular node and one or many activities emanating from that particular node as shown below: Figure 4.7 14 5 13 15 7 EFij 9 Assume Table 4.30 Activity Earliest Start Earliest Finish Time Duration (ES) (EF) 5-13 4 7 3 7-13 7 11 4 9-13 6 8 2 Earliest start of activity 13 – 14  EF5−3  7      ES13−14 = max  EF7−13  = max 11 = 14 (i.e)  EF  14  9−13    193 Anna University Chennai
  • 194. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES The reason for considering the maximum time is that as per the technological constraint the succeeding activity will be started only after the completion of all the preceding activities. Backward pass method In the backward pass method, from the end node of the project the latest start and the latest finish are calculated. You should start with the earliest completion time of the project as the latest completion time of the project then you should work backward, so that you can deduce the latest starting time for each activity. LS IJ = LFij − tij LS IJ = Latest starting time for the activity i-j LFij = Latest finishing time for the activity i-j tij = Time duration of the activity i-j In the latest finish time calculated, you may face some problem because many activities may emanate from a particular node as shown in the diagram. 6 2 4 3 5 Assume Table 4.31 Activity Latest Start (LS) 4-6 15 4-7 20 4-5 18 Now, to find the latest finish of activity 2-4 and 3-4, consider all the latest start time of all the activities emanating from the node four and consider the minimum latest starting time because, In the worst case, if all the succeeding activities starts at the latest starting time then the lowest latest starting time of the succeeding activity becomes latest finish- ing time of the preceding activities. Anna University Chennai 194
  • 195. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES (i.e)  LS 4−6 = 15    LF34 = min  LS 4−7 = 20 = LF2−4 = 15 Similarly  LS = 18   4 −5  3. Identify the critical path. The critical path is the longest path in the net- work. 4. Identify the float or slack for each activity/ event of the network. 5. Carry out the time- cost trade off and if possible crash the project. 6. Carry out the resource scheduling. In scheduling to carry out the above activity, you need to apply (PERT/ CPM) techniques. First you can see the application of the critical path method in the following example. Why a manger should know about latest start and latest finish of each activity of a project? This is because sometimes more than one activity may compete for one resource. In this case, if you know the latest start and latest finish, the resource which is in question will be immediately allocated to the activity which could not be delayed, rather than to the activity which could be delayed. This is one of the reasons for the usage of float. LS 4−6 = 15    Identification of float: LF2− 4 = min LS 4−7 = 20 = LF2− 4 = 15 LS = Float is the leeway available for the manager to schedule the scarce re-  sources to18 activity based on the float availability. This means, if an activity has zero  4−5 the float, that activity should be given preference in terms of allocating the resources, that too, when the other activities which possess float compete for the same resources. Now, you can see how the above explained project network planning and scheduling is elucidated with an example. Problem statement Table 4.32 Consider the product development project. This project consists of following activities. Activity Symbol Preceding Activity Time estimate (days) Demand estimation A - 3 Development of pricing strategy B - 1 Product design C - 5 Conduct, promotional cost analysis D - 1 Manufacture prototype model E C 6 Perform product cost analysis F E 1 Perform final pricing analysis G B,D,F 2 Conduct Market test H G 8 195 Anna University Chennai
  • 196. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Solution NOTES Figure 4.9 Earliest starting and finishing time calculation using forward pass method: ESi = max [ 0, ES(i-1)], EFi = ESi + time duration. Table 4.33 Activity Early start (ESi) Early finish (EFi) A 0 3 B 0 1 C 0 5 D 0 1 E 5 11 F 11 12 G 12 14 H 14 22 Since three activities B,F and D are to be completed before G, we have to select the maximum of all the three early finish time of the predecessors. ESg = max [ EFb, EFf, EFd] Latest starting and finishing time calculation using forward pass method: LSa = Total completion time of the project - Ta, LFa = TCa Table 4.34 Activity Latest start (LSi) Latest finish (LFi) A 19 22 B 10 11 C 0 5 D 10 11 E 5 11 F 11 12 G 12 14 H 14 22 Anna University Chennai 196
  • 197. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Total float for each activity ‘i’ = LSi – ESi (or) LFi - EFi NOTES Table 4.35 Activity Total Float A 19 B 10 C 0 D 10 E 0 F 0 G 0 H 0 The above method of planning and scheduling a network is called Critical Path Method. The critical path for the mentioned problem is C- E- F-G-H. (The path in the project which has the maximum completion time). PERT: Suppose, if a project planner treats the problem, which is discussed in the previous section, as an unknown project in some other new product launch, the project planner has to estimate “three time estimate”, instead of “one time estimates”. The three time estimates for each activity are called optimistic time (to), the most likely time (tm), pessimistic time (tp). Optimistic time(to): It is the minimum time taken to complete the activity, if every thing goes well. Pessimistic time(tm): This is the maximum time to complete an activity, if most of the things go wrong. Most likely time (tp): In real life situation, not everything goes completely right or wrong. The most likely is the time with a more chance to complete the activity. For example, consider the following activity. 197 Anna University Chennai
  • 198. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Figure 4.10 Demand generation 2, 4, 6 Table 4.36 Symbol Activity Probability to 2 0.2 tm 4 0.7 tp 6 0.1 Beta distribution Figure 4.11 It is proved that the time estimate in the PERT method follows a Beta distribution. So the mean of the Beta distribution is Texpected = Te = (to + 4 x tm + tp) / 6 Variance for the activity, á2 = ((tp – to) / 6)2 2 A project planner, in addition to the estimation of standard, should know the variance of each activity; variance is a measure to measure the uncertainty about that activity. If the variance is high, this means that the project manager may not have much idea about the progress and completion of the activity. Let us see the application of PERT – model for the previous problem, with the informa- tion provided in the following table. Anna University Chennai 198
  • 199. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Table 4.37 NOTES Activity Symbol Time estimate (days) Optimistic (to) Most likely (tm) Pessimistic (tp) Demand estimation A 1 3 4 Development of B 1 1 2 pricing strategy Product design C 4 5 9 Conduct, promotional cost analysis D 1 1 1 Manufacture prototype model E 4 6 12 Perform product cost analysis F 1 1 2 Perform final pricing analysis G 1 2 3 Conduct Market test H 6 8 10 Step 1: Estimate the expected time and variance for each activity. Using 1 and 2 Table 4.38 Table 4.38 Activity ET VT A 2.834 0.25 B 1.167 0.027 C 5.5 0.694 D 1 0 E 6.67 1.78 F 1.167 0.027 G 2 0.11 H 8 0.44 Step 2: Network model: Figure 4.12 199 Anna University Chennai
  • 200. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Step 3: Earliest starting and finishing time calculation using forward pass method: ESi = max [0, ES (i-1)], EFi = ESi + time duration. Table 4.39 Activity Early start (ESi) Early finish (EFi) A 0 2.834 B 0 1.167 C 0 5.5 D 0 1 E 5.5 12.17 F 12.17 13.34 G 13.34 15.34 H 15.34 23.34 Since three activities B,F and D are to be completed before G, we have to select the maximum of all the three early finish time of the predecessors. ESg = max [EFb, EFf, EFd] Latest starting and finishing time calculation using forward pass method: LSa = Total completion time of the project - Ta, LFa = TCa Latest starting and finishing time calculation using backward pass method: LSa = Total completion time of the project - Ta, LFa = TCa Table 4.40 Activity Latest start (LSi) Latest finish (LFi) A 20.50 23.34 B 11.00 12.17 C 0 5.5 D 11.17 12.17 E 5.5 12.17 F 12.17 13.34 G 13.34 15.34 H 15.34 23.34 Step 4: Identify the critical path. The critical path is the longest path in the network. The expected critical path is C – E - F – G – H. The duration is 23.34 days. The variance of the critical path is 3.051 days. Therefore standard deviation is equal to 1.746. Anna University Chennai 200
  • 201. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Step 5: NOTES Identify the float or slack for each activity/ event of the network. Identification of float: Total float for each activity ‘i’ = LSi – ESi (or) LFi - EFi Table 4.41 Activity Total Float A 20.50 B 11.00 C 0 D 11.17 E 0 F 0 G 0 H 0 You cannot claim that, the completion time of the project is 23.34 days in this case, because this is the expected completion time attached with the probability. The expected completion time is the sum of the expected completion time of the activity C, E, F, G and H. But timing of each activity follows beta distribution. Now the summation of all the time follows the normal distribution with the summation of all variance. This principal is arrived based on the central limit theorem. It is shown in the figure4.13. Figure 4.13 From this above figure; you can answer for the following questions. 1. What is the probability that the project will be completed within the mean time? 2. What is the probability that the project will be completed within the specified time period? 3. What is the probability that the project will be completed above the specified time period? 4. To complete within the particular probability, how much time will be required? 201 Anna University Chennai
  • 202. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES 5. To complete above the particular probability, how much time will be required? Let us determine the following probabilities for the above mentioned problem. A. The project will be completed in 22 days or less. B. The project will be completed by its earliest expected completion date. C. The project will be completed in more than 30 days. D. The project will be completed between 25 and 30 days. To answer the above problems you should find the Z- values using normal distribution tables as follows. Solution: A. Xi = 22, (Xi = Project due date) = 23.34 ( = Project completion time) = 1.746 ( = standard deviation of the project completion time) Z = (Xi - ) / Z = (22 – 23.34) / 1.746 = -1.053 Corresponding value for this Z from the normal tables is 0.1469 So the probability of completing the project with in 22 days is 14.69% B. Xi = 23.34, = 23.34 = 1.746 Z = (Xi - ) / Z = (23.34 – 23.34) / 1.746 = 0.00 Corresponding value for this Z from the normal tables is 0.5 So the probability of completing the project with in expected completion time is 50 %. C. Xi = 30, = 23.34 = 1.746 Z = (Xi - ) / Z = (30 – 23.34) / 1.746 = 3.5281 Corresponding value for this Z from the normal tables is 0.99978. Therefore to complete the project beyond 30 days = 1-0.99978 (ie) = 0.00022 So the probability of completing the project beyond 30 days is 0.022% Anna University Chennai 202
  • 203. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT D. Xi = 30, = 23.34 NOTES = 1.746 Z = (Xi - ) / Z = (25 – 23.34) / 1.746 = 0.66437 Corresponding value for this Z from the normal tables is 0.7357. Therefore to complete the project between 25 and 30 days = 0.99978 – 0.7357 = 0.26408 So the probability of completing the project beyond 30 days is 26.41% 4.6 RESOURCE SCHEDULING As it is mentioned in the project scheduling, resource scheduling is another important activity of project scheduling. As resource are scares, the project manager efficiency and effectiveness can be measured through the way in which he allocate the resource in various activities of the project but not much extending the completion time of the project. Resource scheduling consists of two phases. Phase 1, deals about the resource allocation and Phase 2 deals about the resource leveling. Resource allocation It is the allocation of the resources for the activities that are critical in nature. If some resources are required by more than one activity at a time, the resources are to be allocated to the activity which is critical in nature and thereby delaying non critical activity. Any how you should see that the critical activities are getting importance in allocating the resources rather than the non critical activity. This is done based on the availability of the float for each activity and this does not effect the project completion time. If you proceed in this manner you will come across the situation in which all activities become critical and resources allocation becomes a problem. In such a situa- tion, the efficiency of a project manager even could be measured through how judi- ciously he allocates the resources and at the some time without much extending the completion time of the project. Resource leveling As the name indicates if you draw a curve between the time Vs resource re- quirement, the profile of the curve is almost constant then you need not carry out the leveling of the resources because all the time almost you need to make use of a constant resource requirement. This paves the way for continuous employment for the people involved in the project. Suppose the profile of the resource requirement Vs time has more peak & valley then you have to level the peak & valley of the resource require- ment in such a manner that throughout the project period you are going to use constant 203 Anna University Chennai
  • 204. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES resources with little variation. The process of doing so is called Project leveling. In this the case of project leveling the project completion time should not be extended but the objective of allocating constant workforce in all the days is achieved through a simple logic that the activities which are having floats are to be moved front and back without violating the precedence relationship. This is done with an objective of having constant resource in all the project days. When you move the activity front and back based on the availability of free float of each activity, that means the highest free float activity is moved front and back to ensure constant resources in all the days. Free float for an activity is calculated as follows Figure 4.14 Lij i j Free float for activity i-j= tj- (ti+Lij) Where ti- is the earliest end time of the event i tj- is the earliest end time of the event j Lij- time duration of the activity i and j Example 4.2 Consider the following network Table 4.42 Activity Immediate Manpower Time duration predecessor requirement A - 9 4 B - 3 2 C - 6 2 D - 4 2 E B 8 3 F C 7 2 G F, D 2 3 H E, G 1 4 Step1: -Draw the network and post the network in a time scale. Anna University Chennai 204
  • 205. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 4.15 NOTES A 4 2 E B 3 2 C F G H 0 2 4 7 11 2 2 3 4 1 D You can verify that the path C-F-G-H is the critical path. Next you should draw it in time scale. To draw this, first you should post the critical path. Figure 4.16 A 9 E 8 B 2 2 Time 0 1 2 3 C 4 F5 6 7 8 G 9 10 11 H 0 2 4 7 11 Manpower 22 22 24 152 10 2 2 2 1 1 1 41 1 7 3 Requirement D 4 The number appears above the arrow indicates that the manpower requirement. Step2: - Draw the resource requirement Vs time profile 205 Anna University Chennai
  • 206. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 4.17 NOTES 24 22 15 10 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 If you see the above resource requirement profile, this profile has more peak & valley. So this is to be leveled to have constant work force requirement. Step3: - Find the float using the formula mentioned already for all the activities .This is shown in the table. Table 4.43 Activities Free float A 7 B 0 C 0 D 2 E 2 F 0 G 0 H 0 Step 4: - Find the total requirement for all the days, this is equal to 101.Now divide this by the number of days to find constant resource requirement Constant resource requirement = 101/11=9.1 Every day you should see that the number of resources requirement should not exceed 10. For doing so, you should give preference for the activity which has least free float. Anna University Chennai 206
  • 207. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Day1 Table 4.44 NOTES Activity Free float Resource Action to be requirement performed B 0 3 Scheduled C 0 6 Scheduled D 2 4 Postponed A 7 4 Postponed In the day1, even though the free float for activity D is more than B. You should give preference to D because if you allot ‘D’ and ‘C’ on day1 it perfectly matches the maximum resources requirement 10. Day2 Table 4.45 Activity Free float Resource Action to be requirement performed B 0 3 Postponed C 0 6 Continued D 2 4 Continued A 6 9 Postponed Day3 Table 4.46 Activity Free float Resource Action to be requirement performed F 0 7 Scheduled B 0 3 Scheduled E 2 8 Postponed A 5 9 Postponed Day4 Table 4.47 Activity Free float Resource Action to be requirement performed F 0 7 Continued B 0 3 Continued E 1 8 Postponed A 4 9 Postponed 207 Anna University Chennai
  • 208. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Day5 NOTES Table 4.48 Activity Free float Resource Action to be requirement performed E 0 8 Scheduled G 0 2 Scheduled A 3 9 Postponed Day6 Table 4.49 Activity Free float Resource Action to be requirement performed E 0 8 Continued G 0 2 Continued A 2 9 Postponed Day 7 Table 4.50 Activity Free float Resource Action to be requirement performed E 0 8 Continued G 0 2 Continued A 2 9 Postponed Day 8 Table 4.51 Activity Free float Resource Action to be requirement performed A 0 8 Scheduled H 0 2 Scheduled Day 9 Table 4.52 Activity Free float Resource Action to be requirement performed A 0 8 Continued H 0 2 Continued Anna University Chennai 208
  • 209. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Day10 Table 4.53 NOTES Activity Free float Resource Action to be requirement performed A 0 8 Continued H 0 2 Continued Day11 Table 4.54 Activity Free float Resource Action to be requirement performed A 0 8 Continued H 0 2 Continued Since for all the days the resources are scheduled as per the procedure men- tioned. The requirement Vs time profile graph is as follows: Figure 4.18 Resource requirement 10 11 days Time 209 Anna University Chennai
  • 210. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Summary In this unit, the job shop scheduling for single machine n jobs, two machine n jobs, 3 machine n jobs and n job m machine are discussed. The project scheduling techniques namely the critical path method, program evaluation review technique are elaborated. The application of float is interpreted and appreciated. The resource level- ing is also highlighted. Review Questions: 1. Draw the network for the given precedence diagram. Table 4.55 Activities Immediate predecessor a - b - c b d a,c 2. How would you calculate the expected time and variance in the PERT model? 3. Expand CPM and PERT? Anna University Chennai 210
  • 211. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT UNIT V NOTES FACILITY, LAYOUT LOCATION AND WORK MEASUREMENT 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Learning Objectives 5.3 Facility Location: 5.3.1 Selection of location: 5.3.1.1 Phase 1: 5.3.1.2 Phase – II 5.4 Plant location selection 5.4.1 Rating Plan Method To Evaluate The Factors For Plant Location: 5.4.2 Cost analysis method: 5.5 Types of Layout 5.5.1 Fixed Product Layout 5.5.2 Product Layout 5.5.3 Group Layout 5.5.4 Process Layout 5.5.5 Design of Process Layout 5.6 Line Balancing 5.7 Time Study and Work Measurement 5.7.1 Time Study 5.7.2 Work sampling 5.8 Learning Curve 5.9 Productivity 211 Anna University Chennai
  • 212. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES UNIT - 5 FACILITY, LAYOUT LOCATION AND WORK MEASUREMENT 5.1 INTRODUCTION The unit deals about one of the strategic decisions in the operations management, namely plant location decision, the characteristics of different layouts are discussed. The different techniques available to design the layout are also introduced. Work measurement technique like time study, work sampling and methods time measurement are elaborated to fix the standards for organizational activities. The impact of learning curve on the standard and productivity improvement is also discussed. 5.2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES 1. To comprehend the factors to be considered for selecting the location. 2. To know the characteristics of different types of layout. 3. Understand the techniques to be adopted in designing the layout. 4. To establish the standards for different activities using standard techniques. 5. To construct learning curve and to comprehend the impact of learning curve in standards and productivity. 5.3 FACILITY LOCATION Facility location i.e. identifying the best location is a strategic decision in operation management. This is a decision like any other strategic decisions like identifying the product, choosing the technology, deciding the capacity etc. It is a long term decision. Once the resources are committed taken back the resources involves more cost because of change in the decision later. So you should be careful while identifying the various locations and choosing the best one. Need for the Decision 1. Research and development department of an organization come up with a new product, to manufacture the product you need to incur the decision. Anna University Chennai 212
  • 213. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 2. For the existing product, there is a lot of market potential so to tap the untapped NOTES market you have to expand the capacity. To expand the capacity, you have to identify the location. 3. Markets are served in a particular region, more competitions and high escalation of cost. It is difficult to survive then identifying the location where there is untapped market in the different regions. 4. Relocation required because of Tsunami, fire, flood, earthquake natural holocaust etc. 5.3.1 Selection of location Selection of the best location involves two phases: 5.3.1.1 Phase 1 In the phase I a preliminary feasibility study is carried out to assess the production input, process technology, infrastructural facilities, social and cultural conditions and legal and government considerations. Production Input: Raw material: It is important to assess the availability of raw material. The assessing is to be carried out in the point of view of the transportation cost and the amount or deposit. Suppose if you start a cement or aluminium industry the deposit of ore and how long it will be lost, that is to be assessed. You have to see the present requirements and future requirements and choose the place where the above conditions are fulfilled. The raw material supplier is for away then the transportation cost dominates the price that makes you less competitive. Labour inputs: When you assess the labour input, the quality of the labour is important. You may find the labours with fewer wages but the productivity of that labour may be low. So in addition to bothering about that wages, you should assess then the skill level also. You can see now more foreign IT companies sources India. The main reasons are those companies identify abundant IT skills in India at comparatively lesser cost. So they sources India. Process Technology: Some times the technology restricts the choice of location e.g. to start a pulp and paper mills. You need water for processing so most of the pulp and paper mill industry are started in the river banks. 213 Anna University Chennai
  • 214. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Infrastructural facilities: A study is very much required to asses well connected and land roads, parts, out parts, railway lines telecommunication facilities etc. This is important because it reduces the transportation cost and lead time. Lend time reduction show lot of saving in other costs. It helps the organization to be a cost competitive. Legal and political considerations: Governments woo the corporate to start industry in their respective countries or state through providing free land, exemption of taxes, subsided power tariffs, less cumbersome licensing procedures. In addition, the prospective person has to see that the legal formalities and complication. He / she has to study the government stipulation about the pollution standards to be exercised, zoning codes to be adopted import and export regulations prescribed and construction specifications etc. Social and cultural conditions: This is the process of exploring the attitude of the people towards the plant to be started over there. This study involves the skill availability and accessibility. This study also involves the study about their demographic variables like the age distribution, income distribution, their status, their life conditions their tradition. Here, you should explain in detail to make them aware of the usefulness of plant to up lift them both economically and socially. At present, in India, since this process not carried out systematically and scientifically, many important projects are stalled by the people in many states like West Bengal, Orissa, Tamil Nadu, to state a few. 5.3.1.2 Phase – II It there is a problem in the first phase, the second phase may not see the lime light. In the phase 1 macro analysis is over, in the second phase the region, community and site selection take place. Region include country to country or state-to-state within a country or within a state different regions. The factors to be considered in the selection of region, community and site are shown in the table. The factors are considered under different major heading like infrastructure, market, supply, and environment and internal. You should note that most of the factors are considered in all the regional, community and site selection. For example, customer concentration and trends are considered in all region, community and site selection. Anna University Chennai 214
  • 215. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Table 5.1 Regional selection Community Decision Site Decision NOTES Infrastructure Transportation network and Transportation network Proximity to transpor their costs and their costs tation system Utilities supply and costs Utilities supply and costs Utilities supply and costs Market Customer concentration and Customer concentration Customer concentration trends. and trends. and trends. Supply Materials and supplies Materials and supplies Materials and supplies availability & accessibility availability & accessibility availability & accessibility Labour availability & Labour availability & accessibility accessibility Land and construction cost Site availability cost & construction cost Size of the site Site costs Environment The intensity of unionization Community attitudes Zoning restrictions towards the new facilities Climate Community service & Proximally to related taxes industry Banking services Environmental impact Government SOPS Government SOPS Environmental regulations Environmental regulations Internal Preference of the management 5.4 PLANT LOCATION SELECTION The selection of the plant is characterized by the subjective factors as well as the objective factors. But it is very difficult to quantify subjective factors. The plant location evaluation is done by considering both subjective and objective factors through a subjective evaluation known as Rating Plan Method. You can see in the following section, how the rating plan is applied to choose a place, where to start a Bio technol- ogy plant, in India. 215 Anna University Chennai
  • 216. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT To start a biotechnology plant what factors you consider and how do you evalu- NOTES ate the same using rating plan method. Selection Criteria The important considerations for selecting a suitable location are given as follows: a. Natural or climatic conditions. b. Availability and nearness to the sources of raw material. c. Transport costs-in obtaining raw material and also distribution or market- ing finished products to the ultimate users. d. Access to market: small businesses in retail or wholesale or services should be located within the vicinity of densely populated areas. e. Availability of Infrastructural facilities such as developed industrial sheds or sites, link roads, nearness to railway stations, airports or sea ports, avail- ability of electricity, water, public utilities, civil amenities and means of com- munications are important, especially for small scale businesses. f. Availability of skilled and non-skilled labour and technically qualified and trained managers. g. Banking and financial institutions are located nearby. h. Locations with links: to develop industrial areas or business centers result in savings and cost reductions in transport overheads, miscellaneous ex- penses. i. Strategic considerations of safety and security should be given due impor- tance. j. Government influences: Both positive and negative incentives to motivate an entrepreneur to choose a particular location are made available. Posi- tive includes cheap overhead facilities like electricity banking transport, tax relief, subsidies and liberalization. Negative incentives are in form of re- strictions for setting up industries in urban areas for reasons of pollution control and decentralization of industries. k. Residence of small business entrepreneurs want to set up nearby their home- lands. One study of the locational considerations from the small-scale units revealed that the native place or homelands of the entrepreneur was the most important factor. Heavy preference to homeland suggests that small-scale enterprise is not freely mobile. Low preference for Government incentives suggests that concessions and in- centives cannot compensate for poor infrastructure. In the rating plan method, ideal rating is considered for the factors, then how much rating each location scores against each factor is assessed and best location is chosen based on the highest total point. Anna University Chennai 216
  • 217. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Table 5.2 - Rating Plan Method To Evaluate The Factors For Plant Location: NOTES Factors Ideal Point Lucknow Bangalore Pune Availability of technically qualified skilled labor. 30 25 28 20 Availability and nearness to the source of material. 20 15 17 15 Market Potential 15 13 11 10 Access to the market 5 4 5 4 Competitive Analysis 5 5 2 3 Site Economics 10 10 5 6 Positive Govt. Influences 10 10 6 6 Strategic consideration of safety and security 2 2 2 2 Rent or buy the property 3 3 2 1 TOTAL POINT 100 87 78 67 In the above table, Lucknow scores more than the Pune and Bangalore. 5.4.2 Cost analysis method: In the previous section, you saw how the rating plan method is applied, to choose the location. In this section, you can see a method, where only the objective factor is considered, namely the cost factors i.e., to start a plant in a particular location, based on the labour availability and accessibility, material availability and accessibility, you may have different variable cost as well as fixed cost for each location. Now based on the estimated fixed cost and variable cost, you can formulate for each location, a different a total cost equation. Once the total cost equation is arrived for each location by applying the cost volume profit analysis, you can estimate the range of production quantity at which the locations are preferred. You can understand above method through exapmle5.1. Example 5.1 Consider a corporate office, which wants to identify the best location. They have identified 3 locations after a preliminary survey. They are locations A, B and C. The corporate has estimated the variable cost and fixed cost and then the total cost for the each location against the production quantity. This is shown in the table. 217 Anna University Chennai
  • 218. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Table 5.3 NOTES SITE Fixed cost Variable cost (Rupees in lakhs) (Rupees per unit) A 2.5 1000 B 3 750 C 4 500 Solution: Considering site A and B, the total cost for site A for ‘x’ quantities = 250000 + 1000x. —— (1) the total cost for site B for ‘x’ quantities = 300000 + 750x. —— (2) Therefore from (1) and (2), x = (300000 – 250000)/(1000-750) = 200 units. Considering site B and C, the total cost for site B for ‘x’ quantities = 300000 + 750x. ——— (3) the total cost for site C for ‘x’ quantities = 400000 + 500x. ——— (4) Therefore from (3) and (4), x = (400000 – 300000)/(750-500) = 400 units. Result, If ‘x’ < 200 units, select site A as it has minimum fixed value. If 200 < ’x’ < 400 units, select site B as it has minimum variable cost compared to A and minimum total cost compared to C. If ‘x’ > 400 units, select site C as it has the least variable cost. Graphical representation: Figure 5.1 Anna University Chennai 218
  • 219. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Review Questions: 1) Define facility location. NOTES 2) When will you go for facility location? 3) What are the phases in the facility location? 4) What the methods used for plant location selection? 1.3 TYPES OF LAYOUT After selecting the plant location, based on the type of production system to be adopted, the layout has to be decided. The types of layout are: 1. Fixed product layout 2. Product layout 3. Group (flexible) layout 4. Process layout 5.5.1 Fixed Product Layout The fixed product layout is developed by locating the workstations or produc- tion centers on the fixed job. Fixed layout type is used when the job size is large. Logistics are involved in ensuring that the right processes are brought to the product at the right time and at the right place. This has been mainly used in electronic industry to support computer systems integration and test; materials, sub assemblies, components, peripherals are brought to the single workstation where finished system is built. This type of layout requires generally higher number of personnel and equipments than the other types, since the work piece remains stationary. Figure 5.2 – Fixed Product Layout 219 Anna University Chennai
  • 220. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Advantages: NOTES 1. This method is highly flexible and any changes in product design and product mix can be easily accommodated. 2. Since work centers are independent, scheduling results in achieving minimum total production time. 3. The teams of personnel are responsible for continuity of operations. 4. Movement of materials is reduced. 5. Job enlargement could be promoted by allowing individuals or teams to per- form the whole job. Limitations: 1. Skilled labour is required. 2. Supervision is required. 3. Positioning of material and machinery is costly and complex. 4. Equipment duplication may occur. 5. Utilization of equipment is required. 5.5.2 Product Layout In this layout the machines are arranged according to the processing sequence of the product. Material flows directly from one workstation to other workstation. Ma- chines are not shared by the products. This type of layout is used for high volume production. For proper utilization of machines sufficient production volume is required. Since the processes are located closed together in the production sequence, the layout minimizes the distance between the work center. Figure 5.3 – Product Layout Advantages: 1. The total production time is short. 2. The material handling is reduced because of the location of the machines to minimize the distances between the consecutive operations. Anna University Chennai 220
  • 221. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 3. Less skilled operator is required. Thus training is simple and short. 4. Less space is occupied by work in transit and temporary storage. NOTES 5. The flow is smooth and logical flow line results. 6. Small in process inventory as the work is directly fed from one process to other. Limitations: 1. The production time is determined by the slowest machine. 2. A general supervision is required. 3. Since identical machines are arranged at various locations, initial investment is high. 4. A change in the product design requires an entire change in the layout. 5. A break down of one machine lead to complete stoppage of entire production. 1.5.3 Group Layout When production volume is not sufficient for product layout, group layout is used. Here products are grouped in to logical product families. The groups of processes are called cells. So it is also called as cellular layout. It is a compromise between product and process layout. Since products are grouped into families this technology is also called as group technology with each individual cells are called GT cells. Figure 5.4 – Group Layout Advantages: 1. This supports the use of general purpose equipments. 2. This is a compromise between product and process layout. 3. Shorter travel distances and smoother flow lines than process layout. 221 Anna University Chennai
  • 222. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 4. Team attitude and job enlargement tend to occur. NOTES 5. Utilization of each machine is increased. Limitations: 1. Higher skilled employees are required 2. General supervision is required. 3. It depends on the balanced material flow through the cell otherwise buffers and WIP storage are required. 1.5.3 Process Layout In this type the machine are grouped and the product passes from one group to other group based on the sequence of production. The groups of processes are called cells. The process layout is used in the rapid changes in the product mix or production volume as well as when both product and group layout cannot be used. Typically job shop employs process layout due to the variety of products manufactured and their low production volume. It has high degree of inter departmental flow. Figure5.5 – Process Layout Advantages: 1. Since the machines are grouped, only fewer machines are required; thus mini- mum investment is required. 2. Better utilization of machines could be achieved. 3. High degree of flexibility exists. 4. Supervision could be specialized. 5. The working personnel find the job more satisfying and interesting since there is a diversity of tasks. Limitations: 1. Highly skilled labour is required. 2. Work in process inventory is increased. Anna University Chennai 222
  • 223. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 3. Total production time is longer 4. Planning and control of production system turns out to be tedious. NOTES 5. Space and capital are tied up by the work in process. 6. Material handling is more expensive because of longer flow line. 5.5.5 Design of Process Layout To design a process layout there are some computerized techniques avail- able. Computerized techniques are classified into: • Techniques which select the best process layout based on the material cost comparison. • Other computerized techniques which select the best process layout based on the qualitative factors namely the closeness between the departments. Closeness ratings are as follows: A – Absolutely essential E - Ordinary closeness I – Important O – Ordinary importance U – Un important X – Not desirable. CRAFT (Computerized Relationship Allocation of Facilities Techniques) CRAFT algorithm was originally developed by Armour and Buffa. CRAFT is more widely used than ALDEP and CORELAP. It is an improvement algorithm. It starts with an intial layout and improves the layout by interchanging the departments pairwise so that the transportation cost is minimized. The algorithm continues until no further interchanges are possible to reduce the transportation cost. The result given by CRAFT is not optimum in terms of minimum in majority of applications. Hence, CRAFT is mainly a heuristic algorithm.Unfortunately, plant layout problem comes under combinatorial category. So, usage of efficient heuristic like CRAFT is inevitable for such problem. CRAFT Requirements: 1. Initial layout. 2. Flow data. 3. Cost per unit distance. 4. Total number of departments. 5. Fixed departments. Number of such departments Location of those departments 6. Area of departments. 223 Anna University Chennai
  • 224. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT CRAFT Procedure NOTES The steps of CRAFT algorithm are summarized below: Step 1. Input: 1. Number of departments 2. Number of interchangeable departments 3. Intial layout 4. Cost matrix 5. Flow matrix 6. Area of departments Step 2. Compute centroids of departments in the present layout. Step 3. Forum distance matrix using the centroids. Step 4. Given data on flow, distance and cost, compute the total handling cost of the present layout. Step 5. Find all the possible pairwise interchanges of departments based on common border or eqal area criterion. For each possibility, interchange the corresponding centroids and compute approximate costs. Step 6. Find the pair of departments corresponding to the minimum handling cost from among all the possible pairs of interchanges. Step 7. Is the cost in the previous step less than the total cost of the present layout? If yes, go to step 8.If not go to step 11. Step 8. Interchange the selected pair of departments.Call this as the NEW LAYOUT. Compute centroids, distance matrix and total cost. Step 9. Is the cost of new layout less than the cost of the present layout? If yes, go to Step 10.If not, go to Step 11. Step 10.The new layout is hereafter considered as the present layout.its data on centroids, layout matrix and the total cost is retained. Go to step 5. Step 11. Print the present layout as the FINAL LAYOUT. Step 12. Stop LAYOUT: Figure 5.6 Anna University Chennai 224
  • 225. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 5.7 Figure 5.8 NOTES 1) Iteration 1: calculate the distance matrix. Distance between two departments = |x1-x2| + |y1-y2| Where, (X1, y1) is the centre of department 1 Centroids of A,B and C, A(50,125) B(25,50) C(75,50) DISTANCE MATRIX: Figure 5.9 1) Determine the total cost for all possible movements between each depart- ment. Cost between two departments = Distance matrix X Cost matrix 225 Anna University Chennai
  • 226. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 5.10 NOTES 1) Re allocation of departments, In this step the departments are interchanged. For interchanging 1. Both departments should have the same area (or) 2. Both departments should share common boundary 2) After reallocating find the new centroid and repeat step 2 and 3. ITERATION 2 Interchange A and C (Because A and C have common border and same area) Therefore new Centroids are, C (50,125) B (25,150) A (75, 50) Figure 5.11 Anna University Chennai 226
  • 227. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT DISTANCE MATRIX: Figure 5.12 NOTES COST MATRIX: Figure 5.13 ITERATION 3: Interchange B and C (Because B and C have common border and same area). Therefore new centroid are, B (50,175) C (25, 50) A (75, 50) Figure 5.14 227 Anna University Chennai
  • 228. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT DISTANCE MATRIX: NOTES Figure 5.15 COST MATRIX: Figure 5.16 TOTAL COST: 975 5) Check total cost for all the possible reallocations and select the layout with minimum total cost. 6) Repeat the iterations till the least total cost is achieved. This layout is optimum solution. In the given problem layout seems to be optimal compared to other two layouts. Now taking layout 2 as base layout, continue further iterations to find the least cost. That layout is the optimal solution. Corelap Algorithm Input data requirement 1. Relationship chart and closeness rating. 2. Building description is given by maximum length to width ratio. Anna University Chennai 228
  • 229. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Objective 1. Maximizing overall closeness rating. NOTES How the software programs works First he found out the closeness rating between the departments. It has to be placed in layout. If there is any type select the department which is high in closeness rating. If there is again tie select the department which is larger in area. If the tie still exists then select any department randomly. Output Computer printout shows final layout. Determination of placement order of department: For the purpose of finding the order of placing the departments the following data are needed. REL- chart and closeness ratings: REL –chart: Table 5.4 CLOSENESS VALUES: A=6, E-5, I=4, O=3, U=2, and X=1 Using the closeness rating TCR (total closeness rating) is calculated thus: 229 Anna University Chennai
  • 230. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Table 5.5 NOTES The following steps are carried out to select the placement order of the departments. 1. Department with the largest TCR is selected for the first placement. In case of ties, the department with the largest area is selected. Department 5 is selected. 2. Review the closeness relationship of department 5 with other departments to find the department that has the highest closeness relationship with department 5. Table 5.6 Department 6 has the highest closeness relationship with the department 5. So it has to be placed next to department 5. 3. Check the closeness relationship for both the departments. Table 5.7 Anna University Chennai 230
  • 231. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT In the above study department 7 has high closeness rating with 6. Thus it has to be placed in the layout next. NOTES Similarly, if there is a tie in closeness rating, then select the department with the highest TCR. If there is a tie again, then select a department with larger area. In case of tie in both conditions, then select a department randomly. Order of placement: 5 6 7 2 1 4 3 PLACEMENT OF DEPARTMENTS IN THE LAYOUT: Table 5.8 5 1. The first department to be placed is 5. it is placed in the centre of a (7x 15) layout. Each cell has an area of 6000 sq.mt. 2. The second department from the list is department 6. It is thus placed. Table 5.9 6 6 5 (Department 6 has two squares. It can be placed thus…) 231 Anna University Chennai
  • 232. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 3. Department 7 has to be placed. It has two squares. It can be placed thus in three NOTES ways. Table 5.10 Table 5.11 Table 5.12 7 7 6 6 6 6 7 6 6 5 5 7 7 7 5 In the above case we have to find the weighted rating for each department. WEIGHTED DEPARTMENT RATING Table 5.13 Closeness relationship Weighted rating. A 243 E 81 I 27 O 9 U 1 X -729 a. Department 7 with department 6 = E = 81, Therefore placement rating = 81. b. Weighted rating of 7 with 6 = 81 Weighted rating of 7 with 5 = 27 ————— Total = 108 ————— Similarly, for the other layout also, the rating is 108. Thus we have to select either b. or c. layouts… let us take c. layout… 1. Next department 2 has to be placed. Table 5.14 2 6 6 7 7 5 Anna University Chennai 232
  • 233. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT PLACEMENT RATING = (27+1) = 28. No other allocation has maximum placement rating… NOTES 2. Next department 1 has to be placed. It has the following four possibilities. Table 5.15 Table 5.16 Table 5.17 Table 5.18 PLACEMENT RATING: A. Weighted rating with department 6 and 2 = 82 B. Weighted rating with department 6 and 5 = 10 C. Weighted rating with department 7 and 5 = 10 D. Weighted rating with department 7 and 2 = 82 Table 5.19 1 1 2 6 6 7 7 5 The above arrangement is selected randomly (between A. & D.) 6. Next department 4 has to be placed. It has the following five possibilities. 233 Anna University Chennai
  • 234. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Table 5.20 Table 5.21 Table 5.22 Table 5.23 NOTES 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 2 6 6 4 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 6 6 4 7 7 5 4 7 7 5 7 7 5 7 7 5 4 4 4 Table 5.24 1 1 4 4 2 6 6 7 7 5 e. PLACEMENT RATING: A. Weighted rating with department 1 and 2 = 108 B. Weighted rating with department 2 and 7 = 82 C. Weighted rating with department 7 and 5 = 28 D. Weighted rating with department 6 and 5 = 28 E. Weighted rating with department 1 and 6 = 28 Table 5.25 4 1 1 4 2 6 6 7 7 5 The above arrangement is selected.(A.) 1. The last department to be placed is department 3. Table 5.26 4 1 1 3 4 2 6 6 7 7 5 Anna University Chennai 234
  • 235. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT The above placement of department 3 has maximum placement rating. (Based NOTES on REL). Thus the layout is allocated with all the departments as follows. Table 5.27 4 1 1 3 4 2 6 6 7 7 5 Total Score of The Layout: Total score of the layout is the sum of the products found by multiplying the length of the shortest path between all departments and the numerical closeness value for the pairs. Total score = ΣFor all pairs (Closeness rating x length of shortest path) The path is calculated by the rectilinear distance from the border of one depart- ment to the border of the other one. Therefore, if two departments are adjacent, they will have common border. The path length will be zero. Total score of the above layout is given as follows: 235 Anna University Chennai
  • 236. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Table 5.28 NOTES Department to Distance Closeness Score 1 2 0 - - 1 3 0 - - 1 4 0 - - 1 5 2 3 6 1 6 0 - - 1 7 1 2 2 2 3 2 2 4 2 4 0 - - 2 5 2 4 8 2 6 0 - - 2 7 0 - - 3 4 2 2 4 3 5 1 2 2 3 6 0 - - 3 7 2 2 4 4 5 3 4 12 4 6 1 2 2 4 7 1 2 2 5 6 0 - - 5 7 0 - - 6 7 0 - - Total 46 Thus the procedure to find the total score ends with this step. One can repeat the procedure with different scales and pick up the best layout with the MINIMUM TOTAL SCORE… ALDEP (Automated layout Programming): ALDEP is a construction type algorithm .This algorithm uses basic data on facilities and builds a design by successively placing the departments in the layout. After placing all the departments in the layout, a score is computed .This is nothing but the sum of the closeness rating values of different neighbouring departments in the layout. This algorithm is repeated for a prespecified number of times and the best layout is selected based on the maximum layout score. Anna University Chennai 236
  • 237. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT The basic data required for this algorithm are listed below. NOTES 1. Total number of departments. 2. Area of each department . 3. Length and width of layout. 1. Closeness ratings of various pairs of departments in the form of Relationship Chart. 2. Minimum department preference (MDP) value. 3. Sweep width. 4. Number of iterations to be performed. 5. Location and size of each restricted area in the layout if present. Steps to be followed: Step 0.INPUT: 1) Number of departments in the layout. 2) Area of each department. 3) Length and width of the layout. 4) REL-CHART (Relationship chart). 5) MDP value. 6) Sweep width. 7) Number of iterations to be carried (N). 8) Current iteration number(I),1. 9) 9.Locations and sizes of fixed departments if present. 10) 10.score of the current layout (It is assumed as a very high negative value before performing the first iteration). Step 1. Select a department randomly and place it in the layout. Step 2. Scan the relationship (REL) – chart and classify the unselected departments into two lists, namely List A and List B. List A contains the unselected departments whose relationship values in relation to the lastly selected department are less than the MDP value. List B contains the unselected departments whose relationship values in relation to the lastly selected department are greater than or equal to the MDP value. Step 3. Is the List B empty? If so , go to step 4;otherwise,go to step 5. Step 4. Select a department randomly from List A and place it in the layout. go to step 6 Step 5. Select a department from List B which has the maximum REL value in relation to the lastly selected department and place it in the layout. Step 6. Whether all the departments are placed in the layout? If not go to step 2; if yes, go to step 7. Step 7. Compute the score of the layout. 237 Anna University Chennai
  • 238. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Step 8. Is the score of the layout more than the score of the current best layout? If yes, update the new layout as the current best layout and store the corresponding score. otherwise, drop the new layout. Step 9. Is the current iteration number I =N? if yes, go to step 10; otherwise, increment the iteration number by one (I =I+1) and then go to step 1. Step 10. Print the current best layout and the corresponding score. STEPS OF ALDEP: 1. Get the inputs. (REL chart, Department area, layout plan) (A=64, E=16, I=4, O=1, U=0, X=-1024) The REL diagram for a plant with 11 departments is as follows: Table 5.29 1) Based on the area of all the departments, fix an appropriate scale. Based on the scale divide the departments in to number of square blocks. Anna University Chennai 238
  • 239. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Table 5.30 NOTES DEPARTMENT AREA NO. OF SQUARES 1 600 12 2 400 8 3 350 7 4 150 3 5 350 7 6 150 3 7 200 4 8 800 16 9 200 4 10 350 7 11 5000 50 (SCALE: 1: 50, i.e. each cell in the layout is assumed to be a square of area 50 sq. units). 1. Draw an initial layout based on the layout area or based on the total area of all the departments. Divide the departments in to the basic number of squares. (Sum of all department squares). 1) ITERATION-1: a. Initially assume a closeness rating of “0”. b. Fix a cut-off value for the department selection. (i.e.) “A” or “E” or “I”... c. Initially place a department randomly or the department with the max. area. d. Then from the candidate (remaining) departments, select a de- partment with the maximum cut-off value with the previously placed department. 2) SERPENT TYPE ALLOCATION: While allocating/placing each department in the layout, it has to be laid out in the following sequence. (Each cell is area of 50 in sq. units… based on the scale). 239 Anna University Chennai
  • 240. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Table 5.31 NOTES Table 5.32 11 11 11 9 10 2 2 7 7 0 0 11 11 11 9 10 2 2 7 0 0 0 11 11 11 9 10 2 2 7 0 0 0 11 11 11 9 10 2 2 8 0 0 0 11 11 11 6 10 1 3 8 0 0 0 11 11 11 6 10 1 3 8 0 0 0 11 11 11 6 10 1 3 8 0 0 0 11 11 11 4 5 1 3 8 0 0 0 11 11 11 4 5 1 3 8 0 0 0 11 11 11 4 5 1 3 8 0 0 0 11 11 11 11 5 1 3 8 0 0 0 11 11 11 11 5 1 8 8 0 0 0 11 11 11 11 5 1 8 8 0 0 0 11 11 11 11 5 1 8 8 0 0 0 11 11 11 11 1 1 8 8 0 0 0 6) If in there is a tie or no department satisfies the cut-off value during the selection of candidate department, then place a department randomly. 7) Calculation of TCR (Total Closeness Rating): a. Once all the departments are placed, then the next step is to calculate TCR. Anna University Chennai 240
  • 241. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT b. Make a note of all the pair of departments sharing common border with NOTES each other. (Note a pair only once i.e. either 1-3 or 3-1). c. Now add up all the pairs’ REL points… d. Then multiply it by 2. Table 5.33 Pairs REL points 11-1 0 11-9 16 11-6 16 11-4 64 11-5 4 9-10 1 9-64 6-10 1 6-4 16 4-5 1 10-2 0 10-5 4 5-1 1 2-8 0 2-3 16 2-1 64 1-3 16 1-8 0 3-8 1 7-8 64 2-7 0 290 Thus the Total Closeness Rating is (290*2) = 580 7) This is the TCR value for the initial layout. 8) Keeping this as the minimum value continue the steps (4-7) for all the possible layouts and calculate the TCR value for all the layouts. Once iteration results in a TCR value less than the immediately previous layout’s TCR value then that layout is the optimal solution. 241 Anna University Chennai
  • 242. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Table 5.34 NOTES 11 11 11 8 8 6 9 1 1 0 0 11 11 11 8 8 6 9 1 0 0 0 11 11 11 8 8 6 9 1 0 0 0 11 11 11 8 8 4 9 1 0 0 0 11 11 11 8 8 4 3 1 0 0 0 11 11 11 8 8 4 3 1 0 0 0 11 11 11 7 8 5 3 1 0 0 0 11 11 11 7 8 5 3 1 0 0 0 11 11 11 7 8 5 3 1 0 0 0 11 11 11 7 8 5 3 1 0 0 0 11 11 11 11 10 5 3 1 0 0 0 11 11 11 11 10 5 2 2 0 0 0 11 11 11 11 10 5 2 2 0 0 0 11 11 11 11 10 10 2 2 0 0 0 11 11 11 11 10 10 2 2 0 0 0 Total Closeness Rating: Table 5.35 Pairs REL points 11-8 64 11-7 64 11-10 4 8-7 64 8-10 1 Anna University Chennai 242
  • 243. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 8-6 1 NOTES 8-4 1 8-5 0 10-5 4 10-2 0 6-9 4 6-4 16 4-5 1 4-9 1 4-3 0 5-2 0 5-3 1 9-1 0 9-3 1 3-2 16 3-1 16 1-2 64 319 Thus the Total Closeness Rating is (319*2) = 638. Thus Iteration 2 shows that layout 2 has high TCR value compared to layout 1. Thus layout 2 is an optimal one compared to layout 1. Similarly, iterations are continued to find the optimal layout. a. LINE BALANCING This is a technique applied to design workplace of a plant, which adopts flow line production system. You know that the productive system of flow line produc- tion produces less variety and standardized products. So the capacity of the system is to be established first or the no. of units produced per day. 243 Anna University Chennai
  • 244. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 5.17 – Line Balancing NOTES Objective: To design an effective and efficient workplace. Input: Capacity: The capacity as it is mentioned already that the capacity is measured through the output. In an automobile industry it may be number of cars to be produced in a day. To decide the capacity you need to have the information about the demand for the product. Yearly demand has been converted into day to day capacity requirement. Technological constraints: Technological constraint that means when you are manufacturing a product, there is a sequence in which the operation on the components is to be carried out then the produced components are assembled according to the particular sequence. For example in the case of electric motor manufacturing activity the activities and immediate predecessor activity to be carried out are given below: Table 5.36 Activities ImmediateActivities Min A Axile manufacturing - 700 B Rotar manufacturing - 800 C Rotar assembly A, B 400 D Stator manufacturing - 200 E Stator cashing manufacturing - 400 F Stator assembly D, E 300 G Protective shield manufacturing - 500 H Final assembly C, E, F 300 The above relationship could be shown in a network form as follows for clear under- standing. Anna University Chennai 244
  • 245. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 5.18 NOTES Available Working time: The available working time is the total working hours available based on the time frame. Example: if the capacity calculation is done for the day then the available hour’s calculation is done for day. If there is one shift of 8 hours duration then the available time in seconds is calculated as 8 x 60 x 60 second. = 28,800 seconds Technological constraint continuation: Each activity is considered to be an element. An element is a distinct that of a specified job. This is done for the purpose of observation, measurement and analysis. Against each element the time for completing the activity is also estimated. Output: Number of stations: Based on the available working time per day, the no. of units to be manufac- tured, and the total work content, the no. of stations are calculated as follows: No. of stations = 3600 x 35 units [Total work content per unit] [Desired no. of units per day] = ———————————————————————— Total productive time available per day = 8 x 60- x 60 = 4.375 = 5 stations 245 Anna University Chennai
  • 246. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Maximum allowable time: NOTES From this you can calculate the maximum allowable time for each station Total available hours = ——————————————————— Desired no. of units per day = 8 x 60 x 60 /35 = 823 seconds. Minimum Allowable time: This is the highest elemental time. In this example the highest elemental time is 800 seconds. The maximum and minimum allowable time helps you to assess the efficiency and effectiveness of the proposed designs. Assignment of the job elements to the workstations: A method is to be adopted to assign the jobs to workstations. The method may be an optimal method or heuristic method. In heuristic method, you may get best solution but there is no guarantee that you may get a solution. But it helps to get nearer to best solution. One such a procedure is the longest operation time (LOT) Remaining. Longest Operation time remaining means after assigning a particular task to a work station. You should find out the remaining unassigned elements and choose the element with highest operation time. Then add the element with the already assigned element. You should be careful enough that the total element time in a particular workstation should not exceed the cycle time established. Suppose the element considered for assigning could not be assigned because the total elemental time at the workstation increased beyond the cycle time, then in such case, you should look for the next highest remaining elemental time. The above mentioned caution is to be followed before as- signing the element to the work station. Thus process is continued till all the elements are assigned. Assignment of elements for 823 seconds work station cycle time Table 5.37 B A C&E D&F G&H I WS II III IV V WS WS WS WS WS – Work Anna University Chennai 246
  • 247. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Station I: NOTES Consider the highest elemental time. This is element B it could be straight away assigned to station because it does not have any predecessor. Next 5 highest elemental time is 700 that is element A. But element A could not be assigned because if you assigned A the stations sum of elemental time exceeds the time cycle time 823 seconds. This reason holds good for other remaining elemental times. Station II: In Station II you can assign element A. This has elemental time of 700 second. You can not assign any remaining elements to station II because the total elemental time exceeds the cycle time. Station III: In Station III the remaining highest elemental time is 500 minutes that is of element G. But before assigning the activities, you should complete other activities as per the technological constraints. So next highest operational elements are C & E, so C & E are assigned to station III. No. other elemental could be assigned to station III. Station IV: Table 5.38 Line design for 800 seconds 1 2 3 4 5 Effectiveness Efficiency B A C&D E&F G&H Goal accomp- Utilization lishment of employee Time requi- red per unit 800 700 600 720 800 28800/800 = 36 3620 in each Units station Available time each 800 800 800 800 800 4000 Utilization = work station 3620/4000 = 90.5% Idle time per 0 100 200 80 0 380 Idle time = cycle 380/4100 = 9.26% Next highest unassigned element is G. For the same reason spelt out previously. They are not allotted to station IV then you can go for allocating next highest elements namely D & F. 247 Anna University Chennai
  • 248. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Station IV: NOTES Then In the remaining unallotted elements, element G is allotted first and then H. The efficiency and effectiveness The efficiency and effectiveness of the LOT method is shown below: Suppose if you adopt minimum allowable cycle time 800 seconds. On the basis for the allocation of elements, then the elements to be assigned will be as shown as below: Next highest unassigned element is G. For the same reason spelt out previously. They are not allotted to station IV then you can go for allocating next highest elements namely D & F. Station V: Then In the remaining un allotted elements, element G is allotted first and then H. The efficiency and effectiveness The efficiency and effectiveness of the LOT method is shown below: Suppose if you adopt minimum allowable cycle time 800 seconds. On the basis for the allocation of elements, then the elements to be assigned will be as shown as below: Table 5.40 B A C&D E&F G&H I II III IV V Table 5.41 Line design for 800 seconds 1 2 3 4 5 Effectiveness Efficiency B A C&D E&F G&H Goal accomp- Utilization lishment of employee Time requi- red per unit 800 700 820 500 800 28800/800 = 35 3620 in each Units station Available time each 820 820 820 820 820 4100 Utilization = work station 3620/4100 = 88.29% Idle time per 20 120 0 320 20 480 Idle time = cycle 480/4100 = 11.71% Anna University Chennai 248
  • 249. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT As you have seen the second design consists of 800, as the cycle time stands better in terms of efficiency and effectiveness compound to the first design. Employee NOTES idleness could be reduced tasks. Thus results in reduction in no. of the employee. Till now it is assumed that the elemental time is deterministic but there is a possibility that the more manual elements involved in the task you can’t get the single elemental time, in this case usually the elemental time follows certain distribution. You can design the workplace or product layout by considering the stochastic time elements also. Review Question: 1. What are the types of layout? 2. What are the techniques used in layout planning? 3. Define line balancing and why is it required? 4. What is minimum allowable time? 5.7 TIME STUDY AND WORK MEASUREMENT Work study consists of two major phases namely method study and work measurement. In an industry method study is applied with an objective of simplifying the job and finding the best method of doing work. Method study paves the way to reduce the work content due to bad working methods, bad layout, wrong selection of tools etc. Work measurement is applied with an objective to reduce the ineffective time and to set the standards. Usually in the industry the method study is applied to ensure the correct methods, process etc. Then, for the best method - the measurement of the method is carried out. According to ILO, Work measurement is defined as follows: “Work measurement is the application of techniques designed to estab- lish the time for a qualified worker to carry out the job at a defined level of performance” Now each key term requires a kind of explanation: Who is qualified worker? Qualified worker is one who has the requisite physical attributes, requisite in- telligence and education, requisite skill and knowledge. With the above mentioned qualities, he can complete the work to meet the satisfactory standards of safety, quality and quantity. Average worker: All the recruited workers are qualified workers. But if you analyze their perfor- mance. The performance may be the time taken per unit by the worker. Assume that 249 Anna University Chennai
  • 250. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT there are 500 workers; if you analyze their performance; the performance against the NOTES frequency mostly follows the normal distribution. Figure 5.19 The shaded portion represents the majority of the worker that means more workers take time to produce one unit between t1 and t2. The no. of employee fall in the region you can consider as the qualified average workers. The unshaded portions in the left side represent above average performance and the unshaded portion of the right side represent the below average performer. Since most of the workers performance falls in the shaded area. The organization has to set the time standard for the average workers. Work Measurement Techniques There are many techniques available to measure the work. The techniques are listed below: Figure 5.20 Procedures to conduct work measurement technique: According to ILO Anna University Chennai 250
  • 251. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT SELECT : Select the job to be studied. NOTES RECORD : Record all the relevant facts by direct observations or by means of suitable recording technique. EXAMINE : Examine critically the recorded elements. MEASURE : Measure each element by time measurement. COMPILE : Arrive at the normal time and standard time by adding allowance. INSTALL : Implement the established standard time. 5.7.1 Time Study Select: First you should select the job to be studied. Situations may lead you to conduct the time study to fix the time standard. a) SITUATION: 1. Organization requires time standard to introduce incentive scheme 2. To determine the no. of equipment and no. of workers, you need to conduct work measurement technique. 3. To fix the standard cost, particularly to determine the labor cost, you need time standard. 4. To determine the selling price, tender price and to promise the delivery time you need to have time standard. Record: After selecting the job you should note down the surrounding conditions like working place, layout condition and see to that the worker adhere to the methods suggested by the method study. Examine: Next you should divide the job into different elements. Suppose you have to fix time standard for the job which involves drilling operation. The elements are: 1. Selecting the work piece and placing it in jig. 2. Tightening the screw. 3. Advancing the drill towards the work piece. 4. Drilling. 5. Withdrawing the drill from the operation. 6. Loosening the screw. 7. Removing piece from jig. 8. Removing the chips. 251 Anna University Chennai
  • 252. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES The purposes of the dividing jobs into different elements are to time the elements accu- rately and also to have a distinguishable starting and ending points for each element. Measure: After dividing the jobs into different elements, the number of observations to be made on each elements is to be determined. Here a trade off is to be made between the accuracy of the result and the cost of the time / study. If you take more observa- tions, results in more accuracy in the result. You can know now, how do you determine the sample size statistically. To determine the sample size statistically you have to specify the desired accuracy and the confidence level. Suppose you need 5 % accuracy result and 95 % confidence level. Assume that the sampling mean follows normal distribution. t is the mean. Figure 5.21 Of the elemental time, t is the standard error of the sampling distribution. A 95 % confidence level and ± 5% accuracy level means that the changes are at least 95 out of 100 that the average value for the element will not be in error when you allow more or less 5 % of true element time. The above bold statements showed pictorially as below: Anna University Chennai 252
  • 253. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES From the above figure, you can arrive Z σ t = (accuracy level) X ( t ) At 95% confidence limit and 5% accuracy level, the Z value from the normal distribu- tion is 1.96. σ t 1.96 σ t = .05 t ————— 1 You know the relationship between the population standard deviation and standard error of the sampling distribution. σ t =σ/ n ————— 2 Where n is the sample size, σ is the population standard deviation. Substitute the value of in equation 1. 1.96 σ / n = .05 t 1.96 σ / .05 t = n n = (1.96 σ / .05 t )2 Here, usually the population standard deviation is not known. In this cases is estimated from the pilot study. Suppose the number of samples to be taken is less than pilot study, then you need not go for further sample collection. But the number of samples to 253 Anna University Chennai
  • 254. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES be determined is more than the pilot study samples, then more sample need to be collected. This process is continued for each element. But there is a possibility that in each element you may end up with different sample size requirements. In this case you can fix the number of cycles for the all the elements based on the element which demands the highest sample size requirement. Measure: In this phase, the elemental time is recorded using stop watch which is specifically designed for the time study. Rating: While measuring the time for each element, the time study person has to take note of the pace in which the operator does the job. The accuracy of the judgment towards the pace of the operator depends upon the experience and training of the time study person. Rating is defined as the workers rate of working relative to the time study person’s concept corresponding to the standard pace. Rating is an adjustment factor, because when a time study person choose a quali- fied, experience, trained worker there is a possibility that the operator may belong to the below average group of that company in this case he may take more time to com- plete the element. So to bring the time related to the average worker, which observed time has to be multiplied with the adjustment factor i.e. or other wise to lessen the observed time. In this case rating will be less than 1. This case becomes opposite while the supposed selected operator is above average worker. In this case the rating factor takes more than 1 to have higher observed time than what is available. Rating = Observed rating / standard rating Standard rating = 100 Compile: After obtaining the observed time, rating for each element Normal time is calculated. Normal time for element = observed time for the element x rating factor All the normal elemental times are added to arrive at the normal time for the operation. You should not consider this time as standard time because you should add allowances with the normal time. Because allowances are to be given to compensate for the energy that the operator spent while doing the job and also allowances are to be added for meeting his / her personal needs like going for toilets etc. Allowance for these reasons is beyond his control. Anna University Chennai 254
  • 255. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Allowances are personal allowances, fatigue allowances and delay allowances. NOTES Personal allowances for meeting his / her personal needs, fatigue allowances are al- lowed for physical exertion. Delay allowances are due to lack of materials, random inspection visits etc. Now the standard time is arrived as follows: Standard time = Normal time x 100 / [100 - % allowance] 5.7.2 Work sampling: Work sampling is another work measurement technique for measuring the following: • To measure & control the percentage of idle time of an activity or productive resource • To established the standard time • To determine the performance index of the operator / department / unit When do you apply work sampling technique: • Jobs consists of longer lead time • To measure the team work Let us consider the first application namely to measure & control the percent- age of idle time of an activity or productive resources. Usually in any organization, the management bothers very much about the utili- zation of key productive resources. Work sampling study used to identify the percent- age of idle time and it helps the management to correct the excessive idle time. It helps in fixing idle time control chart so that management can control the idle time percentage of the so called critical resources every time. Consider in a hospital X- ray equipment is very critical. The management of the hospital wants to establish a control chart to monitor and control the idleness of the X- ray machine. To fix this standard, first nothing has to determine how many observations to be made. To determine the no. of observations you should analyze the process of conducting this study. This study is nothing but a random process. There are two out comes of this random process, one is the X ray machine is working, and another out- come is X- ray machine is not working. So there is every possibility that the outcome to follow a binomial distribution. Based on the percentage of occurrence of activity (in this case idle) ‘P’ and the no. of trails ‘n’ binomial distribution is approximated into a normal distribution. 255 Anna University Chennai
  • 256. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Figure 5.23 NOTES σ p is the stand error of this sampling distribution σ p = ? P (1-P)/n n = sample size p = percentage of occurrence of the activity to be measured. As it is required in the Time study, here also to determine the no. of cycles to be determined, you need to specify the two parameters namely the confidence interval and accuracy. Assume 95% confidence limit and 10% accuracy value. ‘P’ is estimated from the past record that p = 20% suppose ‘P’ is not available, then you should con- duct a pilot study to determine the ‘P’ then the sample size is determined as follows: Figure 5.24 Anna University Chennai 256
  • 257. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT General formula NOTES Z . σ p = SP Where S = accuracy level Z . ? P (1 – p) / n = SP n = Z2 P (1- p) / P2S2 = [Z2/S2] (1-p) / p For 95% confidence limit and 10% accuracy value n = [1.96/.10]2 [1 - .20/.20] n = 1537 observation Timing of the activity to be measured Next you should decide to schedule the timing of the observation to be mea- sured. For this you should generate random numbers through the computer or random number tables. Assume that the hospital is working for 16 hours. Then generate three digit random numbers. Working time of the hospital is given as below: Table 5.42 Shifts Starting time Break Ending time I 8 A.M. 12- 1 P.M. 5 P.M. II 5 P.M. 9- 10 P.M. 2 A.M. First digit represents the number of hours after 8 A.M. Second and third digit help us to find the minutes. The following table shows the conversion of random num- bers in to timing. Table 5.43 Random Hours after start Observation Chronological Number time order 712 7.12 3.07 3 473 4.73 12.44 Lunch hour 482 4.82 12.49 Lunch hour 116 1.16 9.01 1 311 3.11 11.07 2 257 Anna University Chennai
  • 258. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES You can know how do you convert the random number 712 into 3.07 AM. 7 represents the time after the starting of the factory. Namely, 8 AM then it is 3’o clock. Second and third digit represents 1 and 2 represents 0.12 X 60 minutes 7.2 minutes, that means the observer has to observe the position of X ray machine after 3.07 Hrs. Similarly the no. of random numbers are converted into observer observable time. Suppose you have got the results as shown in the table Table 5.44 Activity No.of observation X Ray machine is working 1227 X Ray machine is not working 310 Total Observation 1537 The percentage of idle time is calculated as follows: ‘p’ = 310/1537 = 20% In this case you need not go for further observations. Suppose the obtained ‘p’ value is more than the allowable limit, then you need to rework to find the no. of obser- vations to be taken. Suppose, if it comes around 1600,m then further (1600 -1537) so 63 observations has to be taken to fix the standard − 2X .8 Now σ p = = 0.1 1537 You can fix the control limit using P and σ p value as follows: Figure 5.25 Upper control limit P + 3 σ p = 0.23 Mean = P =2 Lower control limit P – 3 σ p = 17 Anna University Chennai 258
  • 259. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT This is kept as a standard and any particular day, proportion of idle time ex- ceeds the limit you have fixed, then the reasons has to be analyzed and corrected. Thus NOTES the work sampling techniques used to fix the standard to monitor and control the key resources. Establishing Time Standard by Work sampling: Work sampling study in addition to finding the performance index, fixing the control limits for delay and percentage of utilization of activities, it also used for estab- lishing the time standard for operation or for the job. Data required to be collected: Assume that an operator does a turning operation in a part. By work-sampling study to determine the time standards the following information is to be collected. The percentage of working. The total working time. The Number of pieces to be produced. The average performance index. The allowance. The normal time per unit is calculated using the following formula. Normal Time = (The percentage of working) (Total working time) / No. of Pieces product) x Average performance index. Then standard time is calculated follow as: Standard time = Normal time (100/100 - % Allowances) E.g.: An operator does a turning operation in a product. An observer collected the following information. The percentage of working = 85% The total working time = 480 min. The no. of pieces produced = 300 units The average performance index = 120 Allowances from the time study manual is arrived at 15% Normal time = (0.85 x 480)/300 (120/100) = 1.632 min. Standard time = 1.632 x 100/ (100-15) = 1.632 x 100/85 = 1.92 min. Work Sampling study to establish the performance index: This study is applied to establish the average performance index. This average performance index of the labour or department helps the management to control the 259 Anna University Chennai
  • 260. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES labour cost. Let us see how you calculate the average performance index. The work sampling study may be carried out for many periods for data collection. Then from the data collected you can calculate the average performance index as follows: Average Data per period from the data collected during the study. Average no. of pieces produced during the period Standard time per unit. Average working time. Performance index = [(Average no. of pieces produced during the period x Standard time per piece in minutes) / Average hours worked during the period x 60] x 100 E.g. Assume that a drilling operation is carried out on a product. The organization interested in knowing the average performance index of the operator who does the drilling operation. Work sampling study has been conducted for several weeks. The average data collected from the study are given below: Average no of pieces produced during a week = 1500 Standard time per piece per min. = 5 min. Average hours worked during the period = 36 hours Performance index = [500 x 5 /36 x 60] x 100 = 115 % The average performance index helps the organization to control the labour cost. a. LEARNING CURVE In the case of more labour intensive mass production industry, mostly the labour do repetitive type of job, that results in more learning due to experience of doing the same job because of this, the time taken to produce subsequent units gets reduced compared to the previous units. This phenomenon will not lose for longer period, at some point of the time this learning effect ceases. After the learning effect ceases, the time required to produce one unit or one batch will be the same irrespective of the number of units or batches. The organization has to cash in the relevant range period, the period in which the learning effect is there. During the learning effect period, the standard time per unit is not constant it varies depends upon the quantity of the order you get. Since the learning effect has impact on the standard time that is the reason to study this concept in this section . Learning Curve Model: Consider the past data of a company manufacturing Aircraft components. For a particular component the data are taken for ten situations. Anna University Chennai 260
  • 261. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Table 5.45 NOTES Situation Quantity Production Cumulative Cumulative Cumulative (Q) Time (tp) batches (1) Production Average Time Time (2) (3)=(2) / (1) 1 20 164 20 164 8.2 2 30 228 50 392 7.84 3 50 340 100 732 7.32 4 80 453 180 1185 6.58 5 120 655 300 1840 6.13 6 150 767 450 2607 5.79 7 210 863 660 3470 5.26 8 260 1115 920 4595 5 9 330 1488 1250 6083 4.86 10 380 1311 1630 7394 4.37 Using (1) and (3) if you draw the curve, it appears as follows Figure 5.26 Since the nature of the curve is exponential, the general equation for exponential curve is Y= a × X b Y= cumulative average time X= Cumulative production quantity a = The time required to produce the first quantity b = Exponent 261 Anna University Chennai
  • 262. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES ‘b’ depends upon the operating condition. In the above model, for the particular cu- mulative production quantity what will be the cumulative average time? This could be easily calculated provided, if you know the two parameters namely ‘a’ and ‘b’. Since the curve is exponential in nature, if you take the logarithm for the X value and Y value then you can get a linear curve as follows: Log (Y) = Log (a) + b × Log(X) Thus the curve is of the form Y = a + bx Where y= Log (Y) x= Log(X) So using the simple regression analysis you can find the values of ‘a’ and ‘b’. For the given data, shown in the table, let us try to estimate the regression model, Table 5.46 log X log Y 2.995 2.104 3.401 2.059 3.912 1.99 4.382 1.884 4.787 1.813 5.01 1.756 5.347 1.66 5.56 1.609 5.799 1.581 5.94 1.513 If we solve Figure 5.27 Anna University Chennai 262
  • 263. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT log Y = 2.7555 – 0.263 ln x. NOTES Where, R2 = Coefficient of determination = 0.985 R2adjusted = 0.983 Since R2 value is approximately 99%, which means 99% of the variations in the original data have been captured by the estimated regression line. Thus show that the estimated line is the best fit for the original data. Cumulative average time ln Y = 2.7555 – 0.203 ln X You know that b = ln learning curve percent / ln2. -0.203 = ln learning curve percent / ln 2. ln learning curve percent = ln 2 * (-0.203) = 0.6931 * (-0.203) = -0.1407. Learning curve percent = Antilog of [-0.1407] = 86.88% = 87%. The practical meaning of learning effect or the learning curve percent is that if the production quantity becomes double, then corresponding required time to produce one unit of that doubled quantity gets reduced to that extent of (1- learning curve per- cent). This is shown in the following table for the problem discussed already. Table 5.47 UNIT Assume 20 units = 1 units Cumulative average time (Y = a * b) 20 = 1 units Y = 164 (1-0.203) 40 = 2 units Y = 164 (2-0.203) 60 = 3 units Y = 164 (3-0.203) 80 = 4 units Y = 164 (4-0.203) 263 Anna University Chennai
  • 264. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT From the above table you can easily identify that when the production quantity NOTES becomes double; the average time per unit gets reduced to the extent of 13%. So this is to be taken into account while calculating the standard time for the product. Thus way the standard time gets reduced. Application of learning curve: As it is mentioned already the reduced standard time could be made use of estimating the following, 1. Learning curve concept could be applied in pricing the product. 2. This concept could be applied in standard costing. 3. This is applied in budgeting and production planning. 5.9 PRODUCTIVITY Productivity is the ratio between the output and input. This is an index, the output may be sales and input is the recourses utilized for getting the output. Example: the output is sales value and the input is cost of goods sold. If the Productivity Index is more than one, you can say that the performance of the organization is good. If it is less than one you can say that the organization is not doing well. Impact of Learning Curve on the Productivity Cost of the goods sold is the function of labour, material and overhead cost because of learning effect the time required to produce one unit in the relevant range decreases as the number of units produce is more. The result is less labour and variable over heads. So the denominator decreases that leads to higher productivity. There are many reasons for the improvement in the productivity. The increase may due to quality, methods, materials, better management etc. in addition learning effect also have a source for the productivity improvement. Anna University Chennai 264
  • 265. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT Summary NOTES This unit would have helped you to know the factors to be considered while selecting a location. The kind of system design, like layout design, work measurement standards are exposed with an objective of complete understanding the nuances of the system design techniques. At last, you are exposed to the construction and the impact of the learning curve on the productivity. Review Questions: 1. List the various work measurement techniques. 2. List out the procedures to carry out the work measurement. 3. What is time study? 4. Define work sampling? 5. What is impact of learning curve on productivity? 265 Anna University Chennai
  • 266. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Anna University Chennai 266
  • 267. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES 267 Anna University Chennai
  • 268. DBA 1651 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT NOTES Anna University Chennai 268